JP2018161365A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration in game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of a predetermined start condition and controlling a state to be a specific game state more advantageous to a player than a normal game state when the result of the lottery is a win comprises: display control means for controlling performance display means to display predetermined performance information on the basis of the result of the lottery; sound output control means for controlling sound output means to output a predetermined performance sound in association with the performance information to be displayed in the performance display means; and sound volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the sound volume of the performance sound to be output from the sound output means on the basis of the operation of operation means. The display control means can display specific performance information as predetermined performance information to be displayed in the performance display means over a specific period. During the specific period, the sound volume of the performance sound to be output from the sound output means is configured to be suppressed. The sound volume adjusting means can accept the operation of the operation means during the specific period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that variably displays a number of symbols and gives a predetermined gaming value when a symbol stop result is in a predetermined mode. In such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the interest of the game, effects such as display of an image by the image display unit, movement of an accessory, sound by a speaker, lighting of various lamps, and the like are executed along with variable display of the symbols. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-97292 A

  As described above, with conventional gaming machines, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects, and by combining these effects, it is possible to increase the effect variations according to the degree of expectation, while game designers can The burden of managing and setting production combinations is increasing, and if there are deficiencies in the management and setting of such production combinations, the player will feel uncomfortable and excessive expectations despite the fact that various productions are installed. There was a possibility that the performance that gives the game will be developed, and the entertainment interest of the game will be lowered.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction.

Mean 1:
A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and can control to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state when the result of the lottery is a win,
Symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
Production content restriction means for restricting the content of the production performed during the variation display of the symbol,
Providing multiple types of effects as effects that can be performed during the variable display of the symbol,
The plurality of types of productions are divided into a plurality of groups according to the degree of expectation,
The specific group of the plurality of groups belongs to a plurality of effects having apparent commonality and a plurality of effects having no apparent commonality,
The effect content restricting means includes a specific group effect restricting means for restricting the number of times that an effect belonging to the specific group is executed within one symbol variation display.
The production content restriction means changes the restriction availability according to the result of the lottery.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 8 and was seen from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 15. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 17. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a start opening prize. It is a figure which shows an example of a start opening prize control data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory prefetch process. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to notice permission determination data, (A) is a notice permission determination data address table, (B) is an example of notice permission determination data. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to a special symbol reservation ball number command, (A) is a special symbol reservation ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the variation pattern selection determination process of FIG. 29. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the special symbol variation waiting process of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of gate passage. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetch determination prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process per normal symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of a random number extraction range in time series order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach notice setting process. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of story reach, (B) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous notice setting process. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of quasi-continuous change. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of quasi-continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prohibition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure prefetch effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a normal prefetching effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous prefetch effect lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous prefetch effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous prefetching effect aspect selection table for selecting the aspect (specific effect) of a continuous prefetching effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition of a continuous prefetch effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an ordinary figure prefetch effect process. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetching effect. FIG. 17 is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command modification of “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of the table which shows an example. FIG. 17 is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command modification of “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of the table which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory | storage prefetch process of a modification. FIG. 29A is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-described variation distribution table. FIG. 29B is a reach corresponding to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of an executable table. (A) is an example of a table showing conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modification prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to Modification 1. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch prohibition count process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 1. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown input flag setting process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown count process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure prefetch execution determination process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect transition in a probable change time short state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production mode transfer process performed by the periphery control MPU450a. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure prefetch effect control process including the switching control of a special figure prefetch effect. It is a table for selecting a scenario of a special figure pre-reading effect (holding pre-reading effect). It is a table for selecting the scenario of a special figure prefetch effect (background prefetch effect). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure prefetching effect control process which includes the switching control of a special figure prefetching effect and can perform a reservation prefetching effect and a background prefetching effect in parallel. It is a figure which shows an example of a special figure prefetch effect (background prefetch effect). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which switches the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) in execution to the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated starting memory. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the background prefetching effect currently performed is switched to the background prefetching effect based on the newly generate | occur | produced start memory | storage, and a hold prefetching effect and a background prefetching effect are performed in parallel. It is a figure which shows an example of the kind of variation pattern of the modification 3 of this embodiment. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the variation pattern and level of the modification 3 of this embodiment, (B) In order to demonstrate the relationship between the variation pattern of the modification 3 of this embodiment and a game state. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which sets the propriety of the notice effect for every level of the modification 3 of this embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of effect setting processing according to Modification 3; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal notice setting process according to a third modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the notice effect of the modification 3 of this embodiment, (A) is at the time of the first half fluctuation, (B) is after reach or at the time of pseudo-continuous occurrence, (C) is The first half of the reach after the reach or the first half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous, (D) shows the lottery probability of the notice effect in the latter half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous, and the setting value of the effect flag. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a story reach notice setting process according to a third modification. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of the story reach of the modification 3, (B) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of the pseudo continuous fluctuation of the modification 3. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of pseudo continuous notice setting processing according to a third modification. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure prefetch effect control process in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch effect lottery table of the modification 3. It is an example of the type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type) in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the pseudo continuous number of times is 0 times. It is an example of the type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type) in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo continuous runs is 4. It is a figure explaining an example of the kind of symbol group in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the definition of the symbol group in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the reliability level of the prefetch notice effect in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo | simulation continuations is 0 in the symbol group. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the pseudo | simulation continuous number of times is 4 times in the symbol group. FIG. 10 is an example of a winning reliability level lottery table in Modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where the number of pseudo consecutive times is 0 in the symbol group 2; It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the pseudo | simulation number of times is 4 times in the symbol group 2. FIG. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo | simulation times is 0 times in the symbol group. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the pseudo | simulation number of times is 4 times in the symbol group 3. FIG. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where there is no pseudo-continuation and the number of prefetchable fluctuations is 0 times. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where there is no pseudo | simulation series and the number of prefetchable fluctuation | variation is 4 times. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation series classification is a STORY pseudo | simulation series and the number of prefetchable fluctuation | variations is 0 times. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation series type is a STORY pseudo | simulation series and the number of prefetchable fluctuation | variations is four. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo-continuous type is a deadly technique pseudo-ream and the number of prefetchable fluctuations is 0 times. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: A pseudo continuous type is a figure which shows the case where the number of prefetchable fluctuation | variations is a deadly technique pseudo ream and 4 times. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous classification is a hyper pseudo | simulation series, and the number of prefetchable fluctuation | variations is 0 times. It is an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous classification is a hyper pseudo | simulation series, and the number of prefetchable fluctuation | variation is 4 times. It is an example of the lottery drawing at the time of prefetch winning of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the table | surface for drawing the aspect which can be hold-displayed at the time of the said variation | change start at the time of start winning. It is an example of the pre-reading winning lottery lottery of Modification 4 of the present embodiment, and shows a case where the number of holds at the start winning prize is 1. It is an example of the pre-reading prize-holding lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where the number of reservations at the time of a start winning prize is two. It is an example of the pre-reading winning lottery lottery according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment, and shows a case where the number of holds at the time of starting winning is four. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation pattern classification in the case of the reliability level 0 of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation pattern classification in the case of the reliability level 7 of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table | surface of the notice effect in the said change of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table of the notice effect at the time of the tempering of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table | surface of the notice effect in the first half of SP reach of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table of the notice effect in the second half of SP reach of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous frequency | count is 0 times (there is no pseudo | simulation continuous), and is a normal fluctuation | variation or a normal reach. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous number is 0 times and it develops to SP reach. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous number of times is 4 and is a normal fluctuation | variation or a normal reach. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous number of times is 4 and develops to SP reach. It is the figure which extracted an example of the some notice lottery table of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure which shows the lottery table of "window notice at the time of a change start". It is the figure which extracted an example of the some notice lottery table of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure which shows the lottery table of "SP latter half cut-in notice". It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform a sword production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition production according to the classification of a fluctuation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword ornament in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, (A) Sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd sword state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period which concerns on an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament of the modification 1, and the operation timing of an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament (the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. Like the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword ornament is not activated and the operation button is activated once, then the sword ornament is activated It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related effect. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the content of the effect when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when the 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decoration body when specific conditions are satisfied. 219 is a time chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the period other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation | movement state of a sword ornament in an operation reception period, (B) is a time chart which shows the relationship between the operation state of a sword decoration in an operation reception period, and abnormality detection. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of an operation button, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the movable decoration provided in the game board. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of normality, (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the normal button production at normal time, and (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the button normal production at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period, and (B) is the operation button when the abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between an operation state and a notification mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production | presentation at the time of abnormality generation | occurrence | production of a movable decoration body. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when the abnormality occurs in the non-short-time state, and (B) is the operation button cover and the operation button when the abnormality occurs in the time-short state. It is a time chart which shows an operation state. It is a specific example of a mission effect. It is a specific example of a roulette effect. It is a specific example of a roulette effect. This is a specific effect example when the operation button is pressed and held for a roulette effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting mode interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control in a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control during demonstration. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sound data creation process. It is a figure explaining the example of a production | presentation of a volume adjustment suitable implementation | achievement effect. It is a figure explaining the example of a production | presentation of a volume adjustment suitable implementation | achievement effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of (A) volume adjustment suitable realization effect, and the control timing of (B) brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in the modification of a volume adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of the control in volume and brightness | luminance adjustment at the time of alerting | reporting with high importance, such as a high expectation degree effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of the control in a pseudo | simulation continuous determination effect. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in the modification of a pseudo | simulation continuous determination effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of the control in the modification of a pseudo | simulation continuous discrimination | determination effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of the control in jackpot expectation degree discrimination | determination effect.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed and opened on the front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and the front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are on the player side And a door frame 5 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stores a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 that a player operates to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 It is equipped with.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and the horizontal widths in the horizontal directions are substantially the same. The size of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in front view, and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. In this way, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. The game balls and obstacle nails in the area 1100, various winning holes and bonuses cannot be touched.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of 10, 11, 12, and 13 and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 with the connecting member 14 to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. Note that an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light metal molds (for example, aluminum alloys) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support plate 20 and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A support bracket 21, a reinforcement bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be opened and closed. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the main body frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644, the main body frame 3 can be simply mounted by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 in the support hole 20c. It can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) attached and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of a locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to each other. The engagement is released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 that are respectively attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the main body frame base 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5; A hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into a game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out a ball, and when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end portion of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 through which the inside of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and the main body frame A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and is recessed backward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear. The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall when viewed from the front in the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 And. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. Yes. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the hitting ball launching device 650 in front of the upper end of the firing rail 660. It is like that. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626. The game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening and the left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating the through hole. The opening portion of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The 800 main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is like that. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are respectively attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear ends of the main body frame base 600 using a predetermined screw to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. Portion 632, a shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 in front view (FIG. 7). And the door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating in the up-down direction, and the front end of the front extension 632 hangs downward from the front end and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft support 630, the attachment portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is provided. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-like front extension 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension 642b, and the front And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end portion of the extension portion 642b when viewed from the front and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward and downward from the lower end of the attachment portion. A front extending portion 644b that protrudes, and a main body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion and a front extension portion 644b by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension part 642b and the front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment part of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support 640 are coaxial. The body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protruding piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21, so that the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed. It is like that.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. 5 is mounted on the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft bracket 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft bracket 630. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the pivotal support hole 634. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described. The hitting ball launching device 650 is mounted so that the metal plate launch base 652 is mounted at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600, and the rotary drive shaft 654a projects forward from the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. Firing solenoid 654, a hitting ball 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a predetermined movement path of the tip 658 A firing rail 660 extending diagonally to the upper left when viewed from the front and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652, and a tip 658 at the tip of the hitting ball 656 passes between the firing rail 660 and the top of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time. 662 and a stopper for restricting the ball hitting ball 656 (tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the shooting rail 660 by the ball stopper piece 662 can be hit. 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is not shown in detail, but the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. . Further, the hitting ball basket 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654, and a gentle arc extending from the fixed portion 656a, and the tip is centered on the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a hook portion 656b with the hook tip 658 fixed to the tip at a normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the hook portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween, and a stopper portion 656c capable of contacting the stopper 664 It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  When the hitting ball launcher 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located below and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. It has become. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned below the foul space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored, and the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a predetermined payout instruction. To pay out. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball toward the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth with the upper part open, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front, A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the rail 731; a ball stop piece 735 that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet; It is equipped with. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a predetermined width that communicates with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width that is slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that opens into the left side of the rear view when bent in a substantially square shape and communicates with the lower left side (open side) of the rear side of the distribution space, and the right side of the rear side of the distribution space (Axis support side) A ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is meshed with the first gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and disposed behind the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear that rotates together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side of the third gear. A rotation detecting board having a plurality of detection slits (three in the present embodiment) formed at intervals, a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage A counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752 are held. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator includes three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the payout rotator rotates, 1 game ball supplied from the supply passage is 1 Each ball is accommodated in the recess, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detecting board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board, and correspond to between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The award ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage is paid out to the award ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removal passage. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end. The full branching unit 770 opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the award of the prize ball device 740 is obtained. A prize ball receiving hole for a game ball flowing down the ball passage, a branching space that is arranged below the prize ball receiving hole and extends in the left-right direction, and a game from directly under the prize ball receiving hole in the branching space to the front side A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opened at the front right end of the front view, and the right side in the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving opening in the branch space A full tank passage that guides the game ball from the raised position to the front side, and a full ball exit 776 that discharges the game ball that has circulated through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left in front of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 includes a ball receiving port that receives a game ball that opens upward at the left end portion of the rear end upper portion when viewed from the front and flows down the ball passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball receiving portion. A ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has circulated through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end of the front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball exit 776 And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicates with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. The ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side upper end of the main body frame base ball passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  When a game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the upper ball ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that can no longer come out to the side of the tray 301 stagnate in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fill up the normal passage upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot normally enter the passage, and starts moving in the lateral direction in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved in the horizontal direction is full. So as to enter the tongue passage and be supplied from the full bulb exit to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage, and the second bulb outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the substrate unit base 810, and a substrate. A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear face of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front. And board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 downward from the left and right front in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and the front of the discharge passage 842 and the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) is opened forward and upward. A power supply board box holder 840 having a box housing portion that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side and can accommodate the front end of the power board board box 850.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is circulated through the main body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. It has become.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. A power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In the present embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  Further, the payout control board box 860 is configured such that an operation switch 860a (error release unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is reported, it is operated to cancel the error, and the RAM clearing function at power-on and the power-on (time period for functioning as RAM clearing have elapsed) And a function of canceling an error in (after). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of the board base 871 and fixed with a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, so that peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connection with a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided in the door frame 5, the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face the front side of the main body frame base 600, Wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the front side of the relay terminal plate cover 692 is also covered. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the tray unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. It should be noted that the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. The description will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each decorative unit 200, 240, 280 and the decorative unit provided in the plate unit 300 or the operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 arranged on the door frame 5 side. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial operation, and the like. The various switches that detect the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side facing the right side decoration unit 200 and attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of 100. It should be noted that a plurality of LEDs (LED boards) are arranged on the back of the upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, and the left side decoration unit 240, and are related to effects executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 described later. Then, the light emission is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode, and the upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, and the left side decoration unit 240 are illuminated.

  The door frame 5 is attached to the right side of the dish unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner portion of the door frame base unit 100 through the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the dish unit 300, and the door frame base unit 100 is sandwiched therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540; Installed to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the base unit 100 The glass unit 590 is provided with a.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially elliptical shape. An upper bracket 120 that is attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 and fixes the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides that are attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. The speaker 130 and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. 1), and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. A main control board mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided in a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. A handle relay terminal plate 192 (see FIG. 1) that relays the connection to the 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 (on the right side (axial support side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. In addition, the wiring for electrically connecting the switch, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being bundled together at the right side (axial support side) position, it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the gaming window 101 having a vertically long and substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been. The gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a rectangular notch that allows insertion of the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. A speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, a right side (open side) end of the front surface disposed at the lower right corner portion in front view and bulging forward The handle mounting portion for tilting the handle bracket to tilt backward, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. Thus, a lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short forward and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. Side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. Integrated. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that contacts the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided at the lower rear side of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The tray unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are shot through the ball feeding unit. Can be supplied to the device 650.

  The shape of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and forward straightly from the center to the right. Protrusively formed. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and for example, when a player presses the portion downward with a hand, the upper plate 314d bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the hand on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged by bending the upper plate upper panel 314. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. In addition, when the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302 in response to an operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and a lower dish ball removal button 354. The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 in accordance with the operation of the lower tray ball through the lower tray ball removing hole 324b and the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not shown. A ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Operation part), and can accept the player's operation according to the gaming state, or the dial operation part 401 can be moved, not only the game ball driving operation to the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating a rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and a rotation for rotating in reverse.

[4-2-2. Rental unit]
The lending unit 360 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is disposed adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is attached to the inside of the ball rental unit 360. . When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit. 300 can be lent out (paid out) into the top plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the remaining cash or prepaid card is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball transport unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan 302 by operating the upper pan ball release button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an intrusion port in which game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball opening that opens below the intrusion opening and is open at the rear, and a box-like shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction The rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the intrusion port of the front cover to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball removing member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning portion for partitioning between the entrance and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member are hit one by one on the rear cover. Up and down between the front cover and the rear cover before feeding to the supply port 582a And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member accepts it. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, is cylindrical, and has a handle base whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that is rotatable relative to the handle base. Arranged at the front of the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and being rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body. And a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and the shaft member bearing portion is fitted. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion that can be rotated together and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 between the handle base and the potentiometer 512 A switch support member having a through-hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member; A single-shot button that is pivotally supported with respect to the switch support member and operates the firing stop switch 518. And a handle that is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urges the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, it is rotated from the original rotational position to the limit rotational position (rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) that is the maximum rotational position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front To do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the front part 506 of the rotary handle and the rear part of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, so that the rotary handle A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launch intensity corresponding to (a match with) the rotation angle of the front of the main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle, that is, the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle. Yes.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is played by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or a ball hitting device 650 though it has been shot. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base that is open on the front side and has a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first base that communicates with the first sphere inlet and expands to the right in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. One ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and having a larger opening than the first ball inlet 542a, and communicated with the second ball passage and inside the cover base And a second spherical inlet 542c that extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodating space that can be accommodated is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially upper center in the left-right direction and has a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. And a ball passage. Further, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second bulb entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening / closing the shutter 792. It can be in an open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base. An outlet, and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to an upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through a notch portion of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower tray ball supply bowl in the tray unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet through the ball passage opening of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a from the first ball outlet to the dish unit 300 through the first ball passage. It can supply to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply basket and the lower plate ball supply port.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device When the game ball launched by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, the game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. The foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage and is pivotally supported on the cover base so as to be able to swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550. The swinging member is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base, and the upper end is rotated to the left when viewed from the front. It comes to form. Further, the swing member is biased to a position where the swing member is substantially vertical by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines an outer periphery, and a position that is visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front. And a plurality of openings 1158 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 and attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100. A plate-like gaming panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150, and a gaming panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  Further, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light-emitting decorative holes that penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and that can display a predetermined effect image that is visible from the player side according to the gaming state, and a lower part of the back unit 3000 Is provided with a board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 will be described. The front component member 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and has an inner shape that penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between a closed position that extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position that rotates clockwise from the front and opens the outer rail 1111. And a backflow preventing member 1116 biased by a spring so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the front component member 1110 is in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is a launch rail 660 in the hitting ball launcher 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). )). Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The game area 1100 can be invaded by rotating to the open position against the biasing force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 returns to between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received by the start opening 2101, 2102 or the winning opening 2103, 2104, 2201, etc. of the table unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100, The out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. .

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. 1 (see FIG. 1) is dropped and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626. It is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front, is recessed from the front to the rear and is opened at the left end, and is spaced apart from the right end when viewed from the front in the vertical direction. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and opened downward, and has an arcuate upper side and recessed from the front side, and a lower end of the front view , And a ball passage cutout 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, thereby allowing the game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5) It is possible to restrict the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view from moving in the front-rear direction. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is connected to the game board. By locking to the stop portion, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 has a game board fixture 690 (see FIG. 5) pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 5) is inserted into the game board fixing tool 690, and the game board fixing tool 690 allows the game board 4 to be inserted. The lower end of the head is restricted from moving forward. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged at the lower right of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 includes an attacker unit 2100 that is disposed at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100 and above the out port 1151 and is supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1150. And a side prize opening member 2200 supported along the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 disposed approximately at the center of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150. Yes.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the gaming area 1100 in the gaming panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is positioned in the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, Can be changed. The table unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. A start port 2101, a lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101, and a rectangular disposed below the lower start port 2102 and extending more in the left-right direction than the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 A large winning opening 2103 having a shape, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls received in the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side.

  The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 11) is disposed between the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101 and the upper start port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 rises substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 In a state where the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102. That is, the lower start port 2102 is a variable winning port (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is pivotally supported at its lower side so that in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be easily received. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is drawn when a game ball is received (starts winning) into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. According to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), it opens and closes by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 11), and a variable winning opening (variable winning device) Is configured.

  Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the big winning port 2103. The game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. The back unit 3000 includes an upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper start port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side prize opening member]
Next, the side prize opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. Above, two fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and facing each other along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the front view in the attacker unit 2100 A general winning opening 2201 is provided. These two general winning holes 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winning) at all times, and the game balls received in the general winning holes 2201 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side. Then, it is detected by a general prize opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2200, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2201 sandwiched therebetween, and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100) A second shelf 2203 that becomes lower toward the game area 1100), and the first shelf 2202 can bring the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 toward the center of the game area 1100. It can be done.

  Note that the two general winning ports 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game balls are brought closer to the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. A third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2201.

  The side prize port member 2200 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decorative board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side prize port member 2200. The side prize port member 2200 is formed by the side prize port decoration board and the side lamp decoration board 3014. Can be decorated with light emission.

[5-2-3. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front is in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 The left outer peripheral surface is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region with a predetermined width is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game region 1100 and the outer periphery.

  The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the position slightly on the right side in the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down to the left of the center accessory 2300, and on the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game balls that have flowed down (invaded) flow down to the lower part of the game area 1100 through the right side of the center bonus 2300. In other words, when a game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp inlet 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 and the warp inlet 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp exit rolls in the left-right direction, and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame in 2300.

  Although the detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the game ball released from the warp outlet is supplied, and the game ball is placed on the front side of the first stage from the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the center of the first stage in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance in front of the lowermost end of the center accessory 2300. The game is discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received (wins) by the upper start opening 2101 with a high probability. ing.

  The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 is visible from the player side. It has become.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is a transparent member extending leftward so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315. .

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects the game entrance that has entered the gate entrance and the gate entrance that allows the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to be intruded on the outer peripheral surface of the left side of the front wall portion and above the arch portion 2315. A gate switch 2352 for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is The portion 2315 can be seen as if diving.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light emitting elements formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the gaming area 1100 of the gaming panel 1150. The decorative hole is used for luminescent decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear side of the lower panel lens 2520. And a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-like lens base portion, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that have substantially the same shape as the light emitting decoration hole to be inserted. Department. In a state where the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. The ball is not affected as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the game ball flows even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as a veneer plywood is used by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition to being able to show the player the decoration of the gaming panel 1150 that has never been seen before, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be conspicuous and differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back box 3001 for supporting the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, and the back box 3001 The upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and the game board side in the back box 3001. A gear decoration body unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mainly provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014 and a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning port 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guiding member 3016 for guiding the ball downward, and a right guiding the game ball disposed on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and received in the upper start port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the attacker unit 2100. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 is disposed in the lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and has a horizontally-long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 that accommodates the lamp drive board 4170, and a lower part of the lamp drive board box 3423. The motor drive board box 3430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed on the side and accommodates the motor drive board 4180 and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 are arranged on the left side when viewed from the rear. The panel relay terminal board 4161, the horizontally long rectangular upper resistance board disposed at the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 are detachably held. And a locking member.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in conjunction with each other depending on the gaming state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a game or a chance, and to entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing parts 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the fixing parts 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. In addition, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through this opening can be viewed from the player side. Yes. Further, the back box 3001 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like.

  Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 has one fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (right side in the rear view) on the right side of the opening in the rear view. A locking member is provided on the left side of the opening as viewed from the rear, and the other fixing piece 1902 (the left side in the rear view) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is secured by the locking member. By supporting, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guide member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 and the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. Each of the flow paths is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of the game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper start opening 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 on the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning opening 2104. The right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 that can detect magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is circular in a front view, and a lifting mechanism that moves up and down the rotational decoration body unit 3200. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotary ornament body unit 3200 is moved up and down by an elevating mechanism 3250 between an ascending position located above the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and a descending position located substantially at the center of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It can be moved. The rotating decorative body unit 3200 is configured such that a rotating decorative body formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and the rotation radius of the rotating decorative body is increased by the centrifugal force by rotating. It is like that.

  In addition, the rotating ornament body unit 3200 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotation radius of the entire rotating ornament body expands and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to make it possible to give a strong impact on the player, to delight the player and to suppress the interest in the game, and to attract the player's interest strongly Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  The swing ornament body unit 3300 includes swing ornament bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the swing ornament body unit 3200 adjacent to the rotational ornament body unit 3200 located at the ascending position. The body can be swung to the left and right at the same time.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 includes plate-like ceiling decoration bodies that extend in the horizontal direction at the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decoration body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration body is lowered in a descending direction according to the gaming state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 includes a character body that is shaped like a ninja and is three-dimensionally shaped, and the character body moves in the left-right direction from the right end position toward the center side according to the gaming state. Can be done. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body 3400 is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis in which the head extends in the left-right direction, and can reciprocate around the axis in which the right arm extends in the up-down direction. Can be done. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is scolding. Further, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration body unit]
Next, the gear decoration body unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration body unit 3500 is provided with a gear-shaped gear decoration body that is rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and is arranged in a plurality of vertical directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. . The game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 through the fixed piece 1902.

  Further, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box 1905 that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This function display unit 1180 is mounted and disposed at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 is a game state display composed of one LED for displaying a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end of the front view. An upper special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball to the upper start port 2101, which consists of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game machine 1183 and the game status indicator 1183, Upper special symbol comprising one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result arranged as the first special symbol, which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper start port 2101 Display 1185 and the second special symbol placed on the upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and drawn by receiving a game ball into the lower start port 2102 A lower special indicator 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying a separate lottery result as a second special symbol, and a lower start port comprising two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol indicator 1186 And a lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball in 2102.

  The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of suspensions related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls that are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. The normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of the four LEDs and the normal lottery result which is placed under the normal symbol memory display and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 made of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right, and the first prize lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, and the opening / closing of the big prize opening 2103 A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the pattern (number of rounds).

  The gaming status indicator 1183 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming statuses ( For example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  When the upper special symbol display 1184 cannot display the first special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1185 in a variable manner, if the game ball is received in the upper start port 2101, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored first special symbols (stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs. The upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on and blinked. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a is lit and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished when the number of holdings is one, and the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both lit when the number of holdings is two. The upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holdings is three, and both the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b flash when the number of holdings is four. Yes. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  When the lower special symbol display 1187 cannot display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186 variably, if the game ball is received at the lower start port 2102, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs. The lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on and blinking. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off when the number of held is 1, and the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both turned on when the number of held is two. The lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a flashes when the number of holdings is three, and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights. When the number of holdings is four, both the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b flash. Yes. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game balls to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. Can be recognized by the user (variable display game).

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the gate portion 2350 can be played by a combination of the emission color and lighting / flashing. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  The normal symbol memory display 1188 is a normal symbol whose start of variable display is suspended (stored) when a game ball passes through the gate part 2350 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot display the normal symbol in a variable manner. The number of hold (number of storage) is displayed. The normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a made of predetermined LEDs and a 15-round display lamp 1190b, and can display the number of rounds in a “hit” game by lighting each lamp. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory display 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol memory indicator 1188, normal symbol indicator 1189, and The round indicator 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. Note that a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table The position of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. Let the hall clerk recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without confusion. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU. 14 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and performs the game operation. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor, and detection signals from various detection switches. Main control input circuit 4100b, main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, power failure or instantaneous And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring signs of a stop.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a non-volatile storage means built therein. This non-volatile storage means stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. . Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile storage means.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102, and the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Yes. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, the general winning port switch 3020 that detects the gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and the big winning port 2103 are entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the upper special symbol display from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191 1185, Drive signals to the special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190 Or output.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the prize opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because game balls frequently enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used as the upper start port 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection. The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to a method of transmitting as serial data, and a method of communicating as parallel data may be used. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process and executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the command is stored in the ring buffer or on the condition that it is stored). Thus, each command may be transmitted at a necessary timing.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It has BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Sound that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. It comprises an adjusting volumes 4140A, a.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 for effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 with a built-in sound source VDP 4160a described later Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Loses its contents because it can no longer hold

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for transmitting various kinds of movable bodies provided in the game board 4 to the drive board 4170 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame. The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the serial transmission circuit on the game board via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa without using the DMA0 ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up) Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects flow from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen spread on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sound volume flows from the mute to the maximum volume by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of 75%, the brightness setting is set so that the brightness is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to light up.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. And instructing the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. ) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are appended respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1 ms)” is described later. As described above, each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, so that “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are added respectively. (Effect information (1 ms) and later-described effect backup information (1 ms) are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting data, flashing signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca. Includes various information (for example, in the operation unit 400) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like created based on detection signals from the various detection switches provided.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). Instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, the music flowing from the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5, sound effects, etc. As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”). A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed; It includes the audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Al of music and sound effects and the like as audio data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the suggested display object image data used for displaying the suggested display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400, the main body frame as viewed from the player. 3 is the main body frame rear image data used for displaying the main body frame rear image, the service mode screen image data used for displaying the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used for displaying the break timer setting screen. The screen image data and the during-rest screen image data used for displaying the during-rest screen are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control The schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output one by one to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

[7-2-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate side character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is transferred from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, as shown in FIG. 14, stores music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. Further, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or special A certain period of time (in this example, peripheral control) when the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186). From the time when the MPU 4150a receives the variation pattern command until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol variation display starts, or the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special diagram 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command. The dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 and the press And to be able to adjust the sub-volume value of the effect sounds by operating the work unit 405.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually applied to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker to be accommodated and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Indicates the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track used and the sound of the notification sound incorporated in the track used. Is combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data. The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound in order to notify the store clerk etc. of fraudulent behavior, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The track sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the produced effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  In other words, the sound that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is only the notification sound of the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is used for the sound generation described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period of time elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (when the sub volume value is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 at this time, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. The speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. So that the flow from 130.

  Thus, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows in order to notify a store clerk or the like of a fraudulent act to the hall, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the silenced effect sound flows from the speaker 130 and proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the speaker is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time. When the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-2-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, as shown in FIG. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data on the left and right sides, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as a center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, if it is December 25, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or if it is New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when an LED type backlight is attached to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to control whether the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is a cold cathode tube type or only ON or OFF of the backlight. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date information is entered on the production line as the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance reduction accompanying the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the luminance setting information. If the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has been powered on for the first time in December, the peripheral control ROM 41 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-2-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob portion to adjust the volume of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects flow from the speaker 130.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce contents related to game effects (for example, an announcement that the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, or that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) The notification sound for the flow of sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is also operated. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the sound volume, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4 with built-in sound source) So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 and the press of the operation unit 400 are adjusted. By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the setting mode is performed. A screen for this is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume (0 (silence) to 6 (maximum)), A plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted to a desired luminance (100% to 70%). Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The volume of is adjusted. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above. Further, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 that have been adjusted is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs. Further, a screen for performing the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and is being demonstrated. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the calendar information and the time information are reproduced in addition to the adjustment of the sub-volume value of the production sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. It can be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, after a predetermined period (specifically, the period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) from the power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the sound volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, or sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game. When the player who has played the game feels loud and adjusts the volume, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time It is possible to reduce the sound volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits); And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling the effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the various commands are related to special figure 1 production effects, special figure 2 production effects, jackpot relations, power-on, ordinary figure production effects, ordinary electric role effects, notification display, status Classified into display and other.

[8-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the upper start-up switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. 15, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The upper special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 variation pattern, special figure 1 symbol type, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG.

  The special figure 1 variation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special figure 1 symbol type command is for specifying the off, specific big hit and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronous effect, and the change state designation command is the gaming state (high probability state, short time at the start of change of the special figure 1 or special figure 2). This is a command indicating a gaming state or the like. The change state designation command has a value corresponding to the gaming state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of change or when the gaming state is switched. Other special figure 1 synchronized production related commands include a special figure 1 variation type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special figure 1 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 variation pattern command. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). In addition, the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and is classified into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 includes a special symbol 2 variation pattern, a special symbol 2 symbol type, a command with the name special symbol 2 synchronization effect end, and the like. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG.

  The special figure 2 variation pattern command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is for specifying off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 synchronization effect end command instructs the special figure 2 synchronization effect end. Similarly to the special figure 1, a special figure 2 variation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern is included.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 variation, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 2 variation pattern. The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). In addition, as described above, in the same way as in the case of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure 2 as well, the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the attack unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2103 is being opened or the opening is started, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command starts the closing of the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (the grand prize opening of the attacker unit 2100) 2103 during the closing of the round or the start of closing), the winning prize 1 count display command has been detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103), and the jackpot ending command is the jackpot ending Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  In the jackpot ending command shown in FIG. 15, only one type of status and mode is set, but the mode value may be set according to the gaming state after the jackpot. For example, if the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability non-short time gaming state, the mode value is set to “01H”, and if the gaming state after the big hit is a high probability short time gaming state, the mode value is set to “04H”. The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Also, a plurality of endings may be designated even if the gaming state after the big hit is the same. For example, when the gaming state is a high-probability non-short-time gaming state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery. Therefore, whether the main control board 4100 side has a high probability or a low ending May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the jackpot ending command.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or opening of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. is there).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on process described later is executed, and the vicinity of step S92 in the main control side timer interruption process A power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general graphic synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for specifying the disengagement, short opening per opening, long opening per, The general-purpose synchronized effect end command is for instructing the end of the general-purpose synchronized effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command for general power is started during normal power release. The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the notification display category is composed of commands named “abnormal prize display”, “connection abnormality display”, “disconnection / short circuit abnormality display”, “magnetic detection switch abnormality display”, “door open”, and “door close”. ing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown, for example, in FIGS.

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (while the condition device is operating) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit) (When the count switch 2110 detects), an instruction to start winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  Further, the door opening command is generated when the door frame 5 opens with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The door frame closing command indicates that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in a state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening command is instructed to notify the main body frame opening, and the main body frame closing command closes the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. In this state, the main body frame release notification end is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is one of the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. , Which is transmitted when a break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch). The close command is transmitted when the main body frame is detected to be closed (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is, for example, shown in FIG.

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 16, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related category includes various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 12). Inspects various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 16, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These commands are assigned “9 * H” “5 * H” as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific number). And is predetermined by the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening Based on the detection signal from the switch 2109, when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102, the winning instruction to the start port is instructed. The change shortening operation end designation command is used to instruct a state transition from the change shortening operation state to the change shortening non-operation state. The high probability end designation command is an instruction for state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. Special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (game balls enter the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 to display the variation of the special symbol 1 Tells the number of balls that have not been used yet. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0-4 pieces (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol change display of the special symbol 1186 on the function display board 1191. Tells the number of balls that have not been used yet. The normal symbol storage command is used for normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (the number of holds).

  The special symbol 1 holding number designation command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 actuated holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the holding number increases). The special symbol 2 holding number designation command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the holding number increases). The special symbol 1 hold number designation command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are “1” and prefetched when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. It represents none. When the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is pre-read, the special symbol 1 reservation is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variation display on the function display board 1191. Instructs the start of a pre-reading effect in which the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on 1 hold is notified in advance. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is prefetched, the special symbol 2 reservation is prefetched before it is used for the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. An instruction is given to start a pre-reading effect in which the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 suspension is informed. The symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command are transmitted when a special symbol reservation number designation command is transmitted. Note that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol reservation number designation command is prefetched.

  The symbol type prefetch command is used for designating a miss, a specific big hit, and a non-specific big hit at the time of prefetching. The variation pattern prefetch command is used to specify an effect pattern (variation pattern) in a mode at the time of prefetching. The variation type prefetch command is for designating the variation type in the mode at the time of prefetching.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is obtained by using the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol hold after pre-reading before the normal symbol hold is used for the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol. This is to instruct the start of a pre-reading effect that gives a notice of the display result. For the normal symbols, a normal symbol storage command, a normal symbol type prefetch command, and a normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command corresponding to prefetching may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, “prefetching” simply refers to prefetching of special symbols.

  In addition, when performing the prefetch determination, as described later, the same processing as that at the start of variation is executed to generate a command including an effect pattern and a pattern. Since it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the peripheral control board 4140 that received the command is at the time of start of fluctuation or at the time of starting port winning, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening switch 2109 (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is transmitted mainly from the speaker 130 provided in order to notify the fact by voice, and the change shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the end of the change after confirming the change of the specified number of changes (the elapse of the stoppage period) Later). The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stoppage period) after the change is confirmed after digesting the high-probability count in the case of “high probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 storage command is still used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of retained increases, it is used from the retained number to display the variation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 Sent when the number of holds decreases). The special symbol 2 memory command is still used when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 displays the special symbol fluctuation display. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the number of retained increases, it is used from the retained number by the lower special symbol display 1186 to display special symbols. Sent when the number of holds decreases). The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the number of holdings that the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and is not yet used in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 for the normal symbol change display) When there is a game ball passing through the gate part 2350 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the normal symbol display 1189 for the normal symbol change display from the number of holds. ). Similarly to the special symbol, the normal symbol hold number designation command that changes depending on the presence or absence of prefetching may be transmitted for the normal symbol. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of prefetching is indicated by the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 and the holding number increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  Further, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern pre-read command and the normal symbol type pre-read command may be transmitted separately as the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol type pre-read command. . In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol hold number designation command. However, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is not limited to this. It may be transmitted before the symbol hold number designation command. The same applies to a case where a pre-read command relating to a normal symbol variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern pre-read command) and a normal symbol pattern type (normal symbol type pre-read command) is transmitted instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is received at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or from the lower start opening switch 2109. (When a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal), the speaker is housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice. Although it is transmitted to notify the effect, there are cases where the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the start opening winning command and differs depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is the specification of using for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 Some specifications do not notify by voice from 130.

  In addition to the above-described commands, for example, a gaming machine related information command for transmitting gaming machine related information including model information of gaming machines may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined opportunity. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the gaming machine related information command can perform effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, the main control board is configured to always send a normal symbol type prefetch effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 when there is a model that executes a pre-reading effect based on normal symbol hold and a model that does not. If the peripheral control board 4140 determines that it is a model that can execute the pre-reading effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the gaming machine related information command, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect transmitted from the main control board 4100 While the command is processed as a valid command to enable execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, if it is determined that the model is not capable of executing the general-purpose prefetching effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the processing in the main control board 4100 even when there are a model that can execute the usual-look-ahead effect and a model that cannot be executed.

  The main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process executed only once when the power is turned on (any one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17). Yes, multiple times during the game (when winning the start opening, when starting the fluctuation, big hit (or hit in the normal case), when the game state changes, triggering the execution of the timer interrupt process May be transmitted. The transmission at the time of power-on is not limited to being transmitted during the power-on process as long as it is executed when triggered by the execution of the process at power-on. For example, a game machine related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance when the power is turned on, and stored in the command buffer while the steady processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the power-on processing is completed is executed It is also included that transmitted gaming machine related information command is transmitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, an effect that can be executed on the peripheral control board 4140 is processed as an effective command. The command is configured to be discarded as an invalid command. Therefore, even if the presentation executed depends on the model of the gaming machine, the control program for the main control board 4100 can be shared, and the control program for the main control board 4100 can be developed for each model. This eliminates the need to perform the test, shortening the development period, and shortening the test period at the testing institution.

[9. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then each process such as operation of an initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, and the like will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number Random numbers for determination initial value determination, random numbers for reach determination used for determining whether or not reach (reach off) is generated when no big hit gaming state is generated, upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special symbol The random display pattern random number to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the indicator 1186, and the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 when the big hit gaming state is generated. For the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the jackpot symbol for the jackpot symbol used to determine the jackpot symbol to be displayed Period value determination for the random number, and the like are available. Note that the big hit symbol random number described above is the small bonus symbol random number used to determine the small bonus symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 when the small hit gaming state is generated. Also used as On the other hand, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number described above is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the pair of movable pieces 2106 and an initial value for the random number for determination per normal symbol are used. Random numbers for determining an initial value for determining normal symbols, and random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbols variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware (random number generation circuit) built in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical range (from a minimum value to a maximum value) according to a predetermined arithmetic expression ( In this embodiment, it is updated according to a certain rule so that all values appear within a value 0 as a minimum value and a value 32767 as a maximum value. As a result, it is possible to extract a random value with no bias. The random number value is updated based on a 10 MHz internal system clock obtained by dividing the 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator by the main control MPU 4100a. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the sequence of the random number sequence of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number sequences of other cycles. Thus, since the arrangement of the random number sequences generated for each period is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  The random numbers described above are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 0 as the minimum value and the value 32767 as the maximum value). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 every time a main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then proceeds from the minimum value (value 0) to the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Count up. Each time the big hit determination random number is updated for one cycle, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit determination random number is determined based on the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination, and the determined start value The update is repeated again sequentially. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining the big hit. On the other hand, the random numbers for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol determination described above are also updated by the same method as the method for updating the jackpot determination random number described above.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is counted up, the big hit determination initial value determining value is determined in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number. The start value (initial value) of the next period of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is sequentially repeated again from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. Or the checksum value obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value in the main control side power-on process (to be described later) Value) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off). In the case of clearing the area, the big hit determination random number is taken out for the main control MPU 4100a, and the ID code which is different for each main control MPU 4100a is set, and based on the extracted ID code It is set as a starting value for the random number, and the jackpot determination random number is updated from this starting value. For this reason, an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, for the big hit determination random number, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. As described above, the value set in the jackpot determination random number is derived by using the ID code, and the ID code is stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. First information is stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a and the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. Thus, based on the ID code, the start value of the jackpot determination random number is analyzed by taking two steps of security measures, that is, the second security measure that always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU 4100a. Is preventing. Instead of the ID code, the initial value of the jackpot determination random number may be set by extracting the hardware random number described above. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, even if it is the same game board, it is possible to set a different start value for the big hit determination random number every time, and the security can be further strengthened.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as the initial value of the jackpot determination random number. For example, an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains and disassembles the game board 4 by some method. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number coincides with the jackpot determination value, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in other game boards, that is, other pachinko gaming machines. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each interval and a game winning ball is entered at the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 at each predetermined interval, the big hit gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
In the initial value update type counter, when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a extracts the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile storage means, and based on the extracted ID code The initial value deriving process for deriving always the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit determination value range (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 330. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values acquired at the same time is the 200, except when the acquisition times of random number values are different. Other than that, for example, a prime number. That is, in this embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from that of the big hit determination random number, the number of random number values to be the big hit can be made not to be a prime number. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, big hit determination random numbers corresponding to the number (50) of the number of big hit symbols (200) with low probability divided by four.

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum and maximum values are the same regardless of whether the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384). In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is obtained by some method, and the game ball is started upward by irradiating the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 with radio waves. When a fraudulent act is performed as if entering the mouth 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the values in the jackpot determination value range (jackpot determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by irradiating the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity). The player is not perceived by the player).

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing continuation of main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Do. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is inputted to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure warning signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input after the power is turned on in step S14 until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the main control program applies power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC latches a state where the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 being operated to the main control MPU 4100a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting to boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), which will be described later, as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” means not only the state where the power is turned off but also the state where the power is turned on, the state where the power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and the detection that a high frequency has been applied. It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates RAM clear and when the game information is erased, the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the random number for jackpot determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determining random number described above.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 16 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the error sharing navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above, based on the concept of time sharing, based on the concept of time sharing. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error release unit) that should have been originally used to release an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from the power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notice if the voltage falls below the power failure notice voltage. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random value for initial value determination for normal symbol and random number for normal symbol variation display pattern are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S50, the process returns again to step S46, and the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, and this power failure warning notification. If there is no signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes the start opening solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage display. The drive signal output to 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interruption process.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the generation of another interrupt is permitted. The clearing of the interrupt flag may be executed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. By doing so, management of interrupt processing is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to occurrence of other interrupts during timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, for example, the main control program enters each of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 and the large winning opening 2103. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball, a detection signal from an upper start switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, and a lower detection that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 A detection signal from the start port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball to be described later From the payout control board 4110 notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the control process. Reading 払主 ACK signal, respectively, stored in the input information storage area as the input information. Further, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 15 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, A start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103 are shown. , A detection signal from an upper start switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 is read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Each time it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not have the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. -False detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by reading twice in total, that is, twice reading compared for the third time and twice reading compared for the second time to the fourth time Therefore, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S50 Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on this input information. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 4110 is created. This main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code that is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 when the game ball is received in the big prize opening 2103, for example. Triggered by the fact that the detection information based on the detected signal has been written in the corresponding defined bit areas defined successively one bit at a time for the number of winning prize openings 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls A prize ball command is generated as a prize ball instruction to pay out and is sent to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since there are two large winning openings 2103 as the large winning openings, the main control program has a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From the inside, two definition bits for the big winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “first bit region” and “second bit region” in this order. For example, in the case of a game board having one winning prize slot, one definition bit area is used. These definition bit areas to be used are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. When the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening that has identified that the game ball has been received by writing, for example, “0”, and prepares for the next game ball to be received.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the main control program sets the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the big prize opening 2103 to the fourth bit, the pachinko gaming machine in which only one big prize opening is provided as in this embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires information on the fourth bit definition bit area.

  Further, the main control program performs a mask process on the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with a prize ball effective range of a special prize opening 2103 described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program, for example, as a mask process for each defined bit area in which detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is written is forcibly executed. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”), and the prize ball command may not be written in the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program detects the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the big prize opening 2103 in the first special game state. In response to being written in the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out, and the transmission information storage area described above Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the speaker, for example, “ The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special gaming state, the main control program detects detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the special winning opening 2103 in the special winning opening 2103. If not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the game ball payout operation from being executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103 and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 to allow the game ball to be paid out. To do.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out more than the specified number of payouts that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls to the big prize opening 2103, is an over-winning abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 16). ) In the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform predetermined notification.

  In this way, since a substantially illegal game ball is not paid out, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, the main control program, instead, immediately receives an over-winning abnormality command in the transmission information storage area when the reception of the game ball to the big winning opening 2103 is detected, and controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The speaker may be informed.

  Thereafter, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received for the special winning opening 2103, it can be confirmed by hearing whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame state 2 command) of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error canceling navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command received normally as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display of FIG. 16). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected by the count switch 2110 that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 2103, the main control program is Then, a prize abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. Then, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the state is subsequently shifted to the probability variation state, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state (winning probability control). means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the type of the special symbol, or the lower special symbol display The output of the lighting signal is set so that 1186 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Further, when the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, the various commands classified into the jackpot relationship shown in FIG. 15 (the jackpot opening command, the jackpot opening 1 Nth display command, the jackpot 1 A closing display command, a winning prize 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or open / close the opening / closing member 2107 or The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control program sets two rounds so that the two-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on when the number of times (rounds) the grand prize winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is six, the six-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. Set the lighting signal output to the 6-round display lamp and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or turn on the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 12 times To set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence / absence of the transition to the probability variation state with a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when a winning winning of a game ball is triggered, a special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and a big hit lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting state of a so-called probability variation lamp as a gaming state indicator is changed and the state changes to a probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the probability of the big hit lottery described above is set to be relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the big win is achieved. In this way, as a gaming machine that may shift to the probability variation state after the probability variation state is finished, the probability variation state is mainly continued until the next big hit, as if the jackpot game is looped. (Hereinafter referred to as “loop machine”), and the one that continues the probability variation state until the special symbol variation count reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter referred to as “ST (special time) machine”. ")" Exists. As described above, in the pachinko machines of different types in which the probability variation state is continued, the control of the game state indicator described above is different, and the control of the game state indicator must be designed for each model at the development stage. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is received in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied and the winning condition is satisfied. In the case of transition from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, when the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively higher than the normal gaming state. A transition is made to the probability variation state that is set higher, and the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is turned on. The main control program then sets the display state of the game state indicator 1183 to a specific interrupt cycle when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, and the probability variation state is continued. The display state of the game state indicator 1183 is changed from the light-off state to the light-on state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received at the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. (Lottery means) If the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The probability is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). While the probability control state continues, the main control program keeps the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in the lighting state, while when the state shifts to a game state other than the probability change state, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 Is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program turns on the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in response to the transition to the probability variation state described above, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the probability variation state is continued, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is temporarily changed from the lighting state to the extinguishing state within a specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is performed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the extinguished state to the lit state again (lit state continuation control means). Although the player wants to visually recognize that the probability variation state continues, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 can be changed for a very short time as described above. It is possible to make it appear as if the display state of the game state display 1183 has not changed on the visual of the player.

  If it does in this way, it will be difficult to visually recognize that it turned off once, and it will be visually recognized as if the lighting state continues on the display mode of game state indicator 1183. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability variation state continues continuously, the probability variation state continues until the specified number of variations of the special symbol after the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified fluctuation number, the program code that controls the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 between different models Can be shared. As a result, the development efficiency of different types of pachinko machines can be improved.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, When the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state is also transitioned (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit gaming state. The specific game state may be a state in which the time-shortening operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and the time-shortening function is in operation, or both games simultaneously with the above-described probability variation game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of the special symbol variable display during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information representing the managed gaming state. As described above, the data is transmitted in a command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (game state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-described probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the main control program is left with a special symbol variably displayed before the gaming state transitions to a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state, for example, the normal gaming state. Information related to the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of times information”) is included in any command that is transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern. By writing it in the transmission information storage area as information, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (remaining fluctuation number notifying means). The main control program may include the above remaining number information in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module constituted by a set of program codes, is generally called after a CALL instruction included in a main routine and a program code group included in the program module is executed. Return to the main routine by a return instruction. In this case, since an instruction for calling back is required, at first glance, it seems difficult to reduce the program capacity.

  However, in this embodiment, when the main routine includes a continuous subroutine, for example, after the main routine calls and executes the first subroutine with the CALL instruction, the next subroutine is called with another CALL instruction continuously. Alternatively, the return instruction may not be arranged at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine as it is. With the program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). Details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate passing process is performed based on the input information. In the process when passing through the gate, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  Furthermore, following the processing at the time of passing through the gate, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for judgment per normal symbol from the read gate information, and incorporates the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are in an open state, so that the game state is such that a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102 and the game state is advantageous to the player To migrate.

  Further, the main control program determines the normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to the above-described determination based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number value, and classifies the normal symbol variation display pattern shown in FIG. Are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the normal signal indicator 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Further, the main control program, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program shown in FIG. Are generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random number for normal symbol determination taken out does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. When the game is in a big hit game state, a driving signal is output to the attacking solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, or a starting opening solenoid for opening / closing the pair of movable pieces 2106 In addition to outputting drive signal to 2105, 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short time medium Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data (command Transmission means). The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, shown in FIG. Various commands categorized as commands and jackpots (for example, one winning mouth count corresponding to a big winning mouth count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when a game ball entering the big winning mouth 2103 is detected) Display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, various classified as notification displays shown in FIG. Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.), various commands (frame Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  As the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a command is used in which a command stored first for the ring buffer is output first as a command transmission buffer. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86) is executed after the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). Since the command is stored in the command transmission buffer before the pre-read related command, the special read related pre-read command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the general read related pre-read command. The

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) A frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 Then, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame release command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, and second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a main body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the dispensing control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command having the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[9-5. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above jackpot determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, that is, When the start prize is received (start condition is satisfied), for each start memory information (start information) where the start condition is satisfied, the counter value is taken out and used as a big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) The game state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and indicates a game state collectively referring to these.

  The main control program, when determining the jackpot game mode, as data for defining the mode of jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the jackpot for each round, One of the main control built-in RAMs that is defined by an address in which the definition data (table) indicating the closing time of the big winning opening for each round and the winning ball count limit number of the game balls is offset according to the number of the big winning openings The data is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the copy. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower major prize opening (large prize opening 1) ( Step S100). When a game ball is won at the lower major prize opening (the result of step S100 is “yes”), a big winning prize winning designation command indicating that the lower major prize winning is won is set (step S102).

  Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the top prize winning opening (large winning prize opening 2) (step S104). When a game ball is won at the upper prize opening (the result of step S104 is “yes”), a big prize winning designation command indicating that the upper prize winning is won is set (step S106). It is detected by the count switch 2110 whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening. Further, when setting each winning designation command, it is not limited to detecting by the count switch, but each winning designation command is set when the corresponding large winning opening is opened and detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state may be when the game state is in accordance with S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number is a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be there.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the upper gate (community operation gate) (step S112). If the game ball has passed through the upper gate (the result of step S112 is “yes”), a combination operation gate passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a start winning opening (upper start opening 2101, lower start opening 2102). First, a start port 1 identification value is set in a start port identification area indicating a start port to be determined for winning (step S112).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper start port 2101 (step S114). Whether or not a game ball has won the upper start opening 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022. Specifically, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Based on the input information.

  When the game ball wins the upper start opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a start opening winning time process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a start opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball wins in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special design For example, processing for executing a pre-reading effect is executed. Details of the start opening process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the start port 2 identification value in the start port identification area (step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower start port 2102 (step S120). When a game ball wins the lower start opening 2102 (the result of step S120 is “yes”), the start opening winning time process is executed as in the case of the upper start opening 2101 (step S122). The start port 1 identification value and the start port 2 identification value are the start port winning process so that the common start port winning process can be executed for the upper start port winning and the lower start port winning. Information for identifying whether the process being executed is due to the winning process by the upper starting opening or the lower winning opening process based on each identification value, and is referred to in the start opening winning process or It is a value set in order to identify a data table to be set and an area for storing winning information.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electrical accessory action number that is a game progress state variable in which a type of branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game is designated (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. The process ends. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and is therefore backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S134), special branching processing are performed. Symbol outage stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening the big prize opening (step S140), big winning opening release processing (step S142), processing during closing the big winning opening (step S144) ), A winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), a combination operation gate validity waiting process (step S148), or a combination operation gate validity process (step S150).

  In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), the special symbol variation in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is based on the game balls having entered the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. Processing for starting display is performed.

  In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing for controlling the variation display of special symbols on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

  In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102, whether or not the special symbol that has started to change and has stopped is to generate a big hit game state. Judgment is made.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is stopped and a notification is made. Do.

  In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit game state is generated, the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is stopped and the fact is notified. Do.

  In the interval process before opening the big prize opening (step S140), a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the opened state.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the open / close member 2006 from the open state to the closed state.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process for notifying that is performed.

  In the combination action gate valid waiting process (step S148) or the combination action gate validity process (step S150), the upper gate (community action gate) is validated or the passage of a game ball in the upper gate is detected. .

[9-6. Processing at start-up winning a prize]
Next, the start opening winning time process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a start opening winning process in the present embodiment. The start opening winning time process is executed in the processes of steps S116 (upper start opening 2101) and S122 (lower start opening 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  In the start opening winning process, the start opening winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created upon receipt of a game ball in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. At this time, the starting opening prize command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  The main control program first sets start opening prize command creation data for creating a start opening prize command as command data (step S200), and executes command buffer setting processing (step S202). As a result, a start opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The start opening prize command of this embodiment is common regardless of the start winning opening.

  Further, the main control program sets a control data table at the time of winning the start opening corresponding to the start opening that has been won based on the start opening 1 identification value or the start opening 2 identification value selected before starting the start opening winning process. (Step S204). The start opening prize control data table stores data necessary for processing executed at the start winning prize. Hereinafter, the start opening winning control data table will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a start opening winning control data table in the present embodiment. The start opening winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 that is set when winning the upper starting opening 2101 and a starting opening winning control data table 2 that is set when winning the lower starting opening 2102. . Each table defines a special symbol reserved ball number command address table, a special symbol actuated reserved ball number area, a hold history special figure identification value, and a hold information storage area reference offset value, and has the same structure.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118, the start of the start opening winning control data table corresponding to the winning start winning opening Set the address as the control data address. As a result, since the necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the start address of the set start port winning control data table, the data corresponding to the start port by the processing common to the upper start port and the lower start port Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program obtains the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the operation reserved ball number address set in the start port winning time control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation reservation ball number address corresponds to the operation reservation ball number address (special symbol operation reservation ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the contents stored in the operation reservation ball number address are acquired as the number of reservation balls.

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). When the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is “yes”), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is “no”), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, 1 is added to the special symbol total operation reservation number (the contents of the special symbol total operation reservation number area), which is the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number (step S212).

  Further, the main control program specifies the storage location (special symbol holding storage area) of various random numbers such as the jackpot determination random number extracted by the start winning. Here, the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special symbol storage area (source code) related to the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102. In addition, about the line described as "special symbol 1" on the right side of each line of FIG. 23, it is a special symbol reservation storage area regarding the upper start port 2101, and about the line described as "special symbol 2" Is a special symbol reservation storage area for the lower start port 2102. In addition, in the case of “special symbol 1 variation pattern random number storage N area”, “N” corresponds to the reserved number. Each area stores one corresponding random value.

  Specifically, referring to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, as an added value, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size (_TMEM1_KO) of the storage area) is added to the reserved storage area index value (offset value for referring to the reserved information storage area). ) Is added. The reserved storage area index value is “00H” if the value of the start port identification area is the start port 1 identification value, and the offset value (special symbol 2 big hit determination random number storage area if it is the start port 2 identification value. _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value can be added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the jackpot determination random number. As described above, by using the index value, an appropriate storage location can be designated by a common process even if the start port is different. In addition, it is possible to store data in different storage areas by changing the index value according to the timing of executing the common processing. For example, when jackpot determination is performed at the time of prefetch processing and when fluctuation starts, information necessary for jackpot determination can be stored in different storage areas by setting different index values.

  Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the jackpot determination random number in the special symbol reservation storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the jackpot determination random number area (counter value of the jackpot determination random number) is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls. In addition to the big hit determination random number, during a change such as a big hit design random number, reach determination random number, variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, variation type random number), special symbol random number A random number for determining a winning determination or a variation pattern is extracted at the time of starting winning a prize and stored in a corresponding storage area. For example, when the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol 1 is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is used as the head address, the big hit determination random number is B_HIT_M1, the reach determination random number is T_RIT_M1, and the variation pattern random number 1 is In T_HP1_M1, the variation pattern random number 2 is stored in T_HP2_M1, the variation type random number is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the special symbol random number is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the special symbol identification value for selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation in the new reserved memory based on the special symbol total operation pending number, to the corresponding reserved identification history area (special symbol reserved identification). (Area) (step S216). In the special symbol hold identification area, a continuous area of 1 byte is allocated from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8, and the special symbol hold identification area 1 is set to 1 from the total number of special symbols on hold. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes the area corresponding to the new reserved storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning control data table set in step S204. The special symbol hold identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper start opening (special symbol 1) or the lower start opening (special symbol 2). By determining, it is determined whether or not it is possible to start changing the special symbol.

  Finally, the main control program executes a storage prefetch process for executing the special figure prefetch effect (step S218). The special figure pre-reading effect is an effect that implies the lottery result of the special lottery in advance before starting to display the variation of the special symbol. In the memory prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before the special symbol variation display is started, and information for determining the special symbol prefetching effect on the peripheral control board based on the obtained random number value (winning information, symbol type, variation) Pattern number etc.) is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program may include information on the stop symbol of the special symbol in the command as information suggesting the type of the big hit game, instead of the lottery result itself of the special lottery. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Details of the storage prefetch processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-7. Prefetch processing]
Next, the details of the storage prefetching process (step S218) in the start opening winning time process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the storage prefetch process in the present embodiment. In the storage prefetching process, a process for executing prefetching for obtaining the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. Based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the memory pre-reading process, a predetermined command (special symbol hold number designation command) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, so that the result can be displayed before the special symbol variation display is started. It is possible to execute a special figure prefetching effect to suggest.

  When the storage prefetch process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (start winning prize control data table) (step S240). Further, a hold command without prefetch is set as a hold command (step S242).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern changes between the start winning prize timing and the timing when the variation is actually started (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the start winning prize and the variation start time, and prefetching is prohibited when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different. For example, if the number of times of maintenance in the short time state (number of games) or the number of times of maintenance in the fluctuation table (number of games) is the upper limit of the number of reservations (for example, if the number of reservations is four when the number of reservations is one 4 times, if there are 2 special symbols, if the total number of the upper limit number of each hold is 8 8 times, even if there are 2 special symbols, the variable display is started with priority on one symbol In such a case, prefetching is prohibited if it is within the upper limit of the number of reservations on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processing after step S282 without executing the processing related to prefetching.

  On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is “no”), the main control program determines whether it is the prefetch determination prohibition period (step S246).

  Here, the determination of the prefetch determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not it is the prefetch determination prohibition period is determined based on the advance notice determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, the advance permission determination data address table corresponding to the winning start opening (setting value of the start opening identification area) is set, and the advance permission determination data according to the special symbol, the electric accessory operation number, and the hour and middle flag To get. If the acquired notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOC_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if “01H” (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. The notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is an example of a table related to the notice permission determination data, (A) shows the notice permission determination data address table, and (B) shows an example of the notice permission determination data. The notice permission determination data address table defines a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to special symbol 2. Further, the notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on a special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on a short / long flag (JITAN_FG).

  As the basic structure of the notice permission determination data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is the reference source information (the lower address of the reference RAM area), and the third and fourth bytes are prefetched. This is a reference table address for prohibition period determination. Using the 2nd to 4th bytes (3 bytes) of data as a basic unit, the data of this basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, data for two times is set as the number of times of reference. However, as a matter of course, the data is not limited to two times, and may be one time, or may be three or more times. By adopting such a data structure, it is possible to cope with any specification by correcting only the data value without correcting the program code.

  For example, if the special symbol / electrical accessory action number is changing special symbol (HEND), the notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOC_OK), and prefetching is permitted. The special symbol / electrical accessory action number is numerical data. For example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1, and otherwise, it is 0 when the special symbol is waiting for change (IDOL). If the game ball wins the upper start port 2101 and the time is short (the time flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as a reference table for the prefetch prohibition period determination, and the time flag A value corresponding to is determined. At this time, since the time reduction flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the prefetch determination prohibition period) which is the second row data of the notice permission determination data 2 is selected, and prefetching is performed in the determination processing in step S246. Be regulated. The notice permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the prefetch prohibition period corresponding to FIG. 2, and the selection of data is the same as the notice permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so detailed description is omitted. To do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate determination tables. However, if the contents are the same, a common table may be used, or each special symbol. The content may be completely different.

  Also, regardless of the determination result by the notice permission determination data address table, when the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, it may be determined as the pre-reading determination prohibition period so as not to execute the pre-reading effect redundantly. Good.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the storage prefetch process in FIG. In the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the prefetch determination and executes the processing from step S282.

  On the other hand, if it is not the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “no”), the main control program stores a special symbol reservation storage area (a random number for each number of reservations) corresponding to the winning start opening and the number of reservation balls. Special symbol reserved storage buffer (special from the big hit determination random number buffer) set for the corresponding special symbol reserved storage area (7 bytes in this embodiment) corresponding to one reserved code. This is stored in the symbol random number buffer (step S248). Then, based on the random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer, the prefetch determination and the determination at the start of the fluctuation are performed. That is, at the time of prefetching, the contents of the special symbol reservation storage area stored corresponding to the number of reservations are stored in the buffer, and at the start of fluctuation, the information of the head area of the special symbol reservation storage area is stored in the buffer. It is possible to make a determination with a common reference destination at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation, and in any case, the subsequent processing (processing such as jackpot determination) can be used in common.

  The special symbol hold storage area includes, for special symbol 1 and hourly symbol 2, a jackpot determination random number storage N area, a reach determination random number storage N area, a variation pattern random number 1 storage N area, and a variation pattern random number 2 storage N area. The random number storage N area for variation type and the random number storage N area for special symbols are included (N is 1 to 4). The special symbol hold storage buffer includes a jackpot determination random number buffer, a reach determination random number buffer, a variation pattern random number 1 buffer, a variation pattern random number 2 buffer, a variation type random number buffer, and a special symbol random number buffer.

  In the process of step S248, for example, when storing the third reserved memory of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol reserved memory buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 big hit determining random number memory 3 area is set to the big hit determining random number buffer, Random number buffer 3 for special symbol 1 reach determination random number, random number buffer for reach determination, special symbol 1 random pattern 1 storage 3 area value for variation, random variable 1 buffer for variation pattern, special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 2 storage 3 The value of the area is stored in the random pattern 2 buffer for the variation pattern, the random number storage 3 for the special symbol 1 variation type is stored in the random type buffer for the variation type, and the value of the special symbol 1 special symbol random storage 3 is stored in the special design random number buffer. To do.

  Then, the main control program refers to each random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer set in step S248, and executes a special symbol jackpot determination process for determining the result of the special lottery (step S250). . Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (special symbol) of the special lottery (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing a big hit flag or the like when prefetching is determined. At the start of the change, the big hit determination result is stored in the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

  In addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), the big lottery symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), the variation pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), the variation type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), the symbol type command buffer (T_HIT_FGBF) TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF), and a special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

  Note that the normal lottery also includes a buffer related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery, as in the case of the special lottery. The buffers related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery include a winning flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), a normal symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and a normal symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this way, it is possible to make the processing common at the time of prefetching and at the time of start of variation, as in the case of the special lottery.

  Further, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table that holds information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S256). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined in each variation pattern. One or more variation types can be defined in one variation pattern. The variation type corresponds to, for example, the type of pseudo continuous variation when a variation pattern corresponding to pseudo continuous variation is selected. When the variation type classification value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type classification value in the variation type classification buffer (step S264).

  Thereafter, the main control program clears the values from the jackpot determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent malfunction due to the remaining value when the big hit determination is performed.

  Further, the main control program sets commands (design type prefetch command, variation pattern prefetch command and variation type prefetch command) indicating the prefetch result in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). . Further, the hold command reference value when there is a prefetch is set to the hold command reference value (step S280).

  Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (start winning prize control data table) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, a reserved ball number command is acquired based on the set reserved command reference value (step S284), and the acquired reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer ( Step S286).

  Here, the procedure for acquiring the reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data restored in the process of step S282, the address of the start opening winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (value of the start opening identifying area) where the game ball has been won is set. As described above, since the structure of the control data table at the time of the start opening winning prize is common regardless of the value of the start opening identification area, it is possible to share the subsequent processes.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a table related to a special symbol reserved ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number command address table, and (B) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation table. . As shown in FIG. 22, the start opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball number command address table (data set at the head address of each data table (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W)). ), The special symbol reserved ball number command address table can be referred to from the address.

  The main control program has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 corresponding to the winning start opening or a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2. And the address of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol reserved ball number command address table based on the reserved command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data includes, for each special symbol, a pending command generation table when prefetching is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), and pending command generation when prefetching is permitted. Table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

  Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3-byte data. The first byte data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the number of holds, the second byte data is the default value for the command mode data, and the third byte data is the command status data value. Become. For example, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number designation command when the special symbol 1 reserved memory number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the number of holds is 3) and there is a pre-read is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number designation command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B) Created based on Specifically, the status value is “62H”, the mode value is “02H” (holding number 3-1) + “11H” (default value) = “13H”, and the special symbol holding ball number designation command is “6213H”. It becomes. Finally, the created special symbol reserved ball number designation command is set in the command buffer.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, the second byte data (the default value of the mode value) of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is “01H” when prefetching is prohibited, and prefetch permission is permitted. In this case, “11H” is set. Therefore, the upper bits of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command are “0” when prefetching is prohibited and “1” when prefetching is permitted even after the number of reserves is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol reserved ball number designation command can determine the presence or absence of prefetching by referring to the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 4140 waits until receiving information (command) necessary for executing the special figure prefetching effect by receiving the special symbol reserved ball number designation command and referring to the mode value. You can decide whether or not. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command is “0”, it is possible to continue the process without receiving a prefetch-related command. Note that the order of the data configuration set in the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the description order, for example, the lower address of the storage area that refers to the reserved number is set in the second byte, etc. What is necessary is just to set in the order decided beforehand. Furthermore, the information is not limited to 3 bytes (3 information), and may be set for other information that accompanies a pending number command output as long as the data structure is determined in advance.

[9-8. Special symbol jackpot determination process]
Next, the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of special symbol jackpot determination processing in the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination processing determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning. This process is commonly used at the time of special lottery look-ahead and when the special symbol starts to change (when the change display is confirmed).

  The main control program first acquires a big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value for performing the special lottery is acquired from the special symbol big hit determination lower limit data (lower limit value table for big hit determination) based on the probability variation flag (step S302). In the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination), a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or a high probability, and is set to “00H” if the probability is low and “01H” if the probability is high. The special symbol big hit determination lower limit data is set according to the probability state, the lower limit data is selected based on the probability variation flag, and the lottery probability can be made different by making the lower limit data different. It has become.

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). When the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S304 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value, the big hit determination random number is the big hit determination upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the big hit determination random number is generated is from 0 to the upper limit, and the range of random numbers determined to be big hit is the range from the big hit determination lower limit to the upper limit. ing. For this reason, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or greater than the big hit determination lower limit value, it may be determined as a big hit, but a value exceeding the upper limit value is set to the big hit determination random number due to noise or the like. If it happens, there is a risk that it will be judged as a big hit. In this embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, the upper limit value is also compared.

  When the big hit determination random number is not larger than the big hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S306 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or smaller than the big hit determination upper limit value, the main control program Winning is set (step S308). Specifically, the big hit winning is set as the flag set value, and the flag set value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. As described above, the big hit flag storage area is a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of fluctuation, and a big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of prefetch determination.

  On the other hand, when the big hit determination random number is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is “yes”), or when the big hit determination random number is larger than the big hit determination upper limit (step If the result of S306 is “yes”), the winning flag is set to “no win” (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit value, the value that exceeds the upper limit value is set by setting a value that causes the big hit flag to be off like when it is determined that the value is smaller than the lower limit value. Even if it is set, it is prevented from being mistakenly determined to be a big hit. As described above, when the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol jackpot determination process is terminated.

[9-9. Special symbol determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of special symbol determination processing in the present embodiment. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol is specified based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning.

  The main control program first acquires a big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big win (step S322). If the content of the big hit flag is not a big win (the result of step S322 is “no”), the special symbol number value is shifted to set the symbol command value (0) (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the content of the big hit flag is a big hit winning (the result of step S322 is “yes”), the main control program determines the big hit symbol number and the big hit symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table based on the big hit symbol random number. A number is acquired (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, the jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol type number is a number corresponding to the jackpot type one to one. For example, with 16R launching probability variation big hit (01H), with 16R launching non-probability variation big hit (02H), without 16R launching probability variation big hit (without time reduction: latency probability variation, 03H), with 16R launching probability variation big hit (with time reduction: sudden accuracy) , 04H), small hit (05H), and the like. The jackpot symbol number is a value provided in plural for the symbol type number. For example, 01H to 10H for a probable big hit with 16R ball, 11H to 26H for a non-probable big hit with 16R ball, 27H to 3FH for a probable big hit without 16R ball (no short time: latent probability change), 16R 40H to 55H are provided for a promising big hit without a ball (with short time: sudden accuracy), and 56H to 5FH for a small hit. In this way, the fact that a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers are provided for the same jackpot type is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the special symbol (this special symbol). On the other hand, since there is one type of missing symbol, it is not selected from the table, but a predetermined value (missed symbol command value (0)) is set for the missing symbol number.

  Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol type number (step S326). Finally, a special symbol number value is set based on the jackpot symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

[9-10. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process in the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. Note that this processing is executed at the start of variation as in prefetching, and refers to the same variation pattern table at the time of prefetching and at the start of variation.

  The main control program first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. Fluctuation information source table is a special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 according to the gaming state, hit (win fluctuation selection information state table), out of place (outside variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), It is a data table in which table information for referring to reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Furthermore, the area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variation information source table is specified based on the number of data for one block of the special symbol identification value and the special symbol-specific variation distribution information source table ( Step S344). Subsequently, the winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer at the time of pre-reading or the special symbol winning flag area at the time of starting the change (for example, 00H : Out of place, 01H: Big hit, 02H: Small hit) are acquired (step S346).

  The main control program determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big or small hit value (step S350). When the big hit or the small win is won (the result of step S350 is “yes”), the big hit variation selection information type table is searched from the hit variation selection information state table based on the state flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched big hit variation selection information type table is saved. The big hit variation selection information type table is a big hit variation type (a variation group at a stage before the big hit variation pattern is determined. For example, a variation pattern finally determined such as SP1 reach, SP2 reach, etc. This is a table for selecting a group in which groups are grouped). Depending on whether the result of the special lottery wins the big hit or the big win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value set for the big win symbol type. Since different values are set for the hits, it is possible to select a variation pattern by common processing for the big hits and the small hits.

  Next, the main control program acquires a jackpot symbol type (a value stored in the jackpot symbol type buffer if prefetching, or a value stored in the jackpot symbol type area if variation starts) (step S354). The set jackpot symbol type is used in the variation information number search process in step S358.

  Subsequently, the main control program selects a symbol type setting data selection table for variation pattern distribution according to the value of the variation special symbol identification area at the time of variation pattern selection. (Step S356). The variation pattern allocation symbol type setting data selection table is for determining a type for determining the hit variation pattern selection value data table from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the value of (hit) symbol type It is a table.

  Next, the main control program executes the fluctuation information number search process using the jackpot symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby changing the fluctuation information number (from the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table, the hit fluctuation pattern selection value). The type value for determining the data table is acquired (step S358). Further, the saved big hit variation selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, the variation information number that is the result of the variation information number search process is set as a selection value by the process of step S358 (step S362).

  On the other hand, the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data when the big win or the small win is not won (the result of step S350 is “no”) (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The state flag is set to numerical data corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-short time (normal game) state), 01H (high probability short time state), 02H One of the values (low probability short time state) and 03H (high probability non-short time state) is set. Thereby, it is possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the gaming state. Further, reach determination for determining whether or not to generate reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the look-ahead or variation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) A threshold value is acquired (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets a reach variation selection information state table as search data (step S370).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not a reach is generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372). Specifically, the reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer, and is compared with the reach determination threshold acquired in the process of step S368. Reach is generated when the reach determination threshold is larger than the reach determination random number.

  When the reach is not generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “no”), the main control program sets a deviation variation selection information state table as search data (step S374). Further, the deviation variation selection information holding table corresponding to the status flag is searched from the deviation variation selection information status table (step S376), and the retrieved deviation variation selection information holding table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the look-ahead or variation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set as the selected value (step 380).

  The processing from step S374 to step S380 is processing for selecting a variation pattern in the case of a normal deviation where no reach occurs. In the case of deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of holdings.For example, when the number of holdings is large, there is a possibility that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time may be selected compared to the case where the number of holdings is small. A variation pattern table set so as to be high is selected.

  On the other hand, the main control program sets a status flag as a selection value when the reach is generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”) (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the variation time is not determined by the number of holdings, but the variation time may be changed depending on the number of holdings as in the case of the normal deviation. Specifically, even when the reach variation is the same, when the number of holdings is large, a predetermined variation time (for example, a high-speed variation time immediately after the start of variation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number of suspensions is small. In this case, since the variation times are different, different variation pattern commands are set.

  When the process of step S362, step S380, or step S382 ends, the main control program selects a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), the big hit variation selection information type table is set as the search data, and the variation that is the search result of the variation information number search processing in step S358 is selected as the selected value. A pattern type value for pattern distribution is set. If the result of the special lottery is lost and a reach occurs (step S382), the reach variation selection information status table is set as search data, and the status flag is set as the selection value. Furthermore, when the result of the special lottery is lost and no reach occurs (step S380), the deviation variation selection information holding table is set as the search data, and the number of held balls is set as the selection value.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for variation pattern (step S386), and executes variation information number search processing (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the variation pattern selection data selection value from the variation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of step S390, the fluctuation information number search process Is executed (step S394). Thereafter, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

  The variation pattern selection data table is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value and the variation pattern set value as a set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit set in the variation pattern selection data table, and the variation pattern is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. When it is determined that the value of the random number for use 2 is larger, the variation pattern setting value corresponding to the lower limit value of the variation pattern random number 2 is selected. When the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit, the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. It is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value 2 of the variation pattern random number until it is determined to be large.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages by using two types of random numbers, that is, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (a variation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The method of lottery is not limited to the method of lottery in two steps, and a method of lottery in three or more steps may be used, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by one random number for variation pattern. Since the current random numbers for variation patterns are composed of 1 byte, the result of determination using two random numbers is the same as the result of determination using a total of 2 bytes of random numbers. When a variation pattern is selected with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type determination process]
Next, details of the variation type determination process (step S262) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process in the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for variation type determination data corresponding to the state flag (step S400). Subsequently, the variation pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and variation information number search processing is executed (step S404).

  In the variation type determination data table, different variation type determination data is set according to the gaming state, and variation type determination data corresponding to the gaming state is selected by the processing of step S400. The variation type determination data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern lower limit value and the variation type selection data selection value as a set of data. Then, by executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation pattern selection value is compared with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value set in the fluctuation type determination data, and the fluctuation pattern selection value is larger than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value. Is determined, the variation type selection data selection value corresponding to the variation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the variation pattern selection value is smaller than the variation pattern lower limit value, the variation pattern lower limit value is changed until it is determined that the variation pattern selection value is greater than the next set variation pattern lower limit value. While being executed repeatedly. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is determined based on the variation type determination data table set in the variation information source address table. Determined.

  Next, the main control program searches the variation type selection data address table for variation type selection data (address) corresponding to the variation type selection data selection value acquired by the variation information number retrieval processing in step S404 (step S406). ).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a variation type random number as a comparison value (step S408), and executes variation information number search processing (step S410). At this time, the variation type selection data acquired in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the variation type setting value is acquired by the variation information number search processing.

  The variation type selection data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type set value as a set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation type random number is compared with the variation type random number lower limit value set in the variation type selection data. Is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the variation type random number lower limit value is selected. If the value of the random number for the variation type is smaller than the lower limit value of the random number for the variation type, it is determined that the value of the random number for the variation type is greater than the next set lower limit value of the random number for the variation type. Until the variable type random number lower limit is changed.

[9-12. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not being executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the special symbol variation display is performed.

  The main control program first determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (the value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next time is not 0 from the value stored at the head of the special symbol hold identification area. . When the loaded value is 0, that is, when the special symbol fluctuation display is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the main control program does not start the special symbol fluctuation display. The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process for starting the special symbol variable display. Specifically, first, since the variable display when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 (special symbol 2) is executed with priority, the special symbol 2 is set as the start port identification value (step S422). ), Special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set in the variation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number area (step S426).

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). When the number of reserved symbols in the special symbol 2 is 0 (the result of step S428 is “no”), the special symbol 1 is set as the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 variation setting data is used as variation setting data. Set (step S432).

  The fluctuation setting data is composed of a RAM and a data table address that are referred to in order to execute the fluctuation starting process in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and different values are used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 as reference destinations. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. Thereby, it is possible to execute a common variation start process between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  The variation setting data of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The first byte is the lower byte of the active hold ball number address, the second and third bytes are the command creation data address for the hold ball number, the fourth and fifth bytes are the transfer source address when transferring the hold memory area, and the sixth and seventh bytes are reserved. Transfer destination address at storage area transfer, 8th and 9th bytes are reserved 4 Transfer source address at storage area transfer, 10th and 11th bytes are hold 4 Transfer destination address at transfer of storage area, 12th and 13th bytes are changing setting data Address.

  When the variation setting data is set, the main control program stores the starting port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the variation of the special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the number of the operation reservation balls corresponding to the start port identification value and the special symbol total operation reservation number stored in the special symbol total operation reservation number area (step S436).

  Next, the main control program sets a reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438) and sets it in the command buffer (step S440). Thereafter, the reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process. Note that the command creation table (FIG. 26A) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is the same as that for prefetching, and the program capacity can be saved by using the same table at the time of prefetching and at the start of variation. Yes.

  Subsequently, the main control program executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a jackpot determination random number obtained at the time of winning the start opening. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol hold storage area, a hold memory (start memory) including various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number extracted by the start winning is stored for the number of holds for each start opening. When the change of the special symbol based on the reserved memory is started, the reserved memory where the change is started is cleared, and the remaining reserved memory is shifted. For example, when the maximum number of holds is 4, the reserved memory stored in the special symbol reserved memory 2 area is shifted to the special symbol reserved memory 1 area, and similarly to the special symbol reserved memory 3 area and the special symbol reserved memory 4 area. The stored reserved memory is shifted to the special symbol reserved memory 2 area and the special symbol reserved memory 3 area. Thereafter, the special symbol hold memory 4 area is cleared (step S448). The special symbol hold storage area shift process stores the value set in the hold storage area transfer source address set in the variable setting data in the hold storage area transfer destination address and the hold storage area transfer. The transfer source address and the transfer destination address during transfer of the hold storage area are updated to the next address, and the data stored in each hold storage area is sequentially shifted.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the changing data setting address set in the changing setting data as the setting data address, and provides information necessary for executing the special symbol changing processing executed in the next interrupt processing. A predetermined storage area is set (step S450).

  Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special symbol 2 variation pattern reference command is set, and if the special symbol 1 is special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special symbol 1 variation pattern reference command is set (step S452). S456).

  Further, the main control program obtains the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area as lower-order command data (step S458). Further, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by acquiring the variation type category value from the variation type category area (step S460) and adding the variation type category value to the command value set in the process of step S452 or step S456. Are calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing from step S450 to step S462, and command storage processing for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer, and if the special symbol 2 is the special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. Setting is performed (steps S466 to S472).

  Next, the main control program sets a variable state designation command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Each command generated is sent in the order in which it was generated (the order stored in the command buffer), so if you want to change the transmission order, change the command generation order (the order in which the command buffer is stored) do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the variation pattern command, the processing from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processing from step S458 to step S464.

  Next, the main control program clears the special symbol holding history corresponding to the holding storage for which the variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol holding history (step S478). In the present embodiment, an area for storing the special symbol holding history for eight pieces (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, each for four pieces) is allocated, and the variable display corresponding to the head holding storage is started. Then, the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variation display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol holding history stored in the second area (special symbol holding history identification 2 area) is moved to the top. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, it is sufficient to shift an area storing seven special symbol hold histories. Finally, the last area of the special symbol hold history identification area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process is terminated.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol / flag setting process in the present embodiment.

  The main control program first stores a random number (special symbol big hit determination random number) for determining the big hit in the special lottery in the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol for starting the variable display is specified, and the corresponding special symbol jackpot determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2 A special symbol jackpot determination random number stored in the jackpot determination random number storage area 1) is set. Then, the set special symbol jackpot determination random number is stored (transferred) in the jackpot determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

  That is, the special symbol reservation storage area that is the target of the start of fluctuation is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in the corresponding area of the special symbol reservation storage buffer. In addition to the special symbol jackpot determination random number stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) jackpot determination random number storage 1 area, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 area Is stored in the random number buffer for reach determination, the random number stored in the random number 1 storage 1 area for the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) fluctuation pattern for the random number 1 buffer for fluctuation pattern The random number stored in the random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the random pattern 2 buffer for the variation pattern, and the random number stored in the random number storage 1 area for the special design 1 (special design 2) is stored in the variation type random number buffer. The random number value stored in the special symbol random number storage 1 area for symbol 1 (special symbol 2) is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of fluctuation, and the address value of the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) is set to execute the special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination process is executed at the time of prefetching (when executed in the process of step S250 of the storage prefetching process), as described above, the big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the big hit flag. Is set. In this way, by setting the RAM area to be referred / stored before executing the special symbol jackpot determination processing in advance and at the time of fluctuation, the “special symbol jackpot determination processing” It is possible to share with. Note that the procedure of the special symbol jackpot determination process is as described in FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (special symbol) of the special lottery (step S512). The special symbol determination process is the same as the process of step S252 in the storage prefetching process, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation as in the special symbol jackpot determination process. The processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. That's right. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

  Next, the main control program searches the special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number set value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the process of step S516 (step S518).

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on a special symbol display (such as 7-segment) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as display data for the special symbol display as it is, a fixed display pattern is obtained, and there is a possibility that the player can easily identify the winning type in the form displayed on the special symbol display. For this reason, the display pattern is acquired so as not to be a constant display pattern by calculation. In addition, it is possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number in a dedicated table so that the display pattern does not become constant, but if the type of symbol type increases, it is necessary to hold the display pattern by that amount. The storage capacity for storing is increased. Therefore, by acquiring a display pattern by calculation, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

  Finally, the main control program adds the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process to the area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (one is added to the address of the searched special symbol stop area) In the area corresponding to the address that has been set (step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process is terminated.

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, a special symbol actuated reserve ball number area (special symbol 1 actuated reserve ball number area or special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol for starting the variable display is displayed. Then, the value of the special symbol operation reservation ball number area (special symbol operation reservation ball number) is set as the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set stored value is stored in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (step S536).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 is set as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S540). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is the same as the process of step S258 in the storage prefetching process, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation, similar to the special symbol jackpot determination process, and will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. That's right. When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (step S544).

  Next, the main control program retrieves data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value from the special symbol variation time data (step S546). The fluctuation time value acquired at this time becomes the reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

  Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S548), and sets the acquired variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is the same as the process of step S262 in the storage prefetching process, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, as described with reference to FIG. .

  Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo continuous operations. Then, the main control program adds the added value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference changing time value searched in the process of step S546, and obtains the final changing time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electrical accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[9-15. Normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is started, the main control program first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate portion (ordinary gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input process in step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Input information is written to the area. The main control program determines the passage of the game ball with reference to the written input information.

  When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process when passing through the gate (step S802). In the process at the time of passing through the gate, the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Details of the processing at the time of passing the gate will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game ball has not passed through the gate part 2350 (the result of step S800 is “no”), or when the process at the time of passing through the gate is completed, the main control program reads the normal symbol / normal electric accessory. A process corresponding to the normal symbol / electrical instrument action number is searched from the action call table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

  In step S810, the normal symbol variation waiting process (step S812), the normal symbol variation processing (step S814), the normal symbol big hit determination process (step S816), and the normal symbol are shifted based on the normal symbol / electrical accessory action number. A stop process (step S818), a normal symbol stop process (step S820), a normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), or a general electric operation end interval process (step S824) is executed.

  In the normal symbol variation waiting process (step S812), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350, processing for starting the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol changing process (step S814), processing for controlling the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol winning determination process (step S816), the normal lottery winning determination is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350.

  In the normal symbol shift stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped, and a process of notifying that is performed.

  In the normal symbol stop process (step S820), when the normal lottery is won, the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped to notify that, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric accessories) Processing for setting an opening / closing mode of 2106 is performed.

  In the ordinary electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102. For example, processing relating to an operation to prevent the game ball from being received in the mouth 2102 is performed.

  In the normal power operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 has been completed, and when it has been completed, a process for notifying the fact is performed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Next, details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process at the time of passing the gate (step S802) will be described. In the process at the time of passing through the gate, a command transmitted when the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected is set, a random number for normal lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a pre-reading effect is executed. For example, to execute a process or the like.

  In the process at the time of passing the gate, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, and the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted, and the gate of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It has become. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Hereinafter, the procedure of the process at the time of passing the gate will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the process at the time of passing the gate is started, the main control program first acquires the value of the normal symbol actuated ball number area as the actuated ball number (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of suspended balls is 4 or more which is the upper limit value (step S832). When the number of the operation suspending balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of the operation reservation balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is “no”), the main control program stores the number of operation reservation balls in the normal symbol operation reservation balls count buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the contents of the normal symbol operation reserved ball number area to update the normal symbol operation reserved ball number (step S836).

  Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the normal symbol random number storage area corresponding to the reserved number (step S838). Specifically, the normal symbol random number storage area is partitioned from the 0th partition to the third partition in a predetermined unit, and each partition is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols. Each time the gate passes, the normal symbol random number storage area stores a hit determination random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is successful and a hit symbol random number for determining the normal symbol hit symbol. Since the winning determination random number and the winning design random number are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. Note that the random numbers stored for normal symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a random number for reach determination or a random number for variation patterns is provided for normal symbols as in special symbols, these are gated. It can be configured to store each time it passes.

  Finally, the main control program executes the normal symbol prefetching process based on the newly stored normal symbol hold storage (step S840). Details of the normal symbol prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Normal symbol look-ahead processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol prefetching process (step S848) in the process when passing through the gate will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol prefetch process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired based on the newly stored general symbol hold memory before starting the variable symbol display, and the general symbol prefetching effect is generated on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. Information for determination (normal symbol type pre-reading effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the normal symbol type prefetch command, the peripheral control substrate 4140 determines whether or not to execute the general symbol prefetch effect, and performs processing according to the determination result.

  When the normal symbol prefetching process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the prefetch determination value to prohibit prefetching (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period is reached when the process is executed (step S852).

  Here, a period during which the prefetch determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a period during which the prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading determination of the normal lottery is prohibited is determined by the operation (opened) state of the movable piece 2106 (normal electric accessory).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operation state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the game state and the special look-ahead effect. In addition, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery and a short time state corresponding to the variation time in the normal lottery, the winning probability, and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. The probability state includes a low probability state (normal state) and a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the winning probability of the special drawing lottery is higher than the low probability state. Further, the time-saving state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state that is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state. In the short-time state in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-short state, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is high, and further, the operation time of the normal electric accessory (the game at the lower start port 2102) The time during which the ball can enter the ball is long.

  In addition to the opening mode in the short-time state, the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment includes a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower start port 2102 and the game ball sufficiently to the lower start port 2102. There are two types of operation modes of long opening that can enter the ball. Furthermore, the opening mode of the short opening and the long opening may be different in the non-short-time state and the short-time state. The short opening in the non-short-time state is an open mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the start port, but in the short-time state, it may be an open mode in which it is easy to enter the start port similarly to the long open state. Further, the long opening may be an opening mode that is different between the non-time-short state and the time-short state, and may be an open mode in which the rate of winning in the start opening is further increased in the time-short state compared to the non-time-short state. In the case of a short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim and enter the lower start port 2102, and therefore, the normal look ahead effect is executed only in the case of a long opening.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect may be executed even when the short is opened. For example, by executing the same look-ahead effect for the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult to know whether the player is a long opening or a short opening, and the expectation by the pre-reading effect can be further amplified. In addition, by making the look-ahead effect different or only partially different between the short opening and the long opening, it becomes possible for the player to identify which opening pattern will be used, and to perform a launch operation corresponding to the opening pattern. In this way, the interest in games can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as for the pre-reading effect, a gaze effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. The gasse effect is to notify the player that although the pre-reading effect is executed, but the effect is not successful (fails) in the end, the result is that the ordinary electric accessory is not released as a result. May be. As a result, the gaze effect is discouraged for the player, but if the gaze effect is not provided, the release operation is always performed when the prefetch effect is performed. The purpose is to further amplify expectations. In addition, a pre-reading effect as a definite effect may be provided so that either a short opening or a long opening is always executed in the pre-reading effect. About a definite effect, it can be made to amplify expectation with respect to a player more by setting it as the aspect different from a normal prefetching effect.

  In the short-time state, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the player has little profit to inform the long opening, so the pre-reading effect is executed. You may make it not.

  Furthermore, when the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, the execution of the general figure prefetching effect may be restricted. In this embodiment, when the special figure prefetching effect which changes the mode of a hold display is performed, it is permitted to perform the common figure prefetching effect in parallel. On the other hand, when a special figure pre-reading effect that changes the background display is being executed, if the probability state is low, execution of the general-purpose pre-reading effect is permitted, and if the probability state is high, the general-purpose pre-reading effect is performed. The regulation of execution. This is because, in the special figure prefetching effect in the high probability state, the expectation for winning the special lottery is high, and therefore the effect of the normal figure prefetching effect may be reduced. However, by executing the general-purpose prefetching effect, the player can prompt the continuation of the launch without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special-design prefetching effect is being executed. You may make it perform. Further, execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be restricted according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of a big hit gaming state, the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be restricted.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the pre-reading determination prohibition period is reached (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processes after step S868. On the other hand, if the prefetch determination prohibition period has not been reached (the result of step S852 is “no”), in order to execute the prefetch determination, the contents of the hit determination random number storage area to be prefetched are used as the hit determination random number buffer. (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area in any of the sections 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal symbol random number buffer. The normal symbol random number buffer is configured to correspond to the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, an area for 2 bytes of the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number is secured, and the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random buffer are configured. Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls is 2 will be described. The hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are respectively stored in the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer. Stored. In this way, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the hit determination random number buffer, and by executing the “normal symbol hit determination process” on the random value stored in the hit determination random number buffer, It is possible to perform the determination and the hit determination at the start of fluctuation by common processing.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination and executing the “normal symbol hit judgment process”, the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holds are the hit flag buffer and the normal symbol type area buffer, respectively. Therefore, it is set / referenced to the normal symbol operation reserved ball number buffer. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining a normal symbol hit (step S858). Details of the normal symbol hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the winning determination random number buffer and the winning symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

  When the main control program clears the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, it sets normal symbol type prefetch command creation data as command data (step S862) and refers to the contents of the normal symbol type prefetch command creation data. A normal symbol prefetch command (corresponding to the normal symbol type prefetch effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the prefetch determination value is reset to prefetch permission (step S866).

  The main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation reserved ball number command creation data 1 as the command data after the process of step S866 is completed or in the case of the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is “yes”). (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the prefetch determination value is prohibited (step S870). When the prefetch determination value is not prohibition (the result of step S870 is “no”), that is, when the prefetch determination value is prefetch permission. In this case, the normal symbol actuated ball number command creation data 2 is reset as command data (step S872). As described above, different commands are generated for the normal symbol operation reserved ball number command when prefetching is permitted and when prefetching is prohibited. For example, different modes are set depending on whether prefetching is permitted or prohibited. Finally, the main control program generates a normal symbol actuated holding ball number command when prefetching is permitted or when prefetching is prohibited based on the command data set in step S868 or step S872 and sets it in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Normal symbol per judgment process]
Next, the details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol prefetching process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol determination process, a process for determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

  When the normal symbol hit determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, the lower limit of the hit value is selected from the normal symbol per unit determination lower limit value data table based on whether or not the time-short game state is set, and the normal symbol per unit determination lower limit value data is set (step S902). Normal symbols have a high probability during time reduction, and the number of hits during time reduction is greater than the number of hits during non-time reduction, so the lower limit value is smaller in the time reduction. (The total number of hits increases). Further, the main control program provisionally sets “no normal symbol winning” as a default value in the normal symbol winning determination value (step S904).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value set in step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the winning determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “yes”), since the normal drawing lottery was not won, the normal symbol winning determining value (normally temporarily set in the winning flag storage area) “No symbol win” is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). That is, at the time of losing, “0” (no normal symbol winning) is set to the winning flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area.

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is greater than or equal to the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether or not the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (step S906). S908). If the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is “yes”), it is determined that there is a shift as in the case where the normal drawing lottery is not won, and the hit flag area and the normal symbol type area are displayed. Each is set to “0”, which is a deviation value. As in the case of the special figure, if the hit determination random number is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value, it may be determined to be a hit, but an upper limit value is set to the hit determination random number due to noise or the like. In order to cope with a malfunction in which an excessive value is set, the upper limit value is also compared.

  When the comparison value is equal to or smaller than the upper limit for hit determination (the result of step S908 is “no”), the main control program determines that the normal symbol lottery has been won, and the normal symbol win (“ 1 ") is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the winning flag storage area (step S912).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the normal symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Furthermore, a random number for winning symbols is set as a comparison value (step S916), and a variation information number search process is executed (step S918). The normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the winning symbol random number buffer by the variation information number search process to determine the winning symbol type, and the determined winning symbol type is stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S920).

  As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. Then, by setting different areas in advance in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area at the time of prefetching and at the time of fluctuation, it is possible to share the processing at the time of prefetching and at the time of fluctuation. Specifically, at the start of normal symbol variation, a hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of prefetching, a hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, it is possible to share the processing for the normal lottery at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation.

  The main processing related to the special lottery and the normal lottery executed on the main control board 4100 has been described above. A program for executing game control in the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the module configuration of the main control program in the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, some modules of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing and the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing are extracted and shown.

  In the control program in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is divided into modules for each function. A general-purpose module is commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is a special symbol and special electric accessory control process start opening prize process or the like. It is configured to be used not only for special symbol variation waiting processing but also for normal symbol pre-reading processing for normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing. With this configuration, it is possible to use a common module, buffer, etc. when creating a command regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

  Further, a process (variation information number retrieval process) for retrieving data (variation information number) from a predetermined table can be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the configuration of the table to be searched and specifying the search range and search parameters. By configuring the modules in common as described above, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

  In addition, the command buffer setting process and the variation information number search process share a module with a relatively small number of procedures. It is standardized at the time of starting prize) and at the start of fluctuation.

  More specifically, as described above, at the time of prefetching (memory prefetching processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol variation waiting processing), special symbol jackpot determination processing (FIG. 27), special symbol determination processing (FIG. 28), A variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and a variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. These processes are configured to refer to the value stored at the specified address. By specifying the reference address before executing the process, it is stored in different areas at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation. Processing can be executed based on the value. In addition to the value, a table reference destination may be designated. For example, if it is applied to a process of referring to a different table depending on the gaming state, it can be a common process regardless of the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination process for making the normal lottery hit determination is shared in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit determination process, the hit flag indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is acquired from the hit flag storage area and processed. However, when the normal symbol prefetch determination process is executed, the hit flag buffer address is referred to. Although it is set as an address, when it is normally executed from the symbol variation waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as a reference address.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to share a module with a relatively large number of processes as described above, thereby improving program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 44 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 when the interrupt permission is set. Various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by, for example, writing “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the peripheral backup SRAM 4150d is also compared with the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to the Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear it to zero. Then, after performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in this contact sensitivity adjustment function at power-on, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when power supply is started by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 uses the initial value of a predetermined contact determination threshold (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact”) as the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a in response to the start of power supply by the power supply control unit. Also referred to as “determination threshold”.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In this liquid crystal display device luminance setting process, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the game board 4 is stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process to be described later It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is monitored. Appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described later is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display from the channels CH1 and 2 by the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. The data is output to the device 1900 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. Thereby, although delay of processing time can be prevented, so-called frame dropping occurs, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012, and The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect by the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later, and shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music and sound effects adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also generated. Stereo playback.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In addition, in the scheduler update processing, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interruption process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of the starting opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held (0 to 4) Normal symbol memory command for identifying the symbol, symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, and each time the game ball is received in the big prize opening 2103 Or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error generation command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It is analyzed whether or not there is (command analyzing means), and the current gaming state is recognized. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door frame opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 15 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuned effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 tuned effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized in relation to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display shown in FIG. 16, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the notification are The data is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled in a manner different from the normal rendering aspect associated with the rendering operation. By displaying a predetermined warning image (for example, “opening the door!” Etc.) using the 1900 (production device), the upper liquid crystal display device 244 (production device), and the lamp (production device), it is visually externally displayed. A warning is given, or an external warning is given by using a pair of side speakers (direction device) (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs effect control processing (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs execution of a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, when the demonstration screen is displayed in a state where the variable display game is not being executed or when a special figure synchronization effect command is received, the progress of the special figure synchronization effect is controlled. Also, a big hit game effect is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special figure prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). In the special figure prefetching effect control process, the production control program performs setting at the start of execution of the special figure prefetching effect. Details of the special figure prefetch effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a general-purpose prefetch effect control process (step S1028). In the general-purpose prefetch effect control process, the effect control program controls the setting at the start of execution of the general-purpose prefetch effect and the progress control. Details of the general-purpose prefetch effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the light emission indicated by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the data, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. The peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To multiple LEDs on various decorative boards The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the presentation control program is arranged in time series in the peripheral control MPU 4150a as data constituting the screen generation schedule data by updating the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and the extracted at least one character data. Sprite data is generated from the image data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, as the game progresses, by displaying a video composed of a large number of material images superimposed on the background image in each frame, an attempt is made to make it difficult for the player to run out of interest. Although it is required to perform display control so that more material images are included in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, it seems that a large number of material images are included in each frame. It seems that a big burden is imposed on the control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program is provided for each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing correspondence information in which correspondence relationships with a plurality of material images that can be represented are defined in advance, when the predetermined frame of each frame is to be displayed, the correspondence information is referred to and the predetermined information is referred to. At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and drawing data is included in the built-in sound source VDP 4160a without including the predetermined material image and excluding other material images excluding the predetermined material image. A predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is generated by being generated and stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer). Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). This will be specifically described below.

  First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) out of a large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame, At a position where a material image (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) such as at least one sprite on the background image based on the specific background image data is to be originally arranged (hereinafter referred to as “original arrangement position”), As shown in a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter referred to as “confidential state”), it is managed as follows.

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence linking table (corresponding relationship information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Browse the table. In this correspondence linking table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups). Predefined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (confidential release command) for canceling the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence linking table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and as a part of the correspondence information, the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame The value is managed.

  In this correspondence linking table, as such correspondence relationship information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and A correspondence relationship with a secrecy cancellation command for canceling the visual secrecy state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). When the display control program tries to display a predetermined frame according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the correspondence relationship in the correspondence association table is controlled by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. With reference to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame is specified (material image specifying means).

  Furthermore, the production control program identifies the secrecy release command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table when the desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, The specified concealment release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (concealment release instructing means). The secrecy release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as “desired sprite number”) that can identify a desired sprite whose secrecy state should be released in the predetermined frame. As a result of the output of the secrecy release command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated to the one that was off in the initial state. The name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a executes the drawing process.

  Here, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) as follows when trying to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. That is, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has a display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame is kept in a concealed state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table when the concealment release command is not received. Drawing data to be generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame of the aspect which cannot see the said desired sprite on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by control of peripheral control MPU4150a.

  On the other hand, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command, it confirms that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the concealment release command is updated to ON. As a trigger, the desired sprite corresponding to the secrecy release command is specified with reference to the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table. Furthermore, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a generates rendering data in the frame buffer for canceling the concealed state of the specified desired sprite and setting the display mode so that the desired sprite can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In this way, the presentation control program does not need to finely manage which sprite group can be represented in each frame when displaying the frame group of a certain scene due to the presence of the correspondence linking table. On the other hand, the sound source VDP 4160a can draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control compared to the conventional display control of whether or not to output the secrecy release command to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is possible to draw a frame that does not represent any sprite. Thereby, the display control of the frame including a large number of sprites can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, since the correspondence association table described above employs a configuration in which the sprite group including the desired sprite and the effect control program (the concealment release command group issued by the link) are linked to manage the correspondence relationship. In addition, the creation work of sprite data and the design work of the production control program can be completely separated independently, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and thereafter, many devices operate with the sensitivity. Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process in this way, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation process, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) and the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The function of causing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 while outputting the effect command (effect execution command) for executing the display operation in a mode for prompting the touch on the operation surface. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). That is, the effect control program prompts the upper platen side liquid crystal display device 244 to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact type input means). A command for executing the display operation in the mode of prompting the contact of the user is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the presentation control program (the display control program by the control thereof) is touched on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) based on the command. A screen in a mode for prompting touching is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including the initial position is acquired. In addition, this effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel process, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the presentation control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, separately from the above-described presentation command (production execution command), and then stored in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored threshold value for contact determination is written into the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program, as the predetermined timing described above, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has elapsed from the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 15) ) At the end of a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), or when the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) fluctuation time has elapsed, 15), the above threshold setting command is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel 246 is touched when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the outside. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, and based on the threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value for use. Specifically, touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of touch panel 246. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detected coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is increased at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the predetermined threshold value for contact determination is updated, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled. (Calibration) For this reason, the production control program removes the output timing that may affect the game by the player and causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command, so that the game always affects the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. The detection of a contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

  The timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, as shown in FIG. Or, since a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the reception of the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the player has stopped the game, there is a low possibility that the player touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246. Timing can be illustrated. That is, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during a special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variation display ends. Yes.

  In addition, as a timing at which the threshold setting command should be output, a command for synchronizing effect end when the effect control program is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (see FIG. 15). It may be the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the receipt.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 that can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the sound designated by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 can be set by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the hall and the door frame 5 are accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud sound (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful and advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state is entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, included in the target Bank0 (1fr) The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (in the backup first area 4150cb) Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to fr) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is provided in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db as the production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts by setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the production control program is currently executing the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009, and interrupts for 1 ms in step S1010. A timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And S1036 is performed. Finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, and a value 0 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 42 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN as shown in FIG. 42 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 1 ms timer interrupt for the 33rd time is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed by this routine. Exit. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, if the occurrence of the 33-th 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal is generated. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are arranged in time series. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program determines the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. Based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is generated by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Framed Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf drive amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally Drive to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 based on drive data indicated by the pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting signals is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripherals shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a dial operation unit) Rotation (rotation direction) history information 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c performs the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of this routine every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is executed, frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up Production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in 4150 cah and operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of backup first area 4150 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1ms). Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to happen before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 starts to transmit main commands as serial data when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started. The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated to generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. The environment is susceptible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 13, and are shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-5. Variation pattern]
Next, effects in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table in the present embodiment. The variation pattern table is a table for managing a special symbol synchronization effect pattern (variation pattern) executed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with a special symbol variation display (variation display game) on the main control substrate 4100. The special figure synchronization effect includes effects such as the peripheral control board 4140 variably displaying decorative symbols or displaying characters on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable display game. In addition, it may include effects such as operating a movable accessory during a decorative pattern variation display, causing a light emitter such as a lamp to emit light, and outputting sound from a speaker. The effects corresponding to the variation pattern of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous), and the like. In addition, a variation pattern across a plurality of variation display games may be defined.

  Story reach is an effect in which a specific effect is executed one or more times according to the expectation level (possibility of being a big hit) of a running variable display game in which a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode. In the present embodiment, the greater the number of executions of the specific effect, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot is set. The specific effect may be executed before the reach occurs or may be executed only after the reach occurs. In addition, examples of the effects of specific effects include effects such as screen display (cut-in) such as the appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, audio output), operation of a movable accessory, and lamp emission. . Further, a plurality of different presentation modes corresponding to the degree of expectation may be defined for the same type of presentation.

  The quasi-continuous variation is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then re-variable. The temporary stop and re-variation are repeated one or more times. In this embodiment, it is set so that the greater the number of stops, the higher the expected degree of jackpot. In addition, when executing the pseudo continuous variation, an effect such as causing a character to appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be performed, or an effect may be performed during the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, when reach occurs in the final variation of the pseudo continuous variation, the type of reach in the final variation may be defined together.

  The fluctuation pattern is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (hereinafter, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command are combined. The value (effect pattern) set in the “special pattern variation pattern command” mode and the special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol) The selection is made based on the value (result of the variable display game) set in the mode of “special symbol type command” together with the type command. Also, one variation pattern may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1 (2) fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, or a plurality of fluctuation patterns may correspond. When a plurality of variation patterns correspond, a random number value may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a gaming state.

  The variation pattern table includes items such as variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, number of effects inserted (number of scenarios), effect selection pattern, and re-lottery. The “variation pattern name” is a name for identifying the variation pattern. The “winning information” is a result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to a value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. Instead of “winning information”, a gaming state (for example, “normal state”, “probability changed state”, “short time state”) may be used.

  The “variation time” corresponds to the variation time (execution time of the variation display game) in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the variation time may be changed according to the number of starting memories. For example, when the start memory number is large (for example, the start memory number is 3 or more), the variation time may be shortened. It is the same as the variation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180. The same applies even when the variation time is shortened.

  “Number of effect insertions” is the number of executions of a specific effect executed during variable display in story reach, or the number of times that a special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether or not the effect is executed during temporary stop) during pseudo-continuous change It is. The “production selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a specific production candidate to be executed in the story reach or selecting an production to be executed at the time of temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set in which a highly reliable specific effect is more easily selected as a highly reliable variation pattern is selected. A specific example of the “production selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  “Re-lottery” is information that defines whether or not to execute the process of re-lottering the special symbol that has been stopped after the special symbol variation display is completed. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (the process in step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the present embodiment.

  In the received command analysis process, whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by executing the effect control program on the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a). Is determined (step S1401).

  When the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives a command from the main control board 4100, it generates a peripheral control part command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45). In this peripheral control part command reception interrupt process, the main control board 4100 Are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. A plurality of areas are provided in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order received.

  If the command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sends the command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit reception ring. Reading from the buffer (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the command read out in step S1402 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). If it is determined that it is a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 and the variation is changed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the read command is not a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a special symbol type command (special symbol 1 symbol type command or special symbol command). 2. It is determined whether or not the symbol type command, “winning”, “specific big hit”, “winning information command” indicating “non-specific big hit” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). If it is determined that the command is a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “Yes”), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the received command End the analysis process.

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a instructs the special command pre-reading effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether it is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 reservation number designation command (with prefetching, FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (special symbol 2 operation reserved balls) increases. As will be described later, when the read effect command is a command for instructing a special figure prefetching effect, a special figure prefetching effect execution flag indicating execution of the special figure prefetching effect is set. Therefore, the determination of “Yes” in the process of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) holding number designation command of “pre-read”. In the case of the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of “no prefetching”, the determination is “No”. Note that, as the special figure prefetching effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command (design type prefetching, variation pattern prefetching, variation type prefetching) instructing special symbol prefetching other than the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command. "Yes" may be determined when a command for instructing all these special figure prefetch effects is received.

  Further, if the read effect command is a special figure prefetching effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S1408), and receives command analysis processing Exit. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, whether or not the special figure prefetching effect can be executed is determined in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process. Make the necessary settings to perform the production. Note that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that when the read effect command is not the special figure prefetch effect command (the result of step S1408 is “No”), the read command is the normal symbol prefetch effect command (normal symbol type prefetch command, FIG. 16). ) Is determined (step S1409). The general-purpose pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of normal symbol operation reservation balls increases. In addition, the general map pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the general map lottery. When the common figure prefetch effect command is received, a general figure prefetch effect execution flag for instructing the start of the normal symbol type prefetch effect (normal figure prefetch effect) is set. When the general-purpose pre-reading effect execution flag is set, whether or not to execute the general-purpose pre-reading effect is determined in the general-purpose pre-reading effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process. Make the necessary settings to perform the production. Note that it may be determined on the main control board 4100 whether or not to execute the general-purpose prefetching effect. Further, in the case of a model that does not execute the usual map pre-reading effect, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a process such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command when the read effect command is not a normal prefetch effect command (the result of step S1409 is “No”) (step S1409). S1411), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  The command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Special figure 2 synchronized production end command) and a variable state designation command for designating a gaming state (probability variation state, short time state, normal game state) after the big hit game is finished when the result of the variable display game is a big hit included. When a special figure synchronization effect end command is received, a synchronization effect end flag is set. Further, a jackpot opening command for instructing execution of an effect at the start of a jackpot game, a jackpot ending command for instructing execution of an effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included according to the result of the variable display game.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, a start opening winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, and a start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has won at the start opening is received. The start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. In addition, when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls changes due to the winning of a game ball to the upper start opening 2101 or the start of the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is main controlled. Receive from substrate 4100. Similarly, when the number of the special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes due to the winning of the game ball to the lower start opening 2102 or the start of the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 storage command is issued. Receive from the control board 4100.

  Further, the special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number (special symbol 2 operation holding ball number), and the game board side liquid crystal display is performed based on the processing of step S1107. It is set so as to update the display corresponding to the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number (special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number) in the device 1900.

  Further, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the production-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42) is used. Execute the process.

  Further, in addition to the above-described command, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted. Note that power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from a capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 for a predetermined time even when power supply from the outside such as a pachinko island facility is stopped. Information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held, and a command such as a power interruption command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 or the like. In addition, when the external power supply is resumed, a power-on command is transmitted. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes processing corresponding to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

  The effect control process is one of a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), a decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and a jackpot display process (step S1700) based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Is selectively performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the reception command analysis process. In addition, a process for starting a special figure synchronization effect including a variation display of decorative symbols is performed. For example, based on the winning information of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display game, the contents of the presentation (decoration of decorative design, type of reach production, determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect, notice effect form (notice type, notice form), extended effect Presence / absence) is determined, and settings are made according to the determined contents of the production. Further, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is executed when the special figure synchronization effect is not executed. Details of the decorative symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, a special display synchronization effect (decorative symbol variation display) is started, Controls the special drawing synchronization effect executed synchronously. In addition, when a special figure synchronization effect end command is received, a process for ending the special figure synchronization effect and stopping it is executed. In other words, in the decorative symbol variation process, effect control is performed from the start to the end of the special symbol synchronization effect. Details of the decorative symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the effect control program determines and stops the decorative symbol based on the result of the variable display game in order to end the special symbol synchronization effect accompanied by the decorative symbol variation display. Finally, the effect control program sets a process selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, the process selection flag is set to [2] when the result of the variable display game is “big hit”, and the process selection flag is set to [0] when the result of the variable display game is “out”. Set.

  In order to continue the special figure synchronization effect until the special figure synchronization effect end condition is satisfied, for example, the effect control program switches the scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or changes the character. Performing effects such as making them appear. Further, an effect that does not depend on the variation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed next time or the like is executed.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the jackpot set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, a display indicating on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big prize opening 2003 is opened, a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) ) Is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decoration design variation start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step S1404). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the process waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (predetermined condition) on the main control board 4100 side. . Until the variation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the variation display game is started), the control related to the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

  More specifically, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is “No”), is the presentation control program executing a demonstration presentation in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900? It is determined whether or not (step S1511). If it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is “No”), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ( Step S1512). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), a demonstration effect display flag for starting a demonstration effect is set in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S1513).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “No”), the effect control program once ends the decoration symbol variation start process, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. The process waits until either condition is satisfied (the result of step S1501 is “Yes”) or a predetermined time has passed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”).

  If it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (the result of step S1511 is “Yes”), the effect control program continues the execution of the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (the result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure variation pattern command and special symbol design type command, an effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the effect control program updates the process selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol variation start process is executed only once at the start of the execution of the special figure synchronization effect.

[10-9. Production setting process]
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect contents at the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag and parameter are set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment.

  The effect control program first specifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, based on the current gaming state (for example, a variation mode, a time shortening state, a probable variation short time state, a normal gaming state, etc., which may be a production mode related only to the production mode) A pattern may be selected. Specifically, an item of gaming state may be provided in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 47, and a variation pattern having a different production mode may be defined for each gaming state.

  Then, the effect control program sets an effect corresponding to the variation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the identified variation pattern is story reach (step S1521). If it is a story reach (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), a story reach setting process for setting data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the specified variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation (step S1522). If it is pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “Yes”), pseudo continuous variation setting processing for setting data necessary for execution of pseudo continuous variation is executed (step S1550).

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary to execute the effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

  When the setting of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, a continuous prefetch effect setting process for executing a continuous prefetch effect that can set the content of the effect independently of the variation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous prefetch effect setting process, when it is determined that the continuous prefetch effect is executed in the special figure prefetch effect control process in step S1027 of FIG. To do. Details of the continuous prefetch effect setting processing will be described later.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the game state. The effect pattern includes a notice mode corresponding to the variation pattern. For example, in order to suggest the result of the variable display, a specific character appears or the background color is set to a color different from the normal color. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  When the effect setting process ends, information necessary for executing the special figure synchronization effect is set. Then, the ramp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data of the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, a special figure synchronization effect such as a decorative symbol variation display is started.

[10-10. Decoration pattern variation processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process in the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol variation process is executed when the decorative symbol variation start process is executed and the process selection flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation process, the special symbol synchronization effect executed in synchronization with the variable display game is controlled on the condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (decorative symbol variation display) is started.

  When the decorative symbol variation process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the condition for ending the decorative symbol variation display, that is, the special symbol synchronization effect termination condition is satisfied (step S1601). For example, the special-synchronization effect may be terminated when the special-synchronization effect end command (symbol confirmation command) is received from the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronization effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Further, both the reception of the special figure synchronization effect end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure synchronization effect may be set as the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Even if not, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the display screen may be switched so as to forcibly end the variable display and confirm and stop the decorative symbols.

  The effect control program stops (decision stops) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol type command when the end condition of the special symbol synchronization effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”) ( Step S1602). Then, a process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, the process selection flag is set to “0” when the result of the variable display game is “out of place”, and the process selection flag is set to “2” when the result is “big hit”. If there is “small hit”, it is set to another processing selection flag (for example, “3”).

  On the other hand, in the case where the end condition of the special drawing synchronization effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), that is, when the variation display of the decorative symbols is continued, the production control program starts with the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type is story reach (step S1604). When the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), story reach control processing for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In this embodiment, all the scenario effects executed in the story reach are selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process), but when each scenario is selected immediately before the scenario effect is executed, the story reach control process Selected. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation status of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and control according to the operation status is executed. That's fine.

  When the variation pattern type is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the variation pattern type is pseudo-continuous variation (step S1605). When the type of variation pattern is pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1604 is “Yes”), pseudo continuous variation control processing for controlling the progress of pseudo continuous variation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous variation control process will be described later.

  Furthermore, if the type of the variation pattern is not pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes a special-synchronized effect control process corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach ( Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. Further, an effect that does not depend on the variation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed next time may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, a prohibition process is executed to correct the effect display executed in the variation display game corresponding to the prohibition condition (step S1560), and then this process ends. . Details of the prohibition process will be described later.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. ) Is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the above, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy to Bank 2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 will be described as a high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, from the contents stored at the head address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 42 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Story reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a special symbol synchronization effect is executed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol variation display (variation display game) on the main control substrate 4100. When story reach is selected as the variation pattern, in the special figure synchronization production, the production (specific production) suggesting the expectation degree of the fluctuation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once or a plurality of times (insertion). Is done.

  Moreover, in the effect concerning the story reach, the decorative design is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before the occurrence of the reach or after the occurrence of the reach. In the present embodiment, a specific effect in story reach is executed after reach occurs. Hereinafter, an effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the story reach setting process in the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, a process related to the setting of a specific effect executed at a predetermined timing will be described, and other variation patterns may be selected for the setting of a special drawing synchronization effect such as other reach effects Since it is processed in the same manner as described above, the description is omitted.

  When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probability change state, normal state) of the variable display game and the operating state (time-short state) of the ordinary electric accessory. Furthermore, the initial value (“0”) is set to the number of selected effects indicating the number of specific effects (counter) set in this process (step S1532). Subsequently, the scenario for the specific effect is selected by the number of effect insertions (steps S1533 to S1539). In this embodiment, the specific effects that are executed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effect that is executed first is selected last.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of effect insertions, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). When the number of selected effects is less than the number of effect insertions (the result of step S1533 is “No”), since there is a specific effect that has not yet been selected for the scenario, the process for selecting the scenario (steps S1534 to S1538). Execute.

  The effect control program acquires a random value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). A specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

  Here, the procedure for selecting a specific effect will be described in more detail. For the effects executed in the story reach of this embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the variation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect selection pattern in the story reach according to the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when story reach is executed, a specific effect of any one of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is executed, and the expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 ( (Possibility) is set to be high.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 54, scenarios with high expectations are easily selected in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, scenario 5 and scenario 6 with relatively high expectations are not selected in pattern 1, and scenario 1 and scenario 2 with relatively low expectations are selected in pattern 3. It is set not to be.

  Furthermore, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 of FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selected, and the selection rate of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random number.

  Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each gaming state. For example, in a high-probability state with a high probability that a special symbol variation display is won, a scenario with a high expectation level may be easily selected to further increase the player's expectation. Furthermore, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-described gaming state, the number of executions of variation display based on a predetermined variation pattern (for example, the number of executions of SP reach), or a big prize in the big hit game It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination thereof.

  A random number for selecting a specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, a range from “0” to “1000”). Therefore, when a scenario with a high degree of expectation is selected and then a scenario with a low degree of expectation is selected (decline), there is a possibility that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, in the case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern, pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is 3. At this time, it is assumed that “scenario 2” is selected as the scenario corresponding to the specific performance that is executed first, “scenario 3” is selected as the scenario that is executed next, and “scenario 1” is selected as the scenario that is executed last. In this case, the specific effect executed after the specific effect (“scenario 3”) executed for the second time becomes “scenario 1” having a relatively low expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the expectation of the running variable display game corresponds to “scenario 1” or “scenario 3”, and the reliability of story reach as a specific performance is impaired. There is a risk that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described decline is prevented by adjusting the extraction range of the random value acquired in the process of step S1613. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing changes in the random number extraction range in the present embodiment in chronological order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects to be executed last are sequentially selected. When “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (number of inserted effects 3), first, a specific effect to be executed last (third) is selected. At this time, in the process of step S1534, random values are extracted in the range from 0 to 1000 (specified range) (FIG. 55A). If the random value extracted at this time is “550”, referring to the effect selection pattern selection table in FIG. 54, “scenario 3” is selected. Then, the effect control program stores the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area (reach mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1536). Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

  Also, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute a story reach notice effect, which will be described later, as a notice effect in synchronization with the selected specific effect, and the content (notice mode and notice type) of the story reach notice effect to be executed. The story reach notice setting process is executed (step S1570). Details of the story reach notice setting process will be described later. Note that information such as the selected scenario, preview image data, and audio data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the like.

  Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value) of random numbers extracted for selecting the specific effect to be executed second (step S1538). As described above, since “scenario 3” is selected in the last specific execution, if “scenario 4” is selected in the second specific execution, a fall occurs. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the generation range of the random number value is selected so that only the “scenario 1” to “scenario 3” are selected instead of the specified range from 0 to 1000. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value “600” is an upper limit value for selecting “scenario 3”. By setting the upper limit value to “600”, “scenario 4” is not selected. In FIG. 55B, the range of solid lines (“0” to “600”) is a range from which random numbers can be extracted, and the range of broken lines (range from “600” to “1000”) is a random number extraction failure. It is possible.

  Here, when “150” is extracted as a random value for selecting the specific effect to be executed second, “scenario 2” is selected as the scenario of the specific effect. Therefore, the production control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the extracted random number value to “200” so that “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” which does not cause a fall in the specific production executed first is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “85” is extracted as the random number value, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55C).

  Then, the value of the selected effect number becomes 3 in the process of step S1538, and the value of the selected effect number and the value of the effect insertion number match, so the result of the process of step S1533 becomes “Yes”, The selection of production is finished. Finally, the changed random number range (upper limit value) is set to a specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is terminated.

  In the procedure in the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers was set at the start of change (effect control process → decorative symbol change start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process). A range of random numbers may be set.

  For example, all the specific effect scenarios may be selected at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (when the execution of the specific effect is started). In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the above-described story reach setting process may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

  At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on a start winning command or a prefetch effect related command transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the change until the specific effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the expectation level of the variable display game to be executed later, and the variations of the effect can be varied. If the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the occurrence of reach, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

  Alternatively, the number of random values corresponding to the number of effect insertions may be extracted at the timing of selecting a specific effect and rearranged in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, when random numbers are extracted three times and “550”, “85”, and “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), and “550” (scenario) The specific effects may be executed in the order of 3).

  Further, a random number value lottery may be performed every time a specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of a specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, after selecting a specific effect scenario, the lower limit of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, an effect with higher expectation is set to be executed as the random number value is larger. Therefore, when selecting a specific effect to be executed in the execution order, the upper limit value is used. Set the lower limit again. Specifically, when scenario 2 is selected for the first time, the lower limit value is set to “100” so that no fall occurs when the next specific performance is selected, and a random value in the range of “100” to “1000” To generate. By controlling in this way, the story reach can be executed in the same manner as when a specific effect is selected at the start of variation. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and used when the next specific effect is executed. Further, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special drawing synchronization effect) ends. A more specific procedure will be described in the control in the pseudo continuous effect described later.

  Furthermore, both the lower limit value and the upper limit value may be set when a specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to perform control so that the scenarios are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” can be selected by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”. Also, “scenario 2” can always be selected by setting the lower limit value to “101” and the upper limit value to “200”. Note that the same processing can be performed when all the specific effects are selected at the start of variation. Furthermore, an item such as setting only an upper limit value (or lower limit value) or setting an upper limit value and a lower limit value may be provided in the effect selection pattern table so as to be set for each effect selection pattern.

  If the lower limit value is not “0”, random numbers from “0” to “lower limit value−upper limit value” may be generated, and the lower limit value may be added to the extracted random number value. For example, when the lower limit value is “101” and the upper limit value is “200”, a random number from “0” to “99 (= lower limit value−upper limit value)” is generated and the lower limit value “101” is added. It is good also as the random number which extracted the result.

[11-2. Story reach notice]
Next, the story reach notice effect will be described. In the gaming machine in the present embodiment, when a specific effect is executed in the special symbol synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol variable display (variable display game) on the main control board 4100, Synchronize with specific effects and execute story reach notice effects.

  In this example, the story reach notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. However, the story reach notice effect may be executed separately from the specific effect. Of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right three rows as the performance execution timing, either one of the left and right decorative symbols (in this example, the left symbol of the decorative symbol) or before both stop (for example, the decorative symbol It may be before the right symbol stops at the same symbol as the left symbol and the reach occurs, or after the left and right decorative symbols stop (for example, the right symbol of the decorative symbol stops at the same symbol as the left symbol) It may be after reach has occurred. The following explains the story reach notice effect.

[11-3. Story reach notice setting process]
First, the production control in the story reach notice effect executed in synchronization with the story reach will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach notice setting process in the present embodiment. The story reach notice setting process is executed in step S1570 of the story reach setting process (FIG. 53).

  When the story reach notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first selects a story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57A) corresponding to the variation pattern type of the special symbol (step S1571). At this time, depending on the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probable state or the normal state) or the operation state of the normal electric accessory (short-time state), The notice determination table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57A) includes “no notice”, in other words, not only the notice type (notice form) but also the story reach notice effect is executed. The story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) is configured so that lottery is also drawn, but a table for drawing whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect is provided separately, and the table and a predetermined random number are provided. When it is determined that the story reach notice effect is to be executed based on the above, the notice type may be determined using the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57A).

  Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect and the notice type (step S1572). Based on the story reach notice determination table selected in the process of step S1571 and the random value acquired in step S1572, the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect from the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57A) and The content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice mode, notice type) is determined (step S1573).

  Here, the procedure for determining the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect and the notice type will be described in more detail. In the story reach notice effect executed in the present embodiment, a story reach notice determination table is set corresponding to the result of the winning determination and the winning type (FIG. 57). FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a story reach notice determination table in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when a story reach notice effect is executed, a story reach notice effect corresponding to any notice type (notice mode) of notice 1 to notice 5 is executed, and the order of notice 1 to notice 5 is executed. Thus, the expectation (possibility) that the result of the variable display game is a big hit is set to be high.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), it is easy to select a notice type with a high expectation in the order of loss, non-probable big hit, and probable big hit. Specifically, the notice 5 with a relatively high expectation is set not to be selected in the outlier, and the notice 1 and the notice 2 with a relatively low expectation are not selected in the probable big hit. Is set. If the result of the winning judgment is a big hit without a ball, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect by selecting the notice determination table at the time of losing and the contents of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice Type, notice mode) may be determined.

  Furthermore, a range of random numbers is set for each notice type, and the notice type is selected based on the random value acquired in the process of step S1572 of FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific notice type is not selected, all the notice types may be selectable, and the selection rate of each notice type may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random number. .

  The notice determination table may be held for each gaming state. For example, in a high-probability state with a high probability that a special symbol variation display is won, a notice type with a high expectation may be easily selected, and the player's expectation may be further enhanced. Furthermore, a plurality of notice determination tables (lottery tables) may be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-described gaming state, the number of executions of variation display based on a predetermined variation pattern (for example, the number of executions of SP reach), or a big prize in the big hit game It may be the number of winning game balls in the mouth, the jackpot type may be 16R jackpot or 4R jackpot, or the jackpot type may be a jackpot with or without a ball. In addition, the number of effect insertions that is the number of executions of the specific effect executed during the variable display in the story reach may be used (the total of the specific effects executed in one variable display; the change that executes the specific effect once) Predictive decision table for determining whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect corresponding to the pattern and the type of notice to be executed, story reach corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect twice A notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and a notice type to be executed,... A story reach notice corresponding to a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed n (n = 1 to 6 in this example) The notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the effect and the notice type to be executed), or the specific effect executed at the time of the story reach (the specified effect executed at the first time) Whether or not to execute a story reach notice effect in synchronization with the notice determination table for determining the notice type to be executed, whether or not to execute a story reach notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect executed the second time, and A notice determination table for determining the notice type to be executed,... Executes the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect executed n times (n = 1 to 6 in this example) Whether and notice determination table for determining a notice type to be executed), or a combination thereof.

  In addition, in the story reach notice effect performed in synchronization with the story reach, the story reach notice effect corresponding to the low expectation type is executed after the story reach notice effect corresponding to the highly anticipated notice type is executed. This prevents the occurrence of “falling”. Specifically, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in step S1572 in the same manner as the process for preventing the fall of story reach, the fall as described above is prevented.

  That is, when “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (number of inserted effects 3), the last (third) specific effect to be executed is selected, and the story reach notice effect is synchronized with this specific effect. When the story reach notice setting process for determining whether or not to execute and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) is executed, in the process of step S1571, the story reach notice according to the winning type is executed. A decision table is selected, and in the process of step S1572, random values are extracted in the range of 1 to 1000. At this time, if the winning type is a non-probable big hit and the extracted random number value is “800”, referring to the story reach notice determination table in FIG. 57A, “notice 3” is selected (step S1573). ). Then, the effect control program stores the selected notice type in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1574).

  Subsequently, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect executed second, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode). Therefore, a range (upper limit value) of random numbers to be extracted is set (step S1575). As described above, “notice 3” is selected in the last specific performance, so if “notice 4” or more is selected in the second specific performance, a fall occurs. End up. Therefore, the random value generation range is set to a range from 1 to 840 so that only “preliminary notice 1” to “preliminary notice 3” are selected instead of the predetermined range from 1 to 1000. The reset upper limit value “840” is an upper limit value for selecting “notice 3”. By setting the upper limit value to “840”, “notice 4” or more is not selected. That is, a random number that can be extracted in order to determine whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the second executed specific effect, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) The range of “1” is “840”, and the range of random numbers from “841” to “1000” cannot be extracted.

  Here, as a random value for deciding whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the second effect to be executed, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) When “600” is extracted, “notice 2” is selected as the notice type corresponding to the story reach notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit value of the extracted random value range to “690” so that “notice 1” or “notice 2” that does not occur in the specific effect that is executed first is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “500” is extracted as the random number value, “notice 1” is set. Then, the value of the number of selected effects is 3 in the process of step S1538 of the story reach setting process, and the value of the number of selected effects coincides with the value of the number of effect insertions. Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect as well as the random value for selecting the effect (effect selection information), and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) The changed random number range (preliminary random number) for determination (upper limit value) is set to the specified value (1-1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is terminated. In other words, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for all the effects inserted in the story reach in the story reach notice effect is also drawn, and the contents of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) The process of determining is performed.

  In this way, in the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach, each scenario of the number of production insertions executed in the story reach before starting the story reach (all scenarios executed in the story reach). Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect and the contents of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) are determined, and information (notice) regarding the notice type (notice form) according to the decision result Information) is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In the above example, for each specific effect executed in the story reach, whether or not the story reach notice effect is executed and the content of the story reach notice effect (notice type and notice mode) to be executed are determined, and the determination result Information (notice information) related to the notice type (notice form) according to the information is individually stored in the notice form storage area, but for all the specific effects (number of effects inserted) executed in story reach On the other hand, information (notice information) related to the notice type (notice form) indicating whether or not the story reach notice effect is to be executed and the contents of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) are shown in advance. You may make it memorize | store in an aspect memory area. That is, it is not limited to determining whether to execute the story reach notice effect individually for each of the specific effects to be executed, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode). Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for each of the specific effects to be executed and the story reach notice to be executed according to the number of executions (the number of effect insertions) of the specific effect executed during the variable display in the reach. Decide one of a plurality of notice types (packaged) indicating the content of the performance (notice type, notice mode) and set it as a notice type (notice form) according to the decision result. Related information (notice information) may be stored in the notice mode storage area.

[11-4. Example of production]
Through the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect and a story reach notice effect executed in the story reach so that no fall occurs. Next, a specific example of the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect executed in the story reach of this embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing after a reach has occurred in the variation display of decorative symbols. The specific effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right part, an area 1912 is formed above the start-up storage display unit 1911, and a line corresponding to the scenario is displayed in the area 1912.

  In addition, when the story reach notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect, a display corresponding to the notice type is performed on the background of the dialogue (area 1912). The story reach notice effect synchronized with the specific effect is an effect that displays the background state of the lines displayed in the area 1912 in a different form from the normal. Specifically, the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 corresponding to the notice 1 is displayed in blue, and the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in green corresponding to the notice 2 and corresponding to the notice 3. In the region 1912, the background portion of the line is displayed in red, the background portion of the line in the region 1912 is displayed in a leopard pattern corresponding to the notice 4, and the background portion of the line in the region 1912 is displayed in correspondence with the notice 5 Is displayed in rainbow colors. The notice 5 is selected only when a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded) is confirmed (appearance is limited when it is out of place), and is a so-called premium notice with a very low appearance frequency. ing. In addition, when the story reach notice effect is not executed in synchronization with the specific effect (default), the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in white.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the expectation (possibility) that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the order of the notice 1 to the notice 5 is set to be high, and the variable display is performed in the order of the scenario 1 to the scenario 6. It is set so that the degree of expectation (possibility) that the game result will be a big hit is high, and the type of notice that is being executed (notice type: which of notice 1 to notice 5) is being executed It is possible to make the player comprehensively determine the expectation (possibility) that the result of the variable display game is a big hit from both the type of scenario (whether it is scenario 1 to scenario 6).

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario (serif) of specific effects executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, it shows that the expectation level of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is high. More specifically, in the scenario 1, a line indicating that the degree of expectation is low (“not good!”) Is displayed, and the lines are sequentially set so that the feeling of expectation increases. In scenario 5, a line suggesting a big hit ("Is it a hit?") Is set, and in scenario 6, a line ("big hit ~!") Is set to indicate that a big hit has been established. Note that scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit is confirmed.

  Next, the story reach screen transition will be described. 60 and 61 are diagrams illustrating an example of screen transition of story reach according to the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. Since story reach is selected as the variation pattern, reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown in the screen (B).

  Thereafter, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, a specific effect in which a line (scenario 2) is displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). Thereafter, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), the scenario 3 with higher expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode.

  Here, when the random number generation range is not adjusted, the specific effect with the lower expectation than the previously performed specific effect is shown in the screen (E-1). There is a risk of being executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since control is performed so as to prevent falling, a specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the previously executed specific effect is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, the scenario is selected in order from the last specific effect, so when scenario 1 is selected last, scenario 1 is selected for all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not continuously executed.

[12. Pseudo continuous variation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed at least once in the special-synchronization effect, and selected by lottery at a predetermined timing. An effect based on the scenario is executed. As in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) suggesting the degree of expectation of the currently running variable display game is executed as the effect based on the scenario.

  The temporary stop of the decorative symbol is a state where the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, but the variation is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that stops last is slightly moving up and down, and re-variation is started from this state.

  For the temporary stop of decorative symbols, in addition to the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol are stopped. The display of the variation of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be varied again. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may be shown including the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped at the same decorative symbol, and different results may be obtained only by the difference in the fourth symbol. By configuring in this way, a game state after winning a game (such as winning probability of a variable display game) is obtained by executing a winning game with a part of the big winning result mode similar to a small winning result mode. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and variations in performance can be increased.

  In the story reach in this embodiment, all scenarios to be executed at the start of change are determined. However, in the pseudo continuous change in this embodiment, scenarios are selected by lottery at the timing of executing a specific effect (scenario effect). . In addition, in the case of pseudo continuous variation, when reach occurs in the last re-variation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed even if pseudo continuous variation does not occur may be executed. Alternatively, it may be a reach effect that is executed only in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation. Further, in the quasi-continuous variation, it is not necessary to generate reach at the last variation. Hereinafter, an effect when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous variation setting process]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the quasi-continuous variation, as described above, the contents of the effect are drawn out immediately before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of the change, initial settings necessary for executing the pseudo continuous change are performed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous variation setting process in the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed in step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the pseudo continuous variation setting process shown in FIG. 62, a process related to the setting of a specific effect executed at a predetermined timing will be described. Since it is processed in the same manner as when it is selected, description thereof is omitted.

  When the pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the effect insertion number (temporary stop count) and the effect selection pattern from the change pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and the peripheral control RAM 4150c Store in a predetermined area.

  Further, the effect control program sets the number of effect insertions as an initial value for the number of remaining effects, which is the remaining number of executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, in order to initialize a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a specific effect scenario, a prescribed value is set (step S1553). In the present embodiment, when the scenario effect is executed, the contents of the effect are lottery and are sequentially selected from the scenario effect that is executed first. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range for the random number for scenario selection lottery. At this time, an upper limit value may be set in order to limit the selected scenario.

  As in the case of the story mode, all scenarios may be drawn in a pseudo continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of variation. The procedure for drawing the scenario effects is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control process]
Next, the pseudo continuous variation control process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous variation control process in the present embodiment. The quasi-continuous variation control process is executed from when the decorative symbol variation display is started to when it is stopped, and controls execution of temporary stop and execution of scenario effects in quasi-continuous variation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  In the pseudo continuous variation effect of the present embodiment, when the operation input reception period of the press operation unit (effect button) 405 is set in accordance with the timing of temporary stop, and the press operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input reception period, Scenario production is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted in order to execute the scenario effect. That is, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set, a process for executing the scenario effect is executed.

  If the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not it is the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous variation control process is terminated.

  When it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (the result of step S1646 is “Yes”), the effect control program presses the operation unit of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405. A pseudo-continuous notice setting process for determining whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the suggestion effect and the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) is executed (step S1670). . The details of the pseudo continuous notice setting process will be described later. In addition, information such as image data and audio data of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the like.

  When the pseudo continuous notice setting process is executed, the effect control program suggests that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (requesting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). This is performed (step S1647). Specifically, it relates to image data, audio data, and the like necessary to execute an effect that suggests that an operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (requesting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405). The effect information is read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and set. The set production information is subjected to lamp data creation processing (step S1028), display data creation processing (step S1030), and sound data creation processing (step S1030) in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the lamp data output processing (step S1030). An effect is actually executed by the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data creation process (step S1018), and the display data output process (S1012). Next, the effect control program sets a pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag (step S1648), and ends the pseudo continuous variation control process. Note that the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set (the result of step S1631 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step). S1632). The pressing operation unit operation flag is set when the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is acquired in the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is processed when the peripheral control unit is turned on (FIG. 42). ) In the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady process in FIG.

  When the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value in the range of the set upper limit value and lower limit value (step S1633). Furthermore, based on the acquired random number value, a scenario executed as a specific effect is acquired from the effect pattern table (step S1634). The format of the production pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a range of random numbers is set so that a scenario with low expectation is easily selected.

  When the scenario is selected, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute a pseudo-continuous notice effect described later as a notice effect in synchronization with the execution of the effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario, and the pseudo-continue to be executed. A pseudo-continuous notice setting process for determining the content of the notice effect (notice type and notice mode) is executed (step S1680). The details of the pseudo continuous notice setting process will be described later. Information such as image data and audio data of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the like.

  Then, when the scenario is selected, the effect control program sets a scenario execution setting process for setting effect information related to image data, sound data, and the like necessary for executing an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. Is executed (step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is executed after the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) in the peripheral control unit steady process. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  Thereafter, the effect control program sets the lower limit value of the range of random values for selecting a scenario to be executed next so that the fall of the effect contents does not occur based on the random value acquired in the process of step S1633. Setting is performed (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, a scenario having at least the same degree is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. If the acquired random value is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to “301”, a scenario having an expected degree equal to or higher than scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. Further, by setting the lower limit value to “501” instead of “301”, it can be set so that it always rises.

  On the other hand, when the press operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is “No”), the effect control program indicates that the press operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer is up. It is determined whether or not (step S1638). If the time is not up (the result of step S1638 is “No”), the pseudo-continuous effect control process is terminated, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously received. On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer has expired (the result of step S1638 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1640 are executed.

  When an operation input of the press operation unit 405 is received during the press operation unit operation receivable period, or when the operation input of the press operation unit 405 is not received during the press operation unit operation receivable period, The effect control program ends the press operation unit operation suggesting effect (step S1640). Furthermore, the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining number of effects is subtracted by 1 (step S1642).

  Finally, the effect control program determines whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0 (step S1643). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S1643 is “Yes”), since the last specific effect has been executed, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (step S1645), and pseudo continuous effect control is performed. The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is “No”), the effect control program measures the time for which the press operation unit operation can be accepted in order to set the operation input timing for the next press operation unit. A timer is set (step S1644).

  As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated in a state where the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer is not up and the pressing operation unit operation receivable flag is set, the specific effect is obtained. Controlled to be executed. The execution timing of the effect based on the scenario (specific effect) may be after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or may be immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer expires, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The part operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Pseudo-continuous notice effect]
Next, the pseudo continuous notice effect will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed at least once in the special-synchronization effect, and selected by lottery at a predetermined timing. When an effect (specific effect) based on the scenario is executed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. Hereinafter, an effect when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-4. Pseudo-continuous notice setting process]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous notice setting process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous notice setting process is executed in steps S1670 and S1680 of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (FIG. 63).

  When the quasi-continuous notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first selects a quasi-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) corresponding to the change pattern type of the special symbol (step S1671). At this time, quasi-continuous variation depending on the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or the normal state) or the operation state of the normal electric accessory (short-time state) The notice determination table may be changed. If the result of the winning determination is a big hit without a ball, whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect by selecting the notice determination table at the time of losing and the contents of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice Type, notice mode) may be determined. In addition, the lottery result of the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) includes “no notice”, in other words, not only the notice type is decided but also whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed. The pseudo-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) is configured to be selected by lottery, but a table for drawing whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect is provided separately, based on the table and a predetermined random number. If it is determined that the pseudo continuous notice effect is to be executed, the notice type may be determined using the notice determination table of pseudo continuous fluctuation (FIG. 57B).

  Next, the effect control program acquires a random value (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the notice type (step S1672). Then, based on the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table selected in step S1671 and the random value acquired in step S1672, the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) displays the pseudo-continuous notice effect. The presence / absence and the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) are determined (step S1673) and selected as a predetermined storage area (notice form storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. Information (notice information) related to the notice type or the like is stored (step S1674).

  Thereafter, the effect control program uses the random number obtained in the process of step S1672 to prevent the occurrence of a fall in the effect contents, so that the randomness for selecting the notice type for the pseudo-announcement effect to be executed next is generated. A lower limit value of the numerical value range is set (step S1675). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a notice type with a lower expectation than the notice type selected in step S1673 is not selected, that is, at least the same kind of notice type is selected. To do. For example, with reference to FIG. 57 (B), a case will be described in which the number of effect insertions (temporary stop count) is 3, and a variation pattern that is an uncertain variation big hit is selected. When the acquired random number value is “150”, the notice 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to “101”, a notice type with an expected degree equal to or higher than the notice 2 is always selected in the next lottery. In addition, by setting the lower limit value to “201” instead of “101”, it can be set so that it always rises.

  Note that, based on the determination that the number of remaining effects has become zero in step S1643 of the pseudo continuous variation control process, a range of random numbers (upper limit value and When the lower limit value of this random number is set to a specified value in order to initialize (lower limit value) (step S1645), a random number (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the notice type is initialized. In order to do so, processing for setting the lower limit value of the random number to a specified value is also performed. As a result, when the pseudo continuous variation control process is executed next, random numbers can be extracted from the entire range, and any one of the notice types can be determined.

  Thus, in the pseudo continuous announcement effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation, whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous announcement effect for the scenario executed every time the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is operated, and The contents of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) are determined, and information (notice information) related to the notice type for one scenario is assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 according to the determination result. And stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area).

[12-6. Example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Next, an example of pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed in accordance with the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol before the reach occurs in the decorative symbol variation display. Specifically, the pressing operation part suggestion effect is started from a predetermined time before the decorative symbol temporarily stops (the operation accepting operation for the pressing operation unit 405 is enabled), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is generated at the timing of temporary stop. The process ends (operation reception for the pressing operation unit 405 becomes impossible). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where an operation can be received with respect to the pressing operation unit 405 (a period during which the pressing operation unit operation can be received), after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, until the change of the identification symbol is started again A specific effect is executed during the period. In addition, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the press operation unit suggestion effect and the specific effect.

  The specific effect is the same as the story reach. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative design 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right part, and an area 1912 is formed above the start-up storage display unit 1911. An area 1912 displays a dialogue corresponding to a scenario of a specific effect to be executed. Further, the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect is the same as the story reach notice effect, and when the specific effect is executed, a display corresponding to the notice type is displayed on the background (area 1912) of the speech.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, a special figure synchronization effect accompanied by a decorative symbol variation display is started. As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially displayed. The decorative design stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the pressing operation unit operation receivable period is reached, and the pressing operation unit suggesting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. Further, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the press operation portion suggestion effect, a line prompting the operation of the press operation portion (effect button) 405 (“push button!” In the example shown in FIG. 66). Is displayed on the background (region 1912) according to the notice type. The pseudo-continuous notice effect executed in synchronization with the pressing operation suggestion effect is the same as the story reach notice effect, and the background portion of the dialogue in the region 1912 is displayed in blue corresponding to the notice 1 and corresponds to the notice 2 In the area 1912, the background portion of the line is displayed in green, the background portion of the line in the region 1912 is displayed in red corresponding to the notice 3, and the background portion of the line in the area 1912 is displayed in correspondence with the notice 4. Is displayed in a leopard pattern, and the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in a rainbow color corresponding to the notice 5. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed in synchronization with the pressing operation suggestion effect (default), the background portion of the line in the region 1912 is displayed in white.

  When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, as shown in FIG. 66C, the continuation symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is executed is stopped as a middle symbol, and thereafter, As shown in 66 (D), the specific effect is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the pressing operation part suggesting effect is started as in FIG. 66 (B) (FIG. 66 (F)). At this time, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated before the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer expires, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 66G), the specific effect is not executed. Re-variation is started (FIG. 66 (H)). Thereafter, when the final decorative design is temporarily stopped (FIG. 66 (I)), a reach effect is executed (FIG. 66 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 66 (J), the SP reach 3 that can be executed even when the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed is executed. Good. Further, the pressing operation part suggesting effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the specific effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (until the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer expires), the specific effect is executed. However, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, in this case, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect corresponding to the notice type determined in synchronization with the specific effect executed after the elapse of a predetermined time is executed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (until the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer expires), a specific effect is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Although it is executed, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is related to the notice type stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 even if it is decided to be executed. The information is deleted (destroyed) or the notification type is changed based on the information related to the notification type stored in the predetermined storage area (notification mode storage area). The pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed (for example, h portion of the area 1912 is not performed). May be displayed in the default white color).

[12-4. Pseudo continuous fluctuation timing chart]
Furthermore, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. 67 and 68 are diagrams for explaining the timing of control of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 67 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 67A shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

  First, at time t10, a game ball wins at the start ports 2101 and 2102 and a special symbol variation display on the main control board 4100 (a special symbol (identification symbol) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186). (Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, a special figure variation pattern command and a special symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command and selects a variation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation start (start of the special symbol synchronization effect), the operation input reception period (press operation unit operation reception) at the timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Possible period) is started, and the pressing operation section suggesting effect is started (time t11). Further, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the pressing operation part suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect according to the decided notice type is executed. The period during which the pressing operation unit operation can be accepted continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, a scenario effect to be executed is selected (step S1634 in FIG. 63).

  When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (timing at which the decorative symbol re-variation starts, time t14). A specific effect based on the scenario is executed. Further, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect corresponding to the determined notice type is executed.

  Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and scenario 4 at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is finished, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the reach effect is finished, the decoration symbol change ends in synchronization with the end of the special symbol change display on the main control board 4100, and the confirmed symbol is displayed (time t18).

  Next, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period will be described. FIG. 67B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 in the first pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect and the pseudo-announcement effect based on scenario 1 are not executed. In addition, since the lower limit of the random number is not reset for the specific effect executed at the timing of time t15, all candidate scenarios can be selected.

  Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a timing chart of a modified example of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. FIG. 68C shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68C, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed at the start of re-variation of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed before the most fluctuation starts. By being configured in this way, it is possible to execute the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect at the timing operated by the player, and it is possible to execute an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68 (D), when the press operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific operation and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are skipped without being executed, and the press operation unit is received during the subsequent press operation unit operation receivable period. When 405 is operated, a plurality of specific effects and pseudo-continuous notice effects including the skipped specific effects and pseudo-continuous notice effects are executed.

  Referring to FIG. 68D, the case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation reception period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation reception period. Show. In this case, the specific effect and pseudo-continuous notice effect executed at the second temporary stop are skipped, but not only the specific effect and pseudo-continuous notice effect executed at the third temporary stop at the third temporary stop. The skipped specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (which should have been executed at the time of the second temporary stop) are also executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific effect and pseudo-continuous notice effect based on scenario 1 are executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect and pseudo-continuous notice effect executed at the second temporary stop are skipped. . When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the third pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect including the skipped part are selected. After the temporary stop of the decorative symbols, the selected specific effects (scenario 3 and scenario 4) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are sequentially executed.

  As described above, in the pseudo-continuous production according to the present embodiment, the random execution range is set in advance by setting the range (lower limit) of random numbers for lottery of the subsequent specific production based on the random numbers obtained by lottering the preceding specific production. It is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect with an expected level lower than the expected level of a specific effect is executed. Also, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous effect, a random number range (lower limit) for lottering the subsequent pseudo-continuous notice effect is set based on the random number obtained by drawing the preceding pseudo-continuous notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect lower than the expected degree of the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed in advance is executed.

  In addition, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's intention.

[12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Variation example of scenario selection timing]
In the example of pseudo continuous variation described above, the pressing operation unit operable period is set in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol temporarily stops, and the scenario for executing the specific effect at the timing when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is selected. In addition, whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect and the contents of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) are determined. On the other hand, as in the above-described story reach, all scenarios for executing a specific effect are selected at the start of fluctuation, and whether or not a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect is executed. The case of determining the contents of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (notice type and notice mode) will be described.

  When selecting all scenarios at the start of fluctuation, determining whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect, and determining the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) In the pseudo continuous variation setting process (step S1550, FIG. 62) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), the same processes as steps S1533 to S1538 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) are executed. With this configuration, the decorative symbol variation display is started in a state where all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effect and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect are set. .

  As described above, when all scenarios and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect that is executed in synchronization with the specific effect are determined at the start of variation, the pressing operation unit 405 is in the pressing operation unit operable period. When the operation is not performed, the execution of the specific effect that is not executed and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be restricted (skip). In this case, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the subsequent pressing operation unit operable period, the re-lottery is executed to select the scenario again, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. Whether or not to perform and the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) may be determined. In addition, the specified specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect that are regulated without performing the re-lottery may be skipped, and the predetermined specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect that are set in advance may be executed. A specific effect and a pseudo-continuous notice effect based on a scenario that has been skipped after canceling the restriction may be executed.

  When the last specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed, even if the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect that are supposed to be executed in the middle are restricted, the player is finally given In order to notify the degree of expectation, a specific effect based on a scenario determined at the start of variation and a pseudo-continuous notification effect based on a notification type determined at the start of variation may be executed.

  Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed after a predetermined period.

[12-5-2. Modification of specific performance execution conditions]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405. However, the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

  The other conditions include, for example, symbols that are confirmed and stopped, and combinations that do not appear at the time of losing. An effect may be executed (at this time, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 may not be requested). Further, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped by a combination including a pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol that appears only when the pseudo-continuous is temporarily stopped, instead of a chance. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be a pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol, but any symbol in the symbol sequence to be displayed may stop at the pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol. In addition, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed in the case of stopping at a normal loss pattern (so-called “losing eye”).

  Further, the timing of executing the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable accessory) operates, a predetermined light emitter (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. Also good.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable to the left and right. For example, when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed. . Moreover, you may make it change the aspect of production according to the rotation direction of a dial.

  As other operation means, for example, a lever-type operation unit such as a control stick is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301, and a specific effect and a pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing. It may be.

  Furthermore, a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and a player's operation input is enabled from this touch panel. You may make it perform. In addition, in order to enable various inputs on the touch panel, not only the selection of the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, but also the effect mode of the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

  Not only the contact type operation means as described above, but also non-contact type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and a specific effect and a pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed by the player performing an operation such as holding a hand in front of the game board.

[13. Prohibition processing]
Next, the prohibition process will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned notice effect (story reach notice effect) in the special figure synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol change display (change display game) on the main control board 4100. , Pseudo-continuous notice effect), if a notice effect corresponding to a specific notice type (in this example, “Leopard pattern” in notice 4) is executed more than once, a big hit (a big hit without a ball is excluded). Control). Further, as described above, when the special notice type corresponding to the special notice type (in this example, “rainbow color” of the notice 5) is executed as the notice effect in the special figure synchronization effect, it is controlled so as to become a big hit. ing.

  It should be noted that, when the notice 4 is executed as a specific notice type in the special figure synchronization production two or more predetermined times (not limited to two times), it is always a big hit (excluding the big hit without a ball) May be controlled so that when a specific notice type is executed a predetermined number of times within the same (one time) special drawing synchronization effect, the specific notice type is not executed any more. .

  Next, control of prohibition processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the prohibition process in the present embodiment. The prohibition process is executed in the process of step S1560 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  When the prohibition process is executed, the effect control program first determines whether or not the result of the winning determination is a big hit, that is, whether or not the special lottery result is out of place or a small hit (step S1561). In addition, when the result of the win determination is a big hit without a ball, whether or not to execute the notice effect by selecting the notice determination table at the time of losing, and the contents of the notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) Is determined to be a big hit without a ball even if it is determined as a big hit in step S1561, it is determined that it is not a big hit (YES is determined in step S1561). You may make it progress to a process.

  Next, the effect control program determines a notice type stored in a predetermined storage area (notice form storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140, and according to the stored notice type. It is determined whether or not the effect display executed in the variable display game corresponds to the prohibition condition by executing the previous notice effect (step S1562).

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the special figure synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuation display game) on the main control board 4100, it is based on “notice 4”. When the notice effect is executed twice or more, it is controlled so as to be a big hit, so it is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. If the notice type is “Notice 4”, the notice effect based on the “Notice 4” is executed, and the same (one time) special drawing synchronization effect is obtained even though the result of the winning judgment is not a big hit. If it is determined that the prohibition condition that the notice effect based on “Notice 4” is executed twice is satisfied (YES in step S1562), Delete information relating to notice type or the like stored in a predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM4150c of your board 4140 (notice mode memory area) (notice information) (discard) (step S1563).

  By deleting (discarding) information (preliminary information) related to the notice type stored in the predetermined storage area (precautionary form storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 in step S1563, the advance notice is given. Since the production is not executed, it is possible to correct the state not corresponding to the prohibition condition. Thus, it is possible to avoid the confusion of the player by executing the notice effect based on “Notice 4” two or more times within the same (one time) special figure synchronization effect even though the result of the winning determination is not a big hit. .

  In addition, as described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the notice effect corresponding to the notice type with low expectation is executed after the notice effect according to the notice type having high expectation is executed. If the information related to the notice type, etc. stored in the notice mode storage area (preliminary information) falls under the prohibition conditions, Even the execution of the notice effect according to the notice type equivalent to the notice type of the notice effect that is executed when the effect is inserted or is scheduled to be executed when the effect is inserted earlier is restricted. In other words, if the information (preliminary information) related to the notice type stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, even the execution of the notice effect that maintains the jackpot expectation degree is limited. It has become. In addition, the judgment value allocation in the table for the notice reach determination of the story reach and the notice decision table for the pseudo-continuous change is set so that the big hit expectation degree in the notice effect previously executed is easily maintained. Specifically, the story reach can be assigned so that the number of judgment values assigned in the order of notice 1 to notice 4 is reduced, that is, more judgment values are assigned to the notice type with a low expectation of jackpot. You may make it comprise the table at the time of a mistake among the notice determination table and the notice determination table of pseudo | simulation continuous change.

  In addition, as described above, in the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach, the story reach notice is provided for each of the scenarios (specific production) executed in the story reach in advance (before the story reach is started). The presence / absence of the effect and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) are determined, and the determination result (information (notice information) regarding the notice type, etc.) is assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. The information is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area). The notice mode storage area stores notice information for a plurality of scenarios (separately for each scenario or in a form in which all scenarios are collected). In this case, if it is determined that the prohibition condition is met (YES in step S1562), the effect control program not only provides the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area, but also the notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition. Delete all notice information including. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the story reach notice effect from being performed in synchronization with the story reach, and it is possible to correct the state not corresponding to the prohibition condition. In other words, in the story reach notice effect performed in synchronization with the story reach, not only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area but also all the notice information including the notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition are collected. To correct the condition that does not meet the prohibited conditions.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation, each time the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is operated, a scenario (specific effect) executed in response to the operation is performed. Whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) are determined, and the determination result (information related to the notice type and the like (notice information)) is used as the peripheral control board 4140. Is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the notice mode storage area, notice information for one scenario is stored. In this case, if it is determined that the prohibition condition is met (YES in step S1562), the effect control program deletes only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area. As a result, the pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition can be executed while the pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition is not executed. Can correct the condition. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation, only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted to correct the condition not corresponding to the prohibition condition, and the prohibition condition The pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the notice information that does not fall under is executed.

  In this way, if the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with story reach falls under the prohibition condition, it will fall under the prohibition condition by deleting all the notice information including the notice information that does not fall under the prohibition condition. If the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with pseudo-continuous fluctuation corresponds to the prohibition condition, some of the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect corresponding to the prohibition condition is corrected. By deleting only the advance notice information, it is corrected so that it does not correspond to the prohibited conditions. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed later is deleted from the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition. Not limited to this, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed first may be deleted. In this case, in the same way as story reach, the presence or absence of a pseudo-continuous notice effect and the contents of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed for each of all scenarios (specific effects) executed with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation before the start of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. (Notice type, notice mode) is determined, and this decision result (information related to the notice type (notice information)) is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice form storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. When the notice information stored in the notice form storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice form is stored until the information does not correspond to the prohibition condition in order from the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed first. The notice information stored in the area may be deleted. If it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation (YES in step S1562), one of the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect corresponding to the prohibition condition is set. After deleting only the advance notice information of a part, the advance notice information determined in advance according to the number of effect insertions may be set instead of the deleted advance notice information (replaced with the predetermined advance notice information). .

  In addition, when the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted to correct the condition not corresponding to the prohibition condition. Thus, the notice effect (story reach notice effect, pseudo-continuous notice effect) corresponding to the prohibition condition can be prevented from being executed. In the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57A) and the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 57B), the most judgment values are assigned to “no notice”. That is, when the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the lottery result with the highest appearance frequency (selection rate) is selected from the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area ( It can be paraphrased to be replaced with (preliminary information). As described above, when the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information stored in the notice form storage area is used as the lottery result (notice information) having the highest appearance frequency. By replacing, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that the replacement has been performed, and it is possible to execute the variation effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is met in the story reach notice effect performed in synchronization with the story reach (YES in step S1562), the prohibition condition of the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is met. After deleting all the notice information including not only the notice information to be performed but also the notice information that does not correspond to the prohibited conditions, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for each specific effect and the contents of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice The type and the notice mode are determined and the notice information packaged corresponding to the number of effects inserted is set in the notice mode storage area (the package in which the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is determined in advance) It is also possible to replace the information with the notice information. Specifically, if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the story reach with the number of effects inserted of 3 (YES in step S1562), the third time without executing the story reach notice effect at the time of the first and second effects insertion. The notice information packaged may be replaced so as to indicate that the notice 3 is executed when the production is inserted. Also, in this case, different notice information may be set according to the winning type. For example, if the special lottery result is out of order (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the third effect is given. Preliminary information packaged to execute notice 1 at the time of insertion is set, and if the special lottery result is a non-probable big hit (may be limited to a big hit with a ball), a notice is given at the time of the third production insertion The notice information packaged to execute 2 is set, and if the special lottery result is a probable big hit (may be limited to a big hit with a ball), the notice 3 is executed when the third effect is inserted. The notice information packaged as described above may be set. In addition, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, the notice information with the lowest expectation (possibility) suggested among the plurality of notice information packaged (for example, the special lottery result is off (when the third effect is inserted) (Notice type that executes notice 1 only) The expectation (possibility) and the appearance frequency have an inversely proportional relationship, and an effect with a low expectation has a high appearance frequency and a high expectation. Since the notice type with the highest appearance frequency is executed by substituting the notice information with the lowest expectation level that is suggested when it is determined that the condition is prohibited, the notice type with the highest appearance frequency is executed. It is difficult for the player to grasp what has been done, and when it is determined that the prohibition condition is met, a notice is newly set (replaced from the notice information stored in the notice form storage area). The notice type set in the report is packaged so that it does not correspond to the prohibition condition, so it is not necessary to judge whether it corresponds to the prohibition condition when replacing it based on the determination that it corresponds to the prohibition condition The processing becomes simpler than the case where the notice type to be replaced for each specific performance is determined while considering whether or not the prohibition condition is met, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the story reach notice effect performed in synchronization with the story reach (YES in step S1562), after all the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted, The notice information set according to the number of effects inserted may be replaced with the notice information corresponding to the notice type having the highest appearance frequency. For example, a table for drawing whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect is separately provided, and the story reach notice effect is performed in the story reach notice setting process executed in step S1560 of the story reach setting process (FIG. 53). When a lottery is selected for execution, the type of notice is determined using a plurality of notice determination tables provided according to the number of specific effects executed in story reach. If it is determined (YES in step S1562), when the story reach notice effect is executed, the appearance frequency is set to be the highest in the notice determination table corresponding to the number of lottery times (the most judgment value is the most). It may be replaced with a notice type (allocated). This makes it difficult for the player to know that the replacement has been performed by replacing it with the most frequently occurring notice type when the type of the story reach notice effect scheduled to be executed falls under the prohibited conditions, Fluctuation production can be executed without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, as described above, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for all the specific effects to be executed according to the number of executions (the number of effect insertions) of the specific effects executed during the variable display in the story reach, and In the case where the content is determined to be one of a plurality of notice types (notice forms) (packaged) indicating the contents of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode), the above prohibition When a condition is met, the expectation level for jackpot is the lowest among a plurality of notice types (notice modes) provided according to the number of executions of specific effects (number of effects inserted) executed during variable display in story reach. You may make it replace with a notice classification.

  In addition, although it is usually replaced with a predetermined notice type when the above prohibition condition is met, even if the prohibition condition is met, it is determined in advance if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The notice type may be replaced with a notice type different from the notice type, for example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is met in the story reach notice effect, and the special lottery result is out of order. At least a part of the notice information corresponding to the notice type corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the area is determined in advance as a notice type (story reach notice effect may not be executed, May be replaced with a notice type with a low expectation), or the prohibited conditions stored in the notice mode storage area All notice information including notice information corresponding to the notice type not to be given is notice information in which a predetermined notice type is packaged (the story reach notice effect may not be executed, or the notice information packaged) If the special lottery result is a big hit without a small hit or a ball, it is stored in the notice mode storage area. At least a part of the notice information corresponding to the notice type corresponding to the prohibited condition is replaced with a notice type with a higher expectation that is a big hit than the predetermined notice type, or stored in the notice mode storage area. Notice that all notice information including notice information corresponding to notice type that does not correspond to the prohibited conditions is packaged in advance notice type It may be expectations as a big hit in accordance with the notice type packaged than broadcasting to or replaced with high advance notice information.

  Then, the effect control program executes a notice execution setting process for setting effect information related to image data and sound data necessary for executing the story reach notice effect (step S1574). The effect information set in the notice execution setting process is executed after the lamp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady process. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  As described above, the gaming machine of this example is a story reach notice effect executed within one special figure synchronization effect, and when the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area falls under the prohibition condition, Or, a part of the notice information is deleted, or all or part of the notice information is replaced with notice information corresponding to another notice type, and the condition is not corrected. In addition, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the start memory display unit 1911 performs a hold display of the start memory separately from the special figure synchronization effect. A prefetch effect (also referred to as a hold notice) that suggests the result of the variable display is executed before the variable display is started. However, the aspect of the pre-reading effect is not subject to the above prohibition conditions. That is, in the special figure tuning performance executed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, when the prohibition condition is met, the condition is not corrected, but the start memory display unit 1911 is subject to the prohibition condition. Is excluded. Therefore, in the special figure synchronization effect executed in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect (notice effect) that corresponds to the prohibition condition when executed is the notice effect mode (notice type) and the start memory. This may be performed according to a mode of prefetching effect executed on the display unit 1911. Thereby, an effect (notice effect) that is not normally performed is executed, and the player can be expected.

[13. Special figure look-ahead production]
Next, a pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the variable display will be described before the special symbol variable display is started. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment is stored in the starting memory at a predetermined timing until the normal pre-reading effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball is won at the start opening and the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect is digested. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous look-ahead effect that suggests the expected degree of variation display based on it.

  The normal prefetching effect displays, for example, a hold display of the start memory to be prefetched in a mode different from normal. In addition, the continuous pre-reading effect is configured such that the mode of the hold display of the start memory to be pre-read changes whenever the start memory that is variably displayed in advance is consumed. In addition to changing the mode of the hold display of the start memory, a specific effect in story reach or pseudo-continuous change may be executed at a timing when the mode of the hold display is changed.

[13-1. Special figure prefetch effect control process]
First, the special view prefetch effect control process (step S1027) of the peripheral control part steady process in the peripheral control part power-on process (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special figure prefetch effect control processing in the present embodiment. In the special figure prefetch effect control process, a process for executing the normal prefetch effect and a process for determining whether to execute the continuous prefetch effect are executed. The special figure prefetch effect control process may be executed when a prefetch effect command is received in the reception command analysis process.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not a special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the pre-reading effect is not executed, and thus the special figure pre-reading effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program is usually based on the content of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the start-up memory to be pre-read. A mode of pre-reading effect is selected (step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal prefetch effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable symbol special display corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the normal prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball wins at the start opening, except for the case where the number of held start memories is 0, the display mode of the hold display is maintained regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed. Change at a predetermined rate.

  When the pre-reading effect is not executed, the hold display is “white”, but when the pre-reading effect is normally executed, the display color of the hold display is predetermined according to the degree of expectation from “white” to the big hit. Change to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” with the probability of (FIG. 71). Further, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the hold display color is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a loss.

  When the reserved display color is selected, the effect control program executes a normal prefetch effect setting process for setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the hold display, and settings are made to output sound effects, turn on the lamp, and move the feature at the change timing. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of normal prefetch effects from being executed for one start-up memory.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous prefetch effect is executed only when the normal prefetch effect is executed. That is, the player comes to have a sense of expectation by the normal look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball is won at the start opening, and has a greater sense of expectation when the mode of the hold display further changes as the game progresses. Note that the continuous prefetching effect may be executed without executing the normal prefetching effect. For example, when the number of reserved start-up memories is large, the continuous prefetching effect is executed without executing the normal prefetching effect. You may do it. In particular, it is effective when the upper start opening and the lower start opening can always be awarded, and the start opening is configured to be able to win alternately and can hold up to 8 start memories.

  The effect control program determines whether or not to execute the normal prefetch effect (step S2005). When the normal prefetching effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is “No”), that is, when the color of the hold display remains “white”, the special prefetching is not performed without executing the continuous prefetching effect. The effect control process ends.

  When the normal prefetch effect is executed (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program uses the continuous prefetch effect lottery table (based on various information included in the prefetch effect command received from the main control board 4100). The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 71) (step S2006), and whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect is drawn (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern and winning information. The starting memory number (the number of special symbol actuated balls) is included in the special symbol memory command transmitted at the same timing as the prefetch effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous prefetch effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special figure prefetch effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. The continuous prefetching effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start memories is 3 or more because the hold display mode changes over a plurality of variations. In addition, when the result of the variable display based on the start-up memory is a big hit (or a possibility of a big hit), it is set so that the continuous pre-reading effect is easily executed and the number of continuous pre-reads is likely to increase. .

  In addition, the lottery (step S2007) whether or not to execute the continuous prefetch effect is drawn based on the continuous prefetch effect execution probability. In addition, when reach does not occur in the start memory to be prefetched, it is set so that the continuous prefetch effect is not executed. The unit of the continuous prefetch effect execution probability in FIG. 72 is%.

  When executing the continuous prefetch effect (the result of step S2007 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous prefetch effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of executions of continuous prefetching effects is set as the number of remaining effects (number of remaining prefetchings) (step S2009).

  Furthermore, the effect control program sets a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting the continuous prefetch effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, a continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure prefetch effect control process is terminated.

[13-2. Continuous prefetch effect setting process]
Next, the continuous prefetch effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. The continuous prefetch effect setting process is a process for controlling the prefetch effect for the start-up memory that is the target of the prefetch effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the start display hold display of the prefetch effect target is changed at the timing when the start memory for executing the variable display game is executed prior to the start memory of the prefetch effect target. Execute the process.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous prefetch effect setting process according to the present embodiment. The continuous prefetch effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 70) when executing the continuous prefetch effect. If the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is “No”), the continuous prefetch effect processing is terminated because the continuous prefetch effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random value for selecting the prefetch effect (specific effect) to be executed ( Step S2102). Further, based on the acquired random value, the specific effect mode is acquired from the continuous prefetch effect mode selection table (FIG. 74) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, a setting for executing a continuous prefetch effect (specific effect) is performed.

  The continuous prefetch effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment changes the shape of the hold display according to the degree of expectation. In addition, since the continuous prefetch effect is executed in a state where the normal prefetch effect is executed, the shape is controlled so that the shape changes in a state where the color of the hold display is changed. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous prefetch effect mode selection table for selecting a hold display mode in the continuous prefetch effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in this embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a random number range is set for each specific effect. For example, when the production selection pattern is “pattern 2”, when the random value is 0 to 200, the specific production 1 is used, when the random value is 201 to 400, the specific production 2 is used,. The specific effect 6 is selected.

  Moreover, in Pattern 1, the specific effects 5 and the specific effects 6 with high expectation are not selected, and in Pattern 1, all the specific effects can be executed. A range of random numbers is set so that the production is difficult to select. On the other hand, in the pattern 4, the specific effect 1 with a low expectation is not selected, and the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 with a high expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 72, pattern 1 is selected with a variation pattern with low expectation, while pattern 4 is selected when the result of the variation display game is a big hit.

  If the same shape as the previously executed continuous prefetch effect is selected, it may be assumed that the continuous prefetch effect has not been executed, and the game may be continued as it is, or the hold display blinks temporarily. For example, the player may be notified that the continuous prefetching effect has been executed.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the number of remaining effects (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all continuous prefetch effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). When the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S2106 is “Yes”), since all the continuous prefetch effects have been executed, the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous prefetch effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not zero (the result of step S2106 is “No”), that is, when all the continuous prefetch effects are not executed, the effect control program determines the random number value obtained in the process of step S2102. Is set to the lower limit of the random number (step S2109). For example, when the random number value extracted by the production selection pattern “pattern 3” is “350”, the specific production 3 is selected, so that the specific production 1 or the specific production 2 is not selected, that is, the fall. Is set to a lower limit value “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected as the lower limit value of the random number. As a result, when the next continuous prefetch effect is executed, a random number value in the range of “201” to “1000” is extracted in the process of step S2102 and more than the effect previously executed in the continuous prefetch effect. It is possible to prevent the performance with low expectation from being executed.

  In the continuous prefetching effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the hold display changes step by step. For example, when the production selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the number of continuous prefetching executions is “3”, the lower limit is set to “0” and the upper limit is set to “1” so that the first specific production executed is 1 to 4. 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect to be executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number for selecting the specific effect to be executed the second time is set to “201”, and the upper limit value is set to “800”. That is, the specific effect is set to be selected from 3 to 5. In this way, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation always increases (so as to rise), and even when the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is used in the next (last) specific effect. Can be selected, and the specific effect can be executed so as to prevent the fall and reliably increase the degree of expectation. Note that setting the player to rise reliably makes it possible to greatly increase the player's expectation. Therefore, the player may be controlled to rise reliably only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Example of production]
With the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect so that no downfall occurs in the continuous prefetch effect. Next, a specific example of the continuous prefetch effect will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition of the continuous prefetch effect according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 75A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed in a state where the pre-reading effect is not executed. FIG. 75 (B) shows a state in which a normal pre-reading effect is executed as a result of winning a game ball in the upper start opening 2101 in the state of FIG. 75 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the decorative design is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the held start-up memory is digested, and the next fluctuation display is started. At this time, the first continuous prefetch effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 75 (D) to (G), the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed each time the held start memory is digested and the variable display is started. Change.

  Then, when the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started (FIG. 75 (H)), reach occurs (FIG. 75 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 75 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by making it possible to execute a pre-reading effect based on the progress of the game (changing the effect mode), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation in the process of continuing the game. Is possible. In particular, with respect to a variable display game that is executed after a pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect) is executed at the timing when a game ball is won at the start opening and before the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect is consumed. There is a possibility that the gaming interest will be reduced, but it is possible to continuously increase the player's expectation by changing the mode of the hold display every time the variable display game is executed. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Modified example of special figure prefetching effect]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special figure prefetch effect control]
It is not necessary to distinguish between the normal prefetch effect and the continuous prefetch effect. In the embodiment described above, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the hold display mode (color) changes at the timing when the game ball is won at the start opening, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (continuous look-ahead effect). The mode (shape) of the hold display changes during digestion. In this case, only whether or not the continuous prefetch effect is executed is determined at the timing when the game ball is won at the start port, and the content of the specific effect (change in the hold display) is drawn at the time of the on hold digestion.

  On the other hand, the contents (scenarios) of all the specific effects may be drawn at the time of starting winning a prize like story reach. For example, all the specific effects are drawn by lottery in the special figure prefetch effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 70). In the process (step S1408) of setting the special figure prefetch effect execution flag in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be drawn by lottery.

  In addition, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the variable display is being executed at the time of starting winning, the number of continuous prefetch effects is set to 1, and when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, the consecutive prefetch effects lottery table ( 72), it is only necessary to select a mode of continuous prefetch effects (all patterns may be covered in the continuous prefetch effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first prefetch effect (same as the normal prefetch effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. .

  In addition, when the number of pre-reading effects is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of starting winning, and the mode of the hold display does not change after that, it may be a very low expectation effect. In other words, the greater the number of changes in the holding mode, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. However, in the case of only one time, the degree of expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special figure 2 priority digestion]
In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the upper start opening 2101, a first special figure change display game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the upper special display 1185, and a game ball wins at the lower start opening 2102. In this case, the second special symbol variation display game in which the special symbol is variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won at the lower start port 2102, the variable display is started in preference to the case where the game ball is won at the upper start port 2101. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect is executed based on the start memory in which the game ball is won in the upper start port 2101, if the game ball wins the lower start port 2102, the start memory for the pre-read effect is delayed. Become.

  As described above, when the change display of the prefetch target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. Moreover, the specific effect based on the lottery scenario may be executed, and the specific effect to be executed last may be continuously executed for the interrupted amount.

  In addition, the scenario may be reselected for the amount of interruption. At this time, a random number range may be set corresponding to the scenario corresponding to the executed specific effect so that the content of the effect does not fall, and the scenario may be newly drawn, or the executed scenario is ignored. Alternatively, a random number range may be initialized to newly draw a scenario.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the lower start port 2102, the specific effect may be executed only for the variable display corresponding to the start memory won at the upper start port 2101 without executing the specific effect.

  Further, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are configured to be executable simultaneously, for example, a specific effect is provided in accordance with the execution of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Just do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the normal symbol is won, the starting opening solenoid 2105 is driven and the movable piece 2106 is opened and closed, so that a game ball can be won in the lower starting opening 2102. However, when the game ball wins alternately at the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are executed alternately, an interruption is generated. Does not occur. In this case, the control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variable display game is executed. However, since the variable display for a maximum of eight times can be suspended, these variable display games are not distinguished from each other. It becomes possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period of time, and it is possible to execute effects rich in variations.

[13-4-3. Modified example of special figure pre-reading effect]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed, but the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a special structure or natural object may be arranged behind the decorative pattern or character. For example, a cloud may be displayed, the color of the cloud may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Variation of random number lottery]
In the example of production described above, it is configured to prevent the fall by changing the range (upper limit value, lower limit value) for generating random numbers. Good. A case will be described in which pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected.

  For example, without changing the random number generation range (that is, keeping the range from “0” to “1000”), the specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by a process such as calculation. May be. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described.

  In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is any one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. To explain such an example, in order to prevent a fall, a setting is made so that random numbers are generated in a range from “0” to “600”. Here, random numbers are generated in the range from “0” to “1000” and multiplied by “600/1000” (rounded down to the decimal point) to generate random numbers in the range from “0” to “600”. be able to.

  In addition, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random number generated in the range from “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as the random value. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” overlap, the random number variation is biased. For example, when the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range is different. (In this case, 600−400 = 200) is added to the random number value (that is, the overlapping range is changed from “200” to “600”) so that the possibility of executing a scenario with high expectation is increased. Thus, the player's expectation may be increased.

  As another example, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “1000”, a random number generated in the range from “0” to “100” is generated 10 times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number ranging from “0” to “1000”. By configuring in this way, by setting and adding the number of random numbers generated according to the range of random numbers to be generated, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the range of random numbers actually generated constant it can. Further, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number instead of being generated a predetermined number of times. For example, a random number in the range from “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying the random number generated in the range from “0” to “100” by 10. Although detailed distribution cannot be performed, the same result can be obtained if the random number is a uniform random number. Further, the random number extraction method may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the random number extracted may be adjusted as necessary.

  Further, after extracting a random number for selecting a specific effect to be executed first, a random number for selecting a subsequent specific effect may be added to a random number for selecting a preceding specific effect. . At this time, the random number generation range may be adjusted so that the added random number value does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be rounded down.

[15. Tolerance of fall (break of law)]
[15-1. Example of production]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effects continuously executed are configured to prevent the decline in the expectation level of the contents of the effects. However, even if the fall does not occur, the result of the variable display is not necessarily a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with a high expectation level is executed first, the player may be predicted for the flow of subsequent effects, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game cannot be enhanced.

  In view of this, a description will be given of a modified example in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a fall is allowed and a change is made in the effect pattern that is normally executed. The condition for allowing the fall may be determined, for example, according to the gaming state such as the probability state of the winning probability of the variable display and the operating state (short time state) of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, the random number generation range is not adjusted when there is a high probability that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (high probability state, probability variation state), or when the player is in a favorable state such as a short time state. The fall may be allowed. On the contrary, in a state that is not advantageous to the player other than the probability variation state or the short time state, the fall may occur without adjusting the random number generation range.

  Moreover, the fall may be allowed only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. In other words, the player can recognize that the big hit is decided on the contrary when the effect that the expectation level is lowered is executed. As described above, when an effect that is not executed in a normal flow is executed, the expectation level is increased, so that the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced. It is also possible to allow the fall (with a low probability) during normal times while controlling the fall to be difficult to occur, and to increase the probability that the fall will occur when the result of the variable display game is a big hit.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to allow the fall depending on the variation pattern, not the result of the variation display game. For example, when a reach with high reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after pseudo-continuous production, etc.) occurs, the fall may be more likely to occur than a reach with low reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with low reliability occurs, the fall may occur more easily than a reach with high reliability. In this way, instead of the result of the variable display game, whether or not the fall is allowed may be associated with the contents of the effect.

  Further, the fall may be allowed by the reliability of the variation pattern when the result of the variation display game is a big hit. For example, the high reliability variation pattern (reach) is set to have a higher possibility of a fall than when the low reliability variation pattern (reach) is selected. Conversely, the low reliability variation pattern (reach) may be more likely to cause a fall than when the high reliability variation pattern (reach) is selected.

  In addition, when the obscure mode is executed in which the probability state of the variable display game is not clearly notified whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the probabilistic state after the big hit game is finished, the random number is limited only when the actual probability state is the normal state. The generation range may be adjusted. In this case, if the probability state is a probabilistic state, the winning probability of the variable display game is high even if a fall occurs, and as a result, the player is less discouraged, and if the normal state, the fall occurs. Therefore, the player will be less discouraged by directing the story reach. Conversely, only in the case of the probability variation state, the random number generation range may be adjusted to prevent the fall. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the occurrence of a fall.

  Furthermore, in the unclear mode, the probability state may be explicitly notified when a fall occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Also, it is possible to set two types of modes: a mode for adjusting the random number generation range to the indistinct mode and a mode for not adjusting the random number generation range. Further, these modes may be selected by the player. With this configuration, the player can select whether the probability state can be recognized at an early stage or an effect with less disappointment can be executed.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, the control that allows falling is described. In the present embodiment, the random number generation range has been adjusted in order to prevent falling, but a specific procedure will be described.

  For example, when the fall is allowed, the upper limit value or lower limit value of the random number is reset to a specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that it will not fall, but when a fall is generated as a big hit notification effect, a range of random numbers may be set so as to always cause a fall. Further, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set so as to return to a predetermined level instead of the specified value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the probability of occurrence and the stage of the fall.

  Further, as described above, random numbers with a biased distribution may be generated by overlappingly generating a predetermined range of random numbers. In this case, the occurrence probability of the fall (rising) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range as a range where the fall occurs or conversely, as a range where the rise occurs. Further, the range of random numbers generated by setting the initial value, minimum value, and maximum value of a random number counter may be adjusted.

  Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by 1 at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing). However, the value to be added may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, 1 is added in the normal gaming state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probability variation state). In this way, by changing the update method of the random number counter, it is possible to change the occurrence frequency of fall depending on the gaming state.

[16. Processing at power-off]
Here, in the received command analysis processing, processing when a power-off command or a power-on command is received will be described.

  As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted to the main control board 4100 when the external power supply is stopped. Before the power interruption command is transmitted, as described above, a power failure warning signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is executed, so that processing such as command backup is performed. Is executed.

  In the peripheral control board 4140, processing according to a mode in which the power is shut off is executed. Specifically, when power supply from the outside stops and power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, power supply is cut off only to the main control board 4100. In this case, the power supply may be cut off only to the peripheral control board 4140. Hereinafter, each case will be described.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is powered off]
When the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 is interrupted due to factors such as poor wiring contact, game control on the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is not lost, that is, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, the hot start is performed as described above. The production control is resumed (continued).

  Even when the effect control is resumed by hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may be notified that the power supply is temporarily cut off. For example, the power supply cutoff notification may display an initial screen when the power is turned on, or may display a screen notifying that the power supply is shut off.

  In addition, there is a possibility that a deviation may occur between the time measurement (timer) in the main control board 4100 and the time measurement in the peripheral control board 4140 due to the power interruption. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol variation display on the main control board 4100 and the decorative symbol variation display on the peripheral control board 4140 may be shifted. In this case, since the variation display of the decorative symbols ends later, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received. Further, when it is necessary to display an initial symbol at the start of variation, a default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be a symbol other than the jackpot, or may be a symbol dedicated to when a power failure occurs.

  Further, when the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement shift may be corrected at the timing of receiving the big prize closing display command, the ending command, or the like indicating the shift to the next round.

  If the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are lost, the value 0 is written in the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the effect control is resumed as a cold start.

  When an effect (variation pattern) with a specific effect is executed at the timing when the effect control is resumed as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of hot start, if the progress information of the specific effect is held, the effect may be continued as it is, or the scenario lottery result may be discarded and the scenario may be re-drawn. When lottery scenarios are executed at the time of execution of each specific production, the scenario for executing the following specific production until the timing when the last specific production is all finished must be selected so that no flaw occurs in the content of each specific production. Alternatively, the specific effect may not be executed. Note that, in any of the cold start and the hot start, the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply to the peripheral control board is cut off.

[16-2. When only the main control board is powered off]
When only the power supply of the main control board 4100 is shut off and the power supply of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display being executed to the screen display (abnormality notification screen) when the power is shut off. Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is resumed, a command for notifying the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with a power-on command. The command for notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power-on command.

  If the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the content of the currently executed effect, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only by the information notified together with the power-on command, an effect that the player does not misidentify is executed. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect that is being executed is, for example, a state in which the result of stopping the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed or a round effect during a big hit game. Examples of effects that the player does not misidentify are, for example, displaying all the decorative symbols at high speed or displaying a decorative symbol dedicated to an abnormality when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Further, if a big hit game is being played, it is only necessary to display that the big hit game is being played without displaying the number of rounds.

  Also, if the gaming state and the display state during the current presentation are different, an abnormality notification screen is displayed. When a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. In addition, what is necessary is just a display of the grade which can recognize that the player produced abnormality about an abnormality alerting | reporting screen. At this time, the execution of the specific effect is stopped if the fluctuation display is executed with the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, and the execution of the specific effect is subsequently performed (scenario lottery even when the continuous prefetching effect is continued). ) Is canceled.

[16-3. When the main control board and peripheral control board are powered off]
When power to the gaming machine is cut off, power is supplied from the backup power source to the main control board 4100, and the contents stored in the RAM are held for a predetermined period. As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Thereafter, when power is supplied again to the gaming machine, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, when the gaming state is notified from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and the game is not in a stopped state such as a waiting state for the customer, the peripheral control board 4140 provides notification that the power supply has been cut off. After performing the above, it is switched to a production that does not give misunderstanding to the player such as waiting for customers. Thereafter, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. In this case, the execution of the specific effect is stopped when the fluctuation display is executed with the pseudo continuous change or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, and the execution of the specific effect is subsequently performed (scenario lottery even when the continuous prefetching effect is continued). ) Is canceled.

[16-4. Summary at power off]
With the configuration as described above, even if the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether or not the execution of the change display is continued with a pseudo continuous change or a story reach change pattern. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not.

[17. General-purpose look-ahead production]
Next, the normal symbol type prefetching effect (ordinary pattern prefetching effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the general-purpose pre-reading effect is executed. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the general-purpose prefetch effect control process in the present embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose prefetching effect according to the present embodiment.

  When the ordinary figure prefetching effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the normal symbol prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type prefetch effect command is received. When the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is “No”), the effect control program ends this process because the ordinary figure prefetching effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the ordinary figure prefetching effect is currently being executed (step S1201). S2202). In the case where the normal-reading effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “Yes”), the processing after step S2207 is executed in order to continue the normal-reading effect that is being executed.

  When the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect is not being executed (the result of step S2202 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not the execution condition for the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect is satisfied (step S2203). Whether or not the execution condition for the ordinary-look-ahead effect is established is determined according to, for example, the game state or the execution status of another effect. When the execution condition of the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “No”), the effect control program clears the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this process.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the timing which performs a usual map prefetch effect is not specifically limited. For example, it may be executed independently of the execution state of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol synchronization effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation display. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), even when the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the universal prefetching effect is executed. Further, the execution timing of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, even when the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, the ordinary figure prefetching effect may be executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, even when a command (ordinary symbol type prefetching effect command) for instructing execution of a general symbol prefetching effect is received from 4100 from the main control board, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the general symbol prefetching effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that a player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect) is being executed, or when a special effect is being executed during execution of a general map prefetch effect, As a failure, execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be restricted. Further, in order to prevent a plurality of types of notice effects from being executed at the same time, when a special lottery pre-read notice effect is being executed, the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side is restricted to perform the normal lottery look-ahead notice effect. Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (B), the star-shaped pre-reading effect area in the present embodiment is configured such that a star-shaped pre-reading effect area is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner within the area ( FIG. 77 (C)). As a result of the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the win (“To”, FIG. 77 (D)) and the symbol corresponding to the deviation (“−”, FIG. 77 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the regular drawing lottery Is notified. The player may launch a game ball aiming at the lower start opening 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the winning in the normal drawing pre-reading effect area stops. In addition, when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped, the player may be notified to launch the game ball aiming at the lower start port 2102. At this time, in order to ensure the time for the player to launch aiming at the lower start opening 2102, the result of the general-purpose prefetching effect is displayed before a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

  Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set according to the type of the normal lottery, it is usually set according to the advantage for the player (ease of winning the game ball to the lower start port 2102). It may be determined whether or not an execution condition for drawing pre-reading effects is satisfied. For example, as the movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long open), or the movable piece 2106 is set to be moved many times. At this time, only in the case of a movable mode that is advantageous to the player, such as long release, a general-purpose prefetching notice effect may be executed.

  In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than the winning combinations may be defined, and the stop symbols may be set according to the degree of expectation that the normal lottery is a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. When the movable drawing 2106 moves in the long open mode as a result of the normal drawing lottery, a stop symbol to be notified as a hit is set, and in the short open mode, it is not a hit or miss. It may be a stop symbol.

  If the normal symbol variation time is short, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect need not be executed. This is because the winning probability is high, and even if the result of the normal lottery is announced, there is little profit for the player, and the variation time of the normal symbol is short, so that it is not possible to secure a sufficient time for executing the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect. That is, whether or not to execute the general-purpose prefetching effect may be determined according to the gaming state.

  When the execution condition for the ordinary drawing prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the ordinary drawing prefetching effect region (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variably displaying the symbols in the general-purpose prefetching effect, a general-purpose prefetching effect timer is set (step S2205), and the general-purpose prefetching effect is started (step S2206). It should be noted that the time until the normal-picture pre-reading effect timer expires may be fixed, may depend on the gaming state, may vary according to the normal symbol variation time, or may be a combination thereof.

  Further, when the ordinary drawing prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the ordinary figure prefetching effect timer has expired (step S2207). If the normal prefetch effect timer has not expired (the result of step S2207 is “no”), this processing ends to continue the normal prefetch effect.

  On the other hand, the effect control program stops the display of the changing symbols in order to display the pre-reading result of the general drawing lottery when the time limit of the general-purpose pre-reading effect timer expires (the result of step S2207 is “Yes”) ( Step S2208). Finally, the general-purpose prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and this process ends.

  Although the above-described general-purpose prefetching effect has been executed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, it may be executed on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition to displaying on the display device, the multi-prefetch effect is executed by multiple effect devices such as operating a movable accessory, causing a light emitter such as a lamp to emit light, and outputting sound from a speaker. It may be possible, and may be a combination of these production devices. When executing the pre-reading prescription effect in combination with a plurality of effect devices, the general-purpose pre-reading effect is executed by any one of the plurality of effect devices, in addition to the case of simultaneously executing by a plurality of effect devices. May be. For example, when performing a general-purpose pre-reading effect by screen display and voice output, a state in which the general-purpose pre-reading effect cannot be executed by the screen display (for example, when another (pre-reading) effect is being executed during error notification) In the case of (), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect by voice output is executed. In addition, instead of restricting the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, the general-purpose prefetching effect may be executed overlapping with other effects. In this case, the effect mode of the general-purpose prefetching effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made translucent to execute the usual map pre-reading effect, or the sound may be output with the volume reduced.

[18. Effect]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by continuously changing the range of the random number value according to the gaming state or the like, continuous production without contradiction is performed, such as preventing falling without complicating the control. can do.

  Further, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag and the random number initial value for executing the specific effect are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the supply of power is interrupted during the performance, and the performance cannot be continued.

  In addition, when there is a start winning that generates a big hit or a small hit during the performance, there is a start winning that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectation) Even when the state (game mode) transition condition is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

  For example, in the specification in which the variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the lower start opening 2102 described above is executed in preference to the case where the winning display is won at the upper start opening 2101, the result of the variation display executed with priority is given. When the initialization condition such as big hit is satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being interrupted due to the occurrence of a big hit or a change in the gaming state, and being resumed in a halfway state.

  Further, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent falling but also to execute an effect that is executed continuously and has order.

  For example, you may apply when selecting the production | presentation for every round in a jackpot game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the jackpot game, or the contents of the effect may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every three rounds in the 15-round jackpot game). Further, a common effect may be executed up to a midway round (for example, 7 of 15 rounds), and the content of the effect may be selected for subsequent rounds (for example, after 8 rounds). At this time, for example, if the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes the start memory that is a big hit, select an effect pattern in which a special effect is likely to be executed, and It may be suggested (notified) to the player.

  As described above, the feature of the present invention is that it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating control by dynamically changing the range of the random value according to the gaming state or the like. Become.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to maintain a notice lottery table that covers all the selection patterns of specific effects in story reach, pseudo-continuous variation, and continuous prefetch effects, an increase in storage capacity accompanying diversification of effects Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special figure look-ahead (judgment / direction)]
Here, a description will be given of the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure prefetch determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect.

[19-1. Control on the main control board side (prohibition of special figure prefetch determination)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIG. 78 and FIG. 79 are an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing a command modification example of “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 synchronized effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 synchronized effect related” described above in FIG. It is an example of the table which shows details. The description of the same configuration as described above is omitted.

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect. Here, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the mode value is set to “01H”, and the lower start is performed based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to “02H”.

  Next, in the above (FIG. 16), the timing at which the special symbol 1 holding number changes (the increase timing of the holding number (starting memory number) due to a game ball winning to the upper starting opening 2101 or the upper special symbol display 1185) The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a at the timing of decreasing the number of holdings due to the variable display), and if the number of special symbol 1 holdings increases (when the game ball wins the upper start port 2101), the special symbol A 1-hold number designation command was sent. Accordingly, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pieces of reserved number information, and mode values “00H” to “04H” are set in accordance therewith. Further, as described above, the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command notifies not only the number of reservations at the time of increase but also the presence or absence of a pre-reading effect. The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command indicates “prefetching” information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value is “1”, and indicates “no prefetching” information when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. Represents. When the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is “prefetched”, it also plays a role of instructing the start of the prefetch effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 78), the command transmitted is different when the number of special symbol 1 hold is decreased (at the start of fluctuation) and increased (at the start opening prize). The special symbol 1 storage command indicating the number of held balls at the timing at which the number of special symbols 1 held decreases (decrease timing of the number of holdings due to fluctuation display in the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, the start timing of the fluctuation display. Is sent. Therefore, the fluctuation starting special symbol 1 storage command transmitted when the number of holdings decreases has 0 to 3 pieces of holding number information, and mode values “01H” to “04H” are set in accordance with this. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of reserved special symbols 1 increases (the timing of increase in the number of reserved balls due to winning a game ball to the upper start port 2101), a special symbol 1 storage pre-read command at the time of pre-reading indicating the number of reserved balls and presence / absence of pre-reading is transmitted. The Therefore, the pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-read command transmitted when the hold number increases has 1 to 4 hold number information, and mode values “* 2H” to “* 5H” are set accordingly. The upper 4 bits “*” of the mode value are set to “0” when “no prefetching” and “1” when “prefetching”. The prefetch presence / absence information is set in the processing in step S242 ("no prefetching") and the processing in step S280 ("prefetching present") in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 80) described later. The pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 hold number designation command (FIG. 16) have the same information to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the setting of status value and mode value constituting the command is the same. Different. Note that the special symbol 2 storage command at the start of variation and the special symbol 2 storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  Also, only when there is prefetching (that is, when the first address of the prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command mode value is “1”), the symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type A look-ahead command is sent. In the modified example, a change sorting table information prefetch command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process for setting transmission of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 80, the storage prefetch process of a modification is demonstrated. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the process common to the above-mentioned memory prefetch process (FIG. 24), and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, the change sorting table information prefetch command is transmitted when the prefetch determination is performed. Accordingly, the main control MPU 4100a sets a command indicating a prefetch result (a symbol type prefetch command, a variation pattern prefetch command, and a variation type prefetch command) in a command buffer to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). In some cases, the change distribution table information prefetch command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the command acquired in the process of step S284 is the special symbol storage prefetch command (FIG. 78) for the corresponding special symbol prefetch. As described above, the pre-read special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-read command has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (FIG. 16).

  Returning to FIG. The symbol type prefetching command is out of sync with the specific symbol jackpot determination processing (step S250, FIG. 28) and special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S252, FIG. 28) of the storage prefetch processing (FIG. 80). This command specifies a specific jackpot. Similarly, according to the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of fluctuation, As a command for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit, there is a special figure 1 (2) symbol type command. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

  The mode values of the symbol type prefetch command (FIG. 78) and the special symbol 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 79) are associated with outlier or jackpot symbol types 0 to 48. In the symbol type prefetch command, the mode value “01H” is set for the loss, the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for each symbol type with respect to the jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the specific jackpot, and not specified The same mode value “50H” is set for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the big hit (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values “47H” to “50H” are set for each symbol type for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating non-specific big hits (small hits). .

  As described above, the variation pattern prefetch command is a command for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern). The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is obtained by using the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination processing (step S258, FIG. 29, FIG. 30) of the storage prefetch processing (FIG. 80). Use to set. The variation pattern random number 1 is used to set a production mode from a plurality, and the variation pattern random number 2 is used to set detailed production content (production pattern) according to the set production mode.

  The variation type look-ahead command is a command for designating information (time addition value) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous variation on a set variation pattern. The time addition value is set using a variation type random number in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage prefetch process (FIG. 80). If it is determined by the variation type random number that pseudo continuous variation is not performed, the variation time of the set variation pattern is maintained. In addition, when it is determined that pseudo continuous variation is performed using the variation type random number, the pseudo continuous variation corresponding to the variation type (any of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern is performed using the variation type random number. The number of executions of the change (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the time addition value is associated with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation, the time addition value is set by determining the number of executions for each type. Therefore, when pseudo continuous variation is performed, the variation time set in the variation pattern is extended.

  The change distribution table information prefetch command is a command for designating a change distribution table used for determining a change pattern in the change pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of change. As described above, in the fluctuation distribution table, the big hit fluctuation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit ("yes" in step S350) is out of place, but a reach effect is performed (step The reach fluctuation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for “yes” in S372) and the deviation fluctuation selection information table used for the case where the reach effect is not performed and the reach effect is not performed (“no” in step S372). Non-reach distribution table) is provided. The fluctuation distribution table at the start of fluctuation set in the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the three distribution tables described above. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold (start-up memory) that has a reach determination random number that may change the result of reach determination as to whether or not the reach effect is performed when the number of held balls changes between pre-read and start of fluctuation. ).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the merit of transmitting the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands will be described. FIG. 81 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-described variation distribution table, and (B) according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. 3 is an example of a reach execution availability table.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, a big hit determination is performed by a big hit determination random number, and a big hit distribution table is set in the case of a big hit. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is out of reach, the reach determination is performed by the reach determination random number. In reach determination, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the random number for reach determination is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the random number for reach determination is larger than the comparison value. Is set. Thereafter, the effect mode is determined from the random number for variation pattern 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the random number for variation pattern 2 in the effect mode.

  In reach determination, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold value) varies according to the number of reserved balls at the time of determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is four is 10, and that the comparison value is incremented by 10 every time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set even if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the reach determination result differs depending on the number of reserved balls, so either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. When the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Therefore, the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes “01H” when the big hit determination result is a big hit, and “02H” when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9 when the big hit determination result is lost, and the reach determination random number. Is set to “03H” when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, and “04H” is set.

  In this way, by transmitting the fluctuation allocation table information prefetch command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of prefetching, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the prefetching and the fluctuation starting time with respect to the hold of the mode value “03H”. It is possible to execute pre-reading effect control in consideration of the possibility that the result of reach determination may differ when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. In the storage prefetch process (FIG. 80), when the mode value of the fluctuation sorting table information prefetch command is “03H”, the process of setting the pending command reference value when prefetch is present in step S280 is not performed. You may make it maintain the state which set the pending command reference value at the time of no prefetch of S242. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs the prefetch determination but does not transmit the prefetch determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, a special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command “No prefetch” is transmitted to the peripheral control board. Thereby, the pre-reading effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified, and the control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the special symbol 1 memory prefetch command (special symbol 2 memory prefetch command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when winning the game ball to the upper start opening 2101 (lower start opening 2102) is reserved. Information on whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect is included together with the number of balls information (“pre-read” or “no pre-read”). And, only when “pre-reading is present”, the symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command, the variation type pre-reading command, and the variation distribution table information pre-reading command are transmitted. . If the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives only the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) transmitted when the start opening prize is generated, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the prefetch effect without waiting for reception of other prefetch commands. It can be determined whether or not it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) of “prefetching” (when receiving specific game information), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives other prefetch commands or special symbols. The pre-reading effect execution flag is set (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) to execute the process (first pre-processing) for establishing the execution condition of the pre-reading effect, and then the special figure pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 42 step S1027, second pre-processing) is executed, and a pre-reading effect is executed. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) of “no prefetch”, it can grasp that the prefetch command is not transmitted later. It is possible to immediately make a decision not to execute the prefetch effect (without setting the special figure prefetch effect execution flag) without waiting for the reception of the prefetch command. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special chart prefetch effect control process (FIG. 70) which is the second preprocess without executing the first preprocess, and the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set. Since it is not performed ("No" in step S2001), the special figure prefetch effect control process is terminated without executing the prefetch effect.

  Further, when the pre-reading determination is not performed on the main control board 4100 side (when the “no pre-reading” command is received), commands necessary for setting the pre-reading effect on the peripheral control board 4140 (design type pre-reading command, change Since the pattern pre-read command, variation type pre-read command and variation distribution table information pre-read command) are not transmitted, the command transmitted at the start opening prize (pre-read) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the pre-read effect. It is possible to prevent erroneous control. In addition, as will be described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit the pre-reading presence / absence information to the peripheral control board 4140 with respect to a failure of the pre-reading effect that may occur in the progress of the game. Implementation can be facilitated. The condition for setting “no prefetch” to the special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command (that is, the condition that the main control board 4100 prohibits prefetching) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the symbol type prefetch command transmitted at the time of winning the start opening (at the time of prefetching) sets different mode values for specific big jackpot types (first specific result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. A common mode value is set for the non-specific big hit (second specific result) which is a so-called small hit without the operation of the device regardless of the type of the non-specific big hit. That is, when the prefetch determination result is a specific big hit (first specific result), the main control board 4100 transmits a command (first specific information) in which a mode value is set so that the type of the specific big hit can be specified. However, if the prefetch determination result is a non-specific big hit (second specific result), a command (second specific information) in which the mode value is unified so that the non-specific big hit type cannot be specified is transmitted. In the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of fluctuation, different non-specific big hits are set for different non-specific big hit types. As a result, since the type of holding that is a non-specific big hit, which is a so-called small hit, cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of fluctuation, the type of the small hit is given to the player from the pre-reading effect of the hold. There is no fear of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately increases the degree of expectation, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  For example, there is provided a V-zone winning structure for two kinds of feathers in which a big winning opening is opened in response to a small hit and a big hit is generated by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the big winning opening. In pachinko gaming machines, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area differs depending on the type of small hit. That is, whether or not the big hit can be derived is determined according to the type of the small hit. Further, since the types of jackpots that are derived according to the types of jackpots are different, the benefits that the player can acquire (such as the number of times reduced by time) are different. For this reason, the small hit type information becomes more important for the player. In such a pachinko gaming machine, if a look-ahead effect that can grasp the type of small hit is performed, the player can make a decision according to the type of small hit and easily aim for a big hit or a specific privilege . Therefore, by preventing the pre-reading effect according to the small hit type from being executed, no predictable element (information) is given to the player until the variation is started. Thereby, the fairness of a game can be maintained and the interest of a game can be improved.

[19-1-2. Prohibition conditions for prefetch determination]
FIG. 82 is an example of a table showing conditions under which (A) the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching during state transition.

  In the above-described storage prefetching process (FIG. 80), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the timing for starting the game ball and the timing at which the variation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or Even if the table does not change, the prefetch determination prohibition period is prohibited (“yes” in step S246), and the prefetch determination is prohibited. When the prefetch determination is prohibited, “no prefetch” is set in the special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the time of starting winning is the probability at the start of variation. This may be the case when the state is different from the state or when the time-saving state at the time of starting winning becomes a non-time-saving state at the start of variation, etc. Indicates when (game number) falls within 4 times. In this case, the prefetch determination is prohibited regardless of the special symbol type.

  When the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the gaming state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper starting port (special figure 1 starting port) 2101 is the short-time state or the condition device is activated. A case where the game state is a big hit game state and a case where the game state at the time of winning a game ball to the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) 2102 is a non-time saving state or a big hit game state is shown. In this pachinko machine 1, the game ball winning (special symbol 2 holding occurrence) to the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 is limited to the short-time state. When the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the start port 2102 is a non-short-time state (a state that is not a short-time state), the prefetch determination is prohibited. In addition, even if a pre-fetch determination is made for a special symbol hold generated during a big hit game, the special symbol is in a normal (low) probability state and a non-time-short state during the big hit game regardless of the previous game state. There is a high possibility that it is different from the gaming state (the gaming state after the big hit game) when the hold is digested, and there is a concern that the accuracy of the prefetch determination may be reduced. For this reason, the pre-reading determination is prohibited even when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (when the special symbol is suspended) is a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B triggered by 100 fluctuations, the number of times the state A is maintained (the remaining number of fluctuations) becomes 4 (97 in the state A). Pre-reading judgment is prohibited at the start of the second fluctuation. The period from the state A to the state B is defined as a prefetch determination prohibition period.

  The winning 1 generated immediately before the 97th change in the state A is started is digested as the 97th change if there is no hold in all the reserved memory areas 1 to 4, but the reserved memory areas 1 to 3 are reserved. If there are, they are stored in the reserved storage areas 2 to 4 as the second to fourth holds, respectively. Then, it is digested as the 98th to 100th fluctuation. Further, if the hold is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4, an overflow prize is won and not stored.

  In this way, the winning 1 is changed in the state A even if the change digestion is slow. When there is no state transition between winning and starting change, the pre-read information (big hit determination result, variation pattern, etc.) determined by winning is not different from the variation information determined at the start of variation. However, winning 2 that occurs after winning 1, that is, after winning the 97th change in state A, may change state between winning and changing depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning. . When the number of held balls at the time of winning 2 is 3, and the winning 2 is stored in the holding memory 4 area as the fourth hold, even if the winning state is state A, the state B at the start of variation It becomes. In this case, the pre-read information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of variation are different from each other in the preconditions for various determinations, and may not be the same. In particular, when the state A is more advantageous to the player than the state B, the pre-reading effect based on the pre-reading information is actually a low-expectation variation even though the high-expectation effect was performed. An event can occur that greatly discourages the player.

  Therefore, the period in which the state transition can occur between the winning time and the starting time of the change depending on the number of reserved balls when the winning occurs, that is, the state from the state A after the 100th time changing after the start of the 97th time changing in the state A ends. Prefetching is prohibited during the period until the transition to B. In this way, the pre-reading effect is not performed when the period until the change pattern selection table is changed is a predetermined period (here, the remaining number of times of remaining state is changed by 4). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by executing an excessive (divergence) pre-reading effect as compared with actual fluctuations, and to increase the reliability of the pre-reading effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Note that the state transition includes transition from a high probability state to the normal probability state by digestion of the ST number, transition from the short-time state to the non-short-time state by digestion of the short time, state transition by transition of the production mode according to the number of fluctuations, and the like. It is done. When the table for selecting the variation pattern may change between winning (pre-reading) and starting variation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a won the peripheral control MPU 4150a without performing the pre-reading determination. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting port and information without prefetching are transmitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a performs such read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally knows the remaining number of time reductions when, for example, a power interruption occurs during the time reduction state and power is restored. Since this is not possible, it becomes possible to execute the pre-reading effect that was prohibited after power recovery. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern differs between the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state. Further, the main control MPU 4100a counts the number of fluctuations in the time reduction state (time reduction number), but the time reduction number information is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information indicating the short-time state, but cannot grasp the progress status (the remaining number of short-time times) in the short-time state. For this reason, even if the pre-reading effect is to be prohibited when the remaining short time count before the transition from the short time state to the non-short time state becomes 4 or less, the determination cannot be made, and the short time state ends after the power recovery. I had to ban prefetching until. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs prefetch prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU 4100a does not perform pre-reading determination when the remaining short time count before the state transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is 4 times (predetermined number) or less. Not transmitted to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform a prefetch effect. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the pre-reading effect during the time-saving state in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power interruption occurs during the time-saving state and power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period during which the pre-reading effect is not performed, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the description of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command (FIGS. 78 and 81), when the mode value is “03H”, the reach determination result is obtained when the number of held balls fluctuates between prefetch and start of fluctuation. It has been mentioned above that there is a possibility that the table for selecting the variation pattern may change. Whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern may change depending on the result of reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probability is determined in advance, these values can be acquired without setting a fluctuation sorting table information prefetch command by prefetch determination. In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not to make a prefetch target before executing the prefetch determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage prefetch processing (FIG. 80). If there is a possibility that either the reach or non-reach distribution table is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step 244).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present invention has a configuration in which the special symbol 2 hold is prioritized over the special symbol 1 hold and can hold and store up to 4 each, so the number of state maintenance before the transition (number of games) Prefetching is prohibited when is less than 4 times, but is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to change the frequency | count of a determination threshold value (here 4 times) according to the specification applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the control that does not execute the special figure prefetch determination performed on the main control board side described above may be a control that does not perform the special figure prefetch effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Peripheral control board side control (prohibition of special drawing look-ahead effect)]
Next, the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

  In the above description, the special figure prefetching prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described. However, the prefetching prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not sufficient to prevent the occurrence of problems related to the prefetching effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from power interruption, the main control MPU 4100a can grasp power recovery information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot grasp it. When there is a hold when the power interruption occurs, the main control MPU 4100a transmits information on the number of held balls to the peripheral control board 4140, but pre-read information (result information, variation pattern, etc.) for the number of held balls Command contents) are not sent. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot execute the pre-reading effect for the on-hold hold that has been put on hold when the power is cut off. In addition, pre-read information for the hold generated after the power recovery is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, but there is a concern about the execution of the pre-read effect of the hold generated after the power recovery until all the power-on hold is consumed.

  For example, when the probability state after the power recovery is a high probability state and the power-on hold includes a low-probability per-hold, the main control MPU 4100a determines the pre-reading determination of the hold generated after the power recovery. Execution is performed in a high probability state, but the probability state is changed from a high probability state to a low probability state by the corresponding variable execution. That is, it is a low probability state when a hold generated after power recovery is digested. Therefore, even if the hold-ahead pre-production effect that occurred after the power recovery is a highly expected effect, the change effect of the hold may be a normal disapproval effect, which will significantly disappoint the player's expectation. There is a risk of deteriorating interest.

  Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even after receiving the special drawing pre-read command until the predetermined number of times (eight times) after the power is turned on including the power recovery. The predetermined number of times is the upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold. Further, as described above, the prefetch effect is also prohibited when the mode value of the received prefetch fluctuation distribution table information command is “03H”. Below, with reference to FIG.83 and FIG.84, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the periphery control MPU4150a of the modification 1 is demonstrated.

  Also, as a second modification, if there is an unknown hold (power-on hold) when the power is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even if it receives the special figure pre-read command until the unknown hold is consumed. To do. Further, in the second modification, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the pre-read special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-read command, not only in the gaming state, but treats the hold of the command as unknown hold and similarly The prefetch effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is consumed. Below, with reference to FIGS. 85-88, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the periphery control MPU4150a of the modification 2 is demonstrated.

[19-2-1. Modification 1 (Preventing pre-reading for the predetermined number of fluctuations when the power is turned on)]
First, Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the first modification. The processes common to the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch prohibition count process in the received command analysis process of the first modification.

  As described above, in the received command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores various commands from the main control board 4100 in the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and the process corresponding to the read command is executed.

  In the first modification, when the read command is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an 8 variable pre-reading prohibition flag after input and other flags corresponding to the command ( In step S1422), the received command analysis process is terminated. After the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, first, when the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (production start and game state instructions) according to the game backup information to the peripheral control board 4140. . Therefore, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 after power-on is a power-on state command.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch prohibition count process (step S1430) when the read command is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). Thereafter, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  Here, the prefetch prohibition count process will be described with reference to FIG. The prefetching prohibition counting process is a process for making a setting so that it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started eight times after the power is turned on even when a special figure prefetching command is received.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the 8 variation prefetching prohibition flag after setting is set (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), “8” is set to the prefetch prohibition count of the subtraction method provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). Thereafter, the 8 variation prefetch prohibition flag is canceled after the input (step S1433). This completes the setting of the prefetch prohibition count when the first special symbol variation display game is started after the power is turned on.

  In addition, if the eight-variation prefetch prohibition flag after setting is not set (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to processing in step S1434 described later.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (step S1434). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count is decremented by 1 and updated (step S1435), and the prefetch prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count process is terminated as it is.

  Explain along the passage of time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → Step S1432 → Step S1433 is executed in Step S1431 when the first fluctuation starts, and a prefetch prohibition count for counting the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is set. Thereafter, the processing of No → Step S1435 is executed in Step S1434, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “7”. After that, at the start of the second fluctuation, the process of No → Step S1435 is executed in Step S1431, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “6”. Similar processing is repeated at the start of the third to eighth fluctuations, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “0” at the start of the eighth fluctuation. Therefore, at the time of the subsequent fluctuation start, the process of No → Step S1434 is repeated in Step S1431.

  Thus, in the prefetch prohibition count process, the value of the prefetch prohibition count and the number of fluctuations after power-on are linked and linked so that it is possible to determine whether or not the prefetch prohibition state is in effect from the prefetch prohibition count value. .

  Returning to FIG. Peripheral control MPU 4150a uses a special figure prefetching effect command (special pattern 1 when prefetching with prefetch 1 (2) memory prefetching command, prefetching symbol type prefetching command, prefetching variation pattern prefetching command, prefetching variation type prefetching command. , A pre-reading variable distribution table information command) (Yes in step S1407), the ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) having the status value “69H” and the mode value “03H” as the special figure pre-reading effect command. It is determined whether or not a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command indicating "." Is received (step S1441). If the ambiguous command is received (Yes in step S1441), the prefetch effect is not executed, and the received command analysis process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, if it has received a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the prefetch prohibition count is It is determined whether or not “0” (step S1442). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1442), since the fluctuation has not started eight times after the power is turned on (prefetching prohibition state), the prefetching effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated as it is.

  In addition, when the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1442), the peripheral control MPU 4150a has already started the eight fluctuations after the power is turned on. The figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetching effect in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 70) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to

  As described above, in the prefetching effect prohibition control according to the first modification, after the power is turned on, the prefetching effect is not performed until a predetermined number of start of fluctuations, which is the upper limit number of suspensions, is executed. For this reason, the hold at the time of power interruption does not affect the prefetch effect of the hold that occurs after the power is restored. Therefore, the above-described problems can be solved, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed and an appropriate prefetching effect can be provided. In addition, since the predetermined number of times is set as the total number of reserved upper limits for the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the prefetch effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of power interruption is surely consumed (starting fluctuation).

  Although the pre-reading effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, the above-described problem occurs when the power is turned on due to power recovery after power interruption. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on in which RAM clear is executed by the main control board 4100. A command that distinguishes both is transmitted from the main control board 4100, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two for simplicity of processing. However, prohibiting pre-reading until the RAM is cleared when no problem occurs may cause a decrease in the fun of the game. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the RAM is being cleared in the peripheral control board 4140, and if the RAM is being cleared, the prefetch effect may be permitted. In this way, by canceling the prohibition of unnecessary prefetching effects, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game and provide appropriate prefetching effects.

  For example, when the probability state after the power recovery is a high probability state and the power-on hold includes a low-probability per-hold, the main control MPU 4100a determines the pre-reading determination of the hold generated after the power recovery. Execution is performed in a high probability state, but the probability state is changed from a high probability state to a low probability state by the corresponding variable execution. That is, it is a low probability state when a hold generated after power recovery is digested. Therefore, even if the hold-ahead pre-production effect that occurred after the power recovery is a highly expected effect, the change effect of the hold may be a normal disapproval effect, which will significantly disappoint the player's expectation. There is a risk of deteriorating interest.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (prefetching prohibited until unknown pending digestion)]
Next, Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the second modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same process as the received command analysis process (FIG. 83) of the modification 1, and description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special figure prefetch execution determination processing in the received command analysis processing of the second modification.

  As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100 together with the holding when power is turned on (holding during power interruption) in the first modification. The hold when the command is received is treated as “unknown hold” in which the prefetch information for executing the prefetch effect is unknown. And pre-reading production is prohibited until the unknown hold is consumed.

  With reference to FIG. 85, the received command analysis process of the modification 2 is demonstrated. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an unknown flag at turn-on that sets prefetch prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown hold when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a power-on state command (Yes at step S1421). Processing is executed (step S1450). Thereafter, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 86, the unspecified time flag setting process (step S <b> 1450) will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds the special figure 1 hold count (unknown hold count) and special 2 hold count (unknown hold) to the special 1 unknown count and special 2 unknown count of the subtraction method provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, respectively. Number) is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery from the occurrence of power interruption, the number of suspensions at power interruption is set as power recovery information (backup game information).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special 1 unknown count is “0” (step S1452). If the special 1 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1452), a special 1 unknown flag indicating prohibition of prefetch effect of special 1 hold is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. To do. On the other hand, if the special 1 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power interruption, or that the initial start is not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special 2 unknown count is “0” (step S1454). If the special 2 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S 1454), a special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of pre-reading effect of special 2 holding is set (step S 1455), and an unknown flag setting process at the time of input is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply or that the initial start is not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set and the unknown flag setting process is terminated.

  Thus, when power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, pre-reading effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) based on the presence or absence of unknown hold is performed for each special symbol according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a hold at the time of power interruption, a pre-reading effect prohibition setting for a special symbol that is a target of the hold at the time of power interruption is performed.

  Returning to FIG.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460) when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). Thereafter, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process for determining whether to cancel the prefetch prohibition (clear the unknown flag) by digesting the unknown hold. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol that is subject to change is subtracted to determine whether or not to hold the unknown pending (preemption of prohibition of pre-reading effects), and if it is digested, the unknown flag (prohibition of pre-reading effects) is cancelled. .

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the unknown symbol of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). If the unknown flag of the target special figure is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the unknown flag of the target special figure is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the unknown count of the target special figure by 1 (step S1462) and updates the target special figure. It is determined whether or not the unknown count in the figure is “0” (step S 1463). If the unknown count is not “0” (No in step S 1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, if the unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S 1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S 1464), and the unknown count process is terminated.

  In this way, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is consumed (the number of held balls when the unknown hold information is received) are linked and linked, and the unknown count indicating whether there is an unknown hold. When the value of becomes "0", the unknown flag is canceled. As a result, in a special figure prefetch execution determination process (step S1470 in FIG. 85, FIG. 88), which will be described later, it is possible to determine whether or not prefetch prohibition is in effect from the state of the unknown flag, and to determine whether or not execution of the prefetched holding effect that has occurred is possible. To be able to.

  Returning to FIG.

  By the way, in the second modification, not only the interruption at the time of power interruption but also the holding when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100 is handled as “unknown holding”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of unknown hold (prefetching effect prohibition setting) is not limited to when the power is turned on, but prefetching of the hold (game ball winnings to the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102) that occurs after the power is turned on. It is also performed when a command is received.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a pre-read special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-read command indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of start opening winning and the presence or absence of pre-read information that has been held ( In step S1469, Yes), special figure prefetch execution determination processing is executed (step S1470). In the special figure prefetch execution determination process, the setting of an unknown flag for each special symbol (prefetch effect prohibition setting) is set according to the presence or absence of prefetch information of the received command, or the prefetch effect is executed according to the state of the prefetch information and the unknown flag. Set flags.

  Here, the details of the special figure prefetch execution determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command is a command for the special symbol 1 (step S1471). If the command is a special symbol 1 command (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command is “prefetched” (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the top of the mode value of the received special symbol 1 storage prefetch command received is “1”.

  If the received prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is not “prefetched” (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines other prefetch commands (prefetching symbol type prefetch command, prefetch variation pattern). Since the prefetch command, prefetch variation type prefetch command, prefetch variation distribution table information command) is unknown pending that is not transmitted from the main control board 4100, a special 1 unknown flag prohibiting the special prefetch effect is set (step S1473a), At this time, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination process is terminated. If the special 1 unknown flag is already set, the set state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the process of rewriting the special 1 unknown count value to a new reserved ball number value in the process of step S1474a. Do. It is updated so that the digestion of a new unknown hold in the storage order always becomes a cancellation condition for prohibition of prefetching production.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the received pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “pre-read” (Yes in step S1472a), other pre-read commands are transmitted from main control board 4100. Then, it is determined whether or not “6903H” (ambiguous command) is received as the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process in step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 83) of the above-described first modification. When the ambiguous command is received, that is, when the prefetch fluctuation distribution table information command of “6903H” is received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure prefetch execution determination process ends.

  Further, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, has received a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of a mode value other than “03H” (No in step S1475a), a special control is performed. It is determined whether or not the 1 unknown flag is set (step S1476a). If the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), since the special 1 prefetch effect execution is prohibited, the special figure prefetch execution determination process ends.

  Further, when the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in the process of permitting the special 1 prefetch effect, and therefore executes the special figure prefetch effect that instructs execution of the special 1 prefetch effect. The flag is set (step S1477a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination process ends. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetching effect in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 70) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to

  In the process of step S1471, when the prefetched special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetching command is not for the special symbol 1, that is, the command for the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1477b to be executed is obtained by changing the target to the special symbol 2 from the processing of steps S1472a to S1477a for the special symbol 1 described above.

  In the special figure prefetch execution determination process, when a prefetching special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command is received, the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set and the target unknown symbol is used until the corresponding unknown hold is exhausted. Prohibition of special symbol prefetching. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading command is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the target special symbol unknown flag is set. Further, even when the received prefetch fluctuation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the prefetch effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the prefetch effect prohibition control of the second modification, the power interruption hold received as the power recovery information when the power is turned on is set as “unknown hold”, and the prefetch effect is not executed even if the power is restored. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when the prefetch information (specific game information) is not transmitted and there is a hold where the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot specify the prefetch determination result), the special symbol of the target until the unknown hold is consumed. The pre-reading effect is not performed. If the unknown hold is digested, the prefetch effect is permitted. For this reason, the suspension (unknown suspension) at the time of power interruption does not affect the prefetching effect after the power recovery. In addition, since a prohibition period for prefetch effects is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown holds, more appropriate prefetch effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a pre-reading effect and a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a prefetching special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetching command is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set as “unknown hold”, and the prefetching in the target special symbol is performed until the unknown hold is consumed. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing this prefetch effect prohibition control together with the aforementioned prefetch determination prohibition control at the time of state transition by the main control board 4100, a more appropriate prefetch effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the short-time state to the non-time-short state during the state transition described above, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the prefetch determination if the remaining number of times of the short-time state is less than 4 fluctuations. For this reason, the special symbol 2 hold generated during the prefetch determination prohibition period is not prefetched and is recognized by the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an unknown hold. Therefore, the pre-reading effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-short-time state after the state transition until the special symbol 2 hold (upper limit of 4) generated in the short-time state of the remaining 4 changes is digested. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the special symbol 2 priority digestion, after the state transition, the special symbol 2 of unknown pending is digested before the special symbol 1. In this way, the hold generated during the four fluctuations immediately before the transition state is not subject to the prefetch determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the hold that can be prefetched is received until the hold is digested on the peripheral control board 4140 side. By not using the pre-reading effect as well, execution of the pre-reading effect during a period in which defects are likely to occur can be prohibited. Note that the suspension that occurs in the non-short-time state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 suspension. At this time, since the prefetch effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, the special symbol 2 is reserved. Therefore, execution of the pre-reading effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time-saving state is not prevented.

  Moreover, in the modification 2, the prefetch effect prohibition control with respect to unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power interruption is performed at the timing when the number of hold changes. Specifically, the prefetch effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving the special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command (unknown command) when prefetching without prefetching, and the unknown pending corresponding to the unknown command is digested and the fluctuation starts. Released at the timing of In this way, the prefetch effect is prohibited when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, and the prefetch effect is permitted at the same time as the last unknown hold is consumed. Therefore, more accurate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed, and a decrease in pre-reading effect and game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, as described in the first modification, the prefetch effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power may not be targeted at the time of RAM clear. In this case, a determination process for confirming reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above-described unknown flag setting process (FIG. 86), and after the RAM clear command is received (when the RAM is cleared) It is only necessary to end the unknown time flag setting process without executing the process. Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150cac in order to share control between when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. As described above, when the RAM is cleared, by controlling so as to allow the prefetching effect, it is possible to eliminate the prohibition of unnecessary prefetching effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game and provide an appropriate prefetching effect. .

  Also, in Modification 1 and Modification 2, an ambiguous command (a pre-reading variable distribution table information command with a mode value of “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for a generated hold with pre-read. However, this is not limited to the pre-reading effect. For example, in the second modification, the pre-reading effect may be prohibited in response to the occurrence of a hold that becomes a non-specific hit (small hit) in a high probability state. Specifically, in the above-described special figure prefetch execution determination process (FIG. 88), when a prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command with prefetch is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value “50H”). )) Symbol type prefetching command (status value “66H”) and a process for determining whether or not the current probability state is a high probability state are added. If the command is received and the command is in a high probability state, the processes of steps S1473a and S1474a may be executed. Here, at the stage of prefetching, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The small hit types include those that return a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state). If a pre-reading effect is performed even after such a small-hold hold that induces a transition to a low-probability state occurs, it occurs after the small-hit hold, and a big-hit determination is made when pre-reading in a high-probability state. When the change starts in the low-probability state in which the holding has shifted to the occasion of the small hit, an event that becomes a deviation determination can occur. At this time, if the winning effect is performed in the pre-reading effect, the actual variation result (out of line) may not only significantly discourage the player's expectation but also cause distrust in the game effect. Therefore, even if a prefetch command with prefetching is received, if the symbol type prefetching command “6650H” for small hits is received in a high-probability state, the change at which the result of the small hit is determined (holding digestion) ) Prohibit prefetching until. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of an excessive (wrong) pre-reading effect with respect to the actual variation result, and inconvenience to the player's performance, and a pre-reading effect. The reliability of can be raised.

[19-2-3. At the start of the big hit game (pre-read information clear)]
By the way, the hold generated during the big hit is prohibited because the main control MPU 4100a does not execute the pre-read determination, but the hold already generated and stored at the start of the big hit depends on the gaming state at the time of occurrence. The pre-read information is obtained by the pre-read determination, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the pre-read effect. However, since the game state after the big hit that is digested (start of fluctuation) at the start of the big hit may be different from the game state at the time of the prefetch determination (the variation pattern table is different), On the other hand, there is a risk that it will not be an appropriate look-ahead effect. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, while clearing the prefetch effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. In this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems that prevent appropriate pre-reading effects. Hereinafter, the control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot display process. The jackpot display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the aforementioned effect control process (FIG. 49).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first executes a big hit opening display process in response to the big hit start command (step S1710). Next, a display process that displays on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big prize opening 2003 is opened and a display process during a big hit for performing a display effect (for example, round display etc.) during the big hit game state is executed (step) S1720). Thereafter, a jackpot ending display process for effecting the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed (step S1730), the process selection flag is updated to “0” (step S1740), and the jackpot display process is terminated.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit opening display process. The jackpot opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the aforementioned jackpot display process (FIG. 89).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the start flag is set (step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the process of step S1411 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48). If the start flag is not set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the production information (preliminary information) corresponding to the prefetch command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The notification mode is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 is set, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Production control is performed. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the pre-notification mode on the condition that the pre-reading effect information (pre-notification mode) can be specified in a predetermined storage area (pre-notification mode identifiable setting means) and the execution of the big hit game. It also has a function (preliminary notification mode specification impossibility setting means) for setting it as unspecified. The effect information cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the prefetch command is received.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a again sets the effect information corresponding to the prefetch command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are set to be triggered by the current jackpot (step S1713). .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and then ends the big hit opening display process. Thereafter, upon receiving a big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 when the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit display processing (step S1720 in FIG. 89) is executed.

  In this way, in the big hit opening display process, an effect display indicating the start of the big hit is performed, and the pre-reading pre-production information stored at the time of the big hit starts from the one corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the holding according to the big hit gaming state. Can be rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the pre-reading effect information selected under the normal probability state at the time of the occurrence of the hold, and re-reads the pre-reading effect information under the high probability state that can be switched when the jackpot is triggered. Select again. In addition, it is prefetch effect information that is the target of the effect information clear process in step S1712, and the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 (the number of held balls, presence of prefetch, symbol type, variation pattern, variation type). , The distribution table) is held, so that the effect information based on the hold information can be reset in the effect information setting process in the next step S1713. The resetting timing is not limited to the time of starting the big hit. For example, it may be reset before the big hit round finalizing effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect in accordance with the situation with respect to the hold at the time of starting the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the pre-reading effect and the interest of the game.

  The target of the above-described effect information clear process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the big hit. Special pattern 1 with prefetching with prefetching from main control board 4100 (2) Even if other prefetching commands are received, abnormal number of pending changes (holding at previous reception) If the number of pending information received this time has increased to 4 even though the number information was 0, the pending production information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when established is the target of the effect information clear process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent in advance a pre-read effect for the hold, and an appropriate pre-read It leads to offer of production.

  The above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetching effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure prefetching determination on the main control board side.

[20. Production mode transition]
By the way, in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIGS. 48, 83, and 85), when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 is performed. In this process, the variation pattern reception flag is set. Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, a decoration symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting the special symbol synchronization effect including the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state among the plurality, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern received from the main control board 4100 and the winning information (decoration pattern stop pattern, type of reach effect, The determination of whether or not the notice effect can be executed, the notice effect mode, the presence or absence of the extension effect, and the like are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as the special figure synchronization effect.

  Concretely, with reference to FIG. 91, an example of the effect transition in the probability change time-short state in which the number of time reductions is given 64 times will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect transition in the probability variation short time state. When the gaming state enters the shortest time at certain change time, the special-synchronization effect (short-time effect) in the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times, and the special B effect mode after 31 times. A synchronized production (probability change production) is executed. In the special figure synchronized production in the specific A production mode, a continuous production is executed as to whether or not the time-saving state is continued in a fluctuation in which the number of time reductions is 10, 20, and 30, and a normal production is executed in other fluctuations. Is done.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of time reductions, and sets a variation pattern (a normal effect pattern, a continuous effect pattern, a probability change confirmed effect pattern) corresponding to the number of time reductions as a variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of tables in accordance with the number of time reductions (number of lottery game executions in the time reduction state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of time reductions. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 91, the variation pattern that is 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, and 21 to 29 times is selected from the table in which the normal performance pattern is set, and the number of times is 10 times. The variation patterns that are 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the variation patterns that are after the time reduction number of 31 times are selected from the table in which the probability variation confirmed effect pattern is set. Further, the continuous effect pattern is provided with a successful effect pattern in which the time-short state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time-short state ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations) by following the received variation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations). Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as when power is cut off. The production mode of each production varies depending on the production mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 91, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode for the time reduction count of 1 to 30 times, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode for the time limit count of 31 or later.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of the effect mode transition process in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition is executed based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received in the above-described decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is exemplified by the transition from the specific A effect mode of FIG. 91 to the specific B effect mode.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a condition for shifting to the specific B effect mode, in which the continuous effect (success or failure) is executed every predetermined number of times and the continuous success effect is executed three times. This is a production mode. If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not currently in the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the effect control mode transition process ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently in the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a successful effect pattern among the continuous effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not (step S1752). If the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition process ends.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the count of the number of successes by 1 (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update is 3 (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition process ends. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). Thereafter, the effect mode transition process ends. The count of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and the count is cleared at the end of the special A effect mode.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when a predetermined number of specific variation pattern commands are received from the main control MPU 4100a, and the specific gaming state (here, the time-saving state) according to the variation pattern commands received from the main control MPU 4100a. ), It is possible to appropriately determine a transition effect (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in a series of effect modes (specific A effect mode). Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on a command received from the main control board 4100 side where game information is always backed up, even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as when power is cut off, It is possible to execute the appropriate performance at the time of electricity.

[21. Special chart look-ahead effect switching control]
Here, when a start memory with a high expectation level for a big jackpot is newly generated while a special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, the special figure pre-reading effect that has been executed in advance is newly generated. The control to switch (overwrite) to the special figure prefetching effect based on will be described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the content which overlaps with description so far.

[21-1. Control on the main control board side (switch control of special drawing look-ahead effect)]
As described in the memory prefetching process (FIG. 24), in the present embodiment, a command (special symbol) required for executing a special figure prefetching effect is not in the prefetch determination prohibition period when the game ball is won for starting. A hold number designation command, a special figure variation pattern command, etc.) are transmitted. Even in the case of executing the switching control of the special figure pre-reading effect, whether or not the special figure pre-reading effect can be executed is determined by determining whether or not it is the pre-reading determination prohibition period, similarly to the storage pre-reading process shown in FIG. A command necessary for execution of the special figure pre-reading effect is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. As described above, the main control board 4100 serves as a first prefetch determination unit that first determines whether or not the special figure prefetch effect can be executed after the start winning.

[21-2. Peripheral control board side control (switching control of special drawing look-ahead effect)]
When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command for executing the special figure prefetching effect from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 executes the special figure prefetching effect based on the contents of the command and the execution state of the special figure prefetching effect.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in addition to the special-purpose look-ahead effect that suggests start-up memory with a high degree of expectation, such as the normal look-ahead effect that changes the hold display described above, the game machine side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays A special figure prefetching effect such as changing the background of an image (background prefetching effect) or causing a character to appear independently of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (character prefetching effect) can be executed. The background look-ahead effect does not have to be performed with a specific hold display clearly, and any of the currently held start memories (including the start memory being executed) has a high expectation level for the big hit May be shown. In the present embodiment, a background prefetching effect that changes the background is executed together with a prefetching effect that changes the hold display to be prefetched (normal prefetching effect, continuous prefetching effect, together with “hold prefetching effect”). Examples of background prefetching effects will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, control by the peripheral control board 4140 for executing the special figure prefetching effect will be described. Specifically, a special figure prefetch effect setting process for setting a special figure prefetch effect will be described. Other processes are the same as those described so far.

[21-2-1. Special figure pre-reading effect control process (switch control of special figure pre-reading effect)]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure prefetching effect control processing including switching control of special figure prefetching effects according to this embodiment. This process is a process executed in step S1027 of the peripheral control part steady process in the peripheral control part power-on process (FIG. 42), similarly to the special figure prefetch effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the special figure prefetching effect control process including the switching control of the special figure prefetching effect, the process for executing the normal prefetching effect for changing the hold display shown in FIG. 70 and the display mode of the hold display can be changed for each variable display. In addition to the process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous prefetch effect, a process for executing a background prefetch effect is included. In the process for executing the background prefetching effect, it is possible to switch (overwrite) the background prefetching effect that is executed in advance to the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory. A specific procedure will be described below, but description of processing common to the flowchart shown in FIG. 70 will be omitted as appropriate.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not a special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). When the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the special figure pre-reading effect is not executed, and thus the special figure pre-reading effect control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program prefetches based on the content of the prefetching effect command corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched. The type and aspect of the effect are selected (step S2020). Specifically, either the normal prefetch effect that changes the display mode of the hold display of the start memory or the background prefetch effect that changes the background of the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected and selected. The effect form of the special figure pre-reading effect made is determined.

  Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the normal prefetch effect is selected (step S2021). When the normal prefetching effect is selected (the result of step S2021 is “Yes”), the processing from step S2005 is executed. The processing after step S2005 is as described in FIG. 70 differs from the process shown in FIG. 70 at the timing of clearing the special figure prefetch effect execution flag.

  On the other hand, when the normal prefetching effect is not selected (the result of step S2021 is “No”), that is, when the background prefetching effect is selected, the effect control program determines whether to actually execute the background prefetching effect. Is determined (step S2022). Whether or not the background pre-reading effect is actually executed is determined, for example, as to whether or not the expected degree of the variation pattern corresponding to the start-up memory is greater than or equal to a predetermined expected degree. In addition, it may be determined whether or not to execute the prefetch effect according to the degree of expectation, such as making it easier to execute the special figure prefetch effect when the degree of expectation is high.

  Although the special figure pre-reading effect can be basically executed in all the variation patterns, the lottery data allocation for determining whether or not to execute can be varied according to the variation patterns. For example, in the case of deviation fluctuation, the winning (execution) probability of holding prefetching effect is 1/100 (outage is 99/100), whereas in normal reach, 25/100 (outage is 75/100), super reach. In the case of a loss, it is determined based on a lottery table that is set to be 50/100 (a loss is 50/100) and in the case of a super-reach, it is 99/100 (a loss is 1/100).

  Furthermore, the actual production mode (scenario) is determined based on a table in which another scenario table is associated with the number of production executions. For example, when the number of performances is 2, a table in which a lottery probability is set for each scenario is provided. It should be noted that the scenario contents selected according to the scenario table, the number of scenarios, and the lottery probability are different.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the scenario in which the color of the hold display changes and the variation pattern when the number of effects of the special figure prefetch effect (hold prefetch effect) is two. Each scenario is, for example, scenario 1 (blue → blue), scenario 2 (blue → green), scenario 3 (blue → red), scenario 4 (red → gold). It becomes a high special figure pre-reading effect. Scenario 4 is set to be drawn only at the time of the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous effects is not limited to two, but may be three or more, for example, and a table indicating correspondence between scenarios and variation patterns may be prepared according to the number of continuous effects.

  In the present embodiment, a scenario to be executed is determined based on a table in which scenario lottery probabilities are set. In addition to the variation pattern, in the case of a big hit, a scenario lottery table may be provided according to the type of the big hit. When the variation pattern and the big hit symbol are uniquely determined, it is only necessary to have a table based on the variation pattern, and it is not necessary to provide a table to be determined according to the big hit type.

  Moreover, it is not limited to the special figure pre-reading effect (holding pre-reading effect) that changes the hold display, and similarly includes a lottery table and a scenario table for the background pre-reading effect. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the scenario and the variation pattern when the number of effects of the background prefetching effect is two. Each scenario is, for example, scenario A (lightly cloudy → lightly cloudy), scenario B (lightly cloudy → rainy cloud), scenario C (rainy cloud → thundercloud), scenario D (rainy cloud → sunny). It becomes a high special figure pre-reading effect. The scenario D is set to be drawn only at the time of the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous effects is not limited to two, but may be three or more, for example, and a table indicating correspondence between scenarios and variation patterns may be prepared according to the number of continuous effects.

  When the effect control program does not execute the background prefetching effect (the result of step S2022 is “No”), the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2027), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the background prefetching effect is executed (the result of step S2022 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the background prefetching effect is currently being executed (step S2023). The determination of whether or not the background prefetching effect is being executed is performed by, for example, setting a flag at the timing when the execution of the background prefetching effect is started (or determined / selected), and the timing when the background prefetching effect ends (for example, the background prefetching effect) A flag to be cleared at the timing when the variable display based on the start memory for performing the effect starts (ends) may be provided, and may be performed based on the value set in this flag.

  As an example of the flag, a flag (prefetching expectation degree flag) may be prepared for each expectation of the prefetching effect mode (holding prefetching or background prefetching). For example, when the degree of expectation that is a big hit differs depending on the production mode, such as high, medium, and low, a prefetching expectation flag corresponding to each expectation is prepared (for example, a high expectation prefetching notice flag, Like medium expectation lookahead flag, low expectation lookahead flag). Further, instead of dividing the flag according to the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation may be divided according to information set in one flag (for example, when the flag value is “1”, the low degree of expectation, “ 2 ”means medium expectation, and“ 3 ”means high expectation). These examples are merely examples, and the degree of expectation need not be limited to three types, and may be three or more types or only two types. That is, it is only necessary to be able to determine (determine) whether or not the pre-reading effect mode (background pre-reading) can be executed according to the degree of expectation.

  In the case of providing the prefetching expectation degree flag, the prefetching expectation degree flag of the special figure prefetching effect being executed when the special figure prefetching effect is switched is retained and compared with the newly executed special figure prefetching effect flag. do it. For example, when the prefetching expectation flag of the special figure prefetching effect being executed is in the expectation level, if the prefetching expectation degree flag of the newly executed special figure prefetching effect is high in expectation, the new special figure prefetching effect is set. Switch. The special figure prefetching effect flag to be newly executed may be information (numerical information or the like) set for each scenario.

  When the background prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether to switch the currently executed background prefetching effect to the background prefetching effect to be newly executed. (Step S2024).

  In the present embodiment, the expectation level of the background prefetching effect to be newly executed is compared with the expectation level of the background prefetching effect being executed. Switch. The “expectation” is basically an expectation that the result of the special symbol variation display is a big hit, but may also be an expectation of the type of jackpot (design) or an expectation of the gaming state after the big win. Furthermore, it may include not only the result of the special symbol variation display, but also the expectation level as an effect (for example, normal deviation, normal reach, SP reach, etc.). For example, the variation pattern may be identified from the variation pattern prefetch command and determined based on the variation pattern. Specifically, “expectation” may be added to the items of the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) to define the expectation for each variation pattern in advance, or the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach) to be executed. Etc.), the degree of expectation may be set. Moreover, since the reach production with high expectation like SP reach has a long variation time, it may be determined that the expectation is high as the variation time is long. If the degree of expectation is the same, any start-up memory may be prioritized or determined by lottery. In the case where both are big hits, the special figure prefetching effect cannot be executed during the big hit game, so the special figure prefetching effect being executed is prioritized.

  Further, in the case where the player can obtain a large profit as in the case of both big hits, the player may be switched to a special prefetch effect display mode that does not appear in a single prefetch lottery. The degree of expectation need not be limited to jackpots, and the degree of expectation may be divided according to the kind of jackpot. For example, such as the number of rounds of big hit games, the probability of winning a special lottery after a big hit, and the number of continuations of the game state (probability change state, short time state) advantageous to the player, The degree of expectation may be divided according to the gaming state.

  Furthermore, a priority may be provided for each determined scenario, and determination may be made based on the priority set for each scenario. For example, numerical information is set for each scenario so that the degree of expectation increases as the numerical value increases. When scenario information is set and stored in the RAM, it is stored as numerical information, so that the value itself can represent the level of expectation. This numerical information corresponds to, for example, information (numerical value) for determining the production mode and information (numerical value) indicating the degree of expectation, and the numerical information may be set based on these information. In this case, whether or not to switch the special figure prefetch effect by holding the numerical value information of the scenario until the special figure prefetch effect ends, and comparing with the numerical information corresponding to the scenario of the special figure prefetch effect to be newly executed. What is necessary is just to judge.

  The effect control program clears the special figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S2027) when the background prefetching effect being executed is not continued and switched to a new background prefetching effect (the result of step S2024 is “No”). This process is terminated. In this case, the special figure prefetching effect being executed is continuously executed without being interrupted.

  On the other hand, when switching the background prefetching effect being executed to a new background prefetching effect (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the setting information of the background prefetching effect being executed as a new background prefetching effect. Is initialized in order to execute (step S2025). Note that the setting information of the background prefetch effect is also initialized when the background prefetch effect being executed is executed to the end. The initialization timing of the setting information is, for example, the timing when the start-up memory related to the background prefetching effect being executed is consumed.

  The effect control program initializes the setting information of the background prefetching effect being executed (step S2025), or if the background prefetching effect is not being executed (the result of step S2023 is “No”), the background prefetching effect. A setting process is executed (step S2026). Since a plurality of background prefetch effects cannot be executed in parallel, background prefetch effect setting information may be unconditionally initialized in the background prefetch effect setting process. Finally, the effect control program clears the special figure prefetch effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this process.

  In step S2025, the setting information of the background prefetching effect being executed is not initialized and a new background prefetching effect is executed, but a new background prefetching effect is executed following the background prefetching effect being executed. You may make it do. At this time, the player may be able to recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), or may not be able to recognize (hard to recognize). For example, if the player cannot recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), it will feel that the state of high expectation has continued for a long time, so that the expectation can be maintained for a long time. At this time, the state of high expectation is maintained even after the start-up memory fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure pre-reading effect that was originally performed is lost, and further in the fluctuation display executed later, the expectation is higher Since the effect based on the variation pattern is executed, the player can be made less discouraged.

  Further, when the special figure prefetching effect is switched, an effect of notifying that it has been switched may be executed. For example, the player may be able to recognize by executing an effect (display, sound, light emission, driving body, etc.) that is not executed in the normal effect when switching the special figure prefetch effect. Furthermore, you may perform the production | presentation which suggests that switching of a special figure prefetching production | generation occurs. In this case, the effect is not executed at the start of fluctuation after it is determined that the special figure pre-reading effect is to be switched. The pre-reading effect for the player is executed to the extent that the pre-reading effect can be recognized (the screen flash, the color only around the display screen, the decorative design itself changes (color, shape, etc.), the subliminal effect, etc.) It is sufficient that the effect is such that it can be recognized that the effect switching has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, the normal prefetch effect can be executed in parallel for a plurality of startup memories, but the background prefetch effect cannot be executed in parallel. Therefore, the process of step S2021 may determine whether or not the prefetch effect that can be executed in parallel is performed, not whether or not the normal prefetch effect is executed. For example, the prefetch effect that can be executed in parallel is the first group, the prefetch effect that cannot be executed in parallel is the second group, and the prefetch effect selected in the process of step S2020 belongs to the first group or the second group. The processing may be branched depending on whether it belongs to a group. Note that even a pre-reading effect that can be executed in parallel may be switched (overwritten) to a pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start-up effect.

  Further, the background prefetching effect and the normal prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect) may be executed simultaneously. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure prefetching effect control process capable of simultaneously executing the background prefetching effect and the normal prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect).

  When the background prefetching effect and the hold prefetching effect are executed at the same time, the normal prefetching effect and / or the background prefetching effect can be selected in the process of step S2020. This is different from the process in step S2020 of the special figure prefetch effect control process shown in FIG. Further, the process of step S2021 in FIG. 93 is deleted, and after the setting process of the hold prefetch effect is completed, the background prefetch effect setting process is executed. That is, after the process of step S2011, the process from step S2022 to step 2026 may be executed.

  Also, only in a specific state, a plurality of normal prefetch effects may be executed in parallel. For example, a plurality of normal prefetch effects may be executed in parallel only when the normal prefetch effect that has been executed in advance has a lower degree of expectation than the newly executed normal prefetch effect.

  In addition, the information indicating whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect included in the received special symbol hold command and the current gaming state stored on the peripheral board side (the gaming state here is limited to certain change and short time) The priority is based on consistency with the game, such as changing, reaching, hitting a big hit (opening, ending, winning a prize opening, etc.), waiting for customers, etc.) It may be determined whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect. When giving priority to the special symbol hold command, priority is given to the information indicating whether or not the special figure prefetching effect included in the special symbol hold command is executed regardless of the gaming state, and the gaming state (probability state or special figure prefetching effect being executed). In the case of giving priority to the special symbol hold command, the special figure prefetching effect may not be executed even if the special symbol prefetching effect includes information that permits execution of the special figure prefetching effect.

  If the special symbol hold command includes information permitting the execution of the special figure prefetching effect, if the special figure prefetching effect is not executed, for example, a dedicated prefetch lottery table (non-matching special table) is provided. Whether or not to execute the special figure pre-reading effect may be selected by lottery based on the mismatch-only table. At this time, in this non-matching table, it is set so that the probability of selecting a scenario to return to the normal mode (a state in which the special figure pre-reading effect has not been executed) is increased, and the expectation level is gradually lowered in addition. As described above, the production mode changes, or the production of the mode that is not executed in the normal special figure prefetching production is executed. Note that if the information indicating whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect included in the special symbol hold command and the current gaming state stored on the peripheral board side do not match, the player should not be misunderstood. Alternatively, it may be forced to return to the normal performance mode.

  Also, if the information indicating whether or not the special figure pre-reading effect included in the received special symbol hold command is consistent with the gaming state, there is a possibility of malfunction such as a program bug or electrostatic noise. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to find out the occurrence of abnormalities by executing an effect that cannot be executed at normal time, rather than simply controlling so that the special figure pre-reading effect is not executed. It can be used for inspection of gaming machines.

  As described above, after the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the special figure prefetching effect can be executed by the main control board 4100 (first prefetch determination means), the special control board 4140 is based on the gaming state and other starting memories. A second pre-reading determination unit that can determine whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed and the contents of the effect are provided.

[21-3. Example of production]
Subsequently, a specific example of the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) executed by the control described above will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) in the present embodiment. The special figure prefetching effect described in FIG. 97 is a background prefetching effect in which the background changes, and the background can further change at a predetermined timing according to the degree of expectation. Hereinafter, a specific example of the background prefetching effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 (A) shows a state before the background prefetching effect is executed, and shows a point in time when the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 is finished and the special symbol is fixed. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (A), four special symbols 1 start-up memories are reserved.

  After the special symbol is stopped, the start-up memory that has been put on hold is digested, and the variation display of the special symbol is started. And as shown to FIG. 97 (B), the state in which the background prefetching effect was started is shown. At this time, the start memory that is the target of the background prefetching effect is one of the three start memories that are reserved. It may be possible for the player to specify the start memory that is the target of the special figure pre-reading effect at the timing when the background pre-reading effect is started, or the notification is made when the start memory that is the target of the background pre-reading effect is digested You may make it do. Note that if a highly anticipated variation pattern is selected in the start-up memory that is the target of the background prefetching effect, the variation will be the background prefetching effect during the decorative symbol variation display (for example, when a reach occurs). The player can grasp that it is the target.

  In the background prefetching effect of this embodiment, clouds appear in the background. Further, the background change due to the background prefetching effect is configured to progress in stages, and the appearing clouds change in stages. You may make it determine the pattern in which a background (cloud) changes according to the expectation degree of jackpot. Specifically, when the decorative symbol variation stops (FIG. 97 (C)), the reserved start memory is digested and the next variation is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), It turns into a rain cloud by darkening the color. After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), it changes to a thundercloud, and further lightning is generated, resulting in a major storm. At this time, the hold display is reduced or hidden with the occurrence of reach. In this embodiment, the darker the color of the cloud, the higher the degree of expectation, and the highest degree of expectation when a thundercloud occurs. However, the sun disappears as a special effect (for example, a big hit is confirmed). Alternatively, it may be (FIG. 97 (F)).

  In addition, the timing at which the background changes first may be the timing at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102), or may be the time when the decoration symbol starts to change. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols start to change, and even if a plurality of starting holes are won in a predetermined state (for example, a normal gaming state), a display is made so that the winning at the plurality of starting holes can be determined. However, even if a prize is awarded to multiple starting holes in a state different from the predetermined state, it is difficult or impossible to determine the winnings at the plurality of starting holes, and the decorative pattern fluctuates when the state is different from the predetermined state. While a plurality of game balls start and enter during this time, it is difficult for the player to recognize which start memory is expected to be high.

  In addition, when the number of holds is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 3 or more), there is a certain grace period from the start of highly anticipated start-up memory until the fluctuation starts, and multiple execution timings of the background pre-reading effect are set If possible, the background prefetching effect may be started after a certain period. For example, with respect to the special figure pre-reading effect that occurs when the number of holds is 3 or more, no special effect is executed when the hold 1 and hold 2 are used, and the special figure pre-read effect is started at the timing when the hold 3 is used. In this case, a scenario such as “no change → no change → prefetch A” may be set as a special figure prefetch effect scenario, and lottery may be selected for each variation. In the case of lottery for each variation, as described above, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by preventing the decline from occurring.

  By configuring as described above, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start memory that was the target of the special figure pre-reading effect, and all fluctuations that are executed until the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern with high expectation is started. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the display, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, the timing at which the background changes stepwise may be changed every time the decoration symbol changes, or may be changed every predetermined time regardless of the decoration symbol change start timing. As a result, the background can be changed in a plurality of stages even when the number of start-up memories to be digested in advance is small. In addition, when reach occurs in the decorative symbol variation display, the reach effect may be executed in parallel with the background prefetch effect, or the background prefetch effect may be stopped and the reach effect may be executed.

  Subsequently, when a start memory with a high expectation degree of jackpot is newly generated while the background pre-reading effect is being executed, the background pre-read effect being executed in advance is based on the newly generated start memory. An example of the effect when switching (overwriting) to the background prefetch effect will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching from the currently executed special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) to the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory.

  FIG. 98 (A) shows the state before the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) is executed, as in FIG. 97 (A), and the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 is completed. , Shows the time when the symbol is fixed. The start memory of special symbol 1 is reserved for four.

  In addition, FIG. 98 (B) shows a state in which, as in FIG. 97 (B), the reserved start-up memory is newly digested, the special symbol variation display is started, and the background pre-reading effect is started. . Thereafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped (FIG. 98 (C)), and the start-up memory that has been put on hold is digested to start the variation of the decorative symbol and the background is gradually changed (FIG. 98 (D)). The variation display of the decorative design is stopped (FIG. 98 (E)). At this time, the background may be changed independently of the decorative pattern variation display.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), two game balls are newly won at the start winning opening during the special symbol variation display, and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four again. Then, when the expected degree that the newly generated startup memory is a big hit is higher than the expected level of the background prefetching effect started in FIG. 98B, that is, the background prefetching effect being executed, The background prefetching effect is interrupted, and the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory is executed.

  For example, during the execution of the special figure pre-reading effect, the lottery of the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory may be enabled. This lottery may always be possible, or specific conditions (for example, the content of the pre-reading effect currently being produced, the contents of the decorative design change or the stop symbol, and whether or not the lottery can be selected by random lottery) are established. May be possible. When a special drawing prefetch effect lottery based on a newly generated start memory is won, the display mode of the special figure prefetch effect is determined. When the determined display mode is compared with the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect being executed, and the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory is a higher-expected display mode Is switched to the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect to be newly executed at a predetermined timing (next fluctuation start, reach occurrence, symbol stop, etc.). In addition, when the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed is lower in expectation than the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect being executed, the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed is switched. Alternatively, the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect being executed may be continued, or the special figure prefetching effect being executed may be stopped.

  In the background pre-reading effect of the present embodiment, the effect mode related to “weather” is used, but the subsequent special figure pre-reading effect to be newly executed may not be directly related to “weather”. For example, when the special figure pre-reading effect being executed is related to “weather”, the content of the subsequent special figure pre-reading effect may be related to a car race. By executing a special figure prefetching effect related to the special figure prefetching effect being executed, the player can feel as if he / she is executing a series of scenarios and the period of the prefetching effect is extended. it can.

  In addition, in the scenario of the special figure prefetching effect that will be newly executed, the scenario of the special figure prefetching effect that is being executed is compared, and the scenario of the special figure prefetching effect that is currently being executed is combined from the scenario. New scenarios may be combined. For example, if the scenario of the pre-reading special effect is “cloudy → rain cloud → cumulonimbus” and the scenario of the special pre-reading effect is “lightly cloudy → snow cloud → large storm” <Cumulonimbus <Large storm), when the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect being executed is “Rain cloud”, the overall flow of the pre-reading effect mode is “cloudy”. → Rain cloud → light cloudy → thundercloud → large storm ”. Although the expectation is once lowered at the time of switching, the expectation once lowered in the subsequent display mode becomes higher. In this case, by preparing a scenario that changes in the order of “cloudy → rain cloud → light cloudy” as a special figure prefetching effect of false (gase), the “thundercloud” that appears after the light cloudy, Expectation can be further increased.

  In addition, when executing a special figure prefetching effect of an unrelated scenario as a scenario of a subsequent special figure prefetching effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that a new start memory with high expectation has occurred. Even if the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure pre-reading effect in the middle is out of place, the player's expectation can be maintained until the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure pre-reading effect based on the subsequent startup memory is known.

  FIG. 98 (F) shows a state in which the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory has been started. After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the color of the cloud changes so that it becomes darker, and as shown in FIG. 98 (H), lightning appears from the darker cloud.

  In FIG. 98 (F), the color of the cloud is lighter than in FIG. 98 (E), and the progress of the background prefetching effect has returned to the previous stage. As described above, when the progress of the background prefetching effect returns to the previous stage, the player can recognize that the start memory having a higher expectation has been added, and can further enhance the sense of expectation. . It should be noted that for these cloud change effects, an effect mode is set in advance as a scenario, and a plurality of scenarios may be combined, or a scenario combined in advance may be prepared.

  On the other hand, the subsequent background prefetching effect may be started so as to continue the interrupted background prefetching effect without returning the background prefetching effect to the previous stage. By controlling in this way, the player can maintain a state in which the expectation of jackpot is continued for a longer time.

  Reach occurs even in the variable display corresponding to the interrupted background pre-reading effect. In this case, the reach effect is executed, and the background pre-reading effect is continuously executed after the next variable display is started. do it.

  It should be noted that the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) for changing the background is executed in parallel with the special figure prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect) for changing the display mode of the hold display of the start memory having a high expectation described above. It may be. The player may be aware of the start memory corresponding to the background pre-reading effect, but in this case, the player's expectation is higher than when the display mode of the hold display is changed, You may make it raise an expectation further.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a start memory with a higher expectation degree of big hit occurs while the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, the special figure prefetching effect that is being executed in advance is displayed. By switching (overwriting) to the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory, it becomes possible to give the player the original expectation of the big hit, and the effect of the pre-reading effect can be maximized. . Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress that the interest of a game reduces.

  Finally, an example of an effect in the case where the hold prefetch effect and the background prefetch effect are executed in parallel will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the hold prefetch effect and the background prefetch effect are executed in parallel, and the background prefetch effect being executed is switched to the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory. In the effect example shown in FIG. 99, a background prefetch effect related to the hold prefetch effect is executed.

  FIG. 99 (A) shows a state before the pre-reading effect is executed, and shows a point in time when the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is finished and the off symbol is fixed. In the state shown in FIG. 99A, three start memories are held. FIG. 99 (B) shows a state in which the start-up memory that has been put on hold has been digested, the number of hold has changed from 3 to 2, and the special symbol variation display has started.

  Thereafter, one game ball is won at the start winning opening during the change of the special symbol of FIG. 99 (B), and the winning lottery for the pre-reading effect in the start winning is won. FIG. 99 (C) shows a state in which the variation of the special symbol continues and the hold prefetch effect is executed. At this time, the hold display of hold 3 changes to a “cumulonimbus” shape instead of the normal round shape. Further, in the start-up memory in which the hold prefetch effect is executed, the background prefetch effect is executed in parallel with the hold prefetch effect. In the background prefetching effect, the background changes from “cloudy” to “rainy cloud” and finally changes to “thundercloud (cumulonimbus)”. In this way, the hold display changes to “cumulonimbus” by the hold prefetching effect, and the background finally changes to “thundercloud” related to “cumulonimbus”.

  FIG. 99 (D) shows a state where the special symbol variation display has been completed. Subsequently, FIG. 99 (E) shows a state in which the next reserved start memory is digested and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, as a background prefetching effect, a cloud indicating “cloudy” is displayed in the background. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the special symbol variation display ends. At this time, the cloud displayed in the background may be left as it is or may be deleted once. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that the background prefetching effect has been executed.

  FIG. 99 (G) shows a state in which the next hold start memory is further digested and the special symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display is in a state where the hold 1 is “cumulonimbus”, the hold 2 is “normal”, the hold 3 is “storm”, and the hold 4 is turned off. Further, as a background prefetching effect, the background changes from “cloud” to “rain cloud”. In addition, as a result of two game balls winning the start winning opening during the special symbol variation display and the second start memory (hold 3) winning the pre-reading effect execution lottery, the hold display is “Arashi” It changes to the shape shown. Further, the background prefetching effect is executed based on the start memory corresponding to the hold 3. At this time, a scenario is selected in which the background changes from “lightly cloudy” to “thundercloud” and finally changes to “large storm”. Since the start-up memory with the hold display “storm” has a higher expectation level that is a big hit than the start-up memory with the hold display “cumulonimbus”, the background prefetch effect switching (overwriting) is executed. FIG. 99 (H) shows a state in which the special symbol variation display is finished, and rain clouds are continuously displayed in the background.

  FIG. 99 (I) shows a state in which the starting memory whose reserved display is “cumulonimbus” is digested and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also, if the background prefetching effect is continued, cumulonimbus clouds (thunder clouds) should be displayed, but the background is “lightly cloudy” because the hold display is switched to the background prefetching effect based on the start memory of “storm”. Changed to At this time, the hold display is in a state where the hold 1 is “normal”, the hold 2 is “storm”, and the hold 3 and the hold 4 are turned off.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), reach is generated based on the start-up memory in which the hold display is “cumulonimbus”, and the reach effect is executed. At this time, the background and the hold display remain unchanged.

  When the reach variation in FIG. 99 (J) is completed, the result of the special symbol variation display is lost as shown in FIG. 99 (K). At this time, the background remains lightly cloudy.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (L), when the next change is started, the background changes to a thundercloud. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (M), the variation of the special symbol is completed. At this time, the background and the hold display are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Further, when the hold display has digested the start-up memory of “storm”, as shown in FIG. 99 (N), the special symbol variation display is started. At this time, all the hold displays are turned off, and the background changes to “large storm (thunder + storm)”. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (O), the variation display of the special symbol is confirmed and stopped, and a big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the background pre-reading effect and the background pre-reading effect are associated with each other and displayed in accordance with the final display of the scenario, so that the background finally changes when the hold display changes. It is possible to determine in advance (what kind of scenario is selected (occurs)). In addition, the display mode corresponding to the hold display may not correspond to the final stage of the scenario, and may be the first or middle stage. If it is an intermediate stage, there is a possibility of changing to a display mode with higher expectation in the final stage, and the player's expectation can be enhanced.

[22. Modification example for effect control by level management]
As described above, the control for preventing the fall at the time of production execution has been described. However, when the production is executed at a predetermined timing for each variation pattern, the production data becomes enormous and the management becomes difficult when the production variation increases. . In addition, production control such as the above-described process for preventing fall-down is complicated, and for example, when a rare production is executed, it may be difficult to find even if there is an error in the production data. Furthermore, enormous man-hours are required to execute tests for all patterns.

  Therefore, as a third modification of the present embodiment, a gaming machine that makes it possible to easily manage the production data by managing the production hierarchically is proposed. Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to reduce the capacity of data necessary for executing the effect and prevent an error in setting the effect data.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, a “level” corresponding to the contents of an effect that can be executed in response to a prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the time of starting winning or a special figure variation pattern command transmitted at the start of variation. Production standard information) ”. The production content is determined based on the level. Hereinafter, an example of selecting a notice effect (including the above-described story reach notice effect and pseudo-continuous notice effect) and a change effect based on the level will be described.

[22-1. Variation pattern]
First, in order to simplify the following description, a simplified variation pattern is defined. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of types of variation patterns according to the third modification of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, the variation pattern command is composed of a status (STS) and a mode (MODE), and these are combined to form a variation pattern command.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern 1 is “ordinary”, the fluctuation pattern 2 is “normal reach”, the fluctuation pattern 3 is “normal reach”, the fluctuation pattern 4 is “SP reach”, and the fluctuation pattern 5 is “ "SP reach (win)". The branch number added to each variation pattern corresponds to the number of pseudo consecutive times. Specifically, when the branch number is 1, the number of pseudo-continuations is 1,..., And when the branch number is 4, the number of pseudo-continuations is 4. In the third modification of the present embodiment, a maximum of four pseudo continuous fluctuations can be executed. Therefore, in the third modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the status (STS) corresponds to the number of pseudo consecutive times, and the mode (MODE) corresponds to the variation pattern.

  Regarding the reach mode, the SP reach has a higher degree of expectation than the normal reach, and in the case of quasi-continuous fluctuations, the greater the number of quasi-continuous times, the greater the expectation that will be a big hit.

[22-2. Level (direction standard information)]
Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the level (effect standard information) will be described. In Modification 3 of the present embodiment, the higher the level is, the higher the expectation level for jackpots is set. Therefore, the level is set corresponding to the expected level of the variation pattern. FIG. 101A is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern and the level in the third modification of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101 (A), a basic level is set for each variation pattern, level (LV) 1 for variation pattern 1, LV2 for variation pattern 2, LV3 for variation pattern 3, and variation pattern. 4 is set to LV4, and the fluctuation pattern 5 is set to LV5.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, the basic level is set, but in practice, the level is set based on the variation pattern and the number of pseudo-continuations. For example, as shown in FIG. 101A, in the case of the variation pattern 3, LV3 is set as the basic level, but when the number of pseudo-continuations is 3, LV4 higher than the basic level is selected. It is set to be. The variation pattern 3 is a case where the normal reach is executed and the big hit occurs, but the player's expectation can be enhanced by executing an effect that should not be executed in the normal reach. On the other hand, in the variation pattern 4, when the number of pseudo-reams is small, LV2 lower than the basic level is set. In the variation pattern 4, the SP reach is executed, but the variation display result is out of order, so that it is possible to prevent the expectation from being excessively lowered by lowering the expectation level of the effect.

  As described above, since the level is set based on the variation pattern and the number of pseudo-continuations, in the third modification of the present embodiment, the level corresponds to the prefetch command and the variation pattern command. Since the variation pattern indicated by the prefetch command and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command are the same, the level corresponding to the prefetch command and the level corresponding to the variation pattern command are the same when the start memory is the same. . The level may be determined when a prefetch command is received, a flag corresponding to the specified level may be set, and the level may be specified from the flag or the like when a variation pattern command is received. That is, a level corresponding to the contents of an effect that can be executed by determining the level corresponding to the prefetch command when receiving the prefetch command is defined, and corresponding to the variation pattern command when receiving the variation pattern command The effect may be selected according to the level defined when the prefetch command is received without determining the level to be used.

  Moreover, in the modification 3 of this embodiment, it is possible to set a level based on a fluctuation pattern and a gaming state. FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern and the gaming state of the third modification of the present embodiment. In this modified example, as described above, the variation display probability state (low probability state (normal state), high probability state) and the operation state (short time state) of the ordinary electric accessory are set as the gaming state. Specifically, there are a low probability non-short state, a low probability short state, a high probability non-short state (so-called latent probability change), and a high probability short-time state (so-called probability change state).

  When the level is set to a level different from the basic level according to the gaming state, for example, when the player does not grasp the gaming state, the gaming state may be suggested. Specifically, when the player cannot grasp whether the player is in a high probability state or a low probability state in a high probability non-short state, a level different from the basic level is set as shown in FIG. To do. For example, when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the high probability non-short-time state, a level (LV2) higher than the basic level (LV1) is set, and in the case of the variation pattern 4, a level lower than the basic level (LV4). By setting (LV1), control is performed so that an effect that is not normally executed is executed, which suggests that the player is in a high probability state.

  In addition, although the high probability non-short-time state (so-called latent probability change) has been described, a level different from the basic level may be set for game play. For example, when the gaming state is a high probability short-time state and a normal big hit that does not shift to the high probability state occurs in the variation pattern 5, a level lower than the basic level is set and an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed. It can be suggested that it falls from a high probability state.

  Further, the level may be changed with the progress of the pseudo-continuation. As a result, even if a variation pattern with low expectation is selected, if the variation display result is a big hit, it is possible to execute an effect with high expectation by promoting the level according to the progress of the effect. Therefore, a player's interest can be raised in steps. Specifically, the level of the effect that is executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped may be set to be higher in the second half.

  Furthermore, the selection of the level may be determined based on the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot). For example, if it is a big hit with a lot of award balls after shifting to the probability variation state, the level is set high, and if it is a big hit that does not shift to the probability variation state or a big hit without a prize ball (relatively), it is relatively Set to a lower level. In addition to the gaming state, the level is set low in the case of a big hit that shifts to the normal state while it is in the probability variation state, and the level is high when the transition to the probability variation state or the probability variation state is maintained. You may make it set to.

  Also, in the third modification of the present embodiment, whether or not an effect can be executed and the type of effect to be executed differ depending on the set level. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for setting whether or not a notice effect can be executed for each level according to the third modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 102 shows whether or not an effect (notice effect) suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot in the special symbol variation display can be executed.

  More specifically, referring to FIG. 102, as examples of the notice effect, the movable combination (the combination A, the combination B), the background of the display screen (the background image A, the background image B, the background image C), the above The background of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific performance (Notice 1, Notice 2, Notice 3, Notice 4, and Notice 5) can be executed, and the effect by the feature B is more expected than the feature A It is also suggested that the expectation is higher when the background image C is set to be higher in the order of the background image A to the background image C and the background image C is displayed than the background image A. It is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher when the notice 5 is displayed than the notice 1 is set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of notice 1 to notice 5. The background image A displays the background of the display screen in green corresponding to the notice 2 and the background image B displays the background of the display screen in a leopard pattern corresponding to the notice 4. The image C displays the background of the display screen in rainbow colors in response to the notice 5. The background image B is a big hit (even if a big hit without a ball is excluded) when the notice effect corresponding to the “leopard pattern” is executed twice or more in the same variable display game as in the notice 4. The background image C is controlled so as to be a big hit when the notice effect corresponding to the “rainbow color” is executed even once, similar to the notice 5. .

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is divided into a plurality of groups for each notice type with the same degree of expectation of jackpot, and the higher the level, the more notice effect according to the notice type with higher degree of expectation of jackpot is possible. However, if a predetermined level is set based on the fluctuation pattern, a big hit expectation level higher than the set level, in other words, a big hit expectation degree higher than the big hit expectation degree set to the predetermined level based on the fluctuation pattern is set. The notice effect according to the notice type belonging to the set group is not executed. That is, as a group having the same degree of expectation of jackpot, a group 1 consisting of an accessory A and a notice 1, a group 2 consisting of a background image A and a notice 2, a group 3 consisting of an accessory B and a notice 3, and a background image B is divided into five groups, group 4 consisting of B and notice 4, and group 5 consisting of background image C and notice 5, and the jackpot expectation increases in the order of group 1 to group 5. Yes. Also, if the level 3 is set based on the variation pattern, for example, the notice types belonging to the groups 1 to 3 in which the jackpot expectation degree lower than the jackpot expectation degree set in the level 3 is set (the accessory A, Although the notice effect according to the notice 1, the background image A, the notice 2, the feature B, and the notice 3) can be executed, the big hit expectation degree higher than the big hit expectation degree set in the level 3 is set. 4 and the notice type belonging to the group 5 (background image B, notice 4, background image C, notice 5) are not executed.

  As described above, the higher the level, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit can be executed, so in the case of the lowest level 1, only the advancement of the effect A with the low degree of expectation can be executed. is there. On the other hand, in the case of level 5, all the notice effects can be executed, and any of the notice effects may be executed, or the notice effect by the movable accessory and the notice by changing the background of the display screen. Allowing the appearance of the notice and the notice effect by changing the background of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect (it does not have to appear at the same time as long as it appears multiple times in the same variable display game) Alternatively, the notice effects may be executed in parallel, for example, if the actions of the movable combination do not interfere with each other, the effects by the movable combination are executed in duplicate.

  Also, the table shown in FIG. 102 may be referred to when each notice effect is executed, and it may be determined whether or not the notice effect may actually be executed. That is, the notice effect to be executed (information related to the notice type stored in the notice mode storage area) is set to the effect type that can be executed according to the level set in the variation pattern shown in FIG. If it is not included, it is determined that the prohibition condition is met (not included in the type of effect that can be executed according to the level in the information related to the notice type stored in the notice mode storage area) Information related to the notice type that is not included in the type of effect that can be executed according to the level, among information about the notice type that is deleted (destroyed) or stored in the notice mode storage area. The processing for setting the production information related to the image data and sound data necessary for executing the announcement production according to the announcement type is not performed. Or the like by) may not perform the announcement attraction that benefit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a notice effect that should not be executed from being executed. As in the case of level 5, such a determination may not be performed when all of them can be executed.

  It should be noted that the notice effect by the accessory or the notice effect by the background image may indicate the result of the variable display during the execution (the change), or the notice effect for the reserved memory where the variable display is not started ( It may be a pre-reading notice effect).

[22-3. Notice lottery]
Next, the selection procedure of the notice effect selected at each lottery timing will be described. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment, FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal notice setting process in the present embodiment, and FIG. 105 is a third modification of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the notice effect of (1), (A) is at the time of the first half fluctuation, (B) is after reach or at the time of quasi-continuous occurrence, (C) is the first half of development after the reach or the pseudo The first half of the reach after the continuous occurrence, (D) shows the lottery probability of the notice effect and the set value of the effect flag in the latter half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the pseudo continuous occurrence. Since the story reach setting process (step S1530), the pseudo continuous variation control process (step S1630), and the prohibition process (step S1560) execute the same processes as described above, the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, since the effect setting process is a process that is substantially the same as that described above, only different processes will be described, and overlapping parts will not be described.

  When the effect control program receives the change pattern command, the effect control program executes effect setting processing for setting the content of the effect to be executed based on the received special figure change pattern command and the special symbol type command (step S1503). . When the effect setting process is started, the effect control program specifies the change pattern based on the special figure change pattern command received from the main control board 4100. When the change pattern is specified, the notice effect described above (movable accessory (object A, accessory B) Normal notice setting process (step for determining whether or not to execute the background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C)) and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) S1580) is executed. In addition, whether or not to execute the background of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect (notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, and notice 5) and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) are determined. The processing to be performed is performed in the story reach setting process (step S1570) of the story reach setting process (step S1530) and the pseudo continuous notice setting process (step S1670) of the pseudo continuous variation control process (step S1630), as in the above example. Is called.

[22-4. Normal notice setting process]
First, the normal notice setting process will be described. When the normal notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first determines the basic level set in the special symbol variation pattern, and selects the notice determination table (FIG. 105) according to the basic level (step S1581). ). At this time, the notice determination table according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probable change state or the normal state) or the operation state of the ordinary electric accessory (short-time state) May be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice determination table (FIG. 105) includes “no notice”, in other words, not only the notice type (notice form) but also whether or not the notice effect is executed will be drawn in advance. Although the determination table (FIG. 105) is configured, when a table for drawing whether or not to execute the notice effect is separately provided and it is determined that the notice effect is executed based on the table and a predetermined random number, the notice determination table is determined. The notice type may be determined using (FIG. 105).

  FIG. 105 (A) shows the lottery probability of the notice effect executed in the first half of the change of the special symbol. At level 1, the notice effect is executed with the probability of 50%, and the notice effect according to the accessory A is executed with the probability of 50%. When the notice effect is not executed, the flag setting value of the notice flag is set to 0. Similarly, when the notice effect according to the accessory A is executed, the notice effect according to the background image A is displayed. 2 is set when executed, 3 is set when a notice effect according to the accessory B is executed, 4 is set when a notice effect according to the background image B is executed, and according to the background image C. When the notice effect is executed, 5 is set. Expectations of jackpots increase in the order of the combination A, background image A, combination B, background image B, and background image C. When a high expectation level is selected, it is easy to select a notice type with a high expectation level. It is set to be.

  FIG. 105 (B) is a notice effect that is executed after a reach or when a quasi-continuous event occurs, FIG. 105 (C) is a notice effect that is executed in the first half of the reach after the reach or the first half of the reach after the quasi-continuous event, and FIG. The lottery probability of the notice effect executed in the second half or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of pseudo-continuous and the set value of the effect flag are shown. Each notice effect is generally set with the same tendency as the notice effect executed in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol in FIG. 105 (A), and after the second half of the development after the reach in FIG. When the expectation of jackpot is high when it is executed like the notice effect executed in the second half of the reach, it is set so that the notice effect with a higher expectation is easier to be executed, and the player's expectation is I try to increase it. In Level 1, since the notice effect is not executed in the latter half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, 100% is set to “none”.

  Next, the effect control program acquires a random value (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice type (step S1582). Based on the notice determination table selected in the process of step S1581 and the random value acquired in step S1582, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice mode, notice) are determined from the notice determination table (FIG. 105). Type) (step S1583), and the advance notice selected as a predetermined storage area assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (area corresponding to the timing for executing the notice effect in the normal notice mode storage area) The type is stored (step S1584), the notice flag corresponding to the execution time of the notice effect is set, and the process ends (step S1585).

  In addition, the lottery is performed at each timing of the first half change, the time after reach or the occurrence of quasi-continuous, the first half of reach after reach or the first half of reach after occurrence of quasi-continuous, and the second half of reach after development or the second half of reach after occurrence of quasi-continuous. Do. However, there is a case where a lottery is not performed according to the contents of the special symbol synchronization effect executed based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, the variation pattern 1 shown in FIG. 100 does not generate reach, so FIG. Based on the change first half notice determination table of (A), a process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed at the time of first half change and a notice type to be executed is executed, and lottery is not performed at other timings. Note that a process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect for all timings and the type of notice to be executed is executed regardless of the contents of the special figure synchronization effect executed based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. The determination result may be discarded in accordance with the contents of the figure-synchronizing effect. For example, for the fluctuation pattern 1 shown in FIG. 100, the reach is reached when the first half changes based on the respective tables of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (D). Whether or not the notice effect is executed at the timing of the later or pseudo-continuous occurrence, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-continuous occurrence, and the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the pseudo-continuous occurrence Execute the process to determine the type, discard the determination result for timings other than the first half of the change without storing in the normal notice mode storage area, or normal notice mode storage area It may be deleted the notice information in accordance with the notice type and execution timing or the like stored in.

  In this way, when a special figure variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, a special symbol variation pattern is identified from the received special symbol variation pattern command, and the basic pattern set in the identified special symbol variation pattern is determined. Whether or not to execute a notice effect (movable accessory (object A, accessory B), background of display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C)) using the notice determination table according to the level. The contents of the notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) are determined.

[22-5. Story reach notice setting process]
Next, a story reach notice setting process according to a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a story reach notice setting process according to a modification. FIG. 107A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a story reach notice determination table according to a modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the process common to the above-mentioned story reach notice setting process (FIG. 56), and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the modification, as described above, whether or not to execute the notice effect and the kind of notice to be executed are determined according to the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a story reach notice determination table is provided for each basic level as shown in FIG. Then, the effect control program discriminates the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol, and selects the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 107A (A)) corresponding to the discriminated basic level (step A). S1571A), based on the selected story reach notice determination table and the random number obtained in step S1572, the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect and the story reach notice to be executed from the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 107A). The contents of the effect (notice mode, notice type) are determined (step S1573).

  In addition, story reach notice according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or the normal state) and the operation state of the normal electric accessory (short-time state) The decision table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice determination table (FIG. 107 (A)) includes “no notice”, in other words, not only the notice type (notice form) but also whether or not the notice effect is to be executed. The story reach notice determination table (FIG. 107 (A)) is configured as described above, but a table for drawing whether or not to execute the notice effect is provided separately, and the notice effect is executed based on the table and a predetermined random number. If it is determined, the notice type may be determined using the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 107A).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol identified from the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is a variation pattern for executing the story reach, the identified special symbol. Determine whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect using the story reach notice determination table corresponding to the basic level set in the fluctuation pattern of and the contents of the notice effect to be executed (notice type and notice mode) It is like that.

[22-6. Pseudo-continuous notice setting process]
Next, a pseudo continuous notice setting process according to a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pseudo continuous notice setting process according to a modification. FIG. 107B is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pseudo continuous change notice determination table according to a modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the process common to the above-mentioned pseudo | simulation continuous notice setting process (FIG. 65), and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the modification, as described above, whether or not to execute the notice effect and the kind of notice to be executed are determined according to the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a pseudo-continuous change notice determination table is provided for each basic level as shown in FIG. 107 (B). Then, the effect control program determines the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol, and selects the pseudo-continuous variation notice determination table (FIG. 107A (A)) corresponding to the determined basic level ( Step S1671A), based on the selected pseudo-continuous change notice determination table and the random value acquired in Step S1672, the presence / absence and execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect from the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)). The content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (notice mode, notice type) is determined (step S1673).

  It should be noted that the quasi-continuous variation may vary depending on the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or the normal state) or the operating state of the normal electric accessory (short time state) The notice determination table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) includes “no notice”, in other words, not only the notice type (notice form) but also whether or not the notice effect is to be executed. Although the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) is configured as described above, a table for drawing whether or not the notice effect is executed is provided separately, and the notice effect is determined based on the table and a predetermined random number. If it is determined to be executed, the notice type may be determined using the notice determination table for pseudo continuous fluctuation (FIG. 107 (B)).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol identified from the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is a variation pattern for executing pseudo continuous variation, the identified special Whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the pseudo-continuous change notice determination table corresponding to the basic level set in the symbol variation pattern, and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) It comes to decide.

[22-7. Special figure prefetch effect control process]
Next, execution control of the prefetch notice effect in the third modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure prefetch effect control process in the third modification of the present embodiment, and FIG. 110 shows a table for selecting the content of the prefetch notice effect in the third modification of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example.

  When the special figure pre-reading effect control process is started, first, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) instructs a special figure pre-reading effect transmitted at the time of starting winning (special symbol 1 holding number designation command or special symbol). It is determined whether or not a 2-hold number designation command (with prefetching), FIG. 16) has been received (step S3000). When a command for instructing a special figure pre-reading effect is received (the result of step S3000 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is set to the variation pattern of the special symbol specified based on the received variation pattern pre-read command. The pre-reading effect lottery table (FIG. 110) corresponding to the determined basic level is selected (step S3001), and a random number value (pre-reading pre-notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the notice type ) (Step S3002), based on the selected prefetch effect lottery table and the random value obtained in step S3002, the presence or absence of the prefetch notice effect and the prefetch to be executed from the prefetch effect lottery table (FIG. 107 (B)). The content of the notice effect (notice mode and notice type) is determined (step S3003). .

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. In the pre-reading notice effect, when a game ball wins at the start opening, the display mode of the hold display is changed regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of the start memory held is 0. Change at a predetermined rate.

  When the pre-reading notice effect is not executed, the hold display is “white”. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the display color of the hold display is changed from “white” according to the expectation level. It changes into “blue”, “green”, “leopard pattern”, and “rainbow” with a predetermined probability (FIG. 110). In addition, the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol specified based on the received variation pattern prefetch command is set so that the probability that the color of the hold display changes in the order of 1 to 5 increases.

  When the reserved display color is selected, the effect control program executes a prefetch effect setting process for setting for changing to the selected color (step S3004). In the pre-reading effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the hold display, and settings are made to output sound effects at the timing of the change, turn on the lamp, and move the accessory. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S3005). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of pre-reading notice effects from being executed for one start-up memory.

  In addition, when the display color of the hold display is changed to other than “white”, the presence / absence of a change in the hold display and the change timing are selected by lottery, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the lottery result. Also good. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect may be due to the action of a movable accessory, or may be a lamp lighting or sound output.

  Further, when the game state at the time of starting the variable display corresponding to the command instructing the special figure prefetching effect is different from the time of receiving the command instructing the special figure prefetching effect (for example, the high probability state that continues for a predetermined number of times is ended) If the result of the notice effect and the variable display is likely to be flawed, setting the level to 1 prevents the player from being discouraged due to an unfairly expected effect being executed. Can do. Further, it is not always necessary to set the level to 1. For example, if the result of variable display is a big hit, the level may be set to the maximum value.

  On the other hand, when the command for instructing the special figure pre-reading effect has not been received (the result of step S3000 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends this process.

  If the power is shut off before the start of the change after the level of the pre-reading notice effect is set, information regarding the level of the pre-reading notice effect is initialized by the power interruption process, and a predetermined number of changes ( Within the upper limit of the number of suspensions (maximum of 8)), the preliminary lottery may be performed with the level of fluctuation as the lowest level (level 1).

  Specifically, when a hold number command is received following the power-on command when the power is turned on, the level of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold number based on the received hold number command (the total number for the two special types) May be the lowest level. When the power-on command has not been received following the power-on command, the level of fluctuation is set to the lowest level for a predetermined number (eight for the special figure type). May be.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to manage production data hierarchically by setting a level (production standard information) corresponding to a variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to reduce errors in setting the production data. In particular, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of errors that are difficult to find, such as rare performance patterns, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the operation test of the gaming machine. And by providing the game machine which operate | moves stably, the reduction of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

  Further, by drawing lottery contents based on the level, the contents of the pre-reading notice effect and the normal notice effect (movable accessory (object A, accessory B) executed in the special figure synchronous effect (the change)) It is possible to prevent the display screen background (background image A, background image B, background image C)), the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect from not matching. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating due to a decrease in the sense of expectation that occurs when the notice effect is generated after the start of the change.

  Note that the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the special diagram variation pattern command in the normal notice setting process (step S1580), the story reach notice setting process (step S1570), and the pseudo continuous notice setting process (step S1670) is set. It is determined whether the basic level is inconsistent with the level set at the time of starting winning (when receiving a command for instructing special figure pre-reading). The determined level may be selected. Thereby, when a plurality of levels can be selected according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent production contents and habits at the time of prefetching. If it is determined that the result of the variable display is a big hit, the level may be set higher. In this case, the player's sense of expectation is not impaired even if the expectation level of the effect in the variation is higher than the prefetch effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of notice types (an accessory A, an accessory B, a background image A, a background image B, a background image C, an announcement 1) according to the level (effect standard information) corresponding to the variation pattern. In other words, among the notice 2, the notice 3, the notice 4, and the notice 5), it can be paraphrased to switch between an executable notice type and an impossible notice effect. That is, when the level corresponding to the effect pattern is 1, as shown in FIG. 101, the notice effect corresponding to the accessory A, the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect corresponding to the notice 1 are executed. On the other hand, execution of other notice types is restricted. When the level corresponding to the variation pattern is 5, the notice effect according to all the notice types is made executable, and the execution of the notice effect is not limited. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the permissible execution ranges of a plurality of types of notice types are determined according to the level corresponding to the change pattern (direction standard information), and the notice types that can be executed according to the change pattern (notice The allowable execution range of the type is changed.

  Note that the basic level is not limited to one corresponding to the variation pattern, and a plurality of levels may be set corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, the content of the pre-reading notice effect (notice type, etc.) is determined from among a plurality of levels set corresponding to the variation pattern by lottery or the like, and so as to correspond to the decided level. ), And a normal notice effect (movable accessory (object A, accessory B)) and background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C) executed in the special figure synchronized effect (the variation) The content (notice type, etc.) of the story reach notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc.) can be determined and executed, and the effect display can be executed without causing any contradiction.

[22-8. Prohibition processing]
Next, the prohibition process of the modification will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the special figure synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuation display game) on the main control board 4100, Of these, control is performed so that a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded) is always executed when a notice effect according to a specific notice type (in this example, “leopard pattern”) is executed twice or more. ing. Since the prohibition process is the same as the process of FIG. 69 described above, only different portions will be described and duplicate description will not be given.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, a movable accessory (an accessory A, an accessory B) or a display in which whether or not an announcement effect is executed in the normal announcement setting process (step S1580) and an announcement type to be executed are determined. Also in the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as normal notice effect) regarding the screen background (background image A, background image B, background image C), the notice effect according to a specific notice type (in this example, “leopard pattern”) is executed. (“Leopard pattern” is displayed on the background of the display screen as the background image B). In the prohibition process of the modified example, when the result of the variable display game to be executed does not become a big hit (you may exclude the big hit without a ball), a specific notice is given by the above-described story reach notice effect or pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition to restricting the type ("leopard pattern") from being executed more than once, a specific notice when a normal notice effect, a story reach notice effect, and a pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed in a single variable display game. The notice effect (“leopard pattern”) is restricted from being executed more than once.

  In step S1562 of the prohibition process shown in FIG. 69, the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 are stored. Fluctuates by determining the notice type of the story reach notice effect or pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the assigned notice mode storage area and executing the notice effect according to the stored notice type It is determined whether or not a specific notice effect (“leopard pattern”) is to be executed twice or more in one variation display game, even though the result of the display game is not a big hit.

  Specifically, whether or not the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is “background image B” displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen is stored in the notice form storage area. It is determined whether the notice type of the current story reach notice effect or pseudo-continuous notice effect is “notice 4” in which the background portion of the dialogue is displayed in the “leopard pattern” in the area 1912, and is stored in the normal notice mode storage area. Result of winning judgment by executing a normal notice effect based on the stored notice type or executing a story reach notice effect or a pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the notice type stored in the notice mode storage area In spite of not being a big hit, within the same (one time) special drawing synchronization production, the “Leopard Pattern” notice production (background notice B of normal notice production, story reach notice production and pseudo-ream If it is determined that the notice effect 4) is executed more than once, the notice information related to the notice type of the notice effect stored in the notice area and the notice correspondence memory are stored. Delete (destroy) one or both of the notice information related to the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the area, or replace the notice information according to other notice types (step) S1563).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the forecast type of the normal notice effect and the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect fall under the prohibition condition, they are stored in the normal notice mode storage area. Delete one or both of the notice information related to the notice type of the normal notice effect and the notice information related to the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice corresponding storage area ( Discard) or replace with other billion types, one or both of the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are not executed, or one or both notice types are set to `` Leopard Since the “Leopard pattern” will not be displayed because it will be replaced with a different notice type from the notice type that will display the “pattern”, it will be corrected to a condition that does not meet the prohibition conditions. Door can be. As a result, even though the result of the winning judgment is not a big hit, the notice effect that causes the “leopard pattern” to be displayed within the same (one time) special drawing synchronization effect is executed twice or more to discourage the player. Can be avoided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the basic level is set according to the variation pattern, and the type of notice that can be executed differs according to the basic level. When the level corresponding to the variation pattern is 4, the result of the variation display game does not become a big hit as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, and therefore a notice effect that causes the “leopard pattern” to be displayed in the prohibition process. On the other hand, when the level corresponding to the variation pattern is 5, the variation display game results in a big hit when the correction processing is performed so that it is not executed twice or more. Not executed. In this way, the notice type whose execution is restricted is changed according to the level of the fluctuation pattern.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the display color of the hold display may be changed to “leopard pattern” as a pre-reading notice effect. However, even if a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to “leopard pattern” is executed during the variable display game, the above-mentioned prohibition condition is not met. Therefore, when a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to “leopard pattern” is being executed, a notice effect that causes the “leopard pattern” to appear in the normal notice effect, story reach notice effect, or pseudo-continuous notice effect Even if you execute, it is not always a big hit. In other words, not only a special figure synchronization effect executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 but also a specific advance notice effect (“leopard pattern”) for the hold display of the start memory executed on the start memory display unit 1911. It is possible to attract attention by expecting the execution of the number of times (or more) to be announced, and the game is expected to be performed for a specific number of times (notice effect that displays the “leopard pattern” a predetermined number of times or more). It is possible to focus attention on the effects executed in a plurality of areas, that is, the area where the special figure synchronization effect of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed and the area where the start-up memory hold display is performed. In this case, when a pre-reading notice effect is executed and the display color of two or more hold displays is changed to “leopard pattern”, the display color is changed to “leopard pattern”. The result of any of the variable display games in the starting memory to be performed may be a big hit (may exclude a big hit without a ball).

  In addition, a fluctuating display game based on the start memory that changes the display color of the hold display to “leopard pattern” as a pre-reading notice effect is started, and “leopard pattern” is displayed in the normal notice effect, story reach notice effect, and pseudo-continuous notice effect. Even if it is scheduled to execute the announcement effect to be displayed, the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are not met. In other words, when a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” is started as the pre-reading notice effect, the “leopard pattern” is displayed in the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, or the pseudo-continuous notice effect. Even if a notice effect that displays "" is executed, it is not always a big hit. However, when the player starts the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” as the pre-reading notice effect, the “leopard pattern” is already displayed as the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, if the “leopard pattern” is displayed even once in the variable display game, it will be considered as a big hit and the result of the variable display game is expected.

  Further, when it is determined to execute the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the line based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the pseudo-continuous notice effect described above, in step S1562 of the prohibition process. If the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice form storage area is displayed. One or both of the notice information indicating the notice type and the like and the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area may be deleted (destroyed) or may be changed to another notice type. It may be replaced. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the “leopard pattern” notice effect from being executed more than once even though the result of the variable display game is not a big hit.

  In addition, as described above, there are multiple timings for executing the normal notice effect (the first half of the special symbol change, after the reach or when the quasi-run occurs, the first half after the reach or the first half of the reach after the quasi-run, the development after the reach. The latter half of the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous), and the timing after execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect. If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the normal notice effect is already executed at the timing of executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the notice type of the executed normal notice effect indicates “Leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen. In the case of the background image B to be displayed, it is controlled so that the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue as a pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the announcement effect that displays the “leopard pattern” from being displayed continuously, and to notify the “leopard pattern” more than once even though the result of the variable display game does not become a big hit. The production can be prevented from being executed. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the normal notice effect has not been executed yet at the timing of executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the notice type of the normal notice effect to be executed is displayed on the background of the display screen In the case of the background image B displaying the “pattern”, that is, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed before the normal notice effect, and the display screen has a notice type of the normal notice effect executed after the pseudo-notice effect. When the background image B displays the “leopard pattern” as the background (the background image B displays the “leopard pattern” as the background of the display screen when the notification type of the normal notification effect stored in the normal notification mode storage area is the background image B) In addition, the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is notice 4 in which “leopard pattern” is displayed on the background of the dialogue, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is given before the normal notice effect. If it is to be executed, it may be controlled not to execute the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue as the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the pseudo-continuous stored in the notice mode storage area). The notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the notice effect may be deleted (destroyed) or replaced with another notice type). As a result, when the preliminary announcement effect that causes the “leopard pattern” to be displayed is not yet executed when the pseudo-continuous announcement effect is executed, if it is determined in advance to be executed in advance, it is executed first. As the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” is selected as another notice type (the notice 1 to the notice 3 having a lower expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit than the notice 4). (Because notice 5 is selected only when the big hit is a big hit)), it is possible to create a so-called rise state in which the big hit expectation increases as the game progresses, Can be expected to pay attention to the variable display game.

  In addition, among the above-mentioned multiple timings (first half of special symbol change, after reach or pseudo-continuous occurrence, first half of development after reach or first half of reach after pseudo-continuous occurrence, second half of development after reach or second half of reach after occurrence of pseudo-continuous) The timing before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, the first half of the change of the special symbol) and the timing after the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, after the reach or when the pseudo-continuous occurrence, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half after the pseudo-continuous occurrence In the case where the normal notice effect is executed at each of two or more timings including the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, and the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, Later timing (for example, after reach or when quasi-run occurs, first half of reach after reach or first half of reach after quasi-run, second half of development after reach or quasi-continuous If the background type B that displays the “leopard pattern” on the display screen background is determined as the background image B, the “leopard pattern” is displayed on the background of the dialogue as a pseudo-annual announcement effect. The notice type of the normal notice effect that is executed at a timing before the pseudo-continuous notice effect when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit may be displayed on the background of the display screen. If the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” is determined, it may be controlled not to execute the notice 4 for displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue as a pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, a background image B that displays a “leopard pattern” at two or more timings including a timing before the pseudo-continuous notice effect and a timing after the pseudo-continuous notice effect. If it is determined to be the normal notice effect to be executed and the notice 4 to display “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue as the pseudo notice effect, the normal notice that is executed at a timing earlier than the pseudo notice effect. The effect of displaying the “leopard pattern” in the notice type of the effect and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (normal notice effect of the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, the background of the line Control may be performed so as not to execute the pseudo-prediction notice 4 of the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” (of the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area) The notice information indicating the background image B executed at a timing earlier than the similar notice effect is deleted (discarded) or replaced with another notice type (background image A) (when the background image C is a big hit) In addition, the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted (destroyed) or other notice type (varies more than notice 4). The result of the displayed game is a big hit, and the expectation level is low, so it can be replaced with any one of the notice 1 to the notice 3 (because the notice 5 is selected only in the case of a big hit)) Even in this case, it is possible to create a so-called rising state in which the degree of jackpot expectation increases as the game progresses, and it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot and focus attention on the variable display game.

  It should be noted that the lottery process (pseudo-continuous notice setting process) related to the pseudo-continuous notice effect is the same as the normal notice effect at the start of fluctuation (in this example, the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process (step S1550) of the effect setting process (FIG. 103)). In this case, the notice type determined in the normal notice effect setting process (step S1580) and the pseudo-continuous notice setting process (step S1550) respectively expresses “leopard pattern”, in other words What corresponds to the prohibition condition (in this example, the notice type of the normal notice effect is the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, and the notice type of the pseudo continuous notice effect is “leopard pattern” on the background of the line. Is displayed in the normal notice mode storage area, the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the normal notice effect is stored in the notice form storage area. Display the “Leopard Pattern” in a single variable display game by deleting (discarding) one of the notice information indicating the notice type of the similar notice effect, etc., or replacing one with another notice type. It is also possible to correct a state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition by preventing a plurality of effects to be executed. In this case, when the execution timing of the normal notice effect is earlier than the pseudo notice effect, the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the pseudo notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted, It may be possible to replace it with another notice type, which can prevent the notice effect that displays the “leopard pattern” from being displayed continuously and the result of the variable display game is not big hit 2 It is possible to prevent the notice effect that causes the “leopard pattern” to be displayed more than once. In addition, when the execution timing of the normal notice effect is after the pseudo notice effect, in other words, when the false notice effect is executed before the normal notice effect, it is stored in the notice mode storage area. The notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be deleted or replaced with another notice type, so that the “leopard pattern” is still displayed at the timing when the false notice effect is executed. If it is determined that it will be executed after that, the “Leopard pattern” is displayed as the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect that is determined to be executed at the previous timing. The notice 4 to be issued is set to another notice type (the notice 1 to the notice 3 having a lower expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit than the notice 4 (the notice 5 is selected only in the case of the big hit) Ah By replacing in order)), it is possible to create a so-called upstart state jackpot degree of expectation is improved in accordance with the progress of the game, so expect the jackpot to a player can be made to focus on the variable display game.

  In addition, as described above, when all the scenarios for executing the pseudo-continuous variation specific effect are selected at the start of the variation, whether to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the type of notice to be executed are prohibited. The notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area in step S1562 is the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, and is stored in the notice form storage area. When the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is the notice 4 displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the lines, the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area; One or both of the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted (destroyed), or one or both notice types are changed to another It may be changed pointing to tell type. Further, in step S1562 of the prohibition process, the notice type for displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue is stored in the notice mode storage area and the notice type for the story reach notice effect is displayed. When the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” is stored in the background of the dialogue, the notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect are stored. It is also possible to delete (destroy) one or both of the notice information indicating the above, or to replace one or both notice types with another notice type. The pseudo continuous notice effect is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (FIG. 63), and when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated. Is not executed. That is, the normal notice effect and the story reach notice effect are executed according to the passage of time in the special figure synchronization effect, while the pseudo-continuous notice effect is added to the press operation unit in addition to the passage of time in the special figure synchronization effect. It is executed in response to the additional condition of operation 405 being satisfied. Therefore, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, or the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is not the background image B, or the pseudo-continuous notice effect notice stored in the notice mode storage area Even if the type does not correspond to the prohibition condition such as not being the notice 4, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless the additional condition that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is satisfied. In other words, even if the notice 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue is stored in the notice mode storage area, the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not necessarily executed. However, the notice effect that displays the “leopard pattern” is important in that it notifies the player that the game will be a big hit when executed twice or more, and the result of the variable display game will not be a big hit. Nevertheless, if executed more than once, the player may be confused and greatly discouraged. For this reason, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is stored in the notice mode storage area, the notice 4 indicating “leopard pattern” is displayed on the background of the lines, the above-mentioned prohibited conditions are met. For example, the pseudo-announcement effect corresponding to “Notice 4” may not be executed, but for the sake of safety, correct the bug so that it does not fall under the forbidden conditions (the result of the variable display game will not be a big hit) Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the notice effect that causes the “leopard pattern” to be displayed twice or more).

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned example, the correction is made so that the prohibition condition is not met when the prohibition condition is met. However, when the condition can be met, the allowance condition is met at a predetermined ratio. You may do it. For example, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit (may be limited to a big hit with a ball), a specific notice type (in this example, “leopard pattern”) is displayed at a predetermined ratio by lottery or the like. The notice information stored in the normal notice mode storage area or the notice form storage area may be replaced so that the notice effect according to the notice type is executed a predetermined number of times (or more). As a result, the display of the “leopard pattern” can be expected and attention can be paid to the variable display game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is divided into a plurality of groups for each notice type with the same degree of expectation of jackpot, and a specific group (a pre-read notice effect on-hold display display) among these groups. For the notice effect according to the notice type belonging to the leopard pattern, the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect, one special figure synchronization effect (variation) In the display game), multiple appearances (appearing a plurality of times (which may be a predetermined number of times equal to or more than two times) within one special drawing synchronization effect) are restricted. In this example, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the display color of the pre-reading notice effect hold display as a specific group is leopard, the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and Although it is configured to prevent duplicate appearances of the notice effect according to the notice type of the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (multiple appearances within one special drawing synchronization effect), the same applies to other groups as well. If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, it may be possible to prevent duplicate appearance (multiple appearances within one special figure synchronization effect), or some of the other groups (for example, With regard to the display color of the hold-down display of the pre-reading notice effect is rainbow, and the background image C of the normal notice effect is to be allowed to appear repeatedly (multiple appearances within one special drawing synchronization effect). Good. Also, even when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, if it is executed even once for some groups (for example, the notice 5 of the story reach notice effect and the notice 5 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect), the big hit is confirmed. With regard to the premium notice, duplicate appearance (multiple appearances within one special drawing synchronization effect) may be prevented. In addition, a notice effect having an apparent commonality is executed by displaying a “leopard pattern” as a group for preventing a duplicate appearance of a notice effect (a plurality of appearances within one special drawing synchronization effect). Although only the thing is shown, the notice effect of the accessory C may be included as a notice effect that does not have the commonality in appearance by expressing an aspect different from the “leopard pattern”. In addition to the overlapping appearance of the notice effect that expresses the “leopard pattern” (multiple appearances within one special figure synchronization effect), the character C that expresses a mode different from the “leopard pattern” The appearance of the notice effect will be regulated. In addition, it restricts the appearance of duplicates by deleting any or all of the advance notice information stored in the normal advance notice mode storage area or the advance notice form storage area or replacing it with notice information according to other notice types. Not limited to this, the appearance of overlapping may be restricted by specifying the type of the notice effect to be executed with the variation pattern and the notice type, for example, instructing to execute the story reach notice effect of the notice 5 in the story reach. When a special figure fluctuation pattern command is provided that includes a fluctuation pattern and directs execution of a special figure synchronization effect according to the fluctuation pattern, the story reach that displays “rainbow color” is executed only once. You may make it prevent duplication appearance. In addition, a fluctuation pattern for some groups and some types of notices (for example, a premium notice that is determined to be a big hit if executed once, such as a notice 5 of a story reach notice effect and a notice 5 of a pseudo-continuous notice effect). The type of notice effect to be executed and the notice type are designated in the above. For other groups and other notice types, the above-mentioned prohibition process is executed, and when the prohibition condition is met, the normal notice mode storage area and the notice mode storage area It is also possible to prevent duplicate appearances by deleting any or all of the advance notice information stored in or replacing the advance notice information according to other notice types.

  Further, even when the pre-reading notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to “leopard pattern” is executed during the variable display game as described above, the above prohibition condition is not satisfied. Therefore, when a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to “leopard pattern” is being executed, the group is the same level as the group that sets the display color of the hold display as the “leopard pattern” as the pre-reading notice effect. Even if the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed, it is not always a big hit. In other words, the special appearance synchronization is regulated while restricting the repeated appearance of the advance notice effect (multiple appearances within the special figure synchronization effect) within one special figure synchronization effect. In the start-up memory hold display executed in the start-up memory display unit 1911 that is displayed independently of the effect, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect according to the notice type belonging to a specific group is not restricted. For this reason, not only a special figure synchronization effect executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, but also a specific advance notice effect (“leopard pattern”) for the hold display of the start memory executed on the start memory display unit 1911. It is possible to attract attention by expecting the execution of the number of times (or more) to be announced, and the game is expected to be performed for a specific number of times (notice effect that displays the “leopard pattern” a predetermined number of times or more). It is possible to focus attention on the effects executed in a plurality of areas, that is, the area where the special figure synchronization effect of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed and the area where the start-up memory hold display is performed. In this case, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the display color of two or more hold displays is simultaneously changed to “leopard pattern”, the hold display in which the display color is changed to “leopard pattern”. The result of one of the variable display games in the start memory corresponding to the game may be a big hit (may exclude a big hit without a ball). Restricting the simultaneous appearance of multiple pre-reading notice effects according to the notice type belonging to a group (allowing if any of the start memory is a big hit), but notices belonging to a specific group that appeared in the special figure synchronization effect The total of the number of notice effects according to the type and the number of prefetch notice effects according to the notice type belonging to the specific group appearing in the start memory display unit 1911 is a predetermined number (2 in this example) or more. Not intended to restrict the composed, the number of occurrences of informational display in accordance with the notice type belonging to independently certain groups may be to regulate to become more than a predetermined number. For example, if the number of notice effects according to the notice type belonging to a specific group that appeared in the special figure synchronization effect is a predetermined number or more, it will be a big hit (may be excluded if there is no big hit) If the number of pre-reading notice effects according to the notice type belonging to a specific group appearing simultaneously in the start memory display unit 1911 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number, it becomes a big hit (you may be able to exclude a big hit without a ball). Thus, according to the notice effect according to the notice type belonging to the specific group in the special figure synchronization effect and the notice type belonging to the specific group in the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911 If the pre-reading notice effects appear at the same time, even if a plurality of specific notice effects appear at a glance, it is not always a big hit.

  In addition, as described above, the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” as the pre-reading notice effect is started, and the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are displayed. Even if it is scheduled to execute a notice effect that causes a “leopard pattern” to be displayed, it does not fall under the forbidden conditions described above. In other words, when a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” is started as the pre-reading notice effect, the display color of the hold display is set to “leopard pattern” as the pre-reading notice effect. Even if the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect, which are the same group, are not necessarily a big hit. However, when the player starts the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” as the pre-reading notice effect, the “leopard pattern” is already displayed as the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, if the “leopard pattern” is displayed even once in the variable display game, it will be considered as a big hit and the result of the variable display game is expected.

  In addition, when the forecast type of the normal notice effect and the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect correspond to the prohibition condition, the notice type is stored according to which of the notice types corresponding to the prohibition condition. The previous notice information may be deleted (destroyed) or the stored notice information may be replaced with notice information corresponding to another notice type. For example, the group 4 consisting of the background image B and the notice 4 includes a notice type of an accessory C that displays a movable body on which a leopard pattern is drawn as a normal notice effect. In the example, it is configured to include a notice type for operating the movable body in the group 4 that is controlled so as to be a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded) when executed more than once) When the special lottery result is out of place, the role C is set as the notice type of the normal notice effect, and the prohibition condition is met based on the fact that the notice 4 is set as the story reach notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition, it is stored in the normal notice mode storage area so that the normal notice effect corresponding to the accessory C is not executed for the accessory C which is the notice type for operating the movable body without replacing with another notice type. The control for correcting by deleting the previous notice information and the notice 4 which is the notice type for causing the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display an image is replaced with another notice type, and an image corresponding to the notice type after the replacement is displayed. You may make it perform one or both of the control corrected by making it express. In other words, since the so-called display effect that causes the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display an image is easy to replace, it is possible to display other images with different notice types when the prohibited conditions are met. On the other hand, the so-called movable body effect that operates the movable body is difficult to replace because of the number of movable bodies installed and the time required for the movement, etc., and is corrected by stopping the execution of the movable body effect itself. You may do it. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the control burden concerning game processing. In addition, when replacing the display effect, all the notice information including the notice type that does not correspond to the prohibition condition is changed to the predetermined notice information among the notice information corresponding to the plurality of notice types (notification forms) packaged above. You may make it replace, and you may make it replace only the notice classification applicable to a prohibition condition with another notice classification.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a lottery process related to the normal notice effect (a process for determining the notice type of the normal notice effect) and a lottery process related to the pseudo notice effect (the notice type of the pseudo notice effect). Etc.) and lottery processing related to the story reach notice effect (the process of determining the notice type of the story reach notice effect, etc.) are individually executed, and then the prohibition process is executed and these decision results are prohibited. It is configured to determine whether or not the condition is met and correct it when the prohibition condition is met, but based on the lottery result of the previously executed process, the lottery process is executed so that the prohibition condition is not met You may make it do. For example, after the normal notice setting process (step S1580) is executed in the effect setting process shown in FIG. 103 and the lottery process related to the normal notice effect (the process for determining the notice type or the like of the normal notice effect) is executed, the story reach notice is performed. When the setting process (step S1530) is executed and the story reach notice setting process is executed in step S1570 of the story reach notice setting process (step S1530), the lottery result of the normal notice setting process (step S1580) is used. Specifically, in the normal notice setting process (step S1580), the story reach notice is based on whether or not the notice type of the normal notice effect is determined as the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen. You may make it determine the notice classification etc. of production. That is, when the result of the special lottery is off (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the background image B that displays “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen is determined as the notice type of the normal notice effect. If this is the case, it will be limited to the notice 4 that displays the “leopard pattern” on the background of the speech as the notice type of the story reach notice effect, and the notice type that is expected to be a big hit than the notice 4 (notice 1 to notice) 3), or when the special lottery result is a big hit (may not include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the background of the display screen is “Leopard” If it is determined that the background image B for displaying the “pattern” is the notice type 4 for displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the speech as the notice type of the story reach notice effect (the notice 4 is allowed to be decided) It may be one that, may be forced into or notice also intended to determine the 4) so. Thus, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lottery process related to the normal notice effect is executed at a timing earlier than the lottery process related to the pseudo-continuous notice effect or the lottery process related to the story reach notice effect. There are cases where the normal notice effect is executed at a later timing than the story reach notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect. Also, in this case, if there is a risk that the result of the lottery process related to the normal notice effect may fall under the prohibition condition (the special lottery result may be off (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the normal notice effect The background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen as the notice type of the display screen), so that the lottery process executed at a later timing than the lottery process related to the normal notice effect is not subject to the prohibition condition. The lottery content (notice type, etc.) is restricted. In other words, although the order in which the performances are executed is the earlier timing, the lottery processing is limited to the effects of the lottery process so that the lottery contents are not limited to the prohibition condition. The process of changing the contents is no longer necessary. In addition, when the result of the special lottery is off (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the background image B that displays “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen is determined as the notice type of the normal notice effect. If this is the case, it will be limited to the notice 4 that displays the “leopard pattern” on the background of the speech as the notice type of the story reach notice effect, and the notice type that is expected to be a big hit than the notice 4 (notice 1 to notice) By determining to 3), it is possible to create a so-called rising state in which the degree of jackpot expectation increases as the game progresses, and it is possible to cause the player to expect a jackpot and to pay attention to the variable display game.

[23. Scenario production control procedure by level management]
Here, a more detailed procedure for effect control by level management described above will be described as a fourth modification. The reliability level is set based on information transmitted from the main control board 4100. In addition, the reliability level is selected by lottery in order to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the notice effect of the change, and is set for each case. Hereinafter, an outline of a procedure for setting the reliability level will be described.

[23-1. Lottery for pre-reading notice]
The reliability level of the pre-reading notice effect is set when the game ball wins the start winning opening (at the time of a pending winning). When the game ball wins the start winning opening, pre-read information is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the effect control board 4140. The effect control board 4140 draws lots of types of pseudo continuous fluctuations (pseudo continuous types) and one or more types of pre-reading notice effects based on the received pre-read information. The prefetch information includes a variation pattern command, a symbol type prefetch command indicating the type of variation display result of special symbols (big hit type), and the like.

[23-1-1. Selection of type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type)]
Here, selection of the type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type) will be described. Whether or not the pseudo continuous variation can be executed and the number of times of variation are determined at the time of a winning prize, and are transmitted to the effect control board 4140 together with the pre-read information. Then, the effect control board 4140 draws a type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type) according to whether or not pseudo continuous variation can be executed and the number of times of variation.

  111 and 112 are diagrams illustrating an example of the type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type) in the present modification. The maximum number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in this modification is four, and the selection probability of the pseudo continuous type executed according to the fluctuation pattern is defined for each pseudo continuous number of times. FIG. 111 shows a case where the number of pseudo-continuations is 0, and FIG. 112 shows a case where the number of pseudo-continuations is four. In addition, since the lottery probabilities differ only in the case where the number of times of pseudo reaming is 1 to 3, the illustration is omitted.

  There are three types of pseudo-continuous variations in this modification: a STORY (story) pseudo-ream, a deadly technique pseudo-ream, and a hyper pseudo-ream. . In addition, it is possible to select no execution of the pseudo-ream. A lottery probability is defined according to the variation pattern.

  In addition, since the expectation of big hit increases as the number of pseudo-continuations increases, the probability that the pseudo-continuations are executed is higher when the number of pseudo-continuations is 4 when FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are compared. Has been. In addition, when the number of times of quasi-continuous operation is four, a so-called “gase effect” is not executed except for a variation in which reach does not occur.

[23-1-2. Winning confidence level lottery]
When the type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous type) is determined, the effect control board 4140 determines the winning confidence level based on the determined type of pseudo continuous variation and the symbol type prefetch command included in the prefetch information. Lottery. In the above-described example, the reliability level is set based on the variation pattern. However, in the present modification, the winning reliability level is determined based on the type of jackpot together with the variation pattern information. That is, it is determined in consideration of the result of the special symbol variation display.

  The reliability level at the time of winning in the present modification is determined in correspondence with a symbol group and a variation pattern (a variation pattern prefetch command) corresponding to a special symbol type (a jackpot symbol, a symbol type prefetch command). FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining an example of types of symbol groups in the present modification. FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining an example of symbol group definitions in the present modification.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 113, three types of symbol groups are defined. Specifically, the group 1 is for the out-of-order symbol, the group 2 is for the jackpot symbol excluding the jackpot of the maximum round, and the group 3 is for the jackpot symbol when the group 3 is the maximum round.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 114, a symbol group corresponding to a symbol prefetch command value (a mode value of a symbol type prefetch command) is defined. The symbol prefetch command value corresponds to the symbol name (big hit type). Note that the big hit without a ball corresponds to the group 1 for the off symbol. Further, the group 3 is set to “05H”, “09H”, “0AH”, which is the maximum round (10R) in the special figure 1, and “0EH”, which is the maximum round (16R) in the special figure 2.

  As described above, it is classified into groups according to the number of game balls to be paid out based on the symbol look-ahead command value notified from the main control board 4100 (game value provided to the player), and according to the classified group You can set the winning confidence level.

  In this modified example, a winning reliability level lottery table is set according to the symbol group and the number of times of pseudo-continuations. When the symbol group and the number of quasi-continuous runs are determined, the corresponding winning reliability level lottery table is specified. Then, based on the specified winning reliability level lottery table, the winning reliability level is determined. The procedure for determining the winning reliability level will be described below.

  First, the winning reliability level will be described in detail. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning reliability level in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 115, winning reliability levels from level (LV) 0 to level 7 are set in ascending order of expectation degree (reliability) of jackpot.

  As the effect contents according to the winning reliability level, the effect is not executed in the case of the level 0, and the gasset effect is executed in the case of the level 1. Then, as the level increases, the reliability increases. At level 6, a highly reliable character (ladybug) appears, and at level 7, a premium effect indicating a big hit decision is executed.

  Next, an example of the winning reliability level lottery table will be described. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing an example of a winning reliability level lottery table in the present modification. 116 is a symbol group 1 when the number of pseudo-continuous times is zero, FIG. 117 is a symbol group 1 when the number of pseudo-continuous times is four, FIG. 118 is a symbol group 2 when the number of pseudo-continuous times is zero, and FIG. 120, when the number of pseudo-continuous times is 4, FIG. 120 shows a case where the number of pseudo-continuous times is 0 in the symbol group 3, and FIG. 121 shows a case where the number of pseudo-continuous times is 4 in the symbol group 3. In addition, since the lottery probabilities differ only in the case where the number of times of pseudo reaming is 1 to 3, the illustration is omitted. In this modification, a winning reliability level lottery table is provided for each pseudo-continuous number, but a winning reliability level lottery table may be provided for each type of pseudo-ream.

  In this modification, based on the variation pattern notified from the main control board 4100, the reliability level at the time of winning is drawn from the winning reliability level lottery table shown in FIGS. For example, when symbol group 2 is selected and the number of pseudo-reams is 4, if the variation pattern is “Character short reach big hit” (PTN is 21), the winning reliability level lottery table of FIG. 119 is acquired. To do. The level 4 is selected with a probability of 30%, the level 5 with a probability of 30%, and the level 6 with a probability of 40%.

  In this way, by selecting the reliability level at the time of winning in consideration of the result of the variable symbol display, for example, the level 7 notice mode (premium notice, which is a special notice effect in which a big hit is determined when it appears) is maximized. It is possible to appear only when a big hit fluctuation that becomes the number of balls occurs, and fluctuations that generate a big hit that is relatively unfavorable to the player, such as a big hit with a small number of balls and a big hit that does not shift to a high probability state, By setting a low level in the winning reliability level, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting.

[23-1-3. Pre-reading production lottery]
When the reliability level at the time of winning is selected as described above, a prefetch effect to be executed (prefetch notice effect) is selected by lottery. In this modification, as the prefetching effect, a prefetching effect that executes a specific effect such as changing the background display and a prefetching effect that changes the hold display can be executed. In addition, since the pre-reading effect is executed until the change that is the target of the pre-reading effect is started, the effect according to the number of times that the pre-reading effect can be executed is executed.

  A pre-reading effect for executing a specific effect can be executed by combining a plurality of effects, and is executed by combining one or a plurality of pre-reading effects (pre-reading notice effect) according to the reliability level at the time of winning. . In this modified example, “story effect look-ahead notice”, “deadly skill level look-ahead”, “hyper-effects look-ahead notice”, and “countdown look-ahead notice” that displays a countdown until a large change in expectation, By stopping the identification symbol or performing a specific effect at the time of fluctuation stoppage, it is suggested that the subsequent fluctuation is highly expected. The “light guide plate look-ahead” to be used and the “thundercloud mode” to display thunderclouds in the background can be executed.

  122 to 129 are diagrams illustrating an example of the prefetch effect combination lottery according to the present modification, in which a lottery table is set according to the type of pseudo-run to be executed and the number of fluctuations in which the prefetch effect can be executed. FIG. 122 shows a case where there is no pseudo-continuation and the variation, and FIG. 123 shows a case where there is no pseudo-continuation and the number of prefetchable variations is four. FIG. 124 shows a case where the pseudo-run type is a STORY pseudo-run and the variation, and FIG. 125 shows a case where the pseudo-run type is a STORY pseudo-run and the number of prefetchable fluctuations is 4. FIG. 126 shows a case where the pseudo-continuous type is a special move pseudo-reaction and the variation, and FIG. 127 shows a case where the pseudo-continuous type is a special move pseudo-ream and the number of prefetchable changes is four. 128 shows a case where the pseudo-continuous type is a hyper-pseudo-continuous, and the corresponding fluctuation, and FIG. In addition, since the lottery probabilities differ only when the number of prefetchable fluctuations is 1 to 3, the illustration is omitted.

  In this modification, a pre-reading effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous type is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 124, when the STORY pseudo-run is executed, a story effect pre-reading notice is executed. Similarly, a special technique level prefetching is executed when the special technique pseudo-run is executed, and a hyper effect pre-reading notice is executed when the hyper pseudo series is executed.

  Further, the countdown prefetching advance notice, the same color symbol stop prefetching, the fluctuation stop prefetching advance notice, the light guide plate prefetching, and the thundercloud mode can be executed individually or in combination with other effects. In this modification, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed with a combination of 25 patterns including the case where the pre-reading effect is not executed (in the case of level 0). Furthermore, the expectation of jackpot is set to increase in the order of pattern (PTN) 1 to pattern 25, and it is easy to execute a plurality of pre-reading effects. The pre-reading notice at the time of change stop is set to be executed.

  More specifically, with reference to the figure, for example, when the pseudo-ream type is determined to be “deadly-kill pseudo-ream” and the winning reliability is level 2 (LV2) (FIG. 126), a probability of 30% The pre-reading effect is not executed (PTN1), and the “deadly skill level pre-reading” is executed with a probability of 3% (PTN2). Further, “countdown pre-reading notice”, “same color symbol pre-reading notice”, “variable stop pre-reading notice”, “light guide plate pre-reading”, and “thundercloud mode” are executed with a probability of 3%, respectively (PTN3 to PTN7). In addition, “countdown pre-reading notice”, “same color pattern pre-reading notice”, and “variable stop pre-reading notice” are executed with a probability of 10%, respectively, together with “deadly skill level prefetching” (PTN8 to PTN10).

[23-1-4. Pre-order winning lottery]
Next, the prefetching effect that changes the hold display will be described. The hold display is displayed in a predetermined shape by the number of fluctuations held on the display device when a game ball is won at the start opening. In addition to the normal display (normal hold), the hold display can be displayed in another color or shape as a pre-reading notice effect. In this modification, the normal hold is white and changes to blinking white, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow (rainbow) according to the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 130 to FIG. 133 are diagrams for explaining an example of the look-ahead winning reservation lottery of this modification. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a table for drawing lots of modes that can be held and displayed at the start of the change at the time of starting winning. In this modification, the upper limit color of the change of the hold display, that is, the mode in which the hold display can finally change after the start winning until the change starts, based on the winning reliability level, A lottery is drawn from the table shown in FIG. The change hold is displayed in an area different from the hold display before the start of change (for example, an area provided adjacent to the hold display area), and the display mode in the state before the change is in any form. The player can recognize whether or not there has been, and furthermore, the level of expectation can be notified by changing during the change.

  131 shows a case where the number of holdings at the time of the start winning prize is 1, FIG. 132 shows a case where the number of holdings at the time of the starting winning prize is 2, and FIG. 133 shows a case where the number of holdings at the time of the starting winning prize is 4. FIG. 13 is a drawing showing a lottery at the start opening prize based on the upper limit color of the change in the hold display determined by the table shown in FIG. 130. For example, if the number of holds at the time of the start winning is 4 and the upper limit color of the change of the determined hold display is blue, the mode of the hold display at the time of the start winning is based on the table shown in FIG. A lottery is performed. Specifically, a normal hold is performed with a probability of 50%, white blinking is performed with a probability of 30%, and a blue display is held with a probability of 20%. In addition, in the case where the player's expectation is increased by changing the hold display step by step as the hold with the number of holds of 3 is consumed, the illustration is omitted because only the lottery probabilities differ.

  In this variation, the player's expectation can be enhanced by changing the hold display step by step as the hold is consumed. For this reason, if the number of holds is small, the chance of change of hold decreases. Therefore, when the number of holds is 0, hold display is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 130, and variable display is started without change. On the other hand, when the number of holds is 1, the display mode of the hold display at the time of starting winning is drawn based on the table shown in FIG. Change the hold display. Furthermore, when the number of holds is large (for example, 4), the hold display can be changed every time the hold is consumed. At this time, the hold display is changed so as not to exceed the upper limit of the change drawn at the time of starting winning. The hold display may be changed by lottery at every predetermined opportunity, or may be changed step by step up to the upper limit of change. Moreover, it is not necessary to change it step by step, and it may be changed from blue to purple, or it may be changed from normal hold to the upper limit (for example, rainbow) at the last moment.

  Furthermore, the gradual change of the hold display may be such that the degree of expectation does not become low (does not fall), or after it has fallen once and finally changes so that the degree of expectation becomes the highest from the start of change. Good. Moreover, you may make it select the holding | maintenance display change scenario which defined beforehand the aspect that a hold display changes in steps by lottery based on the final aspect of a hold display. Thereby, it is not necessary to draw lots of display modes each time a pending digest is performed, and the control can be simplified. Further, by making it possible to select only the pending display change scenario in which no fall occurs, it is possible to eliminate the need for control for preventing the fall.

  As described above, by executing the pre-reading notice effect based on the winning reliability level selected after winning the game ball, the effect pattern is defined for each variation pattern, jackpot symbol, or a combination thereof. Since it is not necessary, management of production control data can be facilitated.

[23-2. Fluctuation notice scenario lottery]
Next, the lottery procedure of the notice scenario at the time of the change will be described. First, the lottery of the notice scenario at the time of change is drawn at the start of change. Specifically, it is determined after receiving the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Using the determined reliability level at the time of winning a prize, a detailed description will be given of the flow from drawing a notice scenario to drawing an individual notice effect.

[23-2-1. Fluctuation pattern classification lottery]
When the effect control board 4140 receives the special figure variation pattern command, the effect control board 4140 draws a variation pattern classification based on the winning reliability level set at the time of the winning prize and the received special figure variation pattern command (variation pattern). The variation pattern classification is to subdivide the variation pattern, and it is possible to select a variation pattern in which the production expectation is adjusted in more detail. 134 and 135 are diagrams for explaining an example of the variation pattern classification of this modification. FIG. 134 shows a lottery table when the winning reliability level is 0, and FIG. 135 shows the winning reliability level 7. The lottery table in case is shown. The other winning reliability levels are different from each other only in the lottery probability or the reliability level of each effect, and thus illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.

  Note that the winning reliability level used for the lottery of the notice level at the time of the change uses the winning reliability level determined at the start winning prize, but prefetching prohibition (non-temporal special figure 2, short and middle Special Figure 1, during a big hit, before or after the change of the game state on the main control side, or after the change, before and after the change, all the conditions for the predetermined number of fluctuations at power-on, or any combination of conditions) If the reliability level cannot be created at the time of starting winning, etc., the winning reliability level is created using the special figure variation pattern command in the same manner as the procedure for determining the winning reliability level at the starting winning. Further, the reliability level may not be determined at the time of starting winning, but the reliability level may be drawn only based on the symbol type command of the special figure variation pattern command. The reliability level may be drawn (decided) individually at the start. In this case, the reliability level at the time of winning and the reliability level at the start of variation are drawn (decided) with a certain relationship. With certain relevance, the reliability level at the start of variation is drawn (decided) so that it is greater than or less than the reliability level at the time of winning, or the created reliability level at the time of winning is a special variation pattern command In comparison with the contents of, the reliability level at the time of winning determined at the time of the winning winning is corrected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the reliability level at the time of winning and the reliability level at the start of fluctuation from deviating, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. it can.

  When the reliability level at the time of winning is 0, the expectation level that is a big hit is low. For example, if the variation pattern is “character short reach out”, referring to FIG. Either “degree 5%” or “character short reach reliability 20%” is selected with a lottery probability of 50%, and a variation pattern classification with higher reliability is not selected.

  On the other hand, when the reliability level at the time of winning is 7, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same “out of character short reach”, referring to FIG. “Character short reach reliability 5%” is selected with a probability of 20%, “Character short reach reliability 20%” is selected with 30%, and “Character short reach reliability 50%” is selected with a probability of 50%. A high fluctuation pattern classification is selected. In addition, as the reliability of the variation pattern classification, a notice mode having a reliability value corresponding to the reliability value is drawn.

  As described above, by setting the variation pattern classification, even when a command for designating the same variation pattern is received from the main control board 4100, the detailed effect contents (variation pattern classification) corresponding to the winning reliability level are received. ) Can be selected, and an effect more consistent with the pre-reading notice effect can be executed. When the variation pattern classification is not set, when an effect with high reliability is executed by lottery during the pre-reading notice effect, there is a possibility that an effect with low reliability is executed by lottery with the notice effect at the time of change. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is possible to make it difficult for the content of the production to be flawed by determining the production based on the reliability level at the time of winning along with the variation pattern, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. .

  As shown in FIG. 100, the variation pattern classification may be such that a variation pattern without a branch number corresponds to the variation pattern itself, while a variation pattern to which a branch number is assigned corresponds to the variation pattern classification. At this time, the variation pattern classification may be determined by the main control board 4100.

[23-2-2. Lottery points and notice level]
In this modification, the entire variation is divided into four, a lottery point is provided for each divided section, and a notice level is drawn for each lottery point. The segment to be divided is changing (from the start of the change to the time of the tempe). At the time of tempering (when reaching), the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach.

  136 to 139 are diagrams showing an example of the notice level table showing the notice level at each lottery point of the present modification. FIG. 136 is a notice level table during the change in the fluctuation, and FIG. 138 shows the notice level table of the notice effect in the first half of the SP reach, and FIG. 139 shows the notice level table of the notice effect in the latter part of the SP reach. There is a one-to-one relationship between the level of the notice level and the reliability level at the time of winning. The winning level reliability level LV7 is defined as premium, but the notice level LV7 is similarly defined as premium. This is done by drawing the notice level using the reliability level at the time of winning, so that the notice mode in the changing notice effect is executed with the effect that is more consistent with the pre-reading notice effect and the pending lottery determined at the reliability level at the time of winning. Because.

  In the notice level tables shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the contents of the effect pattern are added and set as the reliability level, and a specific description is also shown. In an actual program, control is performed using a pattern number (PTN). For example, the pattern 1 of the changing level has a reliability level of 1 and is set to “being changed_LV1_5” because the gusset notice appears with a change of 5 seconds.

  Moreover, even if the reliability level is the same, a plurality of patterns can be assigned according to the production contents (variation patterns). For example, patterns 1 to 7 are assigned to the reliability level 1 during the change. It has been. Similarly, patterns 8 to 12 have a confidence level 2; patterns 13 to 17 have a confidence level 3; patterns 18 to 22 have a confidence level 4; patterns 23 to 27 have a confidence level 5; The reliability level 6 is assigned to 32, and the reliability level 7 is assigned to patterns 33 to 37. A plurality of patterns will be described using the changing LV2 shown in FIG. In the same way, the patterns 9 to 12 are assigned to the fluctuations in which the reach is determined and the reach is determined and the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed once. ing.

  Further, since the SP reach is executed only when the reliability level is 3 or more, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, a case where the reliability level is 3 or more is defined in the notice level table.

[23-2-3. Notice level combination scenario lottery]
Subsequently, a notice level combination scenario is drawn by lottery based on the selected variation pattern classification. 140 to 143 are diagrams illustrating an example of the notice level combination scenario. FIG. 140 is an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo-continuations is 0 (no pseudo-continuations) and normal fluctuation or normal reach, and FIG. 141 is a case where the number of pseudo-continuations is 0 and develops to SP reach. It is an example of a lottery table. FIG. 142 is an example of a lottery table when the number of pseudo-continuous times is 4 and normal fluctuation or normal reach is performed, and FIG. 143 is an example of a lottery table when the number of pseudo-continuous times is 4 and develops to SP reach. is there. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the case where a pseudo | simulation continuous number of times is 1-3.

  The variation pattern classification lottery will be specifically described. For example, when “SP development_character SP second half reliability 80%” is selected, referring to FIG. 143, PTN5 is drawn with a 10% drawing probability. In this case, “previously changing LV4_4 pseudo-ream” is set for the notice level “changed LV”, “tempe_LV5” is set for “LV at time of tempering”, and “first half SP reach LV5” is set for “first half of SP reach_notice LV”. “SP reach second half LV5” is selected as “SP reach second half _notice LV”.

  In this way, by having a plurality of scenarios that are combined with a plurality of notice levels for each variation pattern classification, it is possible to perform a wide variety of effects from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol, Can be effectively changed.

[23-2-4. Notice lottery by notice level]
Subsequently, the contents of the notice effect are lottery based on the notice level of each selected lottery point. 144 and 145 are diagrams illustrating an example of a plurality of notice lottery tables, and FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table of “variable start window notice”. FIG. 145 is a drawing showing a lottery table for “SP late cut-in notice”. “Variation start window notice” is classified during fluctuation of the notice point, and a lottery is performed according to the content of “Fluctuating LV” already determined. Specifically, when “Variable_LV7” is selected for “Variable LV”, referring to FIG. 144, “Intense heat red” has a probability of 30% and “Premier frame rainbow” has 50%. It is selected with the probability of. The “SP late cut-in notice” is divided into the latter half of the SP reach of the notice point, and a lottery is performed according to the content of the “changed LV” already determined. Specifically, when “SP reach second half LV6” is selected for “SP reach second half_notification LV”, referring to FIG. 145, “seven red stars” has a probability of “red “33 stars” is selected with a probability of 80%. Rather than determining the content of the notice (notice type, notice mode) based on the level for each lottery point, the lottery is directly drawn based on the fluctuation pattern command, symbol type command, reliability level at winning, and fluctuation pattern classification. May be.

  The notice level combination scenario may be directly associated with the fluctuation pattern command without drawing the fluctuation pattern classification.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 197, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's willingness to operate will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 4140.

  FIG. 146 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 147 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, although the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, description of the same configuration as described above will be omitted as appropriate. The operation button 410 provided on the door frame 3 corresponds to the pressing operation unit 405 described above, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 also provided on the door frame 3 are provided on the dial operation unit 401 described above. Equivalent to. For example, when an effect is presented, the player can participate in the effect by operating the operation button 410, the effect selection left button 331, and the effect selection right button 332. When the effect is not presented, the effect selection left button 331, When the player operates the effect selection right button 332, the volume output from the speaker can be adjusted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 houses a sword part 5010 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, a sword part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword insertion direction. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a state where the sword portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword portion 5011 is in a sword state where the sword portion 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword state can function as an operation means for receiving a sword insertion operation by the player and returning to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 148, the execution opportunity of the sword production effect accompanying the movement of the sword production operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of an extracted book effect.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which the sword book production is performed after execution of the sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which the sword book production is performed without performing the sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns of the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern determined in the main control board 4100 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, multiple types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation at the time of big hit, a variation pattern for small hit variation at the time of small hit, and a variation pattern for deviation variation at the time of outage, and variations that have advantageous results for the player The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% for the variation pattern for big hit variation, is executed with a probability of 30% for the variation pattern for small hit variation, and when the variation pattern for outlier variation is used. It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed is higher than when the reach effect is performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), execution / non-execution of the extracted knife effect is selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the extracted blade preparation transition effect. When the sword preparation transition effect is executed even if the types of the variation patterns are the same, the probability that the sword main effect is executed is set higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, the variation pattern that is advantageous to the player is set such that the probability that the extracted sword effect will be executed increases. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword preparation effect is executed is higher when the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for deviation variation, the probability that the sword book effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed with the variation pattern for small hit variation. Note that, in the case of the big hit variation pattern, the extraction effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the extraction preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the sword book effect is executed, the sword preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the sword book effect in the form with the aura member is higher as the variation pattern is advantageous to the player. Is set to be Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by sword decoration body movement)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152, the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect (the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own component member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 149). 150), an aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with a member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integral decorative body (FIGS. 151 and 152).

  FIG. 149 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself. The sword state, (C) the second sword state. FIG. 150 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. 150 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade part 5011 is extracted from the sheath part 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

  The sword decorative body 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 149 (B), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword preparation transition effect is only visible from the player by removing only the part of the blade 5011a that is fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011. Becomes the first sword state. And, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword operation in the sword book production is the second sword that the blade part 5011 is further removed from the sheath part 5020 and the majority can be seen by the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword insertion operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade part 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade part 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade portion 5011 is in the first sword state (FIG. 149 (B)) from the sword state (FIG. 149 (A)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 150A) to the open state (FIG. 150B) inside the portion 5020, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in a changing process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 149 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 are stopped at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state, the closed state is opened and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. Although the example in which the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state after being deformed is shown, this is not restrictive. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (including not only the mode of maximum operation but also the mode of stopping the operation on the way) ).

  FIGS. 151A and 151B are state transition diagrams for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. FIG. The second sword state is shown. FIG. 152 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. 152 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade part 5011 is extracted from the sheath part 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 150 and 151 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 151 (A) to 151 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) described above. While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword state (the state of the sword delivery). Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Thereby, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 152 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is located below the blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 in the fully accommodated state, and is a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011, and the surrounding aura member 5036. A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b which are provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b which mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged with each other. This is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, the blade part is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword part 5010) (the blade state ⇔the first sword state ⇔the second sword state) with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035. Although the example which unites 5011 was shown, it is not restricted to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. Final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (not only the full appearance state that is fully operated, but the midway appearance that is stopped in the middle) It is only necessary to be able to include a state with an aura member in a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade part 5011 so that it is not visually recognized by the player from the state where the sword is inserted into the first sword.

(Example of sword production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158, the sword effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decorative body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the effect pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the extraction effect is not executed) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the extracted sword effect is executed. . FIGS. 153 to 157 are effect transition diagrams of the sword effect. FIG. 158 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. A reach state is formed (FIG. 153 (X1)). Subsequently, the reach decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and an effect image suggesting execution of a sword effect (movability of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the center display area. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 153 (X2)) where two samurai face each other and start living is displayed, an image of one samurai holding a handle and holding a sword in a sheath (Fig. 153 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect which suggests that the sword ornament 5001 moves is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword state (FIG. 149A).

  Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIGS. 154 (X4) and (X5), the sword preparation transition effect is displayed. When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the samurai who holds the sword in the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed as time passes. At this time, the sword decoration transition effect is performed by the sword ornament 5001 changing from the sword state to the first sword state. In addition, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the sword book effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect will be executed by the movement of the sword ornament 5001. In the sword preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player may be expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second sword state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state where the sword is stored, and the image shown in FIG. 153 (X3) described above may be continuously displayed.

  Here, when the sword ornament 5001 in the subsequent sword production effect is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword preparation transition effect (FIG. 150 (A )) To the open state (FIG. 150B), the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword state is visible to the player from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the part of the blade 5011a, but the aura member 5030 is the Since it is provided below, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 operates maximum. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means that can accept a sword operation by the player, and at the same time, has an expectation depending on the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  After the sword preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword book effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 154 (X6)), and the central decorative symbol on the left side of the central decorative symbol is displayed at the center of the screen along with the image that the samurai gives up at the timing when the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped. In addition, the display is stopped and displayed in a stop mode different from that of the right-side decorative design, that is, a deviating mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 154 (X7)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the first extracted state to the sword state at the time of FIG. 154 (X6), and maintains the sword state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operation means.

  On the other hand, when the extracted sword effect is executed, after the sword preparation transition effect is completed, an image in which the sword cutting is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second extracted sword. It becomes a state. Here, in the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state, the form with the aura member that is visible in the form in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 and the aura member 5030 are not visible. There is provided an aura memberless form in which the blade part 5011 that is not deformed can be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 that is in the second extraction state is in the form without an aura member will be described. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 155 (A1)), and an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 155 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 155 (A1), and the blade part 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by a sword, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the blade operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that prompts a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same form as the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 155 ( A3)). In the sword decorative body 5001, the LED on the internal LED board 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. In addition, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of rai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in front of the previous rai cut scene image (FIG. 155 (A2)). (Refer to FIG. 161 (G2) described later).

  When the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs a sword storage operation to place the blade part 5011 in the sheath 5020, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect ends with a symbol type winning notification (FIG. 156). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner (FIG. 156 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, with the image of the opponent's samurai defeated and the conclusion of the Iai, the central decorative symbol is the same as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen, that is, the big hit (here "7") Is displayed (FIG. 156 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of place, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 156 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that is variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol at the center of the screen, together with an image in which the opponent's samurai is not defeated at the timing of the stop display and the conclusion of the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 156 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 which will be in a 2nd extraction state is a form with an aura member is demonstrated. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 157 (B1)), and an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by cutting out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 157 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 157 (B1) and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible from the player. Here, the blade part 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 when the state changes from the first sword state to the second sword state, but this is not restrictive. First, after the blade portion 5011 is in the second extraction state so that only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form the form with the aura member. The sword ornament 5001 only needs to be in the form with the aura member in the second sword state before the operation effective period is started. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second extraction state in which the player can perform a sword operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that an erroneous operation by the player is induced. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword state to the second sword state is performed as in this example, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. It is preferable that the operation effective period is started immediately.

  Further, the images in FIGS. 157 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 155 (A1) and (A2) described above, and the player can see that the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member only by looking at the images. I am trying not to judge whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decorative body 5001, the player can grasp whether the form is with the aura member or without the aura member. Accordingly, the sword decorative body 5001 can be focused before the sword decorative body 5001 functions as an operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. Can do. Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images that are similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 by the player is an effective operation valid period, the sword image in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the form with the aura member as the sword ornament 5001. It is displayed (FIG. 157 (B3)). Since the subsequent effects are the same as those in FIG. 156 described above, description thereof is omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 156 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more gorgeously than in the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period in the sword production effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. First, the sword decorative body 5001 is first moved from the sword state as the sword preparation transition effect. The state changes to the extracted state (time t1). At this time, when the production pattern with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state. It is provided so that it cannot be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword state, the player knows whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 further changes to the second sword state, and if it changes, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the sword book effect is executed, and the possibility of a form with an aura member increases. Further, even if the sword book effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 153 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state can be captured.

  When the sword preparation transition effect is finished, the sword book effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2). Thereafter, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of living together effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when a sword insertion operation by the player is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second sword state to the sword state by the sword insertion operation by the player. Then, the preset operation effective period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and a series of living effects is ended by notifying the symbol type in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Time t5). Note that the operation valid period may be ended by detecting an operation by the player, as indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword state to the sword storage state as the operation effective period ends.

  Here, a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state until the operation effective period starts (time t3-t2) is a mode (aura member) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. As a mode confirmation period in which it is possible to confirm whether or not it is an attached mode, a light emission mode, etc., a period longer than the operation effective period (time t4-t3) is secured. That is, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player is in the operation position (second sword state) that functions as the operation means, the operation reception is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. Thereby, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and inflates the expectation in the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with the aura member, the expectation increases), or the mental preparation As soon as the second sword state is reached, the operation validity period starts and the state of the operation means cannot be confirmed, and it is not possible to confirm the aspect of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

  Further, the sword effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of living effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The operation effects (time t3 to t4) as the operation means are related effects. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and the variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decorative body 5001, thereby suppressing a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform performance by the conventional operation means. Can do.

  In addition, although the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself and the aura member 5030 deform | transforms the blade part 5011 in the example of the above-mentioned production, the aura member 5035 is the sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided with a frame side member (aura member 5035) and becomes an integral decorative body.

  In this way, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operation means that can change (deform or combine) the aspects of members (sword part 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the general decorative movable body. doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (the state of the sword, the first sword state, the second sword state, the form without the aura member and the form with the aura member) It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 148). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the expectation that the change display has an advantageous result for the player due to the change of the aspect of the sword decorative body, and the player's interest in the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Further, before the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state. doing. Moreover, the expectation degree is suggested by making the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first sword state or the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword state to the second sword state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, the expectation is high when the operation position is moved after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance. In this mode, there is a concern that an erroneous operation that the player may operate even though the operation means is not yet in an operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the above-described erroneous operation can be prevented.

  In the first sword state described above, only the blade 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of extraction in the first extraction state is set so as not to satisfy the maximum extraction amount in the second extraction state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a fully appearing state when it enters the second extraction state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword state, the player has a higher expectation at the time of the first sword state, Increase interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first extraction state, it is a form with an aura member (high degree of expectation) at the stage of the extraction preparation transition effect. Since the player can grasp and expect great expectations, the disappointment when the sword book production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the player's feelings are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword book effect, and an effect with a high gaming interest can be provided.

(Variation 1-Extraction using a control button)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 159 to 162, the sword effect is executed in the reach effect, and the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. FIG. 159 to FIG. 161 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword effect of the first modification. FIG. 162 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operating means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned extraction effect (FIGS. 153 to 158) is omitted as appropriate.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed and no sword book effect is performed, and after the sword preparation transition effect is executed About the production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in the drawing, the screen transition of the production display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 are performed. The transition and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 159 (Y1)), and an effect suggesting the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 159 (Y2)). When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate is performed (FIG. 159 Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lit, and the image display operation button is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. Note that the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  When the sword preparation transition effect and the sword main effect are not performed and the result is a losing result, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image for informing the result of the deviation (“767”) is displayed (FIG. 160 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are not changed.

  In addition, when the sword main effect is performed after the sword preparation transition effect is executed, when the player presses the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the first sword state. A sword preparation transition effect is performed (FIG. 160 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a white character of “Tengu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 160 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which an allied samurai is about to touch the sword. (FIG. 160 (F2)). Next, the extracted sword effect in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) is started (FIG. 160 (F3), FIGS. 161 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) by the sword main effect, immediately before FIG. 160 (F2) and immediately after 161 (G1), the image of running lightning is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 160 (F3), and the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (whether it has an aura member or not) ) Along with the strength of lightning, the degree of expectation that will win in the Iai will be shown.

  The subsequent effects are the same as those in FIGS. 155 (A2), (A3), and 156 described above. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state and a predetermined period has elapsed, the sword decorative body 5001 is replaced with the player. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the operation, an operation effective period for validly detecting the blade operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword insertion operation within the effective operation period (FIG. 161 (G2)), and the player is notified of the symbol type (hit and miss) by the sword insertion operation (FIG. 161 (G3) or ( G4)).

  Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 162, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword ornament 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts a state change of the sword ornament 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts to change state, and first changes from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state. Here, in the first extraction state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword ornament 5001 is operated to operate as the operation means. When an effective period occurs, an operation promotion effect is made to prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). Note that if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (the first form) You may make it deform | transform and change a state at a stretch in the form with the aura member of a double sword state. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword state to the second sword state changes according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, changes to the second sword state after the first sword state and a certain time has elapsed. It may be. In addition, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword ornament 5001 is second when the operation effective period ends. The sword is returned to the sword state.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 by the player. The sword decoration body 5001 extraction operation start timing is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the sword decoration body 5001 insertion operation start timing is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tx). As described above, since the movement of the sword decoration 5001 is reversed (the sword operation and the sword operation) depending on which operation means of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, mutual operation is effective. Periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword ornament 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operating means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is deformed and changes its state, and the form with the aura member is provided. To the second sword state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  Further, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 160 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 161). Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operational value of the operation button 410 can be further increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2-Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 167, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 163 to FIG. 167 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword effect according to the second modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect as the above-mentioned.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 steps. The aura level 0 indicates a complete accommodation state (FIG. 152A) where the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a fully appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the maximum extent by the player as a result of the aura member 5035 being combined with the blade portion 5011 in the second extracted state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state of the sword. 152 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

  Here, there are no production patterns (Z1 to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed or no sword book production is performed, and there is no sword preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword book effect is performed, and an effect pattern (in the drawing) in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes a final form (a form with an aura member in a complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) to be performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword ornament Explain the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410, but in the second modification, the operation button 410 is operated step by step by a plurality of operations. A step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 is performed.

  First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword book production effect is not performed, that is, the sword decorative body 5001 does not change its state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → The same effect transition as in FIGS. 160 (E1) and (E2) is followed (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 164 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, although there is no sword preparation transition effect, the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member by one operation of the operation button 410. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as in FIGS. 159 (Y1) to (Y3) in the first modification (FIG. 163 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state, it completely appears. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 164 (I1)). Although the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 of the first modified example is configured by the aura member 5030 and the modified example 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, other effects are the same as those of the first modified example. 160 (F1) (F2) → Traces similar to those in FIG. 161 are followed (FIGS. 164 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 161 (G1) to (G4)).

  Further, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword book effect is performed. In the effect pattern in which the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the first operation button 410 is operated, the same effect transition is performed as before (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decorative body 5001 after the first operation is in the second extracted state from the sword state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) that is not visually recognized by the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 164 (I1) described above (FIG. 165 (J1)).

  Next, an operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 165 (J2)). And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the next production will be performed according to the preset aura levels 0-3.

  First, when the set aura level is “0” (that is, in the case of no aura member configuration), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the staged operation effect is terminated (hereinafter, there is no operation button 410 operation request), and it is notified that the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state is returned. An image (here, white letters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 165 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form without an aura member, and the same effect transition as in FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. 161 of the above-described modification 1 is followed in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) corresponding to the aura level 0. (FIG. 165 (J4) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is changed from the fully accommodated state to the 1/3 appearance state. Become. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 165 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in green indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, an operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 166 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 remains in the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, the message “Izai” on the blackout screen) (White character) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 166 (K2)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member in the state of 1/3 appearance, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 160 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 166 (K3) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 166 (K4)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 166 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, “Izai” on the blackout screen) ) And an image showing the aura level are displayed (FIG. 167 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the appearance of 2/3, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 167 (M1) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 167 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect ends (after this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and a sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state is obtained. An image notifying that the user is returning (here, white characters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen, and an image indicating aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 167 (L2)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 3, FIG. The effect transition is followed (FIG. 167 (L3) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In the above description, the range of visibility from the player is increased by changing the degree of uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 at the operation timing when the aura level is increased. Not limited to. Even if the aura level is increased, the aura level is fixed without increasing the appearance level of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character “Izai” is displayed on the blackout screen), the determined aura level. You may be made to perform the stock-type coalescence which unites the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 at a stretch so that it may become the appearance according to a level. Further, the object whose degree of appearance is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011). For example, the state of the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in a movable state, it is surprisingly novel. Operation effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the stage is developed step by step by giving multiple operational opportunities to the player, it is possible to impress the player with great involvement in the stage and prevent the interest in the stage from being interrupted. be able to. Further, since the confirmed aura level is reported so as to be recognizable even in the subsequent effects, the player can feel the aftereffect of the operation effects.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 168 to 170 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the sword decorative body 5001 described above. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing symbol forms a reach state, the three decorative symbols are displayed in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 168 (A1)), and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 168). 168 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stationary in a state (initial state) visible from the player above the display area. Yes. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach production, after the image of the princess is displayed in the back of the cage (FIG. 168 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 168 (B1)). Then, the operation effect period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts when the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the player is prompted to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 169 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, a sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel an operation different from his / her own sword operation through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012) moving up and down. That's fine. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) can be reduced, and failure or breakage of the movable body can be prevented. Can do.

  In the sword operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but according to the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword operation. You may do it.

  When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initially State) and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 169 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 169 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword storage state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 169 (C2) is notified. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) The princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword ornament is displayed. 5001 maintains the second sword state (FIG. 169 (D2)) Note that at this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterwards may be used to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the winning expectation and the game profit when winning)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the second sword state by the player's sword operation, that is, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the front left-right center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 169 (D3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the total fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has good visibility is displayed. An image of a princess who is surprised when the bag is removed is displayed (FIG. 170 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword operation has been performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current variable display is a hit, the hit with the smiling princess is notified. An image is displayed (FIGS. 170 (E1) and (E2)), and an image for notifying the detachment is displayed together with the sad princess when the detachment occurs (FIGS. 170 (F1) (F2)).

  When a player's sword operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the movable effect that the sword ornament 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. When the player cannot move because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as “Please release the sword” is performed. Even if the player does not stop holding the sword decorative body 5001, the performance itself proceeds. However, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player at the movable motion timing in the horizontal direction of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 169 (D3)). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 has been moved in the left-right direction, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) have progressed. Since it is comprised so that game progress may not stagnate. Note that the sword ornament 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword ornament 5001, or is configured not to perform the movable effect. May be.

  As described above, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword decoration operation (vertical movement) of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operation position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved in the left direction). That is, based on the sword operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword operation has been performed, increasing the player's operation value and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means can be operated in a stepwise manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right after operation) depending on the player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  The left and right movable effects of the sword decorative body 5001 are effect display for the purpose of performing an effect that is integrated with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY. Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, a left-right direction movable effect that is displaced to the left (left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an upward / downward motion (a sword operation for pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 that is performed after the operation is based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  Also, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173. FIGS. 171 to 173 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 that is used in many ways. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern (A (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that a variation being executed is a big hit and an operation of the operation button 410 are performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 171 (A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. An operation promotion effect is started to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 171 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by a player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 171 (N1)), an image suggesting the big hit expectation is displayed (FIG. 172 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 172 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 172 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character that changes the held display may be displayed.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 171 (M1) in which an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message “Title chance to extract the sword” and the explanation of the operation “Take me a sword” message) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 173 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a knives operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 173 (M3)). When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 173 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 173 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 173 (M6)).

  As described above, the pressing operation of the operation button 410 enables various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effects of the other operation means (sword ornament 5001). The subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and the decrease in the willingness to operate and the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

  In the series of reach productions, the first operation (press operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (press operation and sword operation). The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not appear instead.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword ornament 5001 rather than the operation button 410 having a lower expectation than the first sword ornament 5001. Is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 174 to 178 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not move based on the pressing operation, and is displayed in a deviating manner, the display is re-varied from the deviating manner and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1)-(P4) in the figure → R when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given or R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 174A), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , The message “Move the movable body with a single button stroke”) is displayed (FIG. 174 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. The prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 174 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation effective period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do it. Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed in state from the sword storage state to the second sword extraction state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) moves and is a big hit, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is in a fully dropped state from the initial state. Is moved so as to become (FIG. 175 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has been de-duplicated with the specific decorative member SDY (playing object) is displayed with an image (decorative symbol of the decorative symbol). Message of stop mode “777” and “special” is displayed (FIG. 175 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only allowed to move by being stopped in small steps. Not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern with a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 176 (P1)). The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 176 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in a deviating manner (“767”), or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a revival start image (says “Madaja”) indicating that the variation display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state in FIG. 176 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 176 (P3)), the decorative design is again reached and reduced in the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 176 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 176 (P5)). Thereby, the player raises a sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state. The operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the set production pattern, and the specific decorative member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmed image) in which sweat is blotted on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 177 (R1)). The operation of the operation button 410 is started while the operation button 410 is light-decorated while the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) continues to move in small increments, and an operation that prompts the user to press the operation button 410. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 177 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is no longer decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 177 (R3)). At this time, the decorative design displayed at the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 173 (M4)), at this time, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the decoration symbol. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is restored from the all-dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is displayed on the screen. An image for notifying the jackpot is displayed in the center (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “special” message) (FIG. 177 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of order, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative pattern of the shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 177 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decorative body) in which the samurai who has closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes. (Determined image) is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state with the aura member (FIG. 178 (Q1)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective based on the image of the display area. At this time, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, etc. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments, when the predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword state is reached and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 178 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 177 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 178 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 177 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 178 (Q5)).

  In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given an opportunity to operate the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned FIGS. 168 to 178, three examples of reach effect production patterns using the sword ornament 5001 are given, but various production modes may be combined. Thereby, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIG. 179 to FIG. 193, a pseudo continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 whose form is changed in stages according to the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (revariation) will be described. Pseudo-continuous production is an effect that temporarily changes the display of decorative symbols and re-variates them, and is performed in response to pseudo-continuous variation along with pseudo-continuous variation in which temporary suspension and re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. Here, the above-described temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is selected by the main control board 4100, the pseudo continuous effects of the production pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the production contents by the peripheral control board 4140 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword ornament)
First, with reference to FIG. 179, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The form of the sword decorative body 5001 up to the foregoing has been provided with two types, the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating the form of a sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-continuous performance. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. From the left and right side portions of the sheath portion 5020, the player It has an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above. 179 (A) to 179 (D) are diagrams showing types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 is in any form of stage 0 form to stage 3 form according to the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIG. 149 (A) and FIG. 151 (A), and no operation is required for any of the components. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 179 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath part 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 179 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 spreads and moves from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 179 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decoration part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decoration part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010 that can accept an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can do.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 180 to FIG. 193, an example of the effect transition will be described for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (A), the main control board 4100 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. A pseudo-continuous effect is performed when any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo-continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weakness) corresponding to each of six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is a sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), The sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, and the pseudo resurrection LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Selected.

  In the production pattern, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of pseudo continuous variation (revariation), the presence / absence of operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the operation opportunity are given The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is set (see FIG. 188 (B)). The production pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuations of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) 1 to 3 times. Further, “weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (semi-drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). In addition, the “pseudo sword LV1” gives a selection operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and continues selection of pseudo-sequential fluctuation (re-variation) by selecting the player not to operate. Indicates that the performance can be obtained. In addition, the “pseudo resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern that gives the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo ream fluctuation (revariation). This indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is again performed after the end of the fall effect of the special decorative member SDY (a glimpse) based on the first operation opportunity of the variation. The details of the contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) increases, that is, as the shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decorative member SDY The lower the fall position of the object), the higher the expectation degree is set. However, when the fall position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is a half fall, the number of times of continuous continuous fluctuation (revariation) is 1 It is set so that the expected degree is the same as when the specific decorative member SDY (striking object) is dropped all the time with a small production pattern. Specifically, the expected number of times of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 performance pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the total falling sword Expectation level of LV1 strong performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 times, expectation degree of semi-falling sword LV2 weak performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong performance pattern for the first and last drop is 50%, the expectation level of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern for the half-fall sword LV3 is 3% The expectation of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of 3 times of variation) and the total falling sword LV3 is set to 65%. In addition, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation varies depending on the selected variation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the degree of expectation is set higher as the variation pattern has a higher expectation level. The expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% respectively when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern. It becomes. In addition, the expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern is 47% and 74% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, respectively. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  In the following, the pseudo-continuous effects of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 188 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 187 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. 189 to 193. FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of the pseudo-continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. FIGS. 181 to 183 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects as to whether or not an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given while pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is being performed. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns (the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character)). is there. FIG. 185 and FIG. 186 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. FIGS. 189 to 193 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and FIG. 189 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). 190 is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 191 is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. 192 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). FIG. 193 shows a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of an effect transition in case a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed in the effect before a variable display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 180 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the heel is visible from the player above the display area (initial state) ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 180B and 180C, the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect content notification “100 chances if the body can be defeated” message, Samurai Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-continuous production is started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-varied to the player. Inform you. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 1 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in FIG. Thus, since the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) are notified at the time of temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) starts, the player It is possible to grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  When the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 180 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 180 (D) described above. In addition, the pseudo continuous sword pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so as to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the change of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The shape change of the sword ornament 5001 at this time is the timing at which the player's line of sight moves to the sword ornament 5001 from the effect display in which pseudo-variation (revariation) is started and moved toward the sword ornament 5001. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). Note that the shape change timing of the sword ornament 5001 may be before the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). For example, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed together with the display of the pseudo-continuous sword at the time of FIG. Alternatively, pseudo continuous variation (revariation) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state while being enlarged and displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state that can be operated by the player being used as the operating means enabled? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. Subsequent effects include a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is effective in operation (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is not effective in operation (name). To “LV2” or “LV3”). Below, an example of an effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern / Sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 181 and FIG. 184, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition in this case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given by the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. ), An operation confirmation image (an image with the eyes of the samurai opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed (FIG. 181 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for a player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 181 (T2)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 181 (T3)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, an expectation notification effect by a fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, if the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is moved from the initial state to the fall state. Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (blanket) is returned from the all-drop state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 180 (B). An expected degree notification image (“100 body defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the total fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by a later-described half-fall state. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Here, the expectation degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  In addition, when the set performance pattern is a “weak” performance pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a half-fall state. The semi-dropped state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps with the upper half region of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. . Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (blanket) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 180 (B). An expected degree notification image (“50 body defeat!”) Is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Similarly to the “strong” performance pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  If no sword operation by the player is detected within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern or a “weak” production pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has ended without the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is finished, as shown in FIG. 184 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. The Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. Thus, by operating when the sword decorative body 5001 is required to be delivered, the player can perform the reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object). I can greet you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation every time, so that the player's willingness to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the game interest for uniform production is suppressed can do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 188 (B) and 189, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the first stage is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an opportunity to operate. When the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. When there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 189, when the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed to the second state where the sword is placed (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the player's thrilling feeling and allowing the player to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 181 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to a semi-dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor accessory) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern / Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not provided at the first pseudo-variation (revariation) operation opportunity provision timing. After tracing the effect transition shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (G), an operation opportunity is not given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggesting image shown in FIG. 180 (G). A continuation image indicating that the samurai's eyes are closed is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second sword state is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 181 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 181 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second quasi-continuous change (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the temporary stop display just before the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and effect level (number of quasi-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  When the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 181 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is cracked to the left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 181 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 181 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 2 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing a result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 182 (V1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 182 (V1) described above is displayed ( FIG. 182 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for requesting an aggressive operation is given to the player is displayed (FIG. 182 (V3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 2 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 182 (V4)). When a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 described above, an expectation notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. In addition, when no sword operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 does not depend on whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). 186 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 190, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV2 weak production pattern and the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. In the period T2 during which the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. And when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed to the second state where the sword is placed (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 180 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 181 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 182 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 182 (V4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to a semi-dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor accessory) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak production pattern / Sword LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operating means in the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern or the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the sword decoration body is provided at the operation timing of the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) shown in FIG. 182 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity 5001 is not given, after the effect transition shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to (G) → FIG. 181 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 182 (V1) is followed, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuation image (an image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 182 (V1) is displayed. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 182 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols are changed again (FIG. 182 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo-ream sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. The sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display just before the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and the production level (number of pseudo continuous variations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, when the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 182 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012a so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 182 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 182 (V8)). It should be noted that the shape change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword ornament 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed every time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be changed in a plurality of stages collectively when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 183 (X1)).

  Here, when the set production patterns are the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 183 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for the player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 183 (X3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 3 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put sword!” (FIG. 183 (X4)). When a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 described above, an expectation notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. If the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). FIG. 186 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 191, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV3 weak performance pattern and the sword LV3 strong performance pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed and the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) occur. In the period T2 in which the sword ornament 5001 is not given an opportunity to operate, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) is performed. Give the operator an opportunity to operate. And when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 191, when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed to the second state where the sword is placed (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 180 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 181 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) is generated without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation, although the player's feeling of throb is enhanced (see FIG. 182 (V1)). Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 182 (V5)). Then, the sword decorative body reaches the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 182 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 182 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 182 (V8)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to a semi-dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glamor accessory) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo-sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo-sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operating means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), but the pseudo continuous change is made by selecting that the player does not operate. An effect transition example in the case where a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level change effect) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given at the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) operation opportunity provision timing. . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for requesting the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to operate. Accordingly, after following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 180A to 180G and FIG. 181 T1, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is given the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 181 T1. An operation selection image (“Opportunity Maybe!” Message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to perform an operation from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is performed is displayed (FIG. 185 (Z1 )). Then, the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect that prompts the user to select the sword ornament operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation valid period are shown together with a message “Please select whether you want to place the sword”. An image is displayed (FIG. 185 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern, the subsequent production transition varies greatly.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 184) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 185 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed ends, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second sword state in the first stage to the initial sword state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Is it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 186 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (glare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!” Indicating that the pseudo decoration variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 186 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 186 (W3)).

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the operation is detected in the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern) of the basic production pattern as in FIG. 184 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 184 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is displayed in a normal manner with a decorative pattern (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode at the same timing as the timing predetermined in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 184 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 185 (Z2) described above, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”) When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed is completed, the operation pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 185 (Z2) to a continuation image (FIG. 181 (S1)) indicating that an operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, continuation of pseudo-continuous variation. Then, similarly to the sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern) of the basic performance pattern, the above-described FIG. 181 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 182 (V1) → FIG. ) → FIG. 183 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 184 (U5).

  In this way, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is greatly different in the development of the production after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 4100. When the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and reach the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, you will not only be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach a reach effect without knowing the degree of expectation you know if you were operating it originally . Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the case of the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if an operation is performed, an effect (continuous change in the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 due to a level-up effect) caused by continuing pseudo-variation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is missed and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 is initialized. It will return to form. The operation at the selection operation opportunity is the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 4100 that cannot be known by the player, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that results in disadvantageous operation results. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), in the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). When the player operates the sword ornament 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form when the selection operation opportunity is selected to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is increased to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the number of operations set in advance in the production pattern is required, but in this example, an opportunity for two operations (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance. The granting ends at the opportunity, and a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear instead, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 4100, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form You can see only the changes until you reach the reach. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected variation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped, and the operation is performed at the operation opportunity given after the form is further changed (leveled up) to become the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 188 (A), the expectation level in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but this is not restrictive. For example, the expectation degree of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection feeling, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 192, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the first stage in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by an operation of the player is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern or a sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since three quasi-continuous variations (revariations) are inherently provided, a specific decoration is provided. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern. When the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variations (revariations) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period T2 during which (revariation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 during which the third pseudo variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And enable the player to have operational opportunities. And when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 192, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 180E). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed to the second state where the sword is placed (see FIG. 180 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) → FIG. 185 (See (Z1)), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 185 (Z2)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to a semi-dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) continues (when the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern is set), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S1)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) is generated without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation, although the player's feeling of throb is enhanced (see FIG. 182 (V1)). Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 182 (V5)). Then, the sword decorative body reaches the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 182 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 182 (V7)). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 182 (V8)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to a semi-dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern), The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword state to the sword state as the operation effective period ends, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo Resurrection Sword LV1 production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 187, after following the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and making it appear as if it has entered the reach effect as it is, the pseudo-revival where the pseudo-variation (re-variation) is restored An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 4140 when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is selected by the main control board 4100.

  When the set production pattern is a pseudo-resurrection sword LV1 production pattern, as in the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, the above-described FIGS. 180 (A) to (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) to (T3). Follow production transition. If an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the same effect as in FIGS. 184 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is shown in FIG. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword design is resumed. If no operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword storage state with the end of the operation valid period, as in other production patterns, In place of the above-described FIG. 187 (UA1) → (UA2), the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed at the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 187 (UA3) described above. Is temporarily stopped with a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, a pseudo-sword design in a form indicating the form and production level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. As a result, the player is notified (FIG. 187 (UA4)). The sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo continuous sword pattern at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001, and the initial form (sword storage state) is maintained. In this way, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of a temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts in the stage 3 form (FIG. 187 (UA4)), the form and the effect level of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 187 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is applied to the sword decorative body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative part 5012a, and the second decorative part 5012b are operated so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 187 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 187 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its shape at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form, it can impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  After that, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extraction state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player is made effective as an operation means, and the above-described FIGS. 183 (X1) to (X5) When an operation by the player is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decorative member SDY (in accordance with whether or not the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, is not illustrated. The type of the fall effect of the 簾 (character) is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is once in a half-dropped state, so that the level is raised and the above-described FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) → The same degree of expectation notification effect by the entire fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the expectation degree due to the semi-falling effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) as in FIG. 184 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

  In the case where an operation by the player is not detected at an operation opportunity for enabling the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as an operation means, the operation effective period ends as in the case of other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword insertion state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A runaway image ("enemy, runaway!") Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is completed.

  As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern is followed. The same level of performance as the third stage (the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) production in the basic production pattern) will be performed, so the player will be surprised and reach with greater expectations than the other production patterns. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or the subsequent fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) becomes a semi-fall, the player does not feel distracted. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-variation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 193, the operation execution timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 performance pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Give players an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the falling effect (expectation notification) that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) falls half by the player's operation Production). Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is finished and once the display of the decorative pattern variation is returned to the normal mode, the third quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to the stage 3 form. Then, the stage 3 form sword ornament 5001 is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, if the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is performed in the period T1, the fall effect (expectedness notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is completely dropped by the player's operation. Production). Moreover, when the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) is not performed in the period T1, the fall in which the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) falls half by the player's operation. Production (expectation notification production) is performed. Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 193, when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 180E). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed to the second state where the sword is placed (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the player's thrilling feeling and allowing the player to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 181 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 187 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree to be displayed is displayed (see FIG. 187 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 187 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 187 (UA4 )reference).

  The sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form simultaneously with the resumption of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 187 (UA5)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state where the sword is placed into the second sword state (see FIG. 187 (UA6)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is changed from the initial state to the fully dropped state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 184 (U1)). Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the total fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, if the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is not dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (revariation), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is moved from the initial state. The point is changed to a semi-falling state (see FIG. 184 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image corresponding to the semi-falling is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword extraction state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 (W2 )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous change frequency is 2 times and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed a plurality of times, respectively. If it is less than that, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state every time the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is made, and the player can operate, but an operation effective period is provided. (Without giving the player an opportunity to operate), and returning to the sword state. For this reason, since the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is characterized in that the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a beneficial effect for the player by the player's operation. Make the player's choice of operation carefully. Therefore, interest can be given to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the sword ornament 5001 can change in form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are increased step by step. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state and the second sword extraction state (operating position) to when the operation effective period is generated, the player operates the operating mode at the operating position (form, light emission, movable Etc.) is preferably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, so that the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is entered, and the mode of the operation means cannot be checked. It is possible to dispel the concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by shifting to the operation effect.

  In addition, although the stage change of the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 was shown with the form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emission mode or operation mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in stages in correspondence with the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change).

(Application to pre-reading production)
In the above description, the sword effect in the pseudo-reach reach effect has been described. The case of applying to pre-reading effects will be described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the katana LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When the hold that is the target of the pre-reading effect is generated as the third hold 3, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 180B to 180F are performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. Note that the sword decorative body 5001 is different in that the second sword extraction state is limited when an operation opportunity is given (operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 is generated), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 180 (G) to 181 (S1) to (S4) are performed. Further, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effects as in FIG. 182 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIG. 183 (X1) to (X3) are performed. Is called. Note that, as described above, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state in the pre-reading effect only when the operation effective period occurs. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 that is the target of the pre-reading effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. To the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

  The state change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the second sword state is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. It may be performed at the start. The pre-reading effect also has the same effect as the pseudo-reach reach effect.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197, the pre-operation suggestion effect that is executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is effective in operation or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in operation among a plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). . Specifically, the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (the black object) is positioned at the initial position as an suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggesting effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the black object). There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position. In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 194 (B)) that generates the operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. Is performed, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 70% (including a step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern of a pre-operation suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion pattern is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
194 and 195 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 4140 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern selected by the main control board 4100. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 194 (A)), it is determined that the operation button is determined in advance by the lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 194 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. Further, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are not changed.

  Then, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is made effective at a higher rate than the sword decorative body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed with the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 194 (D), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state (form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword insertion operation.

  In the above-described FIG. 194 (C) or (D), when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected, The specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 195 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decorative symbol stop mode “777”, “Superb” message) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the present variable display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 196 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is valid during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. Note that FIG. 197 shows that although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is once activated and the sword ornament 5001 is not activated, and then the sword ornament is displayed. It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes operation effective.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. This is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggested position It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggestion position. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is validated, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the suggested position, the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword ornament 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 196 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is operating at the suggested position. Is generated. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (form with an aura), so that the player can perform a sword insertion operation. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, there is a case where the pre-operation suggesting effect is executed with the second suggestion pattern although the rate is low. At that time, as shown in FIG. 196 (AA2), the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved from the state operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) may be moved from the state operating to the suggestion position without being returned to the initial state to the entire fall state or the initial state.

  When an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected in the above-described FIG. 196 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-described FIG. 194 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 195 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decorative symbol stop mode “777”, “Superb” message) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the present variable display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  It should be noted that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of operation patterns are provided so that the operation efficiency of the sword decorative body 5001 is different, the player's interest in the operation can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, In addition to the basic pattern in which the transition of the effect of FIG. 196 (AA 1) → (AA 3) described above until the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the operation button 410 is once enabled, and then the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 4140 This is executed before the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 196 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to FIG. 196 (AA1) described above and the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (bowl) are performed (FIG. 197 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 197 (BB2)). Here, even if the player detects a pressing operation of the operation button 410 during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 195 described above is not performed, and the switching suggests switching of the operation means that is effective. The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 197 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (aura-equipped form), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation means that is effective for operation is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword ornament 5001. A switching notification image (message of “extraction chance” and “having a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 197 (BB4)). In the meantime, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) has been moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 196 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 195).

  Note that only the image display of the operation button 410 may be performed without enabling the operation button 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 197 (BB2). It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is operated after the player's interest is once directed to the operation button 410. Further, the step-up pattern is not limited to the second suggestion pattern, but may be selectable when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is enabled. ) Can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 194 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)), the sword ornament 5001 has a high degree of expectation and the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (garden accessory) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, it is suggested before the operation. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is also used for the result notification after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 195), a series of falling effects are made from the up and down movement of the suggestion effect before operation. It can be shown in the production of this, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective in operation is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is activated once (or after it appears that the operation is validated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is located at the suggested position, D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it can be expected that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 may become effective thereafter. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same time (FIG. 194 (B)), as in the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (glare) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (still). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player provides an operation effect suggestion by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword decorative body 5001 is operated effectively. The player strongly desires that the operation valid period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggested position. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the effect display device 1600 has a specific effect pattern. Perform the production. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation related to privilege provision). 100% or 0% may be expected for the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation time effect.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation required for granting a privilege) In addition to the operation button 410, another operation means (such as a sword ornament 5001) can be further provided. In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There are cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (givenness expectation degree) related to privilege grant is higher than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for providing the privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in a previous stage where the stage has not yet been performed and the operation is just being performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (such as the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) having such a stunning property. In the case of granting, common operation-related effects can be executed when giving these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production reception is possible). ,
The operation on the operation button 410 is enabled after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled (allowing for receiving the effect). ) The first production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated without producing the “specific operation-related production” (production reception is possible). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period) are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (production) by executing one of the production modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs. Regardless of the case in which a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) can accept the production occurs, it is common (specification prior to the occurrence of those periods). ) Operation-related effects can be executed, so that it is possible to have an interesting aspect as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can be accepted. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect starts to be produced, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep secret.

  Hereinafter, several production modes that can be adopted when such a common (specific) operation-related production will be described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any production reception period occurs after execution of a common (specific) operation-related production. ) If any production reception period occurs without the execution of the operation related production, the content of the production may be omitted. However, the content of the production in the case where any production acceptance period occurs without executing the common (specific) operation-related production is as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example. . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 appears without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each effect described above. Is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First production mode]
198 and 199 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive an effect during a period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the example of a production (1st production aspect).

  FIG. 198 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 198 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 198 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 198 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 198 (b) progress, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display prompting to operate any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) in a state where each area is stopped and displayed (in this case, a character display such as “operate”) and an effect reception The production situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although the operation can be received for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). It becomes possible to make it unclear which of the productions can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 198 (c)) is the same in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001). 198 (b), (c) common (specific) operation related over the period until the operation of at least one of (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted for production. The production is executed.

  Accordingly, not only in this production example, but also in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). Middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration image may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation buttons 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. It is also possible to perform a display prompting the user. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  In the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 198 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light-emitting state, or light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to provide a connection between the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 198 (c) appears is only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where it is possible to accept the production, whether it is in the second situation where only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  In this effect example (first effect mode), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first condition (the operation button 410) or the third condition (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is present. Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when “GG” in the drawing is made progress), an effect is received and an operation effect according to the operation (FIG. 199 (d), FIG. 199 (f)). Is to be done.

  In the operation effect, the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 199 (d) and (f). ("Chance!") Is executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and making any of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception In addition, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 199 (d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 199 (d), the operation is performed in response to the effect reception even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decorative body 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and an operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-stage operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 199 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in the sword position according to the reception of the performance. Instead of returning to the (sword state), it is possible to execute control to maintain the blade position (sword state). As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword position (sword state) to the sword position (sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword state. Occasionally there will be a performance during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the operation-time effects (FIGS. 199 (d) and (f)) are performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 199 (e), the reach state is formed and the reach effects can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocal operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001). 5001) is the case where the production can be accepted and the case where the production cannot be accepted, the common (specific) operation-related production starts, and the common (specific) where the production is started. While an operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) cannot receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the other operation means (for example, the operation button 410) have effects respectively. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is in effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decorative body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production, the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production. You will be able to be confused as if not. That is, in this case, when an effect is received, it becomes possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decorative body 5001, which is the side with a higher rate of expectation. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to add interest about which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is consumed by the amount of such erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the reception of the production required for the execution of the production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is not established, the operation is detected, and the operation on the side where the production can be accepted based on the detection. You may make it perform control which ends the production reception period with respect to a means at the time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

  Also, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side. However, the operation effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If an effect on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the game entertainment can be improved more appropriately.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, an operation-time effect may be performed when there is an operation on the first operation means in the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The operation-time effect may be performed as effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 It is supposed that the setting is made so as to correspond to any one of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the presentation is accepted, the same operation-time effect appears. In the third situation, the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that an effect or another effect aspect (different from the operation effects in the first situation and the second situation) should appear. However, in the example of the production, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  In addition, the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side on which the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Second production mode]
200 to 203 are executed as an effect indicating the progress of the effect until a specific operation-related effect appears in either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears as a result of the above, it is suggested that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production (2nd production aspect) suggested that the production reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among these.

  In FIG. 200 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decoration display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 200B shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 200B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image of the lightning image IZ acting on the images BTG and SYG is depicted. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 200 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 200 (b) has progressed, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are effect-displayed. There is an effect of pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 200B and 200C) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, An effect is received for the operation button 410 when an effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 200B and 200C are “the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001”. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of these periods”.

  Note that the left diagram in FIG. 200 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right diagram displays the sword decoration image SYG. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 201D shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains in the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 200C. An effect depicting the above is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 201 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the production (the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the effect accepting period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is made to emit light, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted.

  Note that the effects shown in FIG. 201 (d) are not progressed through specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 200 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effects. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 200A). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher.

  In addition, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 201 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio that the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 201 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without going through It is desirable to increase the value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  FIG. 201 (e) shows the result of the operation being performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is being performed. This is a depiction of the performance during operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 201 (e) is the same as that in FIG. 199 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the presentation even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. The same is true in that the control for reciprocating between the positions (control for setting the operation state) can be executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 201 (e)) is performed, a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 201 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed (the reach effect is started). Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-operating state (sword storage state)) at an earlier stage. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocal operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  In contrast, FIG. 202 (g) shows that the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. An effect depicting the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 202 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for production (the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “Take out the sword” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state in which the effect can be received (that is during the effect receiving period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 including the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword decorative body 5001 itself may be turned on) is set in the light emitting state. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is not progressed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effect. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 200A). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Still further, when the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed without performing the specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than the case, and the expectation for granting a privilege is made lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 202 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, although the production mode such as “Intense heat !!”, which indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the production reception, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. “Chance!” May be displayed. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, there is an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area, and any of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (h), based on the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to any one of the plurality of aspects described above ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 179 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 202 (i), even when the operation effect (FIG. 202 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the sword state and thereafter the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the sword state (for example, during the period when the reach production is performed). An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, an operation-time effect according to the operation to the state of the sword can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to two operation steps for one operation means (sword decoration body 5001), and the first step operation (operation to the sword state) and the second step operation are performed. Since the operation effects are performed according to each operation (operation to the sword state), not only when the operation on the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed, the first stage In the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed to the time when the second operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to favorably maintain the gaming interest for the operation. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (in this case, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation have different contents.

  In addition, when the operation effect (FIG. 202 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to be given the second stage operation opportunity. Whether the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained at a position where the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given (the sword state) in the operation stage production corresponding to the first stage operation. You may make it perform as an effect which suggests the expectation degree of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the sword state but returned to the sword state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state). It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 202 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage, if the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect) Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-driven state (sword storage state)) at a stage prior to the start of). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance in the sword state. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 203 (j), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 200 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, as in FIG. 201 (d). Thus, an effect depicting the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) or FIG. 202 (g). Or the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)). Here, the lightning image IZ is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as “press” and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in FIG. Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is.

  FIG. 203 (k) shows that, as a result of the development shown in FIG. 203 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in 靄 MY, and even its outline is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), all effect elements (button images BTG) that suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k) appears. Thus, it becomes possible to give a suspicion that the production reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (approaching), and the remaining time until it is definitely shown to which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  In FIG. 203 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 203 (k), the outer shape of the bag MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a performance that depicts the appearance.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur depending on the outer shape of the 靄 MY. Will be able to.

  Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (i), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) from FIG. 203 (k), and until which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is clearly shown. This suggests that the remaining time is less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 203 (i) further progresses and 靄 MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 202 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200B and 200C), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 201 (d), FIG. 203 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will be left. Will be able to.

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIGS. 201 (d) and 203 (j)). The effect on the sword ornament 5001 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200B and 200C) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by 靄 MY (FIG. 203 (k)), and further When the production progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the production shown in FIG. 202 (g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the performance shown in FIG. 203 (k) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) Is set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again, and the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 203 (j) and 203 (k) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, in the production situation shown in FIG. 202 (h) in the production example (second production mode) with the operation button 410 provided as an operable operation means, FIG. 201 (e). As in the effect situation shown in FIG. 4, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where no operation by the player is performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Third production mode]
204 to 207 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show an example effect (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 204 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 will soon be able to receive an effect.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are adopted as such a predetermined movable member, and the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated respectively. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is supposed to be recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position. However, compared to when operating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity, respectively. Each of them at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, it is an operating means that still has time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time until the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the symbol change ends, It can be suitably maintained.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is not produced by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by the respective operations by the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 204B). After the start, basically the same production progress as the second production mode is made.

  For example, first, of the effects shown in FIG. 204 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The production contents are as described with reference to FIG.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 200 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are each operated from the initial position (position when not driven). It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 each have a position different from the initial position (position at the time of non-driving) after the specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state where driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given, When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation unit on the side where the effect can be accepted at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended for the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (non-drive position) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and an effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur The operation means on the other side can be moved to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the extension of the operation-related effects. Also, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. Except for being displayed as corresponding to “410”, the production content is as described with reference to FIG. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are moved to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. These are positioned as operating states (states where driving force is applied) at positions different from the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 204B and 204C, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driven position). In contrast, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are different from each other, so that their matching will be soon. It can be suggested that the illustrated effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 204D is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 204D, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “in the operation position”. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a certain movable operation button 410 ", the content of the production is as described with reference to FIG. 201 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-drive), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Become so.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first provided. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”) You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (f) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 201 (e). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 205 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 205 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 205 (g), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 201 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 206D is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 204D, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except that the content of the instruction is “push in” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, the effect as described with reference to FIG. It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decorative body 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Will come to be.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position)” After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), when the effect shown in FIG. 206 (i) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 202 (h). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 206 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 202 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 206 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206 (j), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 201 (f).

  On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a movable operation button 410 "at a certain time, the content of the production is as described with reference to FIG.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively in the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is still no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will still occur. Will be able to.

  As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k), when the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 203 (k). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), when the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 203 (l). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both. In the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m), it is more preferable that the outer shape of the heel MY is closer to the sword ornament 5001 at the operation position than the sword ornament 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) So that an effect pattern that approaches the outer shape can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) may be performed. When such a production pattern can be performed, the production shown in FIGS. 207 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can accept the production. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the operation on the button side is performed. Become. When a “sword decoration image SYG imitating a sword ornament 5001 (second display mode)” appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001 of the body 5001 and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received, an effect during operation on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is made to appear, even when the sword-playing side operation is performed, based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production at the time of success (specific decoration member SDY is operated) and the production at the time of failure (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is caused to appear, and the contents of the effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  It should be noted that the operation effect on the button side and the operation effect on the sword accessory side are the same effects on the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples related to a specific operation-related production, the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as making a push between specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state with respect to one operation means The operation may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 be operated in the sword insertion state or the sword extraction state when an effect result indicating whether or not to perform the operation is shown.

  In addition, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the symbol variation execution period, when the symbol variation is in the hold state (which was digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable to operate each of a plurality of operating means provided.

  In the above-described second and third effect forms and other examples thereof, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images are not necessarily displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while it is suggested that an effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period occurs. Therefore, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration image may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. Either BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of a specific operation-related effect. When the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ) that has been executed is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When lightning falls on the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock, so that the production can be advanced to the production shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and 202 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on a rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, it is possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIG. 201 (d) and FIG. 202 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the effect progress as effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, there are specific cases in which a production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and a production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the time when the operation-related effects are executed (the effect start) to the time when the effect reception period occurs. In addition, it is desirable to set so that the production reception period is generated for the same period of time even when an operation opportunity is given to any operation means after a specific operation-related production is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related production. When operating the operation means on the side (FIG. 201 (e), etc.), control is performed to return the operation means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the operation. It may be. However, the time when the operation is performed is not used as a reference, and the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated until the operation is ended depending on at which timing in the production reception period the operation is performed. It is desirable to vary the length of time.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the time remaining in the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from when the specific operation-related effect is started to when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably based on the stage reception within the stage reception period after the specific operation-related stage is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  Moreover, it corresponds to any one of images that can appear in the effect result after the start of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period related to a specific effect (an effect such as operating a specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to produce a special production mode as if the production result was shown and the production result ended even though it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production was performed. During this time, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest. When a specific operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received, a predetermined effect is performed based on the reception of the effect. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the high-expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, when the specific operation-related effects relating to a plurality of operation means are in the middle of being performed, if an effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of these operation means, When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the performance as the specific operation-related effect between the start of the production of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and more privilege is given than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  Further, in each of the above-described production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, an production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. Alternatively, an automatic button effect mode in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before may be set. According to such an automatic button effect mode, an operation-time effect is generated without an operation every time an effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. If the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect mode is set, an effect acceptance period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of the operation means while the specific operation-related effect is being performed. In this case, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (the automatic button function does not function). After this, even if an effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable that the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (automatic button function to function) is executed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect mode, for example, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed not only during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed but also during the period in which the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated, the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated. When the operation button 410 is operated during the operation, the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state in addition to the operation time effect corresponding to the operation. is there. However, even if the automatic button effect mode is in the on state, it may be necessary to occasionally generate an operation effect by an operation by the player. Within the production reception period for the operation button 410 when the operation button 410 is in the on state, not only the operation button 410 but also an operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled to operate the other operation means. When the operation button 410 is operated, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, the same on-operation effect is generated as when the operation button 410 is operated while the automatic button effect mode is maintained in the on state. desirable.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect mode is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect mode is changed from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 or a sword ornament 5001 is simulated. While the displayed sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (production reception is received) for the operation button 410. Period) and when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 208 (a) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and 205 (e). Display mode) is displayed, and an effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 208 (b) is displayed instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 202 (g) and 206 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly switched to the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 201 (d), 202 (g), 205 (e), and 206 (h), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as a background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested) is displayed. To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 208 (a), the first image having a shield (button image BTG simulating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design is held. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 208B, a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) do not need to be prepared as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself. It is desirable that the operation means be displayed as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape or a part of the design.

  Further, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (first display mode) and the effect image TG using the entire display area as described above are produced. You may make it perform also as the production | presentation which suggests a different expectation degree depending on which (2nd display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. You may make it suggest an expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  In addition, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (desired to have a relatively high expectation), a specific When an operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after a later-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect) is displayed (it is desirable that the effect state is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed (for example, after a prelude effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect) is not executed. When displayed, the operation reception period for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG as well as another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give an interesting aspect of the operation different from the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively highly expected production situation, and to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a “specific operation-related effect is executed relatively It is desirable to suggest that there is a production situation with a higher expectation than when it is in a production situation where the sword decoration image SYG appears in a production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related production is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the production reception period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410). It is desirable that the effect during the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (the operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is not performed. Although the operation means different from the means is operated, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect mode is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when an effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period is executed. It is desirable to make it so that the automatic button function works. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect mode is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. The operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be obtained even if no operation is performed even when the production reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means. It is desirable that only the same operation-time effects as when operated are executed, and the special operation effects that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation time effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-described automatic button function before another timing. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and a specific timing has arrived. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the effect during operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) from appearing. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the presentation reception period, but the automatic button presentation mode is continued in the on state even after the presentation reception period ends. It is desirable.

  In the above-described effect example, the above-described effects (such as effects during operation and an automatic button function) may be applied after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and other examples thereof, “the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” or the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is performed. If any one of the “sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (second display mode)” is displayed and the presentation is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation-time effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content that is suggested to have a relatively low expectation level. One of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first For the sword ornament 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the timer effect described above (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer-targeted). is there. In other words, in the timer effect for which “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” is produced, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (in this case, “0”), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the performance during operation. In this case, in the “operation opportunity for the operation means” prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when an operation is performed on the operation means, an effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery One of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as an effect target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect results that are advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect effect is not given. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect with the effect of “granting an operation opportunity for the operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)” appears, the “target operation opportunity for the operation means” is selected. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment at the time.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that attention will be distracted and the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is set to an unexecuted state, and the count value It is desirable to start the “specific operation-related effect” after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). In addition, the following timer effects are equivalent to the above-mentioned notice side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  FIG. 209 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 209 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 209 (a). Indicates the situation. In the production situation shown in FIG. 209 (b), the “specific operation-related production” has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which production the timer production is targeted for. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (unknown state) in which it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count reaches “0”) and is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this manner, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. At the time when the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the count value is not “0” and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which one is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), the effects are sometimes Since overlapping in series is avoided, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), until a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001) that the timer effect is an effect object is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is “the provision of an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 (operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword storage” ”Will be given the opportunity to operate”), the “specific operation-related effects” will begin to be produced in the production situation recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the display “1” is performed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the sword ornament 5001 moves in a predetermined operation (here, (Reciprocating operation in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also indicates that “granting an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword ornament 5001” is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

FIG. 209 (d) shows the effect situation where the “specific operation-related effect” has been started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to perform the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target and the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 before the production of the specific operation-related production starts. Even after the operation-related effect is started, the execution state may be continued.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the effects are developed in the order of FIGS. 209 (e) to (h). The contents of these effects are shown in FIG. 200 (c). ), FIGS. 202 (g) to (i), or 204 (d) and 206 (h) to (j), the details are omitted.

  Note that, as a timer effect performed in association with a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 209 or a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 209. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly before this), and continues after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( The degree of expectation for the big hit is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, but at the time when the effect situation where the effect is developed simultaneously appears, Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect value thereof is the same (expectation required for granting a bonus (big hit)) The same). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, so even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand whether or not to pay attention to the situation and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, the bonus is given more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 209 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, a display that suggests the type of effect target (in the effect display device 1600) “Sword”) is performed, but such a display that suggests an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be a timer object, a display that suggests which effect is a timer effect may not be performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, there is an operation opportunity for any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it was granted. However, prior to giving an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (before an effect reception period occurs), a first sign effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 Or before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 (before the production reception period occurs), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may appear. When performing these precursor effects (first predictor effect, second predictor effect), the time required for the effect (predictor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for granting a bonus when an effect appears, in order to enhance the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating an operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given, for example. A specific image is displayed, such as expressing the state of being trapped. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectation levels related to the privilege grant (big hit), In the progress of the sign effect that the button image BTG is gradually exposed, it is possible to have an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 It is important that each is executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a superordinate concept that includes it. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and any of the effect modes is performed as described below with reference to FIG. Depending on whether or not the indication reception period that occurs in response to the indication effect has a length, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the indication effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it.

  FIG. 210 is a time chart for explaining an example of the content of the production for each type of production when a plurality of types (prediction productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the production of indications.

  First, in the example (a precursor effect A) shown in FIG. 210 (a), the precursor effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (a) (prediction effect A), when the sign effect A is performed, the same time length is obtained regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 will be generated.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign effect A (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 199 (d), (f), 201 (e), 202 (h), 205 (f), 206 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (b) (prediction effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed. The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the sign production A as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). This suggests how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursor effect depends on which aspect (the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B1) was performed. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment at the time when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B2) shown in FIG. 210 (c), the sign effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The sign effect B2 is also executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not a “specific operation-related effect”, like the sign effect B1. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1). Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Display) is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect that is different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the sign production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the sign production A as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed in spite of the execution of the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for granting a bonus (big hit) Since it is suggested that the production reception period (effective period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is generated, and the sign production B2 is It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance as to which of the production reception period (effective period) T2 and the production reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of starting the presentation effects B1 and B2 is also started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different lengths of time.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect C) shown in FIG. 210 (d), the sign effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (d) (precursor effect C), when the predictor effect C is performed, the same time length is obtained even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 199 (d) and (f) 201 (e), 202 (h), 205 (f), 206 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. To be done.

  In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the sign production C is the production reception period corresponding to the sign production A as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for the warning effect C itself is shorter than the warning effect A, if the warning effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect” described above, Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the precursor effect A is generated, the game entertainment at the time of the precursor effect C is suitably maintained. Will be able to.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 210, the length of the production reception period (effective period) is associated with the types of the indication effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby producing the production reception period. The length of (validity period) was suggested. However, the production reception period (effective period) can be set by changing the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length of time for each type of sign production. ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as that at the time of the specific operation means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 205 (e), the operation button 410 is in the state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as the state of operating at the operation position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the operation position (sword extraction state). Has been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating its appearance. If the result of the performance is displayed even though a specific operation-related performance with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the range of the performance will be remarkably narrowed. Concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212, an effect image (for example, a button image) simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, and is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of the effects of the effect contents when the precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect contents when the predictor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (c) show the contents of effects when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect state, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 side. If the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword ornament 5001. It should be noted that in the prelude effect (the predecessor effect in another example is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is to be provided is given, an effect image imitating the operation means Is not necessarily displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. It comes to be.

  In the precursor effect shown in FIG. 211 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectations. Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content about which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword decorative body 5001, it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYGa has a low expectation as the sword decorative image SYG, or the expectation degree. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword ornament 5001 is in a relatively high expectation state. It will be suggested that the production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 211 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 211 (c) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword ornament 5001 to operate (“push in” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state. The sword decorative image SYGb is also extracted from the sword state in accordance with this. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received within the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword state. Maintained. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword ornament 5001) Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  In contrast, FIGS. 211 (d) to 211 (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (d), if the precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” is started as shown in FIG. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to these.

  FIG. 211 (e) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this effect situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 as the effect result of the “specific operation-related effect”. Has been. In the display shown in FIG. 211 (e), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

  FIG. 211 (f) shows an effect example when an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompts the sword ornament 5001 to operate. "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the extracted state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword extraction state (sword decoration image SYG). In contrast, the sword decorative body 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the presentation reception period ends, and is different from each other. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the sword storage state. Based on the reception, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 211, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are displayed in the effect receiving period (FIG. 211 (c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 211 (f)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG is set in the stopped state. The other side is continued in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the production when the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a predecessor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword ornamental image SYG imitating the sword ornament 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation It is possible to provide further performance. About this technique, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each above-mentioned effect aspect other than the example of an effect of FIG. 211, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unclear whether the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the contour is drawn) Display in a recognizable display state, etc.) so that it appears as the production progresses. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the side effect image that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined) It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear in sequence as the production progresses further. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect development, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected under a predetermined condition (for example, the operation means is changed). The button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG can be recognized as appearing as a result of the specific operation-related effect. Whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high in expectation or not is unknown (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). Further, it may be possible to generate an effect pattern for further effect development. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to confirm the color. In this case, the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is a display mode with a higher expectation (for example, red) than when the display mode is a lower display mode (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  212 (a) to 212 (e) are diagrams showing other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (d) to 211 (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. In other words, in FIG. 212 (a), the sign effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the sign effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) having a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword ornament image SYG) imitating the sword ornament 5001 Is depicted, and suggests which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 212 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 212 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 208 (b) (the instruction display that prompts the sword ornament 5001 to be operated is not displayed) While the operation-related effects are being performed, both the effect part (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 212 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  212 (c) to 212 (e) show an example of an effect when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 212 (c). In addition, an instruction display that prompts the sword decorative body 5001 to perform an operation (a character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), when the production reception period occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state, As shown in FIG. 212 (d), the sword decorative body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 212 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the effect reception period ends, and the player Will wait for the operation (operation from the sword state to the sword state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to (e), the movement of the sword decorative body 5001 (movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement in the rotation direction (swing in the rotation direction). In the lowering operation), the second character is drawn to swing down the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state. The operation is to be performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 212 (c)) to the end (FIG. 212 (e)) within the production reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the display of the bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 is also moved to the sword state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 212 (c)) to the end (FIG. 212 (e)). However, even if the loop process is performed, the operation is maintained without being affected by the loop process. In addition, when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the operation object role 141 within the effect reception period, the effect is received, and a predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above The loop processing is terminated, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The operation modes (operations responsible for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is completed. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues the operation without ending. Thereby, when the production reception period (FIGS. 212 (c) to (e)) that occurs through a specific operation-related production occurs, the production content of the specific operation-related production continues until after the production reception period occurs ( For example, the background can be continued and executed, and the range of the production can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212, the contents of the effect (the display in which the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 212 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect was performed. The effects (FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) differing from each other while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the performance during the presentation reception period. In this sense, also in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a direct connection between them. In addition, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting a privilege, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  It should be noted that, for a prelude effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. You may be made to suggest whether a mode with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when a production reception is made in a period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, when a precursor production as a specific operation-related production is performed, the production reception is performed in a form that changes both the production content and the background image that have appeared in the previous production. When the presentation within the period is executed, but the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the precursor effect are changed. It is also possible to execute an effect when an effect reception period occurs.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 212, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 that was started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). You may make it maintain the stop state after the operation which performed was completed before the production | presentation reception period generate | occur | produced).

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001), when a display for changing a background image is performed when an effect reception period occurs, and when the background image is changed There may be a case where the display is not performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed at the time of the production reception period, the expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed at the time of the production reception period It is desirable to make it.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When an effect is received, the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation-time effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 199 (d), 201 (e), and 202 (h), a sword decorative body 5001 (or an operation button) is provided as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not the operation related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Moreover, in the specific operation-related effects according to each of the above-described effect modes, and when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 213 (a), the button is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) in which a princess character is added. When the image BTG may be displayed and the button image BTG is displayed in this manner, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is greater than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. If it is made high, it will become possible to maintain suitably the game entertainment at the time of the button image BTG being displayed as an effect result of a specific operation related effect.

  In addition, the mode (specific effect mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision be higher than when displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 213 (a)) and a second effect pattern in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 213 (b) )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the expectation level related to the privilege grant is set to be the same when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG and the sword can be provided, as well as providing an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect. Regardless of which one of the decorative images SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific production mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, in order to allow such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) to appear, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 213 (c), the specific effect mode is in a stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. From (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) ) Appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, so that it is like a “prediction effect by the princess character” even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It is possible to provide a performance with a completely different purpose.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples of the sword decorative body 5001 is such that the sword part (the pattern part 5012 and the blade part 5011) can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 169, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. You may make it perform the said specific operation related effect as an effect about. The sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both supported by a single body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). Is formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, only the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error is likely to occur on the player side. In particular, even in the case where an operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image imitating the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 (and its If an instruction prompting operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an error in operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode will occur on the player side. Become. In other words, in this case, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error while the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If the production reception period ends before the production is accepted even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  The sword decorative body 5001 has a mode such as “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode such as “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reverse relationship. In an operation unit that can provide an aspect, if an incorrect operation is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an appropriate operation, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operational opportunities is increased.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect on whether an operation opportunity according to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIG. 214 and FIG. 215, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is performed properly and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  214 and 215 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 214 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 214 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 214 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is operated from the sword state to the sword state. An image OX and a second effect image TX simulating a second operation mode for operating the sheath portion of the sword decorative body 5001 to move in the horizontal direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 214 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 214 (b) progresses, the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is made to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), a display such as “push-in” can be visually recognized if the first effect image OX remains dominant. Thus, the display such as “slide” is made visible when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the state of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that the display is erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 214 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 214 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is within the display area. An effect depicting the state left in is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 214 (d), an effect acceptance period related to a specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) is displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword state to the sword state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 215 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is made effective. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the production reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received, assuming that there is an operation error by the player. (Here, “You can leave it as is”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), the content of such specific notification changes in accordance with the passage of time so that the player can regain calmness (here, “settled and pushed in”). It is like that. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify with a short word, so this is suitable even if the player side is in a panic state It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is notified that this is properly rendered. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 215 (g) shows that the appropriate side operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (production acceptance period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 215 (e) and 215 (f). As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (operation error state), the production reception is appropriately performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when an operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so it may be counterproductive to report complex contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed such that a specific notification is made based on the operation being made and no effect during operation is made. Therefore, it can be expected that the operation is switched to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation in which an operation is erroneously performed before the production reception period occurs in a specific operation-related effect. For example, when there is no operation instruction related to the second operation part (for example, the sheath part), the first operation part is in a state where an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath part) is performed on the second operation part. It is also assumed that there will be a production reception period related to a specific operation-time effect only on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case as well, how the player side operates There is a concern that it may not be recognized.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (sheath part) is performed, Although the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not made on the operation unit side 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 214 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation on is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by checking a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved leftward) while the operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part). Even if the stage for receiving a specific operation-time effect occurs only on the sword part) side, a state in which an operation is performed on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) (sword decorative body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which 5001 is moved in the left direction), an effect is received and the above-mentioned operation effect is performed according to the operation. It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. When this happens, the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication, etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern. Therefore, in the period until the production result is displayed when the production result that suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the final production-related production that is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described production example, when performing specific notification, an expectation degree related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their other examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself changes to any of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 179). The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 3 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the above-described plurality of modes, and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described modes when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), or a sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 179). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image SYG is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG can be given some interest. In other words, the performance is poor when there is a production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance when there is a production reception period.

  At this time, the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the stage performance during the stage reception period can be improved. It is desirable to ensure it appropriately. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Display it. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it can be understood that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decorative image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment at the time of the production reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such operational effects, it is only necessary that the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Moreover, when preparing a several production | presentation aspect as the sword ornament 5001, it is not necessary to change a form as these several production | generation aspects.

  However, if the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 and the mode of the sword decorative image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that a false display is made. There is concern, and this may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 179) prepared as the form of the sword decoration body 5001. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special form instead of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decorative image SYG is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decorative image SYG. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the display is false. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance beyond the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here shown in FIG. 179) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, with respect to a technique that allows the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special manner, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for other effects (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 180 to 187). You may make it apply.

  For example, if it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 183 (X1), the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 216 (a) in addition to the production situation shown in FIG. 183 (X2). A production pattern for production development is prepared. When the production progresses to the production pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the display area of the production display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 183 (X1). A continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second sword state is in the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 216 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo-sequential change (re-change). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed. This special aspect can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot change. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath part is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), even if the sword image simulating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) in the display area is changed to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 has three stages. It will change from a sword state to a 2nd sword state while maintaining.

  After that, an operation effective period for generating the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and at the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) simulating the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 216 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (e), when the player's sword operation is detected in the operation effective period, the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is caused according to the set effect pattern. The expectation notification effect is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 can be executed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different contents of the effects, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears,
-After that, display an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side to which an operation opportunity is given at a position that is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image,
-After that, it is common to change the specific image gradually from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means). Display effect by “effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, the display effect by the “water effect” (the effect image imitating the operation means is used as the specific image) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third warning effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will come to be.

  And when performing a precursor effect (at least one of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to view. When such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and low expectation. An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. Can be improved. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot hold the performance, the performance during the production reception period can be improved.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 218 is an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with the same contents. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described. It is also possible to apply to the sign production.

  FIG. 217 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 217 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first sign effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 217 (a).

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 217 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to non-display after the start of the effect at the timing t1 shown in FIG. Or the area where the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 218, the production reception period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t2 when the display production by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. A button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively. FIG. 217 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the rate at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 217 (c), there is a situation in which the button image BTG cannot be displayed in either the first display form or the second display form by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is received. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a way that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG has the first display mode and It is possible to advance the production without having certainty about which of the two display modes is displayed.

  In addition, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 217 (c), the “cloud effect” makes it impossible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 217 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” occurs while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 217 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. In other words, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in the form in which the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 217 (d).

  According to such a configuration, the period (timing t2 to t3) from when the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4). ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 217, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the production reception period occurs). The button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until this time, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting an operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state that is difficult to visually recognize before the effect reception period occurs, an effect pattern (third sign) that changes the display mode of the button image BTG to a more expected mode. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It can be suitably maintained.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 217, the button image BTG is made difficult to visually recognize by the “cloud effect”. It was decided to display so that the visibility was maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 may be difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, the player can have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without having certainty of the display mode without being able to grasp the remaining time of the presentation reception period well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented performance.

  In addition, in any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, when such a performance is applied, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the sign effect is started. Even if the length of time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clearly displayed after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is not displayed) to the same time. Further, when such a performance is applied to any one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started As for the length of time until the image can be clearly seen (time until the specific image is hidden), a plurality of these are prepared so as to have a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a technique for making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation unit itself may appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. May be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, it appears in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or an effect image imitating an operation means may be displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as a precursor effect. Also good.

[Moveable performance triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions for design games]
As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a), when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained after executing the symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed is executed, and after the big hit game, the player is advantageous. It is possible to control the game state (short time state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a produces effects according to the result of the determination regarding the hit (for example, various other notice effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-read effects, in addition to effect patterns) As described above, the game entertainment is maintained until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 4100a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it may be difficult to maintain the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time.

  Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the determination process related to the progress of the game and when other conditions unrelated to the symbol variation (symbol game start condition) are satisfied. It is possible to execute a process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode exceeding the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained at a high operation rate for a long period. Can be expected to do.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the following methods listed below can be envisaged as methods for generating the above. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted. However, a situation where the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0” and the number of holds) The above-mentioned another condition must be able to be satisfied even if the condition is “0”, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
・ Performance lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuations periodically, and that a specific result is obtained by this production lottery is the above-mentioned method of “satisfaction of another condition” ・ the cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means A method for determining that a predetermined number is reached, “establishment of another condition”. Time is measured (for example, when the power is turned on) by RTC (real-time clock) function or arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 4150a (or main control MPU 4100a) Measure the time from the above), and the above-mentioned “establishment of another condition” means that the measured time reaches a predetermined time

  In general, in a pachinko gaming machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. The method is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is used, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the change timing will arrive In general, it takes a relatively long time (for example, several hours), so that the display content or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite the long time. If there is a situation that can not be done, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operating time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance as a starting condition of the symbol game. It can be generated based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the design fluctuates. When the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decoration body can be started to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state can be started without starting a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game is established, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state can be started, the movable body abnormality is detected in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed by being restored.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 219, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 219, for convenience of explanation, “when the elapsed time since power-on has reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function, an RTC state in which different display content appears ( The specific state) is generated and the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state) is described. As described above, the method for causing a change in the display content and the behavior of the movable decorative body in the effect display device 1600 when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. Even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately employ each technique described below.

  Assuming that the current state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines the remaining time (until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from turning on the power reaches a predetermined time. Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the flow of the game so far is achieved by sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the basis of the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation. You can have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes). If a big win is won between the occurrence of the period (RTC state) and the end, the progress of the production by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) has not occurred (normal state) ( It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, a condition unrelated to the state of symbol variation is established even at timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) such timing Rt2. Based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the first condition), it is possible to execute a previous display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the second condition is established). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the time Rt has arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing according to the occurrence of the RTC state (the behavior of the movable decorative body) is executed. . The “previous display” can be executed, for example, as a display “RTC state soon” or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations are the results of the jackpot determination. Is not based on the game (no expectation of any big hits) will be suggested to the player in advance, so it is preferable to avoid a decline in gaming interests due to misrecognition by the player Will be able to.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at least in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only a display that does not show any expectation level (display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears as display contents in the effect display device 1600. In order to prevent the display of the decorative design (effect pattern) itself, it is not displayed. That is, in this case, only the display that does not show any expectation level (display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears as the display contents in the effect display device 1600, and the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Since the processing to be started is started, it is expected to more suitably avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player.

  Here, “pre-display that appears at timing Rt1” and “movable body operation that appears at timing Rt2” each correspond to “display that does not conform to symbol variation” and correspond to “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. To do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated regardless of the execution state of the symbol variation at those timings (including the execution / non-execution). However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation in which the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are not ready to operate (the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are in the original position despite the timing Rt2 has arrived). It is feared that the process of sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be performed even when the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, Although a movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, the movable body operation time (in this case, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above is reached during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least one of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body in accordance with the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, various types of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the pachinko gaming machine 1 as well as the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are provided. The movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the movable decorative body is in the original position (normal state) can be executed. Then, when it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in this movable abnormality determination (abnormal determination), a predetermined amount is determined with respect to the movable decorative object that is the determination target in a form following the abnormality determination process. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to recover the movable decorative body in an abnormal state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable body operating time within the above-described RTC state arrives during the execution of the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (such as an operation of moving the movable decorative body to the original position). If there is at least the movable decorative body A, B, or C, the movable decorative body that is in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body in accordance with the design variation”. Can be assumed.

  As the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation”, for example, the symbol variation start timing (the timing to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 4100a when the symbol variation is started), the symbol variation It is possible to execute (execute restoration processing based on command acquisition) as at least one of the stop timings (time to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 4100a when the symbol variation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 4150a) shown in FIG. 219, first, at least “the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs” has arrived, and the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operating time in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (in this case, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, the movable decorative bodies (movable decorative body A and movable decorative body B used within the period). The movable decorative body C) is prohibited from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, so that the movable object operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (the movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side.

  However, at this time, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), at timing Rt1, only a display that does not show any expectation level (display that does not conform to symbol variation) is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. As described above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, when there is a symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 has arrived, The display that is not shown again (display from the timing Rt1) is not hidden at this time, and this is changed over the period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt <b> 2 to Rt <b> 2 a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 has a decoration. Only the display in which the design pattern is not displayed and no expectation is shown. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C) is advanced. It can be expected that the lowering of the game entertainment due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is suitably suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, when the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when timing Rt2a arrives). Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” that has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, The display showing the expected degree of the production pattern and the notice production is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the “timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. As long as it is within a period until the movable decorative body finishes operating in a specific manner (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) depending on the movable body operating time in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game due to the prohibition of the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether the situation should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and if it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, the C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (a movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, the moving decorative body is moved according to the movable body operation time in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure). Even if the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in a specific manner is completed, the movable effect ( Execution of at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is not permitted.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state to appear is the timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. There is concern about the decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if the big win is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) is not generated at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol variation (C, D variation in the diagram) after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, until the timing Rt2 arrives, the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is finished (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ) “After the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that the “period until completion of sequential operation by C” elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a has not arrived, the state in which “a display in which no expectation degree is indicated (display from the timing Rt1)” appears is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 219, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) is the target of the RTC presentation privilege. Because it is not.

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 4150a) shown in FIG. 219, at least “after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state. In this case, the restoration process is triggered even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived (the period until the completion of the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). By prohibiting this so as not to be performed (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the movable decorative body) cannot be performed by the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the symbol variation side is performed. The processing to be performed is prohibited, and the processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the abnormal operation of the movable body is restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably executed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 219, when the game state is controlled in the normal game state and the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is being performed according to the big hit determination, It is assumed that the timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display “RTC state soon” appears in the background display of the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is completed during the period from when the “RTC state is about to be displayed” to the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is displayed. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol variation is in the middle of the process. At the timing Rt2, the three movable movable behaviors that do not conform to the symbol variation are observed. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. It should be noted that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (losing) in the diagram) is stopped.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 219, “three movable decorative bodies A, R2 in accordance with the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs”. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, This is prohibited so that neither the moving effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the symbol variation side effect display ( The display in which the degree of expectation is displayed), the movement effect on the symbol fluctuation side (movable body operation in which the degree of expectation is indicated), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side are controlled as a period in which none is executed (first) One limit). In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 219, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation) This is controlled as a period in which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is indicated) nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (second restriction).

  It should be noted that such control at timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the design change side effect display (display indicating the degree of expectation) and the movable effect (movable body operation indicating the degree of expectation) are not executed) Even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation, but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation), it is executed. That is, in this case, no expectation effect is executed, and the big hit symbol suddenly appears at the timing Rt2a when the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is in the middle of execution. Therefore, the player who was expecting to be in the RTC state can enjoy the fun as a surprised performance exceeding the expectation. In addition, after the big hit symbol appears in this way, the big hit gaming state is generated while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated.

  In addition, as described above, for the display from timing Rt1 (only the display of the decorative symbol is not performed and no expectation is shown), the symbol variation that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 has arrived. The display is not displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as “RTC state”) after the occurrence of the RTC state is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (in the diagram, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as “RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display (expectation level indicates the variation pattern) is started. Display) will be executed as usual. However, with respect to the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, the timing Rt2a has arrived. Will also be maintained in a prohibited state. Therefore, even when an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the big hit determination, Although the display in the liquid crystal display, sound, and lighting of the lamp are normally performed, the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the three movable decorative bodies A and B are moved depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. , C until the completion of the sequential operation (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) ”, the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation (here, the symbol variation start) Even if the time and stop time come, this is prohibited so that the restoration process (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state) is not performed. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt2a, the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) stop timing (restoration operation timing) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (losing in the figure)). )) Start time (restoration operation time) comes, but at these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing is never executed.

  However, in the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (timing Rt2 to Rt5 ′ at the time of abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined presentation position (first position) and then at the predetermined presentation position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then at the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body C is, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219 (e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state Can be executed. However, while a series of movable body operations (in this case, sequential operations by the three movable ornament bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are being executed, a predetermined value is applied to the movable ornament body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, the player will be awakened, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed as a series of movable body operations (here, three It is not performed independently as an operation different from the sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C), but is performed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Yes. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state itself can appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. Thus, it is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in gaming interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, on the basis of the result of the abnormality determination, not the process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormality including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B It is possible to execute a process of operating in the operation mode (special operation). After that, without returning the restored (restored) movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C A process of operating the body C in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred is generated. Until the timing to operate is reached, this is left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. When the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operating mode. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while preferably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C”. That is, in this case, since one of the operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The fall of the game entertainment at the time of performing is suitably avoided.

  Note that the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially performed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It starts when it is in the middle of the stage and continues until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol variation (D variation (losing) in the diagram) have arrived. In this case, since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration process is executed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoration operation”, the “special mode including the restoration operation” is described as “normal operation”. What is necessary is just to restore the movable decorative body B by the operation mode different from the “mode” (return to the original position), and for example, it may be the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, only a display (for example, “the RTC state is about to appear”) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears at the timing Rt1. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display differs depending on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC ready state”). You may make it switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, a display that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation) It is important that a display that does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special manner including a restoration operation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, based on the arrival of timings Rt1 and Rt2 that satisfy a condition based on a function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, “Display” and “Behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation” were started. However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function not conforming to symbol variation on the main control MPU 4100a side, "display not conforming to symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation" May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, “the movable decoration body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation time in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, 3T This is forbidden so that the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is not performed during the period until the completion of the "sequential operation by one movable decorative body A, B, C". It is made difficult to cause a situation in which the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the (specific state) cannot be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and as a result, the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, during the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is desirable to prohibit this from being executed.

  220 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 219, and “at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2. Is different from the example shown in FIG. 219 in that it is not executed.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 220, in the period from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or The restoration process) is not executed itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display not conforming to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state soon”) is made, this is restored. It will never be left in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 220, when the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived. As described above, the process (the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is performed separately, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 219 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 219 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a manner that delays the arrival of the movable body operating time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is “a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the above “special mode”. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 220 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, “the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body Suppose that it is determined that there is an abnormality in one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of the abnormality determination when “is not started yet”. Then, while maintaining the “situation in which the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is maintained. Will be restored.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 220 (e) and 220 (f), compared to when it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are abnormal, the RTC state The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (in the figure, the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b). Thus, the movable body operating time in the RTC state can be reached after the abnormally determined movable decorative body is restored. Thereafter, when the movable body operating time comes within the RTC state, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 219 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 220 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 219 (e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the normal state, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. ”Behavior” is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 220 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 219 (f). After the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in a mode according to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” at the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b) ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination Each of the operations in the special mode is executed.

  According to such a configuration, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three Sequential operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 220, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C here). In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (in this case, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). ) Is delayed for a longer time, but a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be executed in a normal state. The restoration operation for a plurality of movable decorative bodies may be executed in parallel. In this case, the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 220, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it will be an amusement. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 220 (f) and 220 (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state”. It is difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, an indication (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 220 (f) and 220 (g) as well as in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. During the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination or during the period during which the movable decoration body B is operated in a special mode (during operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination), there is an abnormality in the movable decoration body. An indication (error code etc.) indicating that it has occurred will not appear. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is finished, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and further FIG. The display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is finished. There is no such thing as causing any change. These also indicate that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only a “series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state” is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 219 and other examples thereof and in FIG. 220 and other examples thereof, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) that is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is not limited to the above, based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is just to operate | move by a specific aspect in the movable body operation | movement time within the specific state to generate | occur | produce.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation time in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided body). Operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, and the like, and board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (a spear accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 219 and other examples thereof, or in FIG. 220 and other examples thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which “operation not conforming to symbol variation” is performed.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display that does not indicate any expectation level (until the timing Rt1 is displayed). "Display)" is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is used within a period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed. In spite of being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the production pattern, There can be a situation where the production is confusing. In the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

  Therefore, the specific operation means (the frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state where it is subjected to a specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, and according to the result of the jackpot determination for the specific operation means. When the production time for giving the operation opportunity has arrived, the production display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means. Even if a specific operation means in a state where a specific operation is being performed is operated, it is desirable not to receive the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being performed, it is assumed that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to make an appropriate suggestion to the person. In addition, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality by performing an operation on a specific operation unit in an operating state by preventing the production of an operation on the specific operation unit. Expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation to the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment interest of the game due to the fact that the production is not progressed may be lowered. Therefore, among the frame side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 provided so as to be operable), the operation effects within the symbol variation according to the big hit determination The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high operation effect generation rate within the symbol variation within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the effect reception when operated (a predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) are executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be operable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001, etc.), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination A specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low occurrence rate of the operation effect in the interior of the movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state). By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for the operation opportunity grant according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decorative body 5001).

  Also, a frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent from the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform an operation by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 219) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 220) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In addition, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being influenced by the operation (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are used as a panel-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the movable decorative body is provided on the door frame 3 side. The operation by the frame side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body with a relatively low generation ratio of the operational effect within the symbol variation). 5001)) When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot determination is executed. Even if, at least the “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of the pattern variation (the start of the production pattern), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the production pattern It is desirable to make settings related to each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 219 and the other example thereof, or in FIG. 220 and the other example, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, When an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the production can be accepted, the production at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be improved without sacrificing the production on the symbol variation side.

  Further, as described above, in view of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only by the symbol variation after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation to be digested first after that is inevitably started, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is equivalent to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), It is possible to provide a margin for completing operations that do not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Further, when the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, When performing the determination, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is used instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation in the normal state in the form of performing the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the above-mentioned operation, or performing the restoration operation and subsequent to this. In this case, the “special mode including the restoration operation” also restores (returns to the original position) the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, a minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including the recovery operation”, and “restoration operation”. As long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is used as long as the operation is not completed. Therefore, it is more desirable to make settings related to each production pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not arrive. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated when the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in a normal mode or an abnormal determination mode, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, an operation opportunity can be given.

  When an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the presentation reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC) by the frame-side movable decorative body is given. Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It becomes impossible to receive the production, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the time from the above-mentioned timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C in the normal mode is “special time”, the big hit determination As long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” have elapsed since the symbol variation started (the effect pattern started) Each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable ornament (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive). It is desirable to perform the setting related to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case with respect to a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A having a fast operation order or a movable decorative body having a long time required for the restoration operation). When it is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but a movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation order is slow) When the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or a movable decorative body having a short restoration time is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the operation, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal state.

  In addition, after the RTC state occurs, the timing when a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started and the operation of the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), when the specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the corresponding restoration operation time (for example, the start time or stop time of symbol variation) arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body can be executed. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of production, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the “symbol fluctuation start time” described above is set as the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation”. Now, as shown in FIG. 221, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a at least performs the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 4100a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern. In particular, based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 4100a when the process of making an effect progress / symbol fluctuation is started (based on the fact that the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation has arrived) To perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 221, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the progress of the production concerning the “specific production pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the design variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  Generally, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, a performance pattern (relative expectation) that is paired with the specific performance pattern. (Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a pair relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expectation effect pattern) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of effects, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display about whether to operate) or not. Can be executed, and the play entertainment is suitably maintained by such performance.

  However, if the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 comes after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it is not possible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 221, the development of the production concerning the “specific production pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm 2” among the production patterns, and the predetermined movable decoration body with a predetermined value. When a situation in which a process for performing a restoration operation (a restoration process based on a restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) occurs in parallel with each other, a specific time tm2 until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. The “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body” is ended. In addition, as "a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body", various methods can be adopted. A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time required to be different will be different. For example, if the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) simply by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable ornament, “predetermined restoration for a specific movable ornament” is performed. The timing tx at which “the process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored). As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is deferred to a later timing. At the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is executed once again, the timing tx will be exceeded, the specific movable decorative body will be displayed. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed before the specific timing tm is reached regardless of the restoration situation. It becomes like this.

  In addition, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is performed once, x time is required, so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timings tm1 to tm2” is established so that one time The upper limit number n for repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it can be suitably maintained as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, it may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (in the case where the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined performance is being performed, there is a directing effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined production may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In addition, as a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative object operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears ''. When it is provided as “acting based on the reception of an effect by an operation by the player (or receiving an effect but not operating)”, “the effect of causing a specific display to prompt an operation by the player” Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 221, at a timing tx at which “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body returns (restores) from an abnormal state. It is assumed that the normal state has been achieved. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of fluctuation (or the “restoration operation time” such as when the previous symbol is stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be equipped with movable decorative bodies that perform a multi-stage movement with a more complicated structure. Often it takes a long time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or in an effect pattern that is paired with this, when the effect pattern is started Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive after the pattern change is started (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a special performance pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and the main control MPU 4100a side when the symbol variation is started When the special performance pattern is selected based on the command sent from the specific production pattern while the special production pattern is developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed) Control is performed so that the movable decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. As shown in FIGS. 222 (a) and 222 (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which the design variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the progress of the production related to the special production pattern is achieved. And when a situation in which a predetermined restoring operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least during a special performance pattern (period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process, but continues it.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed, a restoration process in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis after restoration is performed). This special function pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and will be carefully restored in this way as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent performance with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 appear a unique display mode such as “This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) and 222 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that “the abnormality must occur in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which symbol variation is performed” is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special performance pattern is finished, if there is a case where the performance pattern according to the new symbol fluctuation is performed without interruption, the next restoration operation time (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). Will be. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately handle abnormalities may also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 (b) and (d), the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed. If the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) has arrived at a certain time, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated, Yes. According to such a configuration, even if there is any hold during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, “even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process in a more serious manner can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 222 (c) and 222 (d), as a result of starting a new symbol variation when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed, the new symbol variation is performed. As a case, “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the design variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (c), the timing is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the state of the game and the effect after the special effect pattern is ended (and the situation of the restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 in the next symbol variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

  In addition, after a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is finished, a situation in which a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed appears. Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 222, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the situation is reached. As described above, since one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be effected at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, a specific movable decorative object is abnormal at the timing tx even though the one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the next restoration operation time comes after the symbol variation is finished from the timing tx. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) arrives, If the restoration process for a movable ornament of a certain number of times is started several times, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. There is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by the repeated restoration process on the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is set in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) has reached the predetermined upper limit number. In spite of this, when the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, only a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body has been brought into the abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not been restored from the abnormal state although the predetermined upper limit number has been reached. Even when the +1 ”-th restoration operation time comes, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being finished. As described above, with respect to an aspect in which one restoration process is continued in a manner straddling the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation time comes while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable that the count for is handled as a single restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. The However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 that are operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (return) may be performed in a manner different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, as described above, the operation opportunity giving effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol variation is performed. Operation system effect patterns (for example, the effect patterns shown in FIG. 209) are prepared. In addition, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 209 (f))”, “Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 209 (f))”, “Character display for prompting operation (“ press ””), and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) ”(See FIG. 209 (f))”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, an operation to push in) and an effect is received, the “specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ”) And the like (see FIG. 209 (g))” and “Process for changing display contents (see FIG. 209 (g))”. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is rendered in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222.

  However, “operation for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. The “sword decoration body 5001 is in a normal state with respect to“ a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 ”and“ a process for performing a display for prompting an operation ”. It can be executed at any time and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and received an effect, “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” and “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force due to an operation by such a player, and the operation part moves, so that the abnormal state It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as an operating means (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001, and the like). In the state described with reference to FIG. 221 and FIG. 222, the driving force for returning the frame side movable decorative body (operation means) to the original position is applied. At the timing of the above-mentioned restoration operation time (in this case, the start time of symbol variation) and “after an effect is received by an operation by the player within the effect pattern of the movable operation system” Each is executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body is aimed at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the symbol variation, but also a different original timing (during the variation period) Among them, aiming at the frame side movable decorative body (operation), the external force (operation by the player) is applied and the abnormal state may be resolved) Since the process of restoring (returning) means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. .

  FIG. 223 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword ornament 5001 is used as such a frame side movable ornament (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 223, an effect pattern of a movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during a period in which symbol variation is performed) is executed. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player has operated the sword ornament 5001 and received a production (timing tm22) while the display of the remaining time is being executed), the “special decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 223, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 221 and 222 is operated as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 223, an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 at the timing tm22 when the presentation is accepted in this way, and the sword decoration 5001 does not return to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and this cannot be restored to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made. However, an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications is performed. This is because the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)”, and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decrease in the gaming interest. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 223, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the presentation at timing tm22. However, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing this process as usual with respect to the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600”. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, at the timing tm23, the symbol variation that has already been put on hold is digested (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time). The timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” started at) is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status) As described above, the process ends until the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, the sword decorative body 5001 is also referred to as "specific movable It is possible to execute a process of performing an operation (applying a driving force) so as to return this to the original position in a form in which at least a part of the operation is performed in parallel with the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the decorative body. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rush when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started / finished is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started / terminated. However, only one of these timings may be the same, or any of these timings may be different.

  As for “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 222, when a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue after the end of the special effect pattern, the symbol variation that is in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately consumed (eg, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not finished but can be executed in such a way that it can be continued. It is desirable that “the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 222). That is, in this case, the “processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” also strides the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) when a special effect pattern appears. It will be executed in the form, but it will be ended regardless of the restoration situation between the time when the next symbol variation is started and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made abnormal, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis appears is executed, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are finished at the timing tx, respectively, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. Thus, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, an external force (driving force by a motor or the like) is not applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific performance pattern. ) To return to the original position (return to the normal state), the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that this is an abnormal situation in which an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2. Even if there is a performance operation with a specific movable ornament in such a low reliability situation, it is highly possible that this will fail. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and becomes abnormal again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated therewith be performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the notification is made whenever an abnormal state occurs again, the player will misunderstand that the abnormal state cannot be resolved. Therefore, the above-described notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body has returned from an abnormal state. Now, while only the sword ornament 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again. As shown in FIG. 223, the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is displayed. If an effect is received by an operation by the player, it is possible to expect a possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in an abnormal state at timing tm25 has been accepted for production by the player's operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is thereafter displayed. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that a movable effect by a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the reception of the performance, a period (one time) in which a process of applying a driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed. Is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position). It is desirable that the process be terminated before the process is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the few chances that the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by such external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the state (returning operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001) has failed, the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the original for a period after the end of the movable performance by the specific movable decorative body. By making it easier for the player to recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return it to the position (returning the sword decoration body 5001 is performed again), It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification accompanying this be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful. The sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm26.

  Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 223, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operating means is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after the presentation is accepted) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operating means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by a player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (modes that return only by applying driving force, modes that return using at least external force) are used, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility that the game will be enjoyed is also increased, and the decline in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Regarding the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted by the player's operation, the pattern variation starts. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different contents (different operation modes) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since the sword decorative body 5001 is restored using external force (operation by the player) for the process, it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable to perform a proper return process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword ornament 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the presentation is accepted is performed when the return possibility of the sword ornament 5001 that could not be returned by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, a “process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 209 (f))” and a “character display such as an operation prompt (“ press ””) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. It is important that the processing (see FIG. 209 (f)) ”is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

  Further, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in the state where the sword decorative body 5001 is located (operated to a specific detection position), and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position (to the specific detection position) If the operation means is provided so that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given to be operated), even if the production reception is generated at the second operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state A driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state without applying the driving force for returning to the original position. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the presentation is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of operation of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

  In addition, after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state has been accepted for production by an operation by the player, the processing for providing the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily accepted. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 219 to 223, the symbol change start time (and the timing after receiving the presentation) is exemplified as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation. The timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed. For example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 4100a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The restored processing is terminated until the timing tm2 in the specific production pattern that has been reserved is reached, or is executed so as to be straddled before the end of the special production pattern that has been reserved. Each process described above is performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be made so that the frequency of appearance of a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis performance pattern) is higher than that in the above.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) that is also used as an operation unit, a specific movable decorative body, or the like is in an abnormal state. If the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is performed at a certain time, as shown in FIG. 222, the abnormality occurs over the period until the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation. One restoration process for the movable decorative body in the state can be continuously executed. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. It is not started, and one restoration process that is already in the running state is continued without being terminated. Therefore, the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is movable. There is a problem at which timing when the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 222, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends, after the new restoration operation timing (next time). This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body after the timing tm11 elapses and before the new restoration operation timing (the next symbol variation start timing) arrives. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both method 1 and method 2”, or “both method 1 and method 3” is employed to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) ) Is newly started, restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the next symbol variation start time) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective, and triggered by this timing (new restoration operation time). The restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation in which a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are performed simultaneously appears. There is no concern that interference may occur between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the next symbol change start time) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative element) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time). Body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective. In this respect, since the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started, since one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is to be completed, these are restored. There is no concern that interference may occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 3: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time). The restoration process is not executed, but after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed, the restoration operation time that comes after that is triggered by another movable ornament (frame side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is the same as the restoration process for the specific movable ornament already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for the abnormal state is executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body becomes abnormal when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

(Operation button operation check period)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) can be operated by driving the operation buttons 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) as effects according to the pattern game by the main control MPU 4100a. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect (such as an effect in which the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is suggested not only by an operation but also by driving) using a drive-type operation means. However, if such operation-time effects can be executed, but if any abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the operation-time effects can be experienced by the player in the manner intended by the designer. As a result, there is a concern that it may lead to a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, as a part of the maintenance related to whether or not the operation-time effect can be performed, an operation check period (an arbitrary operation check period and an automatic action check period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is confirmed that the player can experience the operation-time effect in the manner intended by the designer so that the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Specifically, an operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. It should be noted that the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize a more reliable confirmation operation for each member, there is no overlapping period between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). And preferably generated sequentially. FIG. 224 is a time chart illustrating an operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation check periods (an arbitrary operation check period and an automatic operation check period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projecting start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a projecting state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projecting position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 is pressed. Such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440 can determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. .

  Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction. Operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruded state, and the protruded state When the operation button 410 is pressed down to a normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 224, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operator (player or hall) confirms whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state protruding from the normal state. This can be realized by the administrator). Specifically, when a condition for generating an operation confirmation period, which will be described later, is satisfied, an arbitrary operation confirmation period is started. When the pressing detection state (operation detection state) is monitored, and the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 protrudes based on the pressing detection (operation detection) To change. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period is satisfied (even while the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time. In some cases, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated after the elapse of a predetermined time. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the optional operation check period. The confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be given, and the operation effect using the operation button 410 can be executed and provided with peace of mind.

  Then, after pressing the operation button 410 to make it protrude, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed and a normal state is detected before a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the normal operation state is restored again, and the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the pressing of the protruding operation button 410 is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcedly returned to the normal state by driving after the predetermined time elapses. Will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to be protruded, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended. In such a case, unnecessary time until a predetermined time elapses after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be prevented.

  The above-described operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) occurs when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the generation condition of the operation confirmation period is configured such that the generation condition is satisfied when the demonstration effect is executed in order to avoid occurrence of overlap with the operation effect. Specifically, in the demonstration production, there is no entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for a certain time after the production set in the fluctuation pattern is finished, and the production set in the fluctuation pattern is performed. This is an effect of waiting for a customer when it is not started (the information regarding the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 4100a is not received for a certain period of time on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side), and is suitable for avoiding the occurrence of overlap with the operation effect. In this way, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect, the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period is generated, and thereby the boring time that the effect set in the variation pattern is not started is displayed on the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time as to whether or not it is normally detected and operated.

  The demonstration effect is started when an instruction (for example, demonstration effect) by the main control MPU 4100a is given when there is no time for entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 while the symbol game is not progressing. A start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a side and received to generate a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 4100a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, and by receiving it, a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation) (Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the operation effect and confirming whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. It is possible to perform and provide an operation-time effect using the operation buttons 410 with more peace of mind.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is provided with an LED (each LED of the operation button internal decoration member 432), whether or not an arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred, and a progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period). In accordance with the state of the operation button 410), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. When an arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on with a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (light emission mode A for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is possible). ). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded after the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as when the operation button 410 is not pressed once. However, light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is being performed). Thereby, even after the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded, it is possible to notify the outside that further pressing of the operation button 410 is requested. After that, when the operation button 410 is in a normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on at least once until the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although it is the same color as the case where it is not pressed, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than the above-described light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period (light emission mode C for the confirmation period suggesting completion of the optional operation). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Even when the optional operation confirmation period does not occur, the operation button 410 may emit light in a predetermined manner, for example, in a manner different from any of the light emission modes A to C for the operation confirmation period. This can be illustrated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the completion of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player, and the operation button 410 is in a normal position. An automatic operation confirmation period is provided for confirming the origin so as to be located at the position. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is first moved up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and is operated so as to return to the normal state from the protruding state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to grasp that the operation button 410 is operating at a normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced during execution of the effect using the operation button 410.

  The arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the predetermined time of “10 seconds” is set as the arbitrary operation confirmation period as described above, the time required for a series of operations is a short time of “5 seconds” as the automatic operation confirmation period. Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates to confirm the origin regardless of the player's pressing, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, in the optional operation confirmation period, if the player does not press down, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press down in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by making the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the pressing of the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is changed by driving. While it is possible to allow players and hall managers to check carefully over a long period of time in a situation where there is no such situation, it is possible to quickly terminate the operation confirmation (automatic operation period) of the drive system that does not require such long-term confirmation This is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation operations of the drive type operation means can be increased.

  In the standby period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 or the second is selected by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (the LEDs on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted when the effect is presented. In the peripheral confirmation period, when either the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 or the second button decoration unit 411b is lit, but either is pressed. Depending on how the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on (for example, light emission modes such as brightness and color) are different. For this reason, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it can be confirmed whether or not the press is recognized normally, and the frame side lens 417 and the first It can be confirmed whether or not the two-button decoration portion 411b is normally lit, and the drive type operation means itself is confirmed by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). In addition, it is possible to execute confirmation of related members in the vicinity thereof.

  Further, if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and is not in the protruding state, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b are not lit, and a series of operation check periods is shortened. It becomes.

  In addition, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 is operated by operating the operation button 410. Yes. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. For this reason, in the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether the vibration motor 424 operates and the rendering operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by vibration during the vibration confirmation period, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

  In addition, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is established in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a normal state. There is a case where the operation button 410 is not in a normal position because it is not detected as a normal state. As a cause, for example, when a malfunction occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. The case where it did. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, and control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (A), during a period other than a series of operation check periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of production based on the variable pattern) and a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally at the end of the symbol variation (when the production based on the variation pattern is completed) or at the timing when the demonstration production described above is started (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded (not the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Is called. According to this, even if the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the change pattern, and the change pattern This prevents a misunderstanding that the operation button 410 may have been operated as part of the production based on the above. In addition, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates normally, and there is a decrease in interest in the effect. To prevent it.

  In addition, when it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period using the execution time of the demonstration effect as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when starting the demonstration effect. When the control is in the protruding state and the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start timing of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of the series of operation check periods), the operation check period even at the start timing of the series of operation check periods When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when it returns to the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed with priority. On the basis of this, the entire series of operation confirmation periods may be started in a delayed manner.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), in a series of operation confirmation periods, it corresponds to the start of variation of a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), and the end of the symbol game. It is not determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) at the timing of the end of the change of the special symbol (at the end of the production based on the change pattern). Even in a protruding state (not a normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation confirmation whether or not the operation button 410 is pushed out during the arbitrary operation confirmation period described above, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation confirmation period. This is because the protruding state 410 is maintained so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded during the operation check period, the operation button 410 is operated at the end of the operation check period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 is performed. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation confirmation period elapses, the abnormality does not occur without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state.

(Abnormality detection of sword decoration)
Next, abnormalities in the case where the blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 146 to 149) of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword production operation unit 5000 described above should be in the sword state but not in the sword state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 and abnormality detection.

  The sword decorative body 5001 can be changed between a state where the blade part 5011 is stored and a state where the blade part 5011 is exposed (second blade state). In the above-described production example, the state between the sword state and the sword state (first sword state) is used as the production using the sword ornament 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. Do not use. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade part 5011 is in the sword state and a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade part 5011 is in the sword state. ing. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the sword state to the sword state. In this example, the sword state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can extract the blade part 5011, and the extracted state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot extract the blade part 5011. .

  In addition, an effect using the sword ornament 5011 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), in the production using the sword ornament 5001, an operation reception period during which the sword ornament 5001 in the state of sword can be extracted is generated within the production time. Within the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 in the state of sword insertion is set in the sword state in accordance with an instruction (for example, display of “Take out the sword”) on the display area or the like of the effect display device 1600, thereby obtaining a predetermined effect result. Can be obtained. When the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 and puts the blade part 5011 into the sword state within the operation reception period, control for returning the blade part 5011 to the sword state at the end of the production time is performed. Done. Also, if the player does not extract the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period and the blade part 5011 is left in the sword state, the sword state of the blade part 5011 at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect that has a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410 described above. Yes. That is, when an effect using the sword ornament 5001 is performed, the sword ornament 5001 can be extracted with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in a normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be positioned in the bladed state except for the operation reception period. 2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 when the blade part 5011 is in the sword state or in a state between the sword state and the sword storage state outside the operation reception period. It has become. In this example, the state of the sword position sensor described above is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the state of sword insertion), and the state of sword insertion in the above-described predetermined period (outside of the operation reception period). Measurement) is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), in the operation reception period, unless the player pulls out the sword decorative body 5001, the blade part 5011 should be positioned in the sword state. Is determined to have reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. Done. That is, in the operation acceptance period, when the player removes the sword ornament 5001, the blade portion 5011 is positioned in the sword state, so that the sword ornament is only in the state between the sword state and the sword state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword position sensor is in the ON state (the state where the blade portion 5011 is in the sword insertion state). . In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade part 5011 to the state of the sword in the sword restoration control is set to “0.5 seconds”.

  Further, the operation reception period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001. In the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, sword restoration control is performed to return the blade part 5011 to the sword state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and the player can remove the sword decorative body 5001 during the remaining period. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of extracting the sword ornament 5001 from being hindered.

  As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) is determined at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above. That is, during the operation reception period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Not. On the other hand, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is determined during an operation reception period during which the sword decorative body 5001 can be extracted. For this reason, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player cannot remove the sword ornament 5001 as much as possible. Further, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410. Thus, it is possible to prevent a performance result in such a highly expected performance from being missed.

  In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state has reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), except when the player removes the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, but only when the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001. You may make it judge. For example, the blade portion 5011 is in the state of being delivered at the start of the operation reception period, and after the operation reception period starts, the player does not know whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 should be completely removed, and the blade portion 5011 is removed. Although there is a possibility that the blade is left for a predetermined period in a state between the state and the state where the sword is stored, in such a case, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001. .

  Further, when an instruction is given on the display area of the effect display device 1600 regarding the extraction of the sword decorative body 5001, the instruction is continuously executed regardless of whether or not the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs during the operation reception period. You may do it. For example, in the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. The instruction in the display area or the like of the effect display device 1600 is continued even during the “until time period” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the blade state”. Also, if the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 according to the instruction during “until the end of the sword restoration control”, the sword restoration is performed because the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the production of extracting the sword decorative body 5001 from being hindered due to an abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001.

  In this example, although the blade restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed, it is possible that the blade portion 5011 cannot be returned to the sword state due to a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of blade restoration control that should be completed in “0.5 seconds” may be repeated a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state will continue beyond the operation reception period. In such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoration control is being performed. The result presentation may be derived at the end of the reception period, and further, the blade restoration control may be continued after the result presentation is derived. Thereby, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered without hindering the progress of the production.

(Operation button abnormality judgment timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that cannot be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And changeable. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (A), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (the variation pattern) At the time of starting the demonstration production described above, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in a normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Control is performed to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the change of the special symbol is started, so that an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the change pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered.

  On the game board 5, around the effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom front-movable effect. A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) where the player stands by around the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to change to an operation state (appearance position) that appears on the front surface of. These movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) is provided for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (B), when a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (when the effect based on the variation pattern starts), when the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (the variation pattern) At the timing of starting the demonstration production described above, the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition, but at those timings, If it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and if it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position), an abnormality has occurred. Control is performed to determine and return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least at the start of the variation of the special symbol, so the effect using the movable decorative body as an effect based on the variation pattern When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the production from being cut off. In addition, during the performance based on the variation pattern, if a movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the visual recognition of the display area is hindered. The occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by returning to the non-operating state at least when the change of the special symbol is started.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and at the timing of controlling to a normal state or a protruding state, the player can inhibit the change to the state, whereas the movable decorative body is It is a member that cannot be touched by the player, and the player cannot inhibit the change to the state at the timing of controlling to the non-operating state or the operating state. For this reason, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this regard, the operation button 410 increases the chance of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred, compared to the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be detected at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern. Inhibition can be prevented.

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and an effect using a movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is controlled to a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. For this reason, while the frequency of using the operation button 410 is high, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, participation in the effect is hindered due to the occurrence of an abnormality. Can be prevented.

(Operation button abnormality occurred during operation)
Next, an operation effect that is performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. 228 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 229 is the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in FIG.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projecting start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a projecting state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projecting position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 is pressed. Such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440 can determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. .

  Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

  First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state 410 is changed to a protruding state. Further, in the operation acceptance period, as an instruction effect A at the time of the protrusion operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the protruded state, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, in the protruded state) A combination of a display that replicates a certain operation button 410, a message display such as “Press the protruding operation button!”, And a voice instruction from the speaker (eg, “Press the protruding operation button!”) To be done.

  In the operation reception period described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Thus, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Also, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. The instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is to notify the player that the protrusion is an abnormal protrusion but is positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display on the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, , A display showing the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display such as “This is a protrusion of the real thing! Press the operation button without worrying!”, Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, “ This is a project of the real thing! Press the operation button without worrying! " As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 that is in a normal state does not change to a protruding state. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using a certain operation button 410 is being performed or an effect using an operation button 410 in a protruding state, and further an operation in a protruding state There is a possibility that the player may be hesitant to operate the button 410. However, the instruction button B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed by the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 or the sound from the speaker, so that the operation button 410 that is at least protruded from the display or the sound is used. It is possible to recognize that the performance is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the expectation level for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those composed of different effects as described above, but inform the player that the protrusion is an abnormal protrusion but is equivalent to a normal protrusion. If it is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect content.

  In addition, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to a normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 that has abnormally protruded is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is moved to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of this, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. In the operation acceptance period, as an instruction effect C at the time of normal operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in a normal state, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, in a normal state) A display of a certain operation button 410 or a message “Press the operation button!” Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, “Press the operation button!”) Is performed in combination. In the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in a normal state, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Also, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D during the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. This instruction effect D for normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, A display showing the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as “This operation is not related but press the operation button!”, And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, “This operation is not related but operation is not related. “Press the button!” Etc.). As described above, when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, but display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, By performing the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation by the sound from the speaker, it can be recognized from the display and the sound that the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is being performed. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be ended. Note that the instruction effects C and D at the time of normal operation are not limited to those having different effects as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. In this case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect content.

  In addition, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is displayed within the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period. It is not locked to the mechanism, and the abnormal protruding state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, is the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? The operation button 410 in the protruding state cannot be recognized, but depending on whether or not the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state when it is pressed. Can be recognized.

  Note that when the operation button 410 is abnormal, the operation button 410 that is in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation reception period is displayed in the same manner as the operation reception period when the performance is performed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (when the effect based on the variation pattern starts), the symbol game Control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state at the time of the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern) at the start of the demonstration effect.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed during the operation reception period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, the instruction effect during the normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is a less expected effect than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, so the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the expectation degree for the performance cannot be confirmed due to the fact that it is not, the player will hardly suffer any disadvantage.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in a normal state during the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. The operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism to return to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked. It is possible to keep the abnormally protruding state from being locked. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an abnormal protrusion occurs regardless of whether an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state or an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state. This is because, for example, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred in the operation button 410, You can call attention.

(Notification when operation button abnormality occurs)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And changeable. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (A), when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored. Dont return. In such a case, although the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Even when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done.

  Even when the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the operation acceptance period, the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts at the start of variation (based on the variation pattern, as will be described later). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), the timing at the start of the demonstration production described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods) Thus, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. That is, during the operation acceptance period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player is not intentional. An attempt is made to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence noticeable.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 outside the operation reception period, the response is different from that in the case where an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, during the execution of the demonstration effect described above other than the operation reception period, the automatic operation confirmation period described above is also provided, and the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing during the automatic operation confirmation period. The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is positioned at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 230B, in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that it is in a normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is projected, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating to return from the projected state to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, Does not return to normal. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruded state, and the abnormally protruded operation button 410 is returned to the normal state unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state returns to the normal state. Control is repeatedly performed. If the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state when the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (in this example, five times), The automatic operation confirmation period ends, and after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, the pattern as after the end of the operation reception period described above At the beginning of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (when the production starts based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the game of the game (when the production ends based on the variation pattern), At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

  In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, display of “An error has occurred in the operation button”), notification by blinking of a lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 By performing (for example, flashing the lamp / LED more intensely than in the normal performance), the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is appealed to the outside.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. Not done. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. That is, outside the operation confirmation period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation button 410 is not requested to operate as in the automatic operation confirmation period. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, and is alerted to such an actor.

  In this example, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed. It may be. However, in such a case, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appealing to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect that is notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the automatic operation confirmation period. Thereby, even after the end of the operation reception period, it is possible not to be disturbed by the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 and to pay attention to the effect related to the game progress (effect based on the variation pattern). it can.

(Confirmation effect at the time of abnormality of movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a time chart showing the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  On the game board 5, around the effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom front-movable effect. A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) where the player stands by around the effect display device 1600, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to change to an operation state (appearance position) that appears on the front surface of. These movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) is provided for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 231, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (based on the variation pattern) At the time of the start of the demonstration production described above (at the end of the production) (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition. However, at those timings, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position). In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed.

  However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is movable. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body is performed. Specifically, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image that have been displayed are changed to non-display. Further, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is flashed violently. Thus, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the fact that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, it is confirmed whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a display such as “Please press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game” is displayed. As long as the operation button 410 is not pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also display contents such as decorative symbols and background images remain hidden in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided in the frame 4 and sound from a speaker are prevented from being performed in accordance with display contents.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect that notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect that confirms whether or not to advance the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. End. Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as decorative symbols and background images are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Returning to the above, effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided in the main body frame 4 and sound from the speaker are performed according to display contents. For example, when an effect for operating the movable decorative body is performed after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, the display area display, lamp / Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker are not changed, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. Thereby, the fall of the interest by the movable decoration body not operating can be suppressed. The same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body not operating from the non-operating state occurs. It has been broken.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation reception period for the effect using the operation button 410 (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed). Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be displayed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the used effect is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that a predetermined effect result can be derived without moving the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. The effect that is not present can be the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

  Also, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is An effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred and a confirmation effect to confirm whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred, but when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, You may make it perform an effect. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operation state.For example, when the movable decoration body returns to the non-operation state during the execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be ended even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Multiple movable object interference avoidance operation)
Next, an interference avoidance operation in the case where an abnormality has occurred in any one of the plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case where it will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. As shown, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

  In addition, an effect using the operation button 410 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 232 (A), in the production using the operation button 410, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to the instruction.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not pressed, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state as the operation reception period ends. At the end of the operation reception period, if it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded, and the operation button 410 in the protruded state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the opened state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a relationship of interfering with each other when operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be protruded without the operation button cover 419 being opened, the operation button 410 to be protruded and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other. There is a possibility that further troubles may occur between 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control for avoiding the interference is performed so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 232 (B), when the operation reception period occurs, control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, If it is determined that there is no error, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and control is not performed so that the operation button 410 in the normal state protrudes (control for setting the operation button 410 to protrude). Is prohibited). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Note that even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not enter the open state when the operation reception period occurs. Does not perform the control for setting the operation button 410 in the normal state to protrude (prohibits the control for the operation button 410 to protrude).

  In addition, when the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own touch after the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of the operation reception period, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the control is performed such that the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded by allowing the operation button 410 to be in the protruded state. As described above, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other but the interference state is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is projected. Thus, in the remaining period of the operation reception period, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in a protruding state. For this reason, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of the operation reception period, the player can press the operation button 410 in a protruding state by self-help efforts. It is possible to prevent the participation from being hindered. Note that after pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to a normal state. The situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented from occurring again.

  When the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger even though the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of the operation reception period, However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, when the operation reception period ends, control to return the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed, and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state thereafter, the operation button in the open state Control for returning the cover 419 to the closed state is performed. This prevents a situation in which the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere later again.

  On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened when the operation reception period occurs, and the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not projected. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in a protruding state. At the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved. This prevents the situation where the operation button cover 419 interferes.

(Operation when operation button abnormality occurs according to game state)
Next, the operation when the operation button 410 is abnormal when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-short-time state and the short-time state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case where it will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. As shown, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude and is positioned in the normal state, whereas in the short-time state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 protrudes by the spring mechanism. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

  In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), it is possible to perform an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state is performed when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation reception period. However, as shown in FIG. 233 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state, the control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the opened state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in a normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in an open state, only control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to a closed state is available. Is done. Also, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as the case other than the present example. This is the timing at the start of the demonstration effect described above, at the end of the change (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern).

  On the other hand, in the time-short state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation reception period is in a protruding state when the operation reception period occurs. A predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction. As long as the time is short, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

  Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in an open state and the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is performed. Note that when the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruded state. Only done.

  As described above, the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state in the non-short-time state (normal state), whereas the operation button cover 419 is in the open state in the time-short state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-short-time state and the short-time state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is determined. When an abnormality occurs as described above, the operation button is used when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed at a position corresponding to the gaming state by changing the return destination position of the member where the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating 410 from being hindered.

(Mission erasure timing in mission direction)
Next, as an effect set for the change pattern, in addition to a change effect such as a change display of decorative symbols, in addition to a case where a mission effect is determined whether or not the mission presented to the player is achieved This will be described below.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, decorative display of the decorative symbol is started based on the variable pattern, and when the lottery result is a win after a predetermined time has elapsed (in the case of the variable pattern at the time of winning), the decorative symbol is displayed. Is displayed in a stop pattern with a winning symbol, and when the lottery result is out (if it is a variation pattern at the time of outage), a variation effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when execution of the mission effect is determined, the mission effect (presentation effect and result suggesting effect described later) is also displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 within the period in which the above-described variation effect is performed. Control for execution is performed.

  The mission effect of this example is composed of a presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting the mission to the player, and a result suggesting effect (following effect) for notifying whether or not the mission is achieved. Specifically, first, a presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting a mission to the player is performed using the effect display device 1600, but when the player presses the operation button 410, the presented mission is deleted. As a result, the presentation effect is finished and a result suggesting effect (follow-up effect) for informing whether or not the mission is achieved is started. If the lottery result is a win, after the start of the result suggesting effect, a display indicating that the mission is achieved as a result of the mission effect is derived before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the winning symbol. If the result suggestion is finished, but the lottery result is out, after the start of the result suggestion effect, the mission effect results as a result of the mission effect before the decorative symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped. A display that suggests failure is derived and the result suggesting effect ends. In other words, when the lottery result is a win, in the result suggesting effect (following effect) in a series of mission effects, the result of the same content as the presentation effect (previous effect) that presented the mission first is derived. When the lottery result is out of place, the result suggestion effect (follow-up effect) in the series of mission effects is derived from a result different from the presentation effect (preceding effect) that presented the mission first. Before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the lottery result regarding the winning can be determined or suggested.

  In this example, after the presentation effect that presents the mission to the player (preceding effect) is performed, the player presses the operation button 410 at an arbitrary timing to end the presentation effect and to suggest the result. The effect can be started, and until the operation button 410 is pressed, the mission presented in the presentation effect is not erased, and the result suggesting effect (subsequent effect) is not started. . As described above, unless the operation button 410 is pressed, the displayed mission is continuously displayed, and the mission effect does not proceed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness to press the operation button 410 and As a result, it is possible to prevent the mission effect from proceeding without the player being aware of the presentation. In the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed before the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing 5 seconds before the decorative symbol stop display) arrives just before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, when the presentation limit time arrives, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is terminated, and the result suggesting effect is started to forcibly advance the mission effect.

  In this example, “4 seconds” is set as the execution time of the result suggesting effect, and the result suggesting effect is compulsory due to the arrival of the presentation limit time set at the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol. Even if it starts, the result suggestion effect similar to when the player starts the result suggestion effect at an arbitrary timing is executed to advance the mission effect. The presentation limit time may be common when the mission effect is executed corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variation times, but the presentation limit time according to the plurality of types of variation patterns with different variation times. For example, when performing a mission effect corresponding to a variation pattern of “20 seconds”, “timing 5 seconds before stop display of decorative symbols” is set as the presentation limit time On the other hand, when performing a mission effect corresponding to a variation pattern of “20.5 seconds”, “timing before 5.5 seconds before display of decorative symbols” is set as the presentation limit time, etc. Can be illustrated. As a result, when the result suggestion effect is forcibly started due to the arrival of the presentation limit time, the player recognizes the length of the fluctuation pattern being executed and the stop display time of the decorative symbol by starting the result suggestion effect. Can be prevented, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this example, as described above, the execution time of the result suggesting effect (following effect) is set to 4 seconds, and when the operation button 410 is pressed, the result suggesting effect (following effect) is started, As a result of (4 seconds), the result suggestion progresses. For this reason, if the operation button 410 is pressed at an early timing after the presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting the mission to the player is performed, the start of the result suggesting effect is accelerated and the timing at which the result is derived is also obtained. If the operation button 410 is pressed at a later timing, the start of the result suggesting effect is delayed and the timing at which the result is derived is also delayed. Thus, a player who wants to quickly determine whether or not the lottery result is a win can be directed to press the operation button 410 at an early timing after the mission is presented.

  Next, a specific example of the mission effect will be described with reference to FIG. In this effect example, a case will be described in which the main control MPU 4100a determines a change pattern in which a mission effect is performed simultaneously with a change effect among a plurality of change patterns.

  First, when a command related to a variation pattern in which a mission effect is performed in parallel with a variation effect is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a side to the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, a variation display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (FIG. 234 (A)). Then, after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the symbol display region where the decoration symbol variation display is performed using the upper right display region and the lower left display region of the effect display device 1600 are used. The mission display area is divided into a series of mission effects (FIG. 234 (B)). In other words, at the start of the presentation effect (preceding effect) in the mission effect, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display area in which the region is reduced compared to the start of the decorative symbol variation display. The player who requests the progress of the game proceeds while watching the mission display area, and the player who does not request the progress of the mission effect progresses while watching the symbol display area.

  In the mission display area of the display area of the effect display device 1600, first, if “7” comes out, it is a big hit! By performing the presentation effect (preceding effect) that displays the mission message image “,” the player can grasp the achievement condition imposed as the mission. In addition, in the presentation effect, an operation message image different from the mission message image “Start by pressing a button!” Is displayed in the mission display area, and the mission effect progresses when the operation button 410 is pressed ( It is possible for the player to grasp that a rattle as a result suggesting effect is started).

  When the operation button 410 is pressed while the presentation effect is being performed in the mission display area, the mission message image and the operation message image are deleted. In addition, a display consisting of a character image of “rattle” newly appears, and a rotation display in which the rattle starts to rotate is performed. As a result, whether or not the mission is achieved is started. (FIG. 234 (C)).

  Next, when the lottery result is a big hit, when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the result suggesting effect (following effect) is started by pressing the operation button 410, the result of mission achievement presence / absence As a result, a result image in which a ball “7” appears from the rattle is displayed (FIG. 234 (D)). As a result, it was shown that the result was the same as the previously presented mission (giving "7" in the rattle), and the player was able to grasp that this mission was successful (achieved) Before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the lottery result is a big hit. After that, when the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, the division of the mission display area and the symbol display area is canceled, and the decoration symbol is displayed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (in this example, “777”) (FIG. 234 (E)).

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is out, the result of mission achievement is obtained when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the result suggesting effect (following effect) is started by pressing the operation button 410. As a result, a result image in which a ball other than “7” appears from the rattle is displayed (FIG. 234 (F)). As a result, it was shown that the result was different from the previously presented mission (giving a “7” in the rattle), allowing the player to grasp that this mission failed (not achieved), Before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the lottery result is off. After that, when the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, the division of the mission display area and the symbol display area is canceled, and the decoration symbol is displayed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, The decoration symbol is removed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed (“513” in this example) (FIG. 234 (G)).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, there are sword ornaments 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 described above as the operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the operation buttons 410. Even if the player operates, the presentation effect in the mission effect is not ended, and the result suggesting effect is not started. The sword decorative body 5001 executes an effect different from the mission effect (for example, an effect change such as a serif effect) as an effect corresponding to (accompanying) a change effect such as a change display of the decorative symbol performed in the symbol change area. It is supposed to be used sometimes. For this reason, for example, after being divided into the symbol variation area and the mission display area by executing the mission effect, the presentation effect in the mission effect is performed in the mission display region, and the operation waiting state for the operation button 410 continues. Even in the same period, it is possible to execute an effect using the sword ornament 5001 different from the mission effect in the symbol display area, and an effect using the operation button 410 in the mission display area (mission effect) ) And other effects (such as speech effects) using the sword effect operation unit 5000 in the symbol display area can be sufficiently enjoyed by the player.

  In addition, in this example, as a presentation effect (preceding effect) in the mission effect, “If the rattle“ 7 ”comes out, it is a big hit! After the mission message image is displayed, if the lottery result is a big hit, the result image in which the ball “7” appears from the rattle is displayed as the result suggesting effect (follow-up effect), and further the presentation effect In the result suggesting effects, the same effect image made up of “7” balls appears. As a result, it becomes possible to easily determine that the result is the same as the presented mission, and the player can easily grasp that the mission was successful (however, the lottery result is a big hit In this case, the same effect image is not necessarily caused to appear in the presentation effect and the result suggesting effect, but, for example, substantially the same effect image (shape, size, etc.) as the effect image appearing in the presentation effect is different. As long as it has a commonality that can be recognized as “same” from the appearance, color, and the like, it may appear in the result suggesting effect.

  In addition, in this example, as a mission effect, if “7” comes out with a rattle, a big hit! The mission effect including the presentation effect (predecessor effect) for displaying the mission message image and the result suggestion effect (following effect) using the rotation display of the rattle character image has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if “this character” comes out with a rattle, it is a big hit! The presentation effect (preceding effect) that displays the image of the target character (mission target pre-display image) together with the mission message image and the image of the same character as the presented character (direction, posture, size, etc. are different) It is good as long as it has the commonality that can be recognized as “same” from the appearance and color, etc.), and a mission effect consisting of a suggestion effect (subsequent effect) as a result of the appearance of an image of a character different from the presented character Etc. In addition, as for the mission effect, each mission effect such as “a mission effect that shows a big hit if“ 7 ”appears once in a rattle” or “a mission effect that shows a big hit if“ 7 ”appears twice in a rattle”. Alternatively, the number of mission achievements may be different. Moreover, it is preferable that the mission effect is that the achievement of the mission ensures a big hit, but it may be a big hit even if the mission is not achieved.

  In the above example, the operation button 410 is pressed until the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) that has been set immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If not, when the presentation limit time arrives, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is terminated, and the result suggestion effect is started and the mission effect is forcibly advanced. However, other embodiments may be adopted. For example, as another example, the operation button 410 is pressed until the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) arrives just before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If not, when the presentation limit time arrives, the presented mission may be deleted to end the presentation effect, and the mission effect may be ended without starting the result suggesting effect. In this case, when the presentation limit time arrives, the division of the mission display area and the symbol display area will be canceled, and the game progress in the large-area symbol display area for players who do not require the progress of the mission effect. Can be actively executed. Further, the progress mode of the mission effect at the time when the presentation limit time has come may be made different depending on the type of the mission effect. For example, when performing the first mission effect that displays the above-mentioned rattle as the mission effect, when the presentation limit time arrives, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is terminated, and the result suggesting effect is started. While the mission effect is ended without performing, the mission expectation is different from the first mission effect (for example, the hit expectation is higher than the first mission effect). When performing a mission effect that displays another character such as “Omikuji” instead of a rattle, when the presentation limit time arrives, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is terminated, resulting in a result suggestive effect May be started to forcibly advance the mission effect.

  Further, in this example, the effect display device 1600 is used for both of the change effect such as the change display of the decorative design, the presentation effect (previous effect) and the result suggesting effect (following effect) for presenting the mission. A plurality of display devices may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and their effects may be performed using another display device. Thereby, for example, the effect using the operation button 410 and the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 (the effect corresponding to (accompanying) the change effect such as the change display of the decoration symbol) are clearly recognized. be able to.

(Counting the specific number of notices in roulette production)
Next, as an effect set for the change pattern, a change effect such as a decorative symbol change display is performed, and as an effect using the operation buttons 410, among a plurality of types of notices each set with a degree of expectation. A case where a roulette effect indicating which notice is decided will be described below.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, decorative display of the decorative symbol is started based on the variable pattern, and when the lottery result is a win after a predetermined time has elapsed (in the case of the variable pattern at the time of winning), the decorative symbol is displayed. Is displayed in a stop pattern with a winning symbol, and when the lottery result is out (if it is a variation pattern at the time of outage), a variation effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, when execution of the roulette effect is determined, control for executing the roulette effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 within the period in which the above-described variation effect is performed.

  The roulette effect of this example is composed of a first roulette effect (first roulette effect) that does not require the operation of the operation button 410 and a second roulette effect (second roulette effect) that requires the operation of the operation button 410. Thus, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect proceed sequentially in this order. Specifically, first, as the first roulette effect, an effect of determining the mode of the button image imitating the operation button 410 from a plurality of types of modes is performed. As the mode of the button image, “notice A (normal)” which is not decorated at all and “notice B (ladybug)” which is decorated with a ladybug pattern are set. Further, the degree of expectation (expected degree of jackpot) for the mode of the button image is set so as to increase in the order of “notice A (normal)” and “notice B (ladybug)”. That is, when the lottery result is a win, the probability of determining “notice B (ladybug)” is high in the first roulette effect. Note that in the first roulette effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested, and the button image mode is notified as a result of a plurality of types without pressing the operation button 410. Yes.

  Next, after the button image is displayed in the mode determined in the first roulette effect, the effect of determining the mode of the display image on which a predetermined pattern is drawn from a plurality of types is performed as the second roulette effect. Is called. As the display image, “notice 1 (×)” in which a symbol “×” is drawn, “notice 2 (○)” in which a symbol “○” is drawn, “notice 3 (in which a symbol“ ☆ ”is drawn) ☆) "and" Notice 4 (Ladybug) "on which the ladybug is drawn are set. The display image includes “notice 4 (ladybug)” having the same pattern as “notice B (ladybug)” in at least the first roulette effect. In addition, as the expectation degree for the display image mode (expectation degree for jackpot), “notice 1 (×)”, “notice 2 (○)”, “notice 3 (☆)”, “notice 4 (ladybug)” It is set to be higher in order. That is, when the lottery result is a win, in the second roulette effect, the probability of determining “notice 4 (ladybug)” is high. In the second roulette effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is requested by using the button image display in the mode determined in the first roulette effect. As an opportunity, the mode of any one of the plurality of modes is notified as a result.

  In the above, only when the lottery result is a win, “Notice B (Ladybug)” is notified as the result of the first roulette effect, and “Notice 4 (Ladybug)” is the result of the second roulette effect. Can be notified. That is, if the lottery result is out of order, “Notice B (Ladybug)” is notified as the result of the first roulette effect, and “Notice 4 (Ladybug)” is the result of the second roulette effect. The notification is limited to not to be determined at the same time. As described above, when “Notice B (Ladybug)” is notified as the result of the first roulette effect, and “Notice 4 (Ladybug)” is notified as the result of the second roulette effect, the ladybug is notified. Since it is determined that the lottery result is a win if the pattern pattern appears twice, the roulette effects can be expected with attention. On the other hand, regardless of whether the lottery result is winning or losing, and whether the result of the roulette effect is a ladybug pattern, the content before the result notification in the first roulette effect (in the roulette display) “Preliminary B (Ladybug)” appears as a plurality of displayed modes), and the content before the result notification in the second roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed in the roulette display) is “Preliminary 4 ( "Ladybugs") are not allowed to appear. In other words, as a content before the result notification in the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed in the roulette display), a ladybug pattern may appear several times. Even if the insect pattern appears multiple times, it is not determined that the lottery result is a win. Also, in the stage before the result notification in the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect (a stage where a plurality of modes are displayed in the roulette display), the expectation level (the jackpot expectation level) is not fixed, Even if a ladybug pattern appears multiple times at a stage, the degree of expectation (expectation for big hits) does not increase.

  In this example, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect are performed, the contents of each roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed in the roulette display), and the result of each roulette effect are notified. The mode is determined by the variation pattern determined on the main control MPU 4100a side. Specifically, since two types of modes are set as a result of the first roulette effect, four types of modes are set as a result of the second roulette effect. At least eight types of variation patterns are set. Only when the lottery result is a win, “Notice B (Ladybug)” is notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and “Notice 4 (Ladybug)” is notified as a result of the second roulette effect. While it is possible to determine the variation pattern set so as to be performed, when the lottery result is out of place, the variation pattern is limited so as not to be determined.

  Unlike this example, the contents of each roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) and the mode notified as a result of each roulette effect are the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the main control MPU 4100a side. When the variation pattern is transmitted to the side, that is, when the variation of the decorative design starts, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern. Specifically, “first roulette content determination lottery” for determining contents (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) in the first roulette effect as a plurality of effect lotteries performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol “First roulette result determination lottery” for determining the mode notified as a result of the first roulette effect and the contents (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) for the second roulette effect are determined. “2 roulette content determination lottery” and “second roulette result determination lottery” for determining the mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect. After a plurality of lotteries, the result of the first roulette effect is “Notice B (Ladybug)” and the result of the second roulette effect is “Notice 4 ( If “Ladybug” is determined, the result of any roulette effect is replaced with a mode other than “Ladybug” and executed. In other words, after a plurality of production lotteries, it is determined whether the lottery results related to the winning and the production lottery results satisfy the prohibition condition that is determined to be inconsistent. The result of any roulette effect is replaced with a mode other than “Ladybug” and executed. Among the plurality of performance lotteries, the “first roulette result determination lottery” and the “second roulette result determination lottery” are prohibited, but the “first roulette content determination lottery” and the “second roulette” The “content determination lottery” is not a forbidden object, and the “Ladybug” mode may be displayed several times in the roulette display before the result notification in the roulette effect.

  In addition to the above, the mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect may be determined on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side when the operation button 410 is pressed. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is pressed, a “second roulette result determination lottery” is performed to determine a mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect. After that, despite the fact that the lottery result is out, “Notice B (Ladybug)” has already been determined and displayed as the result of the first roulette effect, and “Notice 4” is the result of the second roulette effect. If “Ladybug” is determined, the result of the second roulette effect is replaced with a mode other than “Ladybug” and executed. That is, after determining the result of the second roulette effect, it is determined whether or not the above prohibition condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, the result of the second roulette effect is expressed as “Ladybug”. It replaces with aspects other than "and performs.

  Next, a specific example of the roulette effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. In this production example, a case will be described in which the main control MPU 4100a determines a variation pattern in which a roulette effect is performed among a plurality of variation patterns.

  First, when a command related to a variation pattern in which a roulette effect is performed is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a side to the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, a variation display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 235 (A )). Then, after starting the display of the decorative symbol variation, the first roulette effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, in a four-fold roulette display, two button images indicating “notice A (normal)” and two button images indicating “notice B (ladybug)” are alternately arranged. Then, a roulette effect is performed so as to select in turn clockwise (FIG. 235 (B)).

  Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first roulette effect, either a button image indicating “notice A (normal)” or a button image indicating “notice B (ladybug)” The selection stops in the display area. That is, when “notice B (ladybug)” is determined as a result of the first roulette effect, the selection stops in the display area of the button image indicating “notice B (ladybug)” (FIG. 235). In contrast to (C)), when “notice A (normal)” is determined, the selection stops in the button image display area indicating “notice A (normal)” (FIG. 235 (D)). .

  Next, the second roulette effect is performed. At the start of the second roulette effect, the selection start image “Roulette effect start!” Is displayed to notify that effect. In addition, at the start of the second roulette effect, a button image as a result of the first roulette effect is displayed and a start operation instruction image “Press the button to stop!” Is displayed. If the operation button 410 is pressed in the roulette display displayed after the start of the roulette effect, the player can grasp the display image in the roulette display as if he / she can select it. Further, as a button image display, when a button image indicating “notice A (normal)” is selected as a result of the first roulette effect, a button image indicating “notice A (normal)” is displayed (FIG. 235 (FIG. 235). E)), a button image indicating “Notice B (Ladybug)” is displayed when a button image indicating “Notice B (Ladybug)” is selected (FIG. 235 (F)).

  In this example, the button image of the ladybug pattern can be displayed both in the roulette display and after the roulette display in the first roulette effect. The button image is enlarged and displayed. In the first roulette effect, the time for displaying the ladybug pattern button image after the roulette display is longer than the time for displaying the ladybug pattern button image during the roulette display. For this reason, a ladybug pattern button image is difficult to recognize during roulette display, whereas a ladybug pattern button image is easy to recognize after roulette display. In this example, if the ladybug pattern appears twice through the first and second roulette effects, the lottery result is confirmed to be a big hit, but the ladybug pattern displayed after the roulette display Only button images are counted as the number of times a ladybug pattern appears. That is, even if a ladybug pattern button image is displayed during the roulette display, it is not counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern has appeared. In this regard, the ladybug pattern button image is displayed differently between the roulette display and after the roulette display, so that the ladybug pattern button image appears when the ladybug pattern button image is displayed. It is easy to discriminate whether or not it is counted as the number of times.

  In the second roulette effect described above, in the roulette display divided into four, a display image of “Notice 4 (Ladybug)”, a display image of “Notice 1 (×)”, and “Notice 3 (☆)” The display image and the display image of “Notice 2 (◯)” are arranged clockwise, and roulette display (rotation selection display) is performed so as to select them in order clockwise (FIG. 235 (G)). .

  Then, after the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect is started, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the rotation display speed of the roulette display (rotation selection display) is reduced by the pressing, and the operation button 410 is displayed. After a predetermined time (in this example, 3 seconds) after pressing down, a display image of “Notice 1 (×)”, a display image of “Notice 2 (○)”, and a display image of “Notice 3 (☆)” The selection stops in any one of the display areas indicating “notice 4 (ladybug)”. That is, if “notice 4 (ladybug)” is determined as a result of the second roulette effect, the selection stops in the display area of the display image indicating “notice 4 (ladybug)” (FIG. 236). (H)), when “notice 1 (×)” is determined, selection stops in the display area of the display image indicating “notice 1 (×)” (FIG. 236 (I)). . When the selection is stopped in the display area of the display image indicating “Notice 4 (Ladybug)”, the display image indicating “Notice 4 (Ladybug)” is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 236 (J )). Even when the operation button 410 is not pressed until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the second roulette effect, the selection is stopped in any one of the display areas as described above. I am doing so.

  As described above, in the second roulette effect as well as the first roulette effect, the ladybug display image can be displayed both in the roulette display and after the roulette display. The latter shows a magnified display of the ladybug display image. In the second roulette effect, the time for displaying the ladybug display image after the roulette display is longer than the time for displaying the ladybug display image during the roulette display. For this reason, a ladybug display image is difficult to recognize during roulette display, whereas a ladybug display image is easy to recognize after roulette display. In this example, if the ladybug pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the lottery result is determined to be a big hit, but the ladybug displayed after the roulette display Only the image is counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern appeared. That is, even if a ladybug display image is displayed during the roulette display, it is not counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern has appeared. In this regard, the number of times the ladybug pattern appears when the ladybug display image is displayed by making the ladybug display image easier to recognize during and after roulette display. It is easy to determine whether or not it is counted.

  If the ladybug pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (this book) when the variation time set in the variation pattern has elapsed. In the example, “777”) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 236 (K)). On the other hand, if the ladybug pattern appears only once through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, and if the ladybug pattern never appears, the variation pattern When the set fluctuation time has elapsed, the decorative symbol is removed and is stopped and displayed as a symbol (in this example, “513”) (FIG. 236 (L)).

  In this example, through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, when the ladybug pattern appears twice, the lottery result is determined to be a big hit. A special effect different from the normal effect (the effect set in the variation pattern) is performed until is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. Thereby, after the ladybug pattern appears twice, it is possible to prevent a dull time just waiting for the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol.

  Further, in this example, during the execution of the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in the reduced display area in the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Thereby, when it is desired to pay attention to the variation display of the decorative symbols, the roulette effect does not hinder the visual recognition of the variation display of the decorative symbols, and can pay attention. Further, in this example, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect are performed at a timing (so-called normal variation) before whether or not the decorative symbol variation display forms a reach. Accordingly, even when the decorative symbol variation display does not form a reach, those roulette effects can be executed, and it is possible to prevent a boring time during the normal variation.

  In this example, only the ladybug pattern image displayed after the roulette display is counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern has appeared in each of the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect. Only when the predetermined appearance condition is satisfied, the number of times that the ladybug pattern appears may be counted. As in this example, as a case where the predetermined appearance condition is satisfied, in addition to the case where the ladybug pattern image is enlarged or the time period during which the ladybug pattern image is displayed is long, for example, an effect display Only when the ladybug pattern image is displayed at a specific position in the display area of the apparatus 1600, the number of times the ladybug pattern may appear may be counted. On the other hand, as a case where a predetermined appearance condition is not satisfied, for example, a ladybug pattern image appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600 but does not stay in a predetermined position, and leaves the display area in a short time. In such a case, it may not be counted as the number of times a ladybug pattern has appeared.

(Concealment display in roulette production)
In the second roulette effect described above, as another example, the player may arbitrarily make the roulette display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 difficult or impossible to recognize. The case will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at the start of roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, in addition to the selection start image and the start operation instruction image described above, a secret instruction image of “Press and hold the button if you do not want to see” is displayed. Display is performed (FIG. 237 (A)). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example is determined to be “long press” when the operation of the operation button 410 is continuously performed without interruption for a predetermined long pressing time (2 seconds or more in this example). The operation detection signal for the operation button 410 is continuously input over the long press time (2 seconds or more in this example), so that the “long press” operation can be detected. It can be done. By displaying the concealment instruction image, if the operation button 410 is held down for a long time, it is possible to allow the player to grasp that the subsequent roulette display progress process and result cannot be recognized.

  At the start of roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, when the operation button 410 is pressed for a long time according to the instruction by the concealment instruction image, by detecting the initial “press” for the “long press”, As in the previous embodiment, the rotation display speed of the roulette display (rotation selection display) is slowed down, and a display image of “notice 1 (×)” after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) after the operation button 410 is pressed. And the display image of “Notice 2 (○)”, the image of “Notice 3 (☆)”, and the display image of “Notice 4 (Ladybug)” are not selected. To do. However, in this example, it is determined that the operation button 410 has been pressed for a long time (2 seconds in this example), and it is determined that the operation button 410 is a long press. (In this example, a special still image painted in white and hidden behind) is displayed, and at least each display image arranged in the roulette display is hidden by a concealment image so that the player cannot recognize it. (FIG. 237 (B)).

  That is, in this example, if the operation button 410 is pressed for a long time according to the instruction by the confidential instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, it is concealed before the selection of the roulette display stops. The player image is displayed so that the player cannot recognize which result the rear roulette display has ended. Further, the confidential image is terminated by releasing the long press, but as long as the operation button 410 is pressed and held, the display is continued, and while the operation button 410 is pressed and held, If the roulette display cannot be recognized continuously, and the operation button 410 is pressed for a long time even when the selection of the roulette display is stopped, it is possible to recognize which display image has been selected in the roulette display. It can be eliminated (FIG. 237 (C)). As a result, if the user does not want to know the expected degree of roulette effect (expected expectation of big hit) before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the roulette effect is displayed by long pressing the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on whether or not the big hit symbol is derived when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed thereafter.

  In this example, even in a period in which the operation button 410 is pressed for a long time, that is, a period in which the roulette display cannot be recognized, the decorative display pattern is displayed in the reduced display area on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. The variable display is performed so that it can be visually recognized. As a result, even when the operation button 410 is pressed for a long time, the concealment image does not hinder the visual recognition of the decorative symbol variation display, and only the decorative symbol variation display is avoided while avoiding the visual recognition of the roulette display. You can selectively focus on.

  In this example, when the operation button 410 is pressed and held in accordance with an instruction from the confidential instruction image at the start of roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, each display image arranged in the roulette display. Is hidden by the concealment image so that it cannot be recognized by the player, but only a part of the display image, but not all, may be concealed by the concealment image, making it difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, as a display image arranged in the roulette display, for example, a pattern similar to the pattern of “Ladybug” is provided, and the pattern of “Ladybug” or a part of the similar pattern is hidden by a concealment image. It may be difficult for the player to determine whether or not the pattern is “Ladybug”.

  Further, in this example, at the start of roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, not only when the operation button 410 is pressed and held according to the instruction by the confidential instruction image, but also according to the instruction by the operation instruction image. Even when the operation button 410 is normally pressed without being long-pressed and then pressed again with respect to the operation button 410, the confidential image is displayed. In this case, the roulette display is started by the first press and the roulette display becomes temporarily visible, but the roulette display is hidden by the concealment image by the subsequent long press, which is the same as the above-described embodiment. It is difficult to recognize the result of the roulette display, and it is possible to suppress the result of the roulette effect from being displayed for a long time for a player who does not want to know the expectation level (expected expectation level of the big hit).

  In the above-described another example, “long press of the operation button 410” is exemplified as the display condition of the concealment image. However, if it is possible to make it difficult for the player to arbitrarily recognize the roulette display, the operation button The concealment image may be displayed in response to another operation instead of the long press of 410. As other operations, for example, operations on other operation units such as the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 provided on the sword decoration body 5001 and the door frame 3 in the above-described sword effect operation unit 5000 (by long press) And may be a normal press), and at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the confidential image is displayed on the condition of these other operations. May be.

  Further, in the above-described another example, the display of the confidential image is terminated by releasing the long press of the operation button 410. However, as another aspect, when the operation button 410 is long pressed, Even if the long press is released, the concealment image may continue to be displayed for a specific long time (preferably a longer time than the selection of roulette display is stopped). In this case, the player However, it is possible to reduce fatigue and burden caused by continuously pressing the button.

  Further, in the above-described another example, a “special still image painted in white and invisible behind” is displayed as the concealment image. However, the display time of the concealment image is not limited to the still image ( If the concealment image continues to be displayed while the operation button 410 is being pressed for a long time, it may be a dynamic image that changes over time. As an example of the concealment image made up of a dynamic image, “a game information image that is switched and developed at regular intervals within a special balloon image that is painted white and the back is invisible” can be exemplified. As the game information image, specifically, an explanation image related to the gaming technique, various game effect explanation images mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, an explanation image of the current gaming mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. For example, a special dynamic image that informs the explanation of the gaming machine or the gaming situation is displayed while being switched at regular intervals. Thus, by displaying information useful to the player even during a period in which the effect is not interesting in the concealment image, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

[24. Setting mode interrupt processing]
Next, the setting mode interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). Or a special symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186) for a certain period of time (in this example) when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped From the reception of the variation pattern command at the peripheral control MPU 4150a until the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or at the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a special diagram 1 tuning production end command or a special figure 2 tuning production termination command is issued. The dial operation unit 40 of the operation unit 400 except for 0.5 second after the display of the decoration symbol is displayed. And to be able to adjust the like plurality of LED brightness provided in each decorative board sub volume value and the door frame 5 and the game board 4 of the effect sound (light amount) by operating the or pushing operation section 405. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 has been operated except for a predetermined period after the power is turned on and before and after the start and stop of the decorative symbol variation display (prohibition period: about 1 second). When the operation signal of the pressing operation unit 405 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the above, the setting mode interruption process is executed. The operation unit 400 used in the production is used as an operation unit for adjusting the sub-volume value of the production sound and the brightness (light quantity) of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. Separately from the pressing operation unit 405, a dedicated operation unit for adjustment (for example, an operation of a cross key type that adjusts the volume level by an operation in the vertical direction and adjusts light intensity (luminance) by the operation in the horizontal direction. May be provided.

  In the setting mode interruption process, as shown in FIG. 239, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). For example, when the setting mode interruption process is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the decorative symbol variation display, a selection screen for selecting volume adjustment or luminance adjustment is displayed. Is displayed (FIG. 239 (B)). Then, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and operating the pressing operation unit 405 in a state where one of volume adjustment and luminance adjustment is selected, volume adjustment processing (step 1122) and luminance adjustment processing (step S1123). Is executed and an adjustment screen is displayed (see FIG. 239 (C)), the volume of the production sound is adjusted, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is set to a desired brightness. (100% to 70%) can be adjusted. In addition, as the LED whose brightness can be adjusted, only the LED of the game board 4 may be adjustable, only the LED of the door frame 5 may be adjustable, and either the LED of the game board 4 or the LED of the door frame 5 may be adjusted. May be adjustable. Further, in addition to or separately from these, the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal may be adjustable.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in this example, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed below the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900), and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Overlapping the display area (symbol display area) and the hold display area (first hold display areas 1600a to 1600d indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol, second hold display areas 1600e to 1600h indicating the number of hold of the second special symbol) Display as much as possible. In other words, the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode avoids the area (design display area) in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed and the reserved display area (so as not to overlap the design display area and the reserved display area). To be displayed. Therefore, the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted without hindering the visual recognition of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the display is not limited to the above as long as it can be displayed so as not to hinder the visual display of the decorative display of the decorative symbols. For example, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed so as not to overlap the hold display area. On the other hand, display the display to overlap the display area (design display area) of the decorative design, and display the screen for selecting the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) on the front layer rather than the decorative design. It is also possible to prevent visual recognition of the decorative symbol variation display performed on the back of the screen for performing the setting mode.

  When volume adjustment is selected on the selection screen (FIG. 239 (B)), volume adjustment processing (step S1122) is executed. In the volume adjustment process, seven scales from 0 to 6 are displayed so as to correspond to the seven levels of the substrate volume, and the substrate volume is adjusted by increasing / decreasing the display of the scales colored according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the substrate volume after the change can be grasped (FIG. 239 (C)). To operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 after adjusting the substrate volume or when the non-operation period of the operation unit 400 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the setting mode interruption process ends and the setting mode is performed. Hide the screen. However, the substrate volume is usually adjusted immediately when the dial operation unit 401 is operated in the volume adjustment process, and is reflected in the volume of music and sound effects. As a result, the volume of the board volume is confirmed by actually listening to the music and sound effect according to the changed volume as well as the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). Can be adjusted while.

  When brightness adjustment is selected on the selection screen, brightness adjustment processing (step S1123) is executed. In the brightness adjustment process, seven LEDs are provided to correspond to seven levels of brightness so that the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted in increments of 5% from 70% to 100%. After the scale is displayed, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the display of the scale that is colored according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401. The brightness of can be grasped. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated in the brightness adjustment process, the setting information of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is immediately rewritten, and the door frame 5 and the game board 4 It is reflected in the brightness | luminance of several LED provided in each decoration board | substrate. Then, after adjusting the luminance of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, or the non-operation period of the operation unit 400 is a predetermined period (for example, 2 Second)), the setting mode interrupt process ends and the screen for performing the setting mode is hidden. Also, in the brightness adjustment process, as with the volume adjustment process, normally, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, the setting information of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is immediately rewritten. The brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is reflected on the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the respective decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. While confirming not only the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) but also the brightness of a plurality of LEDs actually provided on the door frame 5 and each decorative board of the game board 4, Can be adjusted.

  It is to be noted that the pressing operation is performed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the period when the demonstration display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the waiting state. When the operation signal of the unit 405 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in addition to the adjustment of the sub-volume value of the production sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, calendar information and Then, a selection screen to which time information (other setting processing) is added is displayed, and by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, calendar information, time information (other setting processing), etc. are re-displayed. It can be set (step 1124).

  As shown in FIG. 240, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the pressing operation of the operation unit 400 is performed during a period in which a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) in a waiting state for customers. When section 405 is operated (FIG. 240 (A)), the setting mode interruption process is executed, and a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). As shown in FIG. 240 (B), a selection screen for selecting one of volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, calendar information, and time information is displayed. Then, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and operating the pressing operation unit 405 in a state where any of volume adjustment, luminance adjustment, calendar information, and time information is selected, volume adjustment processing ( Step 1122), brightness adjustment processing (step S1123), or other setting processing for resetting calendar information and time information (step S1124) is executed to adjust the volume of the effect sound (FIG. 240C). ), Adjust the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and game board 4 to the desired brightness (100% to 70%), re-read calendar information, time information (other setting processing), etc. Can be set.

  Further, the display is based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during a period when the presentation display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed. The screen for performing the setting mode is different from the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the decorative symbol variation display (position and size). , Shape, color, transparency, etc.). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, during the standby state, the decoration symbol is not displayed, and a predetermined image is displayed so as to overlap the area where the decoration symbol is variably displayed (the symbol display area). Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the demonstration, four adjustment screens for volume adjustment, luminance adjustment, calendar information, and time information, and a setting mode for the adjustment screen are set. The screen for performing is enlarged more than the display of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the region of the variation of the decorative symbol (the symbol display region) or the central portion of the effect display device 1600 that overlaps the region where the demonstration is performed, Opaque display is made to be a layer. Therefore, various adjustments and settings are performed in a state that is easier to see than during the variable display of decorative symbols during a period when the demonstration display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the waiting state for the customer. be able to. In this example, while the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed, a part of the demonstration is hidden by the screen for performing the setting mode. There is a demonstration in the back. It should be noted that at least the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the demonstration period and the operation unit 400 during the decorative pattern change display. As long as the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is displayed in a different mode (position, size, shape, color, transparency, etc.) The pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is stopped while the decorative symbol variation display is not performed or when the big hit or the small hit is not performed but there is a reserved memory (waiting for variation start). Screen for setting mode that is displayed based on the operation, and during big hits, during small hits, or when the decorative symbol change display is stopped and there is no pending storage In a screen for setting the mode in which the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is displayed based on it is operated, it may be made different. In addition, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the demonstration, a screen for performing the setting mode may be displayed instead of the demonstration (after ending the demonstration). The demonstration will not be visible while the screen for performing the mode is displayed. This makes it easier to see the screen for performing the setting mode, and allows the operation of the setting mode to be performed without being distracted by the demonstration being executed backward. Further, the display is based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during a period when the presentation display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed. The mode (position, size) differs between the screen for performing the setting mode and the screen for performing the setting mode that is displayed when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the decorative symbol variation display. , Shape, color, transparency, etc.), for example, during the decorative symbol variation display, the screen for performing the setting mode overlaps with the variation variation display region (design display region). A semi-transparent display is made at a position (for example, the center portion of the effect display device 1600), and the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) enters a customer waiting state. It may be in the period in which the demonstration by is being performed opaque displayed without varying the display position such a screen for setting mode.

  In addition, it is displayed based on the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 being operated during a period in which a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). The mode (position, size) differs between the screen for performing the setting mode and the screen for performing the setting mode that is displayed when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the decorative symbol variation display. , Shape, color, transparency, etc.) before and after the start of the decorative symbol variation display (for example, about 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received and after the variation symbol command is started) Or just before the stop (several seconds before or after the final display of the decorative symbol performed based on the reception of the special figure 1 synchronized production end command or the special figure 2 synchronized production end command For example placing approximately 0.5 seconds before and after the display), etc.), also pushing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated may not display the screen for setting mode. As a result, the screen for performing the setting mode before and after the start or stop of the decorative symbol display (decoration display of the decorative symbol (stopping the special symbol variable display)) is displayed in a different manner, thereby preventing the player from being confused. can do.

  That is, basically (normally) the setting mode interruption process is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to set the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). A screen for performing the mode is displayed, for example, a predetermined period (for example, a variation pattern command) including a start timing and a stop timing (decoration display of a decorative symbol (variable display stop of a special symbol)) of a decorative symbol variation display. Approximately 1 second from the start of the display of the decorative pattern change display to the end of the display of the decorative pattern, or after receiving the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronized effect end command. When the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of about 1 second until 0.5 seconds elapses after the fixed display is displayed, the setting mode interruption process is not executed The display for performing the setting mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) or the setting mode interruption process is performed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Even if it is executed, the screen for performing the setting mode may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900).

[25. Sound data creation process]
The sound data creation process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the sound generation schedule data (step S1131), and among the read schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is used as the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted from 4150ce and set to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (step S1132).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a activates the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a is set to the substrate volume 0-6. The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. The substrate volume is increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the converted value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Set. In the sound data output process (step S1018) described above, the sound volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 so as to be the sound volume set to the substrate volume. Is amplified to the master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, so that the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects are played from the provided speakers.

  That is, when the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated, or when the volume adjustment process (step 1122) is executed in the setting mode interruption process, the board volume is changed and the board volume after the change is changed to the sub-volume. Set as volume value. As a result, music and sound effects corresponding to the changed sub-volume value flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). The setting mode interruption process is executed by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and when the volume is adjusted by the setting mode interruption process, the sound data creation process The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is converted into seven levels of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the compressed voltage from an analog value to a digital value. The value of the substrate volume is increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the converted value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted by setting the substrate volume.

[26. Realization of suitable volume control]
Next, an effect that provides a player with a specific period in which volume adjustment can be suitably realized will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example has a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). ) Or a special symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186) for a certain period of time (in this example) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped In the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a special figure 1 tuning effect end command or a special figure 2 tuning effect end command is received from the peripheral control MPU 4150a until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative pattern change display starts. The volume of the production sound can be adjusted except for 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative pattern is displayed. . However, when a variation effect such as a decorative symbol variation display is continuously executed, the volume of the effect sound cannot be adjusted by focusing on the variation effect, and the volume of the effect sound is adjusted. I lost the timing. Therefore, the player feels uncomfortable that the volume is too high, or plays the game while feeling stress such as lack of excitement when the volume is too low. Since it is difficult to do so, there is a risk that the operation rate of the gaming machine will be reduced because the game is stopped or relieved from a tired memory.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, the above-described problem is solved by providing the player with the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound. Specifically, after the decorative display variable display is started on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900), the effect sound is suppressed (changed to a sound volume lower than a predetermined level (eg, volume 2 or less)). And may be muted), and after providing a specific period for displaying notification to the player that it is a period in which the volume can be suitably adjusted, a variation effect is executed and decorated. The display result of the symbol variation display is derived and displayed. An example of an effect that provides a specific period will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. It should be noted that the specific period may be provided during the fluctuation every time a predetermined number of fluctuations are executed, or may be provided during the fluctuation with an appropriate probability by lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, a specific period is provided by lottery (selecting a variation pattern that provides an effect for providing a player with a specific period in which volume adjustment can be suitably realized by variation pattern selection determination processing). The probability that a specific period is provided (probability that a variation pattern is selected that provides an effect to provide a player with a specific period in which volume adjustment can be suitably realized in the variation pattern selection determination process) is It is set so as to be higher than the reach probability (probability of executing the reach effect in the variation display of the decorative pattern: about 10%) (in this example, about 20%). Therefore, a specific period is provided at a high rate before an important reach effect is performed as an expectation effect, and the volume is adjusted. Reduction can be suppressed. In this example, a period of about 5 seconds is provided as the specific period, which is longer than the period until the screen for performing the setting mode is not displayed (2 seconds as the non-operation period of the operation unit 400). Therefore, the volume and brightness can be adjusted with ease.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a, when a variation pattern for performing an effect that provides a player with a specific period in which volume adjustment can be suitably realized is selected, starts variation display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern. Based on the result of the notice lottery, the notice effect is executed (FIG. 242 (A)), and after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed (for example, the volume of the effect sound is reduced). In addition to suppressing the volume from 6 to 2 or lowering the volume of the production sound, etc., control for causing the production display device 1600 to display “currently suitable for volume adjustment” is executed over a specific period (FIG. 242). (B)). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the player is notified that the timing of volume adjustment has been given by displaying “currently suitable for volume adjustment” on the effect display device 1600 during a specific period. Although configured as described above, such display may not be performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the performance executed during a specific period is also limited, and only the decorative symbol variation display is performed without performing the notice effect or the reach effect. (FIG. 242B). In this way, not only the volume of the production sound is suppressed, but also the visual production is restricted (suppressed), so that a suitable opportunity is provided as a timing for adjusting the volume, and the player is not confused by the production volume. Can be adjusted. Further, in this example, the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is overlapped with the area where the character or the like is displayed as the notice effect, and is displayed on the front layer than the character displayed as the notice effect. During the specific period, the notice effect is not hindered by not performing the notice effect. It should be noted that the screen for selecting the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) may not overlap with the area where the character or the like is displayed as the notice effect, or the screen for selecting the semi-transparent setting mode (selection screen) , The adjustment screen) may be displayed as a notice effect so as to overlap the front layer of the area where the character or the like is displayed. In this case, the operation unit 400 is operated during a period other than the specific period to set the mode. Even when a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the display is displayed, it is possible not to disturb the visual recognition of the notice effect. Further, during the specific period, the number of effects executed, the number of characters displayed, etc. are suppressed (restricted) compared to the period other than the specific period in the fluctuation, and a plurality of effects are executed or a plurality of characters are displayed. It may be changed from a lively state such as being displayed to a lonely state in which only a background image is displayed with almost no effect or a character being hardly displayed. You may make it not display an ornament symbol, the image relevant to the variation display of an ornament symbol, etc. Thereby, a more suitable opportunity can be provided as the timing of volume adjustment. In addition, a specific expectation effect (for example, a mode (color, shape, etc.) different from a normal low expectation effect in a serif notice that displays a speech) among the expectation effects that increase the expectation of jackpot even during a specific period For example, when executing a high expectation effect that displays a line in a case, or when executing a high expectation effect that displays a hold in a different manner (color, shape) from the normal low expectation effect in the hold notice) You may make it not suppress. Thereby, while giving the player the timing of volume adjustment, the necessary effects of the expectation effects are executed without being suppressed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. Note that a specific background image (for example, an image of the same color, for example) may be displayed in place of the background image during the specific period, and this makes the difference from the period other than the specific period clear, rendering, etc. Since this is not performed, a suitable opportunity can be provided for the timing of volume adjustment.

  When the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed (silenced) (FIG. 242B), the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device) 1900) displays a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode (FIG. 242 (C)). By selecting the volume adjustment on this selection screen, the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted (FIG. 243 (D)). When the specific period ends, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continues to execute the variation effect and derives and displays a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 243 (E)).

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 244A, even if the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the specific period, the volume after the change is changed. Is not immediately reflected in the volume of the effect sound A that is output in connection with the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed, and the effect sound A is returned when the specific period ends and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed. The effect sound A according to the changed volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. That is, even if the volume of the production sound is changed during the specific period, the production sound A corresponding to the volume after the change is provided in the main body frame 3 while the volume of the production sound A is suppressed during the specific period. When returning from the state in which the sound volume of the effect sound A is suppressed without being output from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, the sound volume during the specific time period is changed. The effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is reflected from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Thereby, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the setting mode without being distracted by the effect sound output during the specific period.

  On the other hand, it is not a sound that is output in relation to the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed, but it is related to a specific effect (prefetching notice effect such as a hold notice) or a specific operation (operation of the operation unit 400). A specific sound to be output (for example, “picone” that is output when the hold display is performed in a shape other than the normal round shape in the pre-reading notice effect, or “pic” that is output when the operation unit 400 is operated. For the electronic sound), when the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the specific period, the changed sound volume is immediately reflected in the output of the specific sound. Thus, regardless of whether or not it is during the specific period, that is, even during the specific period, the specific sound corresponding to the changed volume is accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. In It is output from only the speaker. In addition, the presentation display device 1600 may perform a hold display during the specific period, and in this case, the display is changed during the specific period when a different hold display is performed according to the result of the pre-read lottery. The specific sound corresponding to the sound volume may be output from a speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and a speaker provided in the door frame 5. As described above, even for a specific sound that is output in relation to a specific performance or a specific operation necessary for executing the expectation notification or the like even during a specific period, the volume of the performance sound is suppressed. Because it is possible to immediately reflect the change in volume and output a specific sound with the volume after the change, it is possible to control the volume etc. for a specific performance or specific operation while giving the player a volume adjustment timing. It is possible to execute without notification to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, even if the volume of the production sound is changed during the specific period, the production sound A is suppressed until the specific period ends, and the production sound A corresponding to the changed volume is the main body. Since it is not output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, when changing the volume of the effect sound during a specific period, the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display) The volume is determined from the scale displayed on the device 1900). Note that an auxiliary sound may be generated by operating the operation unit 400 even during a specific period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed. For example, when adjusting the volume of a production sound during a specific period, if the volume of the production sound is changed by rotating the dial operation unit 401 (when the volume scale (barometer) increases or decreases), the volume after the change is changed. The auxiliary sound (for example, “beep”) corresponding to the sound may be output from a speaker housed in a speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and a speaker provided in the door frame 5. Thereby, even during a period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, the effect display apparatus 1600 is configured to output an auxiliary sound that assists volume adjustment when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to change the volume of the effect sound. In addition to the scale displayed on the (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900), the auxiliary sound according to the changed volume can be adjusted while actually listening and checking with the ear.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for operating the operation unit 400 at any timing during a specific period in which the volume of the production sound is suppressed to perform the setting mode is produced. The volume of the effect sound can be adjusted by changing the scale display on the adjustment screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 by rotating the dial operation unit 401.

  In addition to suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the specific period, the light emitting means provided in the door frame 5 (in this example, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5), function display The unit 1180 excludes a plurality of LEDs and restricts (suppresses) effects by light emitting means provided in the game board 4 (in this example, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4). Also good. That is, during the specific period, light emission, emission color, number of blinks, lighting pattern, brightness, etc. by the light emitting means provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4 are limited (suppressed) than the period other than the specific period in the fluctuation. The lighting means is changed from a dazzling and lively state such as flashing frequently with high brightness to a dim and calm state such as maintaining a lighting state with low luminance (which may be turned off). Also good. In this way, not only suppressing the production sound but also limiting (suppressing) the production by the light emitting means provides a more suitable opportunity for the volume adjustment timing, and the player can adjust the volume without being confused by the production. Can be executed.

  In the above-described example, the probability that a specific period is provided (the probability that a variation pattern that provides an effect for providing a player with a specific period in which volume adjustment can be suitably realized in the variation pattern selection determination process is selected) is selected. Although it was set to be higher than the reach probability, the probability that a specific period is provided may be set to be lower than the reach probability, thereby providing the specific period with a rarity. In such a case, if the volume is not adjusted within this specific period, it is possible to have a feeling that a reach effect will be executed before the volume is adjusted to a desired volume, so that the volume adjustment operation can be promoted.

  Further, the variation pattern for executing the effect of providing the player with the specific period may be selected not only when the result of the special lottery is out of place but also when the big hit or the small win. In other words, if the result of special lottery is lost in the special symbol jackpot determination process, a specific period is provided to the player in the error variation selection information state table set when the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern selection determination process. The big hit that is set when the fluctuation pattern selection determination process determines the fluctuation pattern when the special lottery determination process results in a big win or small win You may make it set the fluctuation pattern which performs the production | presentation which provides a specific period to a player in the fluctuation | variation selection information classification table. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to the provision of a specific period for a player who has already completed volume control. In addition, when a variation pattern that executes an effect that provides a specific period to the player is executed, the specific period is set so that the percentage of jackpots is higher than when the variation pattern is not executed. It is possible to set a high expectation degree of the big hit of the fluctuation pattern for performing the presentation provided in this case. In this case, not only gives an opportunity to adjust the volume when a specific period is provided, but also raises the expectation for the big hit Therefore, not only a player who has not yet adjusted the volume, but also a player who has already adjusted the volume can be prevented from deteriorating the gaming interest. Whether or not to provide a specific period is determined by lottery by the main control MPU 4100a (selects a variation pattern that provides an effect to provide a player with a specific period in which the volume can be suitably adjusted in the variation pattern selection determination process). Not only those but also lottery to determine whether or not to provide the specific period based on the fluctuation pattern command received by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and when the lottery result providing the specific period is obtained, the fluctuation pattern You may make it perform the production | presentation which provides a specific period during the fluctuation display based on. In this case as well, as in the example described above, when the effect providing the specific period is executed, the specific period is set so that the probability of a big hit is higher than when the effect providing the specific period is not executed. The appearance probability of the effect to be provided may be set, and the execution probability (appearance probability) of the effect providing the specific period is the reach probability (the probability of executing the reach effect with the decorative display of the decorative pattern: about 10%) It may be set to be higher (in this example, about 20%).

[27. Brightness adjustment suitable realization effect]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present example can adjust not only the volume of the effect sound but also the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during the variation display of the decorative symbols. It is said that. In the above-described example, the player is provided with a period in which the adjustment of the production sound can be suitably realized as the specific period, but in addition to the above or separately from the above, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are provided as the specific period. You may make it provide a player the period which can implement | achieve adjustment of the brightness | luminance of several LED provided in each decoration board | substrate suitably. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 246.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a is a variable that executes an effect that provides a player with a specific period in which the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be suitably realized. When the pattern is selected, when the decorative symbol variation display is started based on the variation pattern, the announcement effect is executed based on the result of the preliminary lottery (FIG. 245 (A)), and the decorative symbol variation display is started. When a predetermined period of time elapses, the volume of the production sound is suppressed (for example, the volume of the production sound is reduced from 6 to 1, the production sound is muted, etc.), and the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are also displayed. The brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is suppressed to 50% or less, for example, or the door frame 5 or the game board 4 A plurality of decorative boards Etc. to turn off the ED), run over a specified period control to display the "I'm home of sound and duration suitable brightness adjustment" to the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 245 (B)). Note that in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the volume display of the production sound and the door frame 5 are displayed to the player by displaying “currently a period suitable for volume and brightness adjustment” on the production display device 1600 during a specific period. Although it has been configured to notify that the timing of adjusting the luminance of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 has been provided, such display may not be performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the effects that are executed during the specific period are limited (FIG. 245 (B)). In this way, during the specific period, the number of effects executed, the number of characters to be displayed, and the like are suppressed (restricted) compared to the period other than the specific period in the variation, and a plurality of effects are executed. In addition to changing from a lively state, such as a character being displayed, to a lonely state, in which almost no performance is performed or the character is hardly displayed, it is provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. By suppressing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, it is possible to provide a suitable opportunity for adjusting the volume of the production sound and adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. . As with the above-described example, a specific expectation effect (for example, a dialog different from a normal low expectation effect in a dialogue notice that displays a dialogue) among the expectation productions that increase the expectation of jackpot even during a specific period. When performing a high expectation effect that displays lines in (color, shape, etc.), or performing a high expectation effect that displays a hold in a different form (color, shape) from the normal low expectation effect in the hold notice Etc.) may not be suppressed. Thus, while giving the player the volume of the production sound and the timing of adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the necessary production of the expected degree production is suppressed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  And if the press operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the specific period when the brightness | luminance of several LED provided in each decoration board | substrate of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is suppressed (FIG. 245 (B)). Then, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) (FIG. 245 (C)). By selecting the brightness adjustment of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 on this selection screen, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is adjusted. Becomes possible (FIG. 246 (D)). When the specific period ends, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continues to execute the variation effect and derives and displays a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 246 (E)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (B), a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the decorative boards of the game board 4 by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during a specific period. Even if the brightness of the door frame 5 is changed, the brightness after the change is not immediately reflected in the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, but the specific period ends and the door frame 5 and reflected in the case of returning from the state in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is suppressed, provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 according to the changed brightness. The plurality of LEDs to emit light. That is, even if the luminance of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the luminance is continuously suppressed during the specific period and the luminance after the change is changed. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are not caused to emit light. And when it returns from the state which the specific period was complete | finished and it returns from the state which suppressed the brightness | luminance of several LED provided in each decoration board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4, the brightness | luminance after a change is reflected, and it is in the brightness | luminance after a change. Accordingly, a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light.

  Moreover, even during a specific period, a specific expectation effect (for example, a specific light-emitting means based on the decision to perform a hold notice in the pre-read lottery among the expectation effects that increase the expectation of jackpot) For when emitting light with a different emission color, or when performing a high expectation effect that displays a line in a different manner (color, shape, etc.) than the normal low expectation effect in a serif notice that displays a line) You may make it not suppress. Thereby, while giving the player the timing of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, the lighting effects related to the necessary effects among the lighting effects performed in relation to the expectation effects are executed without being suppressed. , It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, even if the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the plurality of LEDs are not changed until the specific period ends. Since the brightness is suppressed and the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are not emitted with the changed brightness, they are provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period. When changing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, the volume is determined from the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). In addition, even if it is the specific period when the brightness | luminance of several LED provided in each decoration board | substrate of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is suppressed, it is specific LED of several LED by operating the operation unit 400, or You may make it light-emit auxiliary LED other than several LED for the predetermined period (for example, about 2 second) according to the brightness | luminance after change. For example, when adjusting the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to rotate the decorations of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. When the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the substrate is changed (when the brightness scale (barometer) increases or decreases), a specific LED or an auxiliary LED may be caused to emit light for a predetermined period according to the changed brightness. Good. Thereby, even in a period in which the luminance of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to each decoration of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. In addition to the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) by causing the LEDs that assist the brightness adjustment to emit light when changing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the board, the brightness after the change It is possible to adjust the light emission according to the actual visual observation.

  In the above example, when the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are changed during the specific period, the changed volume until the specific period ends. In accordance with the effect sound A is not output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the changed luminance Although the LED that does not light up the plurality of LEDs provided in is shown, the production sound according to the volume that has already been set without changing the volume or volume after the specific period has elapsed according to a specific operation A can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, or a plurality of A provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the changed luminance. LE It may be made possible emit.

  For example, separately from the operation unit 400 (production button) used for production, the sub-volume value of production sound, the brightness (light quantity) of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, etc. Dedicated operation part for adjustment (for example, a cross that adjusts the volume level by operating the up / down direction (volume control button), and adjusts light intensity (brightness) by operating the left / right direction (light amount (brightness) adjustment button) If the operation unit 400 as an effect button is not operated when the volume is changed during a specific period as shown in FIG. 247 (A), an effect according to the changed volume is provided. While the sound A can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 after a specific period, the volume is increased during the specific period as shown in FIG. If the operation unit 400 serving as a production button is operated in such a case, the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3 when the production sound A corresponding to the changed volume operates the operation unit 400 (operation timing of the operation unit 400). It may be possible to output from a speaker housed in 920 and a speaker provided on the door frame 5 (the output may be anything that can be output and may not actually be output until after a specific period). As a result, a player who does not need to adjust the volume after adjusting the volume or performing an effect that provides the player with a specific period in which the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound can be suitably realized is an operation unit as an effect button. A state in which the effect sound A according to the volume after the change by operating 400 and the volume already set can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 Can be restored. The specific period is executed as a period of production using the operation unit 400 as a production button (more specifically, by operating the operation unit 400 as production using the operation unit 400, the expectation of winning during fluctuations) This is executed as an effect for notifying the result of the win), and during the effect (during a specific period) by the operation unit 400, the player operates a brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) different from the operation unit 400. ), The operation unit 400 is operated after the adjustment, so that the expectation effect executed by the operation of the operation unit 400 and the effect of notifying the winning result are in a specific period in which the volume is suppressed. However, since the volume after adjustment is immediately reflected, the player's favorite game is realized. When the volume adjustment operation unit (cross key; volume adjustment button) is operated, seven scales 0 to 6 corresponding to the seven levels of the substrate volume are displayed and set in the same manner as in the above example. The displayed sound volume is displayed in different colors. Further, the display of the volume scale and the like is not displayed when the non-operation period of the volume adjustment operation unit (cross key; volume control button) reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Become. As the specific period, a period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than a period (2 seconds as a non-operation period of the volume adjustment operation unit (cross key; volume adjustment button)) until the volume scale is not displayed. In the case where the production using the operation unit 400 is performed over a period of time), the volume scale is not displayed after the volume is changed by operating the volume adjustment operation section (cross key; volume adjustment button) during a specific period. The operation operation unit 400 is operated after waiting for display, and a production sound according to the changed volume can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. In the production using the operation unit 400, the production executed after the operation of the operation unit 400 is executed without being disturbed by the display of the volume scale or the like. It can, can suppress the lowering of the game interest.

  Similarly, when the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during a specific period, if the operation unit 400 as an effect button is not operated, the change is made after the specific period. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decoration boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can emit light with brightness, while the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decoration boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is increased during a specific period. When the operation unit 400 serving as a production button is operated when the change is made, a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are emitted when the operation unit 400 is operated (operation timing of the operation unit 400). It may be possible (it only needs to be able to emit light, and may actually not emit light until after a specific period). Thereby, the door frame 5 and the game can be performed while performing the effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be suitably adjusted. After adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the board 4 or a player who does not need to adjust the brightness, the player operates the operation unit 400 as an effect button to change the brightness or the brightness already set. A plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be returned to a state in which light can be emitted. The specific period is executed as a period of production using the operation unit 400 as a production button (more specifically, by operating the operation unit 400 as production using the operation unit 400, the expectation of winning during fluctuations) This is executed as an effect for notifying the result of the win), and during the effect (during a specific period) by the operation unit 400, the player operates a brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) different from the operation unit 400. ), The operation unit 400 is operated after the adjustment, so that the expectation effect executed by the operation of the operation unit 400 and the effect of notifying the winning result are in a specific period in which the luminance is suppressed. However, since the brightness after the adjustment is immediately reflected, the player's favorite game is realized. Even when the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) is operated, seven scales are displayed and set so as to correspond to seven levels of brightness as in the above example. Color display is performed so that the brightness can be distinguished. Further, the display of the brightness scale or the like is not displayed when the non-operation period of the brightness adjustment operation unit (the cross key; brightness control button) reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and the setting mode interruption process ends. Become. As the specific period, a period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than a period (2 seconds as a non-operation period of the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button)) until the brightness scale is not displayed. In the case where an effect using the operation unit 400 is executed over a period of time), the brightness scale is not displayed after the brightness is changed by operating the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness control button) during a specific period. Since the operation operation unit 400 is operated after waiting for the display, the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be returned to a state capable of emitting light with the changed brightness. In the production using the operation unit 400, the production executed after the operation of the operation unit 400 can be executed without being disturbed by the display of the brightness scale or the like, and the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

[28. Volume / brightness adjustment during high-priority notifications such as high expectations
In the above-described example, the player is provided with a specific period in which the volume and brightness can be suitably adjusted. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present example does not provide the sound volume and the luminance even when the specific period is not provided. The brightness can be adjusted. For this reason, a high-priority notification such as a high expectation effect is performed, and thus it is difficult to suitably adjust the volume and brightness. There may be a case where the volume or the brightness is adjusted even if the production sound is output at the volume or the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are flashing at a high brightness. . In this example, even when the volume or brightness is adjusted during the non-preferred period, the high-priority notification performed during the non-preferred period is not disturbed.

  Specifically, in the case where the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays a decorative design in a variable manner based on a variation pattern that executes a highly anticipated reach effect, the sound volume at which the effect sound is adjusted by the player (In this example, the maximum volume is 6) However, the volume is not limited to the maximum volume, as long as the volume is increased as compared with other reach effects. May be the maximum value of the volume of the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, or may be the maximum value of the volume range used in the gaming machine among the sound volumes of the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP. Or a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 (a specific LED determined in advance among the plurality of LEDs) or all High brightness that does not depend on the brightness adjusted by the player (in this example, 100% of the maximum brightness. However, it is not limited to the maximum brightness, but the brightness is higher than other reach effects etc. Note that the maximum luminance may be the maximum value of the luminance of the LED, or may be the maximum value of the luminance range used in the gaming machine among the luminances of the LED. Executing one or both of the light emission causes a non-preferred period in which it is difficult to suitably adjust the volume and luminance. However, even during this non-preferred period, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for setting the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). ) Is displayed and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted.

  For example, when the volume of the effect sound is changed from volume 3 to volume 2 during the unfavorable period, the changed volume is related to the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed as shown in FIG. 248 (A). When the unfavorable period ends and the volume of the production sound is returned from the maximum volume (volume 6) without being immediately reflected in the volume of the production sound A that is output, The production sound A corresponding to the volume 2 that is the volume of the sound flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5. That is, even if the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the operation unit 400 during the non-preferred period, the output of the effect sound A at the maximum volume is continued during the non-preferred period, and the non-preferred period ends. When the volume of A is returned from the maximum volume (volume 6), the main body frame 3 is provided with a production sound A corresponding to the volume after the change (in this example, volume 2) reflecting the change in volume during the unfavorable period. The speaker box 920 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 are used for output.

  In addition, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and each decoration board of the game board 4 is changed from 80% to 70% during the non-preferred period, the change is made as shown in FIG. 248 (A). The later brightness is not reflected immediately, but is reflected when the non-preferred period ends and the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are returned from the maximum brightness (100%). A plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light according to the later luminance of 70%. That is, even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the non-preferred period to change the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the decorative boards of the game board 4, the door frame 5 at the maximum brightness during the non-preferred period. The light emission of a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 or a specific LED (a predetermined LED among the plurality of LEDs) or all of the LEDs is continued, and the non-preferred period ends. When returning the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 from the maximum brightness (100%), the brightness after the change (this is reflected to reflect the change in the brightness during the unfavorable period. In the example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light according to 70%).

  As described above, when the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are changed during the non-preferred period, the volume and the luminance are increased after the non-preferred period ends. In order to reflect this change, while accepting the adjustment of the volume of the production sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while enabling the adjustment), non- It is possible to execute an effect, an important notification, etc. (due to a high expectation reach effect, etc. in this example) that are executed during the preferred period without being suppressed, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  As for the specific sound, if the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the non-preferred period, the changed sound volume is immediately reflected in the output of the specific sound. Thus, regardless of whether or not it is during the non-preferred period, that is, even during the non-preferred period, the specific sound corresponding to the changed volume is accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the door Although it is configured to be output from a speaker provided in the frame 5, it is not preferable to change to the maximum volume during the non-preferred period and change the volume of the stage sound during the non-preferred period as with the effect sound A. During the period, the state where the specific sound is output at the maximum volume is continued, and when the unfavorable period ends and the volume of the specific sound is returned from the maximum volume, the change is made to reflect the change in the volume during the unfavorable period The specific sound corresponding to the volume after May be changed to a state which is output from the speaker provided to the speaker and the door frame 5 is housed in a speaker box 920 provided in the.

  In the above-described example, a high expectation reach effect is executed as a non-preferred period, and a production sound is output at a high volume, or a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with high brightness are provided. Although the flashing period is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a period in which a special sound such as a theme song is output at a high volume after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or a theme song in a big hit gaming state, etc. It may be a period in which special sounds are output at a high volume, and when the volume of the production sound or the brightness of multiple LEDs is adjusted during the period in which the special sounds are output at a high volume, the above high expectation reach effect Control similar to that performed when the period is adjusted during the period may be executed. That is, after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on or the special sound such as a theme song in the big hit gaming state is output at a high volume, the volume of the production sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs are adjusted. Does not immediately reflect the volume after the change and the brightness after the change, and the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 with the effect sound A corresponding to the volume after the change after the elapse of a predetermined period, and While outputting from the speaker provided in the door frame 5, according to the brightness | luminance after a change, several LED provided in each decoration board | substrate of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is light-emitted. Also in this case, while accepting the adjustment of the volume of the production sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while making adjustments possible), during the non-preferred period It is possible to execute the performance, important notifications, etc. (in this example, a high expectation reach performance, etc.) without being suppressed, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the non-preferred period, similarly to the above-described volume adjustment preferable realization effect and luminance adjustment suitable realization effect, the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). ) Displays a screen for selecting the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen). By selecting the brightness adjustment of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 on this selection screen, the door is displayed. The brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted. Also in this case, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the highly important notification content performed in the effect display device 1600. . Specifically, a screen (selection screen, etc.) for performing a setting mode at a position (for example, near the end of the display area) that is not covered with an important display or the like related to the effect or game performed in the effect display device 1600 (Regulation screens) and screens for setting modes (selection screens, adjustment screens) are important for effects and games, such as by translucent display at positions that are important for effects and games. It is designed not to interfere with visual recognition such as simple display. Thereby, while accepting the adjustment of the volume of the production sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while making adjustments possible), during the unfavorable period An effect to be executed, an important notification, etc. (in this example, a high expectation reach effect, etc.) can be displayed in a manner that the player can recognize. In addition, the volume and brightness are displayed on the adjustment screen as scales. When the volume and brightness are adjusted by operating the operation unit 400, the scale display is changed to correspond to the adjusted volume and brightness. The volume and the brightness can be adjusted with reference to the scale display even during the non-preferred period in which the LED emits light with high brightness.

[29. Pseudo continuous discrimination effect]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, after temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping) the decorative symbol variation display, pseudo-variable variation (pseudo-continuous: temporary variation of the decorative symbol variation display and re-variation) Are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, and then the variable display is stopped. Further, since the pseudo-ream is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the normal variation display, the player executes the game while expecting the occurrence of the pseudo-ream. However, since the pseudo-ream performs an effect similar to the case where the normal variation display is continued, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the pseudo-ream is executed or the normal variation display is performed. There is. In this example, the above problem is solved. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed twice in succession, a prohibition period is provided at each of the start and stop of the variation display executed twice. . For this reason, when the decorative symbol variation display is executed twice in succession, the prohibition period is provided four times in total.

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed only once, but the variation display is a pseudo-continuation in which the temporary stop and the re-variation are performed once each, it is shown in FIG. 48 (B). As described above, the prohibition period is provided at each of the start and stop of the decorative symbol variation display, and no prohibition period is provided at the time of temporary stop and re-variation. For this reason, in the case where a pseudo-ream is executed with a variation display of decorative symbols, the prohibition period can be provided only twice regardless of the number of temporary stops and re-variations.

  In this example, when the operation unit 400 is operated, specific image information (for example, character information or a character) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period (for example, 5 seconds). However, before and after the start of the decorative pattern variation display (for example, about 1 second from when the variation pattern command is received until about 0.5 seconds elapse after the decorative pattern variation display starts) ), End of variation production) (approx. 1 until several seconds (for example, about 0.5 seconds) elapses after the decoration symbol is displayed after receiving the special figure 1 tuning production end command or the special figure 2 tuning production end command. When the operation unit 400 is operated while the specific image information being displayed is not displayed during the prohibition period, the reception of the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited. In addition, specific image information is not displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, the operation unit 400 is operated before or after the decorative symbol is stopped (determined stop or temporary stop) or before or after the decorative symbol is changed or displayed in the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the effect display device 1600. Thus, the player can determine whether the pseudo-ream is being performed (whether the pseudo-ream is continuing) or whether the normal variation display of the decorative symbols is continuously performed. That is, when the normal variation display of the decorative symbol is executed twice in succession, the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited before and after the decorative symbol stop display (definite display) and before and after the second variation display start. Since the period is provided, the specific image information is not displayed when it is already displayed, and the specific image information is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the prohibited period. On the other hand, when the quasi-ream is being executed (when the quasi-ream is continuing), the prohibition period is before and after the decorative symbol stop display (before and after the temporary stop) and before and after the decorative symbol variation display start (before and after the re-variation). Since it is not provided, when specific image information is already displayed, it is continuously displayed without being hidden, and when the operation unit 400 is operated before and after temporary stop or before and after re-change, the specific image information is displayed. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that it is possible to easily determine that the pseudo-ream is being executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the prohibition period for prohibiting the operation reception of the operation unit 400 is provided before and after the start and stop (confirmation display) of the variable display, and the operation reception of the operation unit 400 other than the prohibition period is performed. When the operation unit 400 is operated during a permissible period that permits the display, specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that when the decorative design that is variably displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops, It is possible to easily determine whether the state is temporarily stopped in a series or whether the normal variation display is stopped (determined display). As a result, when it is determined that the pseudo-ream is being performed, the expectation for the big hit is increased and attention is paid to the variable display.

  Further, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation unit 400 is displayed so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the decorative symbol variation display executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, specific image information is displayed at a position that does not suffer from the decorative display variation display (for example, near the edge of the display area), or specific image information is subjected to the decorative display variation display (this In the example, the display of the variation display of the decorative symbols is not hindered by semi-transparent display in the vicinity of the center of the display area. Thereby, it is possible to variably display decorative symbols without disturbing visual recognition by specific image information, while enabling determination of whether or not pseudo-continuous depending on whether specific image information is displayed, Decrease in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In addition, it may be displayed so as to prevent the visual display of the decorative symbol variation display at a position covered by the decorative symbol variation display. In this case, the pseudo-ream is executed by facilitating the visual recognition of specific image information. It is easy to determine whether or not there is.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, when the operation unit 400 is operated, specific image information is displayed over a period of about 5 seconds. In addition, since the above-described prohibition period is about 1 second, if specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the operation unit 400 during the allowable period immediately before the prohibition period, a specific period is displayed during the prohibition period. Although the image information is not displayed, the specific image information is displayed again after the prohibition period even if the operation unit 400 is not operated. Therefore, it becomes possible to operate the operation unit 400 with a margin with respect to the end timing of the variation effect, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not it is a pseudo-continuous. Further, in the variation effect, the decorative symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined period, and then temporarily stopped, and then are confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command. Therefore, if the operation unit 400 is operated during a period from when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped to when the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command is received, specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the decorative symbol is determined and displayed based on the received special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden. . That is, when determining whether or not it is a pseudo-ream, it is only necessary to operate the operation unit 400 in accordance with the temporary stop of the decorative symbol or when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being operated unnecessarily during the decorative symbol variation display without grasping the operation timing of 400. In addition, since the specific image information is displayed for about 5 seconds, the variation display of the decorative symbols corresponding to two or more start winning prizes is continuously executed (normal (non-pseudo series)). When the variable display is executed continuously), the specific image information displayed immediately before the final display of the decorative symbol is once hidden, and then the variable symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next start winning is displayed. It is displayed again without operating the operation unit 400 after the start. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by a variable display other than the last variable display of the pseudo-series, the specific image information displayed immediately before the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is the start of the next variable display in the pseudo-series. It continues to be displayed until later. As described above, in the variable display other than the last variable display of the pseudo-series, the specific image information is continuously displayed until the start of the next variable display in the pseudo-series, and the normal (non-pseudo-series) variable display is continuously displayed. If the specific image information is not displayed once, it is displayed again without operating the operation unit 400 after the start of the next variable display. Can be reliably determined. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example displays specific image information in different modes (position, size, shape, color, transparency, etc.) during the period when the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is performed and other times. Therefore, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the operation unit 400 during the demonstration is displayed in a mode different from that before the prohibition period after the prohibition period when the decorative symbol variation display is started. It becomes like this. In this way, when the specific image information displayed during the demonstration is hidden or switched to a different mode, the player recognizes that the display of the decorative symbols starts or starts. It can be done. Further, a predetermined period including the start timing and stop timing of the decorative symbol variation display (for example, a period of about 1 second from when the variation pattern command is received until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variation symbol variation display starts, When the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of about 1 second from when the special figure 1 synchronized production end command or the special figure 2 synchronized production end command is received until 0.5 seconds elapses after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. May not display the screen for performing the setting mode, and if the screen for performing the setting mode is already displayed, the screen for performing the setting mode is not displayed during the period. (The display may be turned off). Thereby, when the specific image information displayed during the demonstration is switched to a different mode, the specific image information is once hidden, so that the specific image information can be switched to another mode without a sense of incongruity. Note that when the specific image information is not displayed during the prohibition period, the specific image information may not be displayed again after the prohibition period. In this case, the specific image information displayed immediately before the prohibition period has not been displayed again after the prohibition period even though a certain period (in this example, 5 seconds) has not elapsed, so that the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. It can be easily recognized.

  In addition to displaying specific image information according to the operation of the operation unit 400, a specific sound (for example, “pip” output when the operation unit 400 is operated) is displayed in association with the display of the specific image information. Or a sound corresponding to the action of the character (for example, a sound such as “shush” corresponding to the action of the character 1601a injecting air into the balloon 1601b in FIGS. 250 to 251 described later). In this case as well, it is only necessary not to output a specific sound during the prohibited period, and it is possible to determine whether or not it is a pseudo-continue (whether or not the pseudo-continuation is ongoing) by the presence or absence of the output of the specific sound. Become.

  The forbidden period is provided in connection with the variable display of decorative symbols. In other words, the prohibition period is always provided when a start winning is generated and a special lottery is performed. In addition, since a different variation time is set for each variation pattern, the prohibition period occurs when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is started, that is, after the decorative symbol variation display is started. The timing to perform is determined according to the determination contents in the variation pattern selection determination process. That is, the main control program executes the variation information number search process (step S394) based on the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in step S390 of the variation pattern selection determination process, and displays the result of the variation information number search process. A variation pattern is selected based on this. In each variation pattern, a variation time (a time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display) is set, and the variation time is different for each variation pattern. For example, a variation pattern that causes a variation of 10 seconds is a variation pattern in which a decorative symbol is removed and displayed in a stopped state 10 seconds after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Therefore, the prohibition period occurs at a timing about 10 seconds after the start of the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the fluctuation pattern which performs the deviation fluctuation with the reach of 30 seconds is to display the decoration symbol after 30 seconds from the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation display. Then, a prohibition period occurs at a timing about 30 seconds after that. As described above, the generation timing of the prohibition period after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol differs depending on the type of the variation pattern, that is, the content determined in the variation pattern selection determination process.

  In the above example, the specific image information is displayed when the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period. However, after the specific image information is displayed, the operation unit 400 is further operated. Specific image information may be changed. For example, the character 1601a having the balloon 1601b as the specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation unit 400 during the allowable period (FIG. 250 (A)). When the operation unit 400 is further operated thereafter, the specific image information is changed into a state in which the character 1601 inflates the balloon 1601b by inflating the balloon 1601b (FIG. 250B). The size of the balloon 1601b may be gradually changed according to the operation (by changing from FIG. 250 (A) to FIG. 250 (C), the balloon 1601b may change so that the bulge of the balloon 1601b increases). In this way, not only whether specific image information is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit 400, but specific image information may be changed stepwise according to the operation of the operation unit 400. . As described above, since the specific image information is displayed over a certain period, in a case where the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is early or the like, whether the specific image information is not displayed due to the prohibition period is constant. When it is difficult to determine whether the display has been made non-display because the period has elapsed, the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is advanced by changing specific image information in stages according to the operation of the operation unit 400 However, it is easy to determine whether or not the prohibition period is due to a change in specific image information, in other words, whether or not the pseudo-continuation is being performed (the pseudo-continuation is continuing).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), when the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, the specific image information A (for example, the character 1601a and the balloon 1601b in FIG. 250 (A)). ) Is displayed. Further, when the operation unit 400 is further operated in this state, specific image information A is specified as specific image information B (for example, the character 2601a and the balloon 2601b in FIG. 250B), and further specified according to the operation of the operation unit 400. Is changed step by step to specific image information C (for example, character 2601a and balloon 2601b in FIG. 250C). On the other hand, after the specific image information A (for example, the character 1601a and the balloon 1601b in FIG. 250A) is displayed based on the operation unit 400 being operated during the allowable period, Even if the specific image information A is hidden and the operation unit 400 is operated, the specific image information A does not change stepwise. It should be noted that the specific image information that has been hidden due to the prohibition period may be displayed again after the prohibition period without operating the operation unit 400, or the operation unit 400 may be operated after the prohibition period. You may make it display based on this.

  As described above, since the specific image information is changed according to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the allowable period, it is possible to entertain the change of the specific image information in addition to the determination of the above-described pseudo-continuity, and the game entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[31. Expectation of jackpot expectation]
Even when the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period, if a high expectation effect such as super reach is being executed, the high expectation effect ends without changing specific image information. After that, it may be changed to specific image information according to the operation of the operation unit 400. In this case, it is determined whether or not the high expectation effect is executed according to the change of the specific image information. Is possible.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), the specific image information A (for example, the character 2601a in FIG. When the high expectation effect is started after displaying the balloon 2601b), even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the specific image information A is not changed. The display is continued (not limited to displaying specific image information A as a still image, but the character 1601a may be operated so as to inflate the balloon 1601b according to the operation of the operation unit 400. May be displayed such that the character 1601a operates to inject air into the balloon 1601b but the balloon 1601b does not expand.) After the end of the high expectation effect, the specific effect image A may be changed to a display mode (specific effect image C in this example) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the execution of the high expectation effect. . As described above, specific image information is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit 400 by the player except for a part period (prohibition period) during the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and the specific image information according to further operations. Although it can be executed without interfering with high-expectation production, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amusement interest.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, when the operation unit 400 is operated within the allowable period after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, the specific image information is immediately displayed or the specific image information is changed ( When the operation unit 400 is operated within a permissible period after the change display of the low expectation level (which can immediately reflect the operation of the operation unit 400) and the decorative pattern change display starts, specific image information is displayed. Or when the specific image information can be changed (although the operation of the operation unit 400 can be immediately reflected), the operation of the operation unit 400 is performed within the execution period of the high expectation effect. Display of specific image information or change of the specific image information is prohibited and display of specific image information or change of the specific image information is performed after the execution period of the high expectation effect (operation Is reflected after the end of the high expectations effect without immediately reflect the operation of knitted 400) comprises a high degree of expectation variation pattern. Therefore, the player who operates the operation unit 400 can determine whether or not it is a high expectation effect depending on whether or not the operation of the operation unit 400 is immediately reflected, and the gaming interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a specific sound may be output in association with the display of specific image information. For example, when the character 1610a operates to inject air into the balloon 1601b and the balloon 1601b is inflated, a specification such as “shush” is specified. Sound may be output. Further, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the character 1601a operates to inject air into the balloon 1601b, but does not output a specific sound by displaying that the balloon 1601b does not expand. Alternatively, the balloon 1601b may be displayed as a balloon 1601b inflated to a size corresponding to the operation reflecting the operation of the operation unit 400 during execution of the high expectation effect after the end of the high expectation effect. You may make it output specific sounds, such as "shuffling", when expanding. In the above example, the specific sound is output in relation to the display of the specific image information. However, the specific image information is not displayed or separated from the specific image information within the allowable period. A specific sound may be output based on the operation unit 400 being operated. For example, a specific sound (eg, “beep”) is output every time the operation unit 400 is operated within the allowable period, and a specific sound is output when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect. Instead, the specific sound may be output by reflecting the operation of the operation unit 400 after the end of the high expectation effect. Also in this case, the player operating the operation unit 400 can determine whether or not the high expectation effect is being executed according to the timing at which the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, since the prohibition period is provided at the start and stop of the decorative symbol variation display, even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the prohibition period. When specific image information is not displayed or specific sound is not output, or when specific image information that has already been displayed is not displayed, it is determined that the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed ends. become able to. Therefore, even if the operation unit 400 is operated in a state where an effect advantageous to the player or an effect of high expectation is being executed, or a result advantageous to the player (stop symbol) is displayed, the specific image information is present. If no display or a specific sound is output, it is predicted that the result of the decorative symbol variation display will be advantageous to the player, and the gaming interest will be improved.

  In the above example, the character 1610a is displayed based on the operation of the operation unit 400, and the display mode of the character 1610a is changed according to the operation of the operation unit 400. Whether or not a high-expectation effect is achieved by changing the execution mode (display mode, background color, effect sound type, volume, LED emission color, LED emission color, etc.) May be possible. That is, when the operation unit 400 is operated while the low expectation effect is being executed (including not only the low expectation reach effect but also the variable effect in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner without executing the reach effect). While changing the execution mode of the fluctuation effect immediately, if the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the execution is performed by changing the execution mode of the variable effect being executed after the end of the high expectation effect. It may be possible to determine whether the medium fluctuation effect is a high expectation effect or a low expectation effect.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to determining the degree of jackpot expectation according to the change in the specific image information. For example, the effect sound adjusted according to the operation of the operation unit 400, the door frame 5 and the decorative boards of the game board 4 are used. You may make it discriminate | determine a jackpot expectation degree according to the change of the brightness | luminance (light quantity) of some LED provided. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 252 (A) is a variation pattern for performing normal variation of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 252 (B) is a normal reach effect (the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns after performing the normal variation of the decorative symbol. Of these, the left and right decorative symbols are stopped at the same symbol and reach is generated, and then the middle symbol is changed over a predetermined period, and then the change is performed. The fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (A) is a pattern in which the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the three rows of left middle, right, and right are stopped in the order of left → right → middle, and the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol The variation pattern that performs normal reach after performing the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) changes the decorative symbols that are displayed in three rows of the left middle, right, and left and right. After the decorative design is stopped at the same design (after normal variation), a normal reach effect that changes the decorative design for a predetermined period is executed, and the decorative design in the same design as the left and right decorative designs Either the player can stop and win a big hit, or the inside decorative symbol can be stopped by a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols. That is, the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after performing the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern in which the normal variation in FIG. 252 (A) is performed. In addition, the variation pattern in which the normal variation in FIG. 252 (A) and the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) are performed until the normal reach effect is performed. It is difficult to distinguish from the display content of the display device 1600.

  In the variation pattern in which the normal variation in FIG. 252 (A) is performed, a plurality of effect sounds and a plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 according to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the normal variation of the decorative design. When the brightness (light quantity) of the LED is adjusted, the result of volume adjustment and the result of brightness adjustment are immediately reflected, and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 with the adjusted volume. A sound effect is output from the speaker provided at the same time, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light with adjusted brightness. On the other hand, in the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B), during the normal variation of the decorative symbol, in other words, before the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the same symbol and the reach occurs. Even if the production sound and the brightness (light quantity) of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted according to the operation of the operation unit 400, the result of the volume adjustment and the result of the brightness adjustment are immediately displayed. Without the reflection, after the reach occurs, that is, when the normal reach effect is started, the effect sound is reflected from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 with the adjusted sound volume. Are output, and the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light with the adjusted brightness.

  That is, in the variation pattern in which normal variation is performed in FIG. 252 (A), the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal variation of the decorative design, and the plurality of LEDs provided on the effect sound and the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 When the brightness (light quantity) is adjusted, the output of the production sound at the adjusted volume and the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness are performed. However, in the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after performing the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B), the decoration pattern is in the normal variation (the left and right decorative designs are the same design). Even if the operation unit 400 is operated before the stop display and the reach occurs, the volume of the effect sound and the brightness (light quantity) of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted. , Adjusted volume The operation timing of the operation unit 400 is not enabled by the operation timing of the operation unit 400, and the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the adjusted brightness is not possible. This is possible at a later timing (when normal fluctuation ends and normal reach production starts). As described above, the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (A) with a low expectation of big hit is executed by changing the timing of reflecting the result (volume adjustment or brightness adjustment result) according to the operation of the operation unit 400. It is possible to determine whether the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal reach effect is executed after performing the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (B), which has a higher hit expectation than the fluctuation pattern, and the operation is performed during the normal fluctuation. When the unit 400 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound and the brightness (light quantity) of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the volume after the adjustment is delayed from the operation timing. This is an important production effect that controls the output of a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the decorative board of the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness. When a certain normal reach production is started, the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected to output the production sound at the adjusted volume, and the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the adjusted brightness Since the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the player is performed, the normal reach effect can be executed with the volume and brightness desired by the player.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, until the reach occurs, whether or not the variation pattern for performing the normal variation of FIG. 252 (A) is executed from the display content of the effect display device 1600, FIG. It is difficult to determine whether or not the variation pattern for performing the normal reach effect is executed after the normal variation of (B) is performed. Therefore, only the player who operated the operation unit 400 during the normal variation is executed at the early stage (before the reach occurs), and the variation pattern for performing the normal reach effect is performed after performing the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B). Can be determined. It should be noted that whether the variation pattern for performing the normal variation in FIG. 252 (A) or the variation pattern for performing the normal reach effect after performing the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) is also executed during the normal variation. The display content of the effect display device 1600 may be varied so that it can be determined. In this case, as a variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after performing the normal variation, a result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal variation (result of volume adjustment or luminance adjustment). Is reflected at the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal variation and the first variation pattern in which the sound can be output at the adjusted volume or the light emission is controlled at the adjusted luminance) The result of the operation of the operation unit 400 (the result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment) is reflected after the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (when normal fluctuation ends and normal reach production starts) (after adjustment) A second fluctuation pattern (which enables sound output at a predetermined volume or controls light emission with adjusted brightness).

  In addition, as a variation pattern for performing normal variation with low expectation, when the operation unit 400 is operated during normal variation, a result (a result of volume adjustment or luminance adjustment) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is displayed. When the operation unit 400 is operated during the first normal variation pattern to reflect at the operation timing (to enable sound output at the adjusted volume or to control light emission at the adjusted luminance) and during the normal variation, the operation unit 400 The result (volume adjustment or brightness adjustment result) corresponding to the operation is reflected after the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (when normal fluctuation ends or after the end), and the sound can be output at the adjusted volume. And a second normal variation pattern that controls the light emission with the adjusted luminance). Further, the display content of the effect display device 1600 may be made different so that it can be determined which of the first normal variation pattern and the second normal variation pattern is being executed. Whether the second normal variation pattern is the second normal variation pattern by making the display contents in the normal variation the same as the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) is performed. It may be difficult to determine whether or not the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) is performed. That is, a fluctuation pattern in which a reach is generated and a normal reach effect is performed when a result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400 by operating the operation unit 400 during normal fluctuation. Even if the operation unit 400 is operated during normal fluctuation and the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, the reach does not occur and the normal reach effect is not performed. It is also possible to provide a variation pattern that becomes a deviation. In this case, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation and the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation. Thus, it is only necessary that the ratio of the reach is higher than the case where the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 is counterfeited at the operation timing of the operation unit 400.

  Also, before and after the start of the decorative symbol variation display (for example, about 1 second from when the variation pattern command is received until about 0.5 seconds elapse after the variation symbol variation display starts) ), End of variation production) (approx. 1 until several seconds (for example, about 0.5 seconds) elapses after the decoration symbol is displayed after receiving the special figure 1 tuning production end command or the special figure 2 tuning production end command. Or the like) may be a prohibited period during which the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited. By providing such a prohibited period, it is possible to recognize that the decorative symbol variation display has started or has started, or that the decorative symbol variation display has stopped or has stopped.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the operation unit 400 is operated and the volume of the production sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs are adjusted within the period in which the normal fluctuation is performed, the adjusted value is adjusted at the operation timing of the operation unit 400. Output control of a plurality of LEDs is performed with the output of the production sound at the volume and the adjusted brightness, or the output of the production sound at the adjusted volume and the adjusted brightness after the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is delayed. By changing whether to perform the light emission control of the LED, it is a fluctuation pattern (FIG. 252 (A)) that performs normal fluctuation with low expectation or a fluctuation pattern that performs normal fluctuation with higher expectation than the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 252 (B)) can be discriminated, but the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period of the normal fluctuation period to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs. The variation pattern in which normal variation with low expectation is performed by changing the timing of performing the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs with the output of the adjusted sound at the adjusted volume and the adjusted luminance only when the adjustment is performed (FIG. 252 (A )) Or a fluctuation pattern (FIG. 252 (B)) that performs normal fluctuation with a higher degree of expectation than the fluctuation pattern. Accordingly, it is possible to direct the operation unit 400 to be operated during a specific period. Further, in this case, it may be possible to identify that it is a specific period by changing the display content of the effect display device 1600. In this case, the operation unit 400 is given to the player during the specific period. It can be operated, and it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being operated wastefully.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  In other words, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 192 Handle relay terminal board 400 Operation unit (operation unit)
470 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device 650 Ball hitting device 740 Prize ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error release unit)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display device 4100 Main control board (game control board, game control unit, special game state generating means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Payout control board (payout control board, payout control unit)
4120 payout control unit 4120a payout control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board (effect control unit, effect execution means, effect determination means, effect storage means, effect generation information selection means, effect content selection means, effect selection information change means, effect execution timing determination means, effect reference information selection means, Production selection means)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and can control to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state when the result of the lottery is a win,
Symbol display means for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
Production content restriction means for restricting the content of the production performed during the variation display of the symbol,
Providing multiple types of effects as effects that can be performed during the variable display of the symbol,
The plurality of types of productions are divided into a plurality of groups according to the degree of expectation,
The specific group of the plurality of groups belongs to a plurality of effects having apparent commonality and a plurality of effects having no apparent commonality,
The effect content restricting means includes a specific group effect restricting means for restricting the number of times that an effect belonging to the specific group is executed within one symbol variation display.
The effect content restricting means changes the restriction availability according to the result of the lottery.